Im-16 Oil Purifiers PDF

-·
Final Drawings
H2614
......-------------------------.
IMO SHIP IDENTIFICATION NO. 9665592
SEC.NO. SHIP DESIGN OFFICE SHIP TYPE
C3B6 SHIP OUTFITTING DESIGN DEP'T 1 13,800 TEU CLASS CONTAINER CARRIER
TEL NO. SHIP NO. SHIP NAME

2614 THALASSA HELLAS
2-3778
APPROVED Sanghoon Nam NAME OF DRAWING
GEA WestfaUa Separator Korea ltd. CHECKED Gyuhwan Kang

OIL PURIFIERS
DRAWN
SCALE DRAWING NO.
DATE 2013. 09. 01
I 6U-2843-165
HEAVY BNDUSTIFUES CO.,ILTD.

I CONSOLIDATED NO.
IM-16
Westfalia Separator
Mechanical Separation
Mineraloil Systems GtnbH
Division
Instruction Manual
No.: 8555-9001-010
Edition: 1207
Designation: Control system for separators with self-cleaning bowl
Model: 010
b
Division
Instruction Manual
No.: 8555-9001-010
Edition: 1207
Designation: Control system for separators with self-cleaning bowl
Model: D10
2
TRANSLATION OF THE ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Subject to modification!
The authors are always grateful for comments and suggestions for improving
the documentation. They can be sent to
Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH
Werner-Habig-Str. 1
D-59302 Oelde
© Westfalia Separator
8555-9000-010/1207
3
\Vcs tfoiia Separator

i\:lincraloil tern:; Crnb!i
Mechanlcal Separation
Division
Type
Type
Pri.lf-Nr.
Control No.
Bemessungsspannung
V, 3/AC ................. Hz
Nominal voltage
Steuerspannung
Control voltage
VAC ................. Hz ............... voe
Volllaststrom
Full-load current ···················A
Bemessungsstrom
(gr6Bter MotorNerbraucher)
................... A
Nominal current
(largest motor/consumer)
Kurzschlussausschaltvermogen lcn
................. kA
Short-circuit breaking capacity
Schaltplan-Nr.
Wiring diagram No.
Programm-Nr.
Program No.
Part-No.
Part No.
A company of GEA Group
Installations- und SchutzmaBnahmen sind nach den Bestimmungen des VOE bzw.
des zustandigen EVU auszufi.lhren.
Installation and protective measures are to be taken in accordance with national and
local electric rules and regulations.
This page must be filled in by the user.

Please enter the data from the nameplate.
8555-9000-010/1207
4
For your safety

@ Strictly adhere to instructions marked with this symbol.
This avoids damage to the separator, the control system and other
equipment.
"' Take special care when carrying out operations marked with this
symbol -
otherwise danger to life!
~ @ This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-

mation which help to better understand the separator, the control sys-
tem or plant components and the processes.
@ Observe the accident prevention regulations!

The local safety and accident prevention regulations apply uncondi-
tionally to the operation of the separator. The plant operator must en-
sure compliance with these regulations.
@ When operating electrical apparatus, certain parts carry danger-

ous voltage.
Before working in electrical components, take adequate preventive
measures according to the national provisions (in Germany in accord-
ance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verein Deutscher El-
ektrotechnik I Association of German Electrical Engineering) or of the
local electric power company.
Non-compliance with the protective measures can result in serious
damage to persons or property.
Any work on electrical components may only be carried out by an au-
thorized electrician.
"' Only qualified or authorized specialized staff may operate, main-

tain and repair the separator and the control system.
Corresponding training courses take place in the manufacturer's plant
or are held on site by the manufacturer.
@ Follow the instructions in the manual.

The instructions in the separator and control system and manuals
must be followed.
Problem-free and safe operation is conditional on correct transport,
storage, installation and assembly as well as careful operation and
maintenance.
Repair and maintenance work that goes beyond the scope described
in these manuals may not be carried out.
8555-9000-010/1207
5
e Operate the separator only in accordance with agreed process

and operating parameters
e Maintain the separator

as specified in the separator manual.
e Carry out safety checks on the separator,

as described in the chapter "Safety precautions" in the separator man-
ual.
• Liability for the function of the machine passes to the owner.

Liability for the function of the machine passes unconditionally to the
owner or operator irrespective of existing warranty periods in so far as
the machine is improperly maintained or serviced by persons other
than Westfalia Separator service personnel or if the machine is not
applied in accordance with the intended use.
Westfalia Separator shall not be liable for damage which occurs as a
result of non-observance of the above. Warranty and liability condi-
tions in the Conditions of Sale and Delivery of Westfalia Separator are
not extended by the above.
8555-9000-010/1207
6
7
1 Safety precautions 9
1.1 Preface ................................................................................................... 10

1.2 Correct usage ........................................................................................ 11
1.3 Non-compliance with the intended use .................................................. 12
1.4 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 13
1.4.1 Safety markings and their meaning ....................................................... 14
1.5 Operations on the control system .......................................................... 16
1.5.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel. ...................... 16
1.5.2 Spare part requirements ........................................................................ 17
1.5.3 Electrical installation .............................................................................. 17
1.5.4 Operation ............................................................................................... 18
1.5.5 Shut-down and "Emergency-Off' ........................................................... 19
1.5.6 Maintenance and repair ......................................................................... 20
1. 6 Explosion protection .............................................................................. 21
1.6.1 Classification of the centrifuge I plant .................................................... 21
1.6.2 Obligations of the operator .................................................................... 22
1.6.3 Standards and guidelines ...................................................................... 22
1.7 Care instructions .................................................................................... 24
1.8 Storage .................................................................................................. 24
1.8.1 After delivery .......................................................................................... 24
1.9 Disposal ................................................................................................. 24
2 Description
2.1 Function ................................................................................................. 26

2.2 Performance features ............................................................................ 27
2.3 Areas of application ............................................................................... 27
2.4 Functional layout diagram ...................................................................... 28
2.5 Technical data ....................................................................................... 29
2.5.1 Control Unit D10 .................................................................................... 29
2.5.2 Control cabinet. ...................................................................................... 31
2.6 Digital inputs and outputs ...................................................................... 32
2.7 Analog inputs and outputs (4 - 20 mA) ................................................. 33
2.7.1 Special versions ..................................................................................... 33
2.8 Configuration ......................................................................................... 34
2.8.1 Front view .............................................................................................. 34
2.8.2 Interior view ............................................................................................ 35
3 Operation
3.1 Getting acquainted with the operating elements ................................... 38

3.1.1 Function keys ......................................................................................... 39
3.1.2 System keys ........................................................................................... 41
3.1.3 Softkeys F1 - F4 .................................................................................... 41
3.1.4 Parameter entries .................................................................................. 42
3.2 Switching-on the control unit .................................................................. 43
3.3 Password protection .............................................................................. 44
3.4 Program sequence diagram .................................................................. 45
3.5 Process data overview (Home) ............................................................. 46
3.6 User settings .......................................................................................... 50
3.6.1 Calling up user settings ......................................................................... 50
3.6.2 User timings ........................................................................................... 52
8555-9000-010/1207
8
3.6.3 Timer lists 1 and 2 ................................................................................. 54

3.6.4 Counters ................................................................................................ 55
3.6.5 Analog inputs (Al) .............................................................................. 59
3.6.6 Analog outputs (AO) .............................................................................. 63
3.6.7 Input list. ................................................................................................. 64
3.6.8 Output list................................ 64
3.6.9 PIO controller ......................................................................................... 65
3.6.10 Time recording ....................................................................................... 68
3.6.11 Alarm counters ....................................................................................... 70
3.6.12 Alarm memory ....................................................................................... 72
3.6.13 Maintenance .......................................................................................... 73
3.6.14 Volume (option) ..................................................................................... 74
3.6.15 Service information ................................................................................ 77
3.6.16 Date and time ........................................................................................ 78
3.6.17 Separator settings .................................................................................. 79
3.6.18 Contrast ................................................................................................. 84
3.6.19 Language ............................................................................................... 84
3.6.20 Speed monitoring (option) ..................................................................... 86
3.7 Changing the Micro Memory Card (MMC) ............................................. 88
3.8 Memory reset ......................................................................................... 89
3.8.1 Setting the jumper .................................................................................. 89
3.8.2 CPU reset .............................................................................................. 90
4 Maintenance and servicing 91
4.1 Accident prevention ............................................................................... 92

4.2 Removing faults ..................................................................................... 93
5 Installation and connection 95
5.1 Installation of the control system ........................................................... 96

5.2 Connecting the control system .............................................................. 97
5.3 Centralised control via potential-free contacts ....................................... 98
8555-9000-010/1207
9
1 Safety precautions
1.1 Preface ................................................................................................... 10

1.2 Correct usage ........................................................................................ 11
1.4 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 13
1.5 Operations on the control system .......................................................... 16
1.5.4 Operation ............................................................................................... 18
1.5.5 Shut-down and "Emergency-Off" ........................................................... 19
1.6 Explosion protection .............................................................................. 21
1.6.1 Classification of the centrifuge I plant... ................................................. 21
1.6.2 Obligations of the operator .................................................................... 22
1.6.3 Standards and guidelines ...................................................................... 22
1. 7 Care instructions .................................................................................... 24
1.8 Storage .................................................................................................. 24
1.8.1 After delivery .......................................................................................... 24
1.9 Disposal ................................................................................................. 24
8555-9000-010/1207
10
1 .1 Preface
-
I Equipment documentation
.. Every person who is assigned the
task of installing, operating, main-
taining and repairing the controi sys-
tem must have read and understood
the documentation.
'" The documentation must be com-
plete, kept near to the installation
and be readily accessible to the op-
erators. It must be available to the
operators at all times!
Fig. 1
Nameplate (inside the control cabi-

net)
.. For possible further inquiries please
state:
- type (1)
- control no. (2)
" To ensure fast and correct pro-
cessing, please state when ordering
spare parts:
- type (1)
- control no. (2)
- circuit-diagram no. (3)
Fig. 2
·-
8555-9000-0i 0/1207
11
1.2 Correct usage

The control system
" is used to ensure automatic ejection and process monitoring of mineral oil
separators of the OSD and OSE series.
" is rated in accordance with the method of application of the separator agreed
with Westfalia Separator. Refer to the data sheet and contractual agreements.
The electronic control system triggers total ejections of the bowl at adjustable in-
tervals with or without displacement of the liquid from the bowl.
The following ejections can be selected for the separators stated:
- Partial ejections
Partial ejection of the bowl means partial emptying of the solids space of
the bowl. The product feed is shut off during partial ejection.
- Total ejections
In the case of a total ejection, virtually the complete bowl content is emptied
and collected in the solids vessel after closing the product valve and draw-
ing off the residual liquid.
Never initiate a total ejection when the separator is vibrating strongly
(bowl unbalance)!
- Pre-selectable partial ejections followed by a total ejection
For perfect clarifying efficiency and low ejection losses on the separator, the
time-dependent program cycle requires the solids content in the feed material
not to vary too much.
The separators with the UNITROL system have two inbuilt monitoring functions:
- WMS (Water content Monitoring System)
- SMS (Sludge Space Monitoring System)
Separators of the D I E generation can be upgraded for one-stage WMS/SMS
operation.
For details concerning specific functions refer to the corresponding chapters of
this manual.
Intended use involves

• adhering to these safety instructions and to the instruction manuals for the
control system and for the separator
.. paying attention to safety markings in/on the control cabinet
" adhering to the data on the nameplate, e.g. the rated voltage
The contractually agreed conditions agreed with Westfalia Separator on the in-
tended use of the control system must be passed on to the operating personnel
by the plant operator.
Any operating mode deviating from this is not intended use and can result
in severe damage to property and persons!
8555-9000-010/1207
12
1.3 Non-compliance with the intended use

Any use that deviates from the intended use is considered to be non-
compliant.
The control system may not be operated by:

" Persons who have not read and understood these basic safety precautions.
" Persons who have not read and understood the instruction manuals of the
control system and of the separator.
" Persons who have not been briefed on proper and correct operation.
" Persons who have not been adequately trained .
., Persons who have not reached the minimum age of 18 years.
The separator may not be operated:

" while maintenance and repair work is being done on the separator plant
" in case of insufficient air or water supply
.. in case of impermissibly low supply voltage
" by persons who are not adequately trained.
" when the control system is operated with spare parts which do not come from
Westfalia Separator.
Non-compliance with the intended use

.. can cause severe damage to the control system, the separator and other
plant components!
" can endanger the operator and other persons!
----------- -·~--·~-~~---·-·-·----------- ----

8555-9000-01011207
13
1.4 Safety markings

The safety markings (adhesive and plastic labels) are attached to all control sys-
tems on the front panel and inside the corresponding control cabinet in such a
way that they are clearly visible.
All safety markings on the control system and plant components must always be
in perfect condition.
" Clean dirty safety markings.
.. Replace damaged safety markings.
[1x1"J
31£'!................... :
4
2 8555020
Fig. 3 Safety markings on a control unit (example)
Safety markings
1 Configuration plan plates
2 Electrical markings
3 Warning pictograms
4 Maker's nameplate
5 Nameplate
The texts and part numbers of the safety markings change depending on the
languages required by the customer.
8555-9000-010/1207
14
1.4.1 Safety markings am:I their meaning

The following safety markings are attached inside/onto the control cabinet as
adhesive labels.
Before carrying out work, dis~

connect power to all compo=
nents of the monitoring system!
Risk of injury due to electrical voltage
and unintended start-up of the separa-
tor!
Before carrying out work on the

separator and electrical plant com-
ponents:
., Make sure the separator is at a
57 standstill.
'--~--~~~~~~~~~~~---'
Fig. 4 " Switch off all electrical appliances ,,i
via the main switch,

.. Lock the installation to prevent it
from being accidentally switched on.
Danger due to electrical voltage!

Non-compliance with the protective
measures can result in serious dam-
age to persons or property.
Before working on electrical con-

trol/plant components:
"' Switch off all electrical appliances
via the main switch.
SS
Fig. 5
CAUTION:
The parts marked Ill this way can carry voltage even when the main
switch is off!
.. Lock the separator/plant to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.
@ Take adequate preventive measures according to the national provisions (in
Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VOE (Verein
Deutscher Elektrotechnik I Association of German Electrical Engineers) or of
the local electric power company.
"' The work may only be carried out by competent persons (qualified technical
specialists).
Pictograms with warning text

Pictograms can be meaningfully supplemented as illustrated in the two following
examples:
- with warning text (Voltage is also present ... ),
- with signal vvord (Ar \l::NTION!) and warning text.
8555-9000-010/1207
15
Danger through external voltage!
Voltage also present when main switch

is turned off!
CAUTION:
The circuits marked in this way can
carry voltage even when the main
switch is off!
Fig. 6 Example 1
AC HT UN GI Danger through external voltage!

Auch bei ausgeschaltetem
Haupts challer konnen
ornngeforbige Leitungen
unter Spannung stehen.
ATTENTION!
ATTENTION!
Also in case of switched off main isola-
Also in case ofs\\itched off tor orange coloured cores can be un-
main isolator orange coloured cores
can be under \·oltage. der voltage.
ATTENTION!
Lorsque le commutateur principal
est eteint les files orange
peuvent etre sous tension. CAUTION:
switch is off!
Fig. 7 Example 2
I'm
Orange coloured IE?ads are fitted as standard at Westfalia Separator.
Different colour leads can be fitted if requested by the customer!
Potential equalisation (protec-

tive-earth terminal)
The grounding protection is a measure
which, in the case of a malfunction,
leads off the touch voltage into the
earth.
SG
Fig. 8
8555-9000-010/1207
16
1.5 Operations on the control system
The control system works reliably, pro-

vided that it is operated and main-
tained in accordance with our operat-
ing instructions.
Fig. 9
Special attention must be given to:

" Electrical installation
" Operation
" Shut-down and "Emergency-Off"
" Maintenance and repair
1.5.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel

Operating, maintaining or repairing the separator, the control system or the sep-
arator plant requires specialized knowledge!
CAUTION!
Operating, maintenance or repair work by unqualified or unauthorized
personnel can lead to operating, assembly and handling errors and severe
damage to persons and property.
Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified

or unauthorized personnel!
For operation, maintenance and repair work, personnel may only be deployed
who
" have reached a minimum age of 18 years.
" are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings and train-
ing .
.. are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
The operator of the separator, the control system or the separator plant
" is responsible for the necessary skills and knowledge of the personnel.
" is responsible for briefing and training the personnel.
" must be sure that the personnel have read and understood the manuals nec-
essary to carry out their work.
Westfalia Separator offers an extensive range of training and advanced training

courses. For more in-depth information, please check back with Westfalia Sepa-
rator or one of their authorised agencies.
8555-9000-010/1207
17
1.5.2 Spare part requirements
" Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia

Separator.
The use of non-genuine parts leads to:
- safety risks,
- less durability and availability,
- increased service requirement.
If a safety risk occurs when using non-original
spare parts, this may have legal consequences
Fig. 10 for the responsible persons. In such cases,
Westfalia Separator accepts no liability or war-
ranty claims.
1.5.3 Electrical installation
.. Electrical work may only be car-

ried out by an authorized electri-
cian!
" The governing accident prevention
regulations apply for the electrical
appliances and installations.
.. Special attention must be paid to the
installation guidelines of Westfalia
Separator.
" The frequency and voltage of the
power supply must correspond to
the machine specifications.
Fig. 11
• Carry out voltage equalization.

" Observe legal regulations; e.g. in the EU: .
- Low-voltage guideline 73/23/EWG
- Electro-magnetic compatibility 89/336/EWG.
- Guidelines of the classification societies.
8555-9000-010/1207
18
1.5.4 Operation
.. Refer to chapter "operation" .

.. Note nameplate.
Check the rated and control voltage
for conformity with the connection
data of the control system.
Fig. 12
When unusual noises or vibrations oc-·

cur on the separator:
.. Immediately shut down the separa-
tor with fiiied bowi via "emergency-
off'.
" Never trigger a bowl ejection!
.. Evacuate the room.
" Do not re-enter the room until the
centrifuge has come to a standstill.
S2
Fig. 13
" The bowl is not allowed to run with-

out liquid supply for more than 15
minutes, as otherwise it would result
in overheating of the bow! material.
For energy plants:
r~'
" Activate the cooling-water program
(see section 3.6.17 - Separator set-
tings).
ll,~rJI " Activate automatic shut-down (see
I~ ~I section 3.6.17 - Separator settings).
Fig. 14
8555-9000-010/1207
19
1.5.5 Shut-down and "Emergency-Off"

In order to be able to be switch off all drives in a hazardous situation or in the
case of abnormal operating states, the control cabinet - depending on the ver-
sion - is equipped with:
- an emergency-off switch or
- a min switch with emergency-off function.
The separator is shut down by means of external and internal emergency-off
switches while performing two total ejections.
When the main switch with emergency-off function is activated, power is cut off
to the entire control system. There will be no bowl ejection.
mm!
Provided the separator is equipped accordingly, the shut-down procedure can
be accelerated by a pneumatic brake and safety-water function .
.. For shut-down refer to the chapter

"Operation" of the start-up and shut-
down manual.
8$5501"
Fig. 15
8555-9000-010/1207
20
1.5.6 Maintenance and repair

Timely maintenance of the control system and the replacement of worn or dam-
aged plant components is essential to ensure safe operation.
Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator. Otherwise, safety
risks may arise {see section 1.5.2).
Maintenance and repair work may only be carried out to the extent described in
this instruction manual.
Maintenance and repair work not described in this manual may only be
carried out by the manufacturer or by "repair shops" authorized by the
manufacturer.
We recommend having the control system regularly checked by our specialists.
These checks help to maintain the operating safety and avoid unexpected
downtime.
Before carrying out maintenance

and repair work:
CAUTION! Risk of injury due to

electrical voltage and unintended
start-up of the separator!
" Make sure the separator is at a

standstill!
Possibilities for checking standstill
are described in the separator man-
S7 ual.
Fig. 16
" Switch off all electrical appliances
'" Lock the installation to prevent it
8555-9000-010/1207
21
1.6 Explosion protection
., Strictly adhere to the prevailing local

rules and regulations for operating in
potentially explosive areas.
An area is "potentially explosive"
when there is (or must be expected)
an explosive atmosphere in such a
volume that specific preventive
measures concerning design, con-
struction, and the use of centrifuges
and control systems are required.
Fig. 17
., The operation of centrifuges I control systems in "zone O" areas, i.e.

where a dangerous explosive atmosphere is prevailing continuously or
for long periods or frequently, is not permitted!
" Operation of the centrifuges I control systems in
- areas of "zone 1'', i.e. in areas in which dangerous explosive atmosphere is
occasionally present,
- areas of "zone 2", i.e. in areas in which dangerous explosive atmosphere
are rarely and briefly present,
is only admissible when the centrifuge I control system is equipped for use in
explosion-hazarded areas.
" Centrifuges installed in explosion-hazarded rooms can be operated by means
of a control panel installed in the vicinity of the centrifuge. The control system
is then installed outside the explosion-hazarded room.
• Only units designed for application in "ex" zones are allowed to be operated in
potentially explosive areas.
" All the electrical apparatus of the centrifuge/plant, i.e. motor controls, valve
controls, electric heaters, heater control units, electrically operated valves
must be protected accordingly or, if in standard design, must be installed in a
separate room outside the explosion-hazarded area.
" Supervisory equipment on the centrifuge such as pressure guards or transmit-
ters, flow detectors and temperature switches, pressure switches, must be
connected to intrinsically safe Eex(i) electric circuits.
" In the area close to the centrifuge/control system, take the preventive
measures provided under "primary" explosion protection" (ventilation, etc.).
• Carry out voltage equalization before operating the centrifuge I control sys-
tem.
1.6.1 Classification of the centrifuge I plant

The centrifuge/plant complies with the requirements of Group 11, Equipment
Category 3 in accordance with the Directive 94/9/EG. The respective tempera-
ture class is specified in the technical documents.
8555-9000-010/1207
22
1.6.2 Obligations of the operator

The operator
" must assess the explosion risks and carry out the zone classification.
" rnust ensure that the centrifuge/installation is correctly erected and tested be-
fore commissioning.
.. is responsible for the safety aspects of his centrifuge/installation.
The correct and proper condition of the centrifuge/installation must be main-
tained by regular testing and maintenance.
1 .6.3 Standards and guidelines

The following standards, guidelines and regulations must be observed when us-
ing equipment in explosion-hazarded areas:
" Directive 94/9/EG (ATEX 95)

Equipment and protective systems for correct usage in explosion-hazarded
areas.
This Directive describes fundamental safety requirements and test proce-
dures for application outside of explosion-hazarded areas, which, however,
with regard to explosion hazards, are necessary for the safe operation of
equipment and safety systems or contribute to it.
" Directive 1999/92/EG (ATEX 137)

Protection of safety and health of the employees when working in explosion-
hazarded areas.
This Directive is directed at the operator and contains, among other things,
the necessary specifications and definitions for zone classification required for
assessment.
'" EN 1127-1
Explosive atmospheres - explosion protection - Part 1 Fundamentals and
methodology
" EN 50 014
General provisions
" EN 50018 or IEC 60 079-1

Electrical apparatus for explosion-hazarded areas - flameproof enclosure "d"
Basic principle:
Parts which can ignite an explosive atmosphere are incorporated in a h~using
which, in the event of an explosion of an explosive mixture, withstands the
pressure and which prevents transfer of the explosion to the atmosphere sur-
rounding the housing.
Main application:
Switching devices and switchboards, control switches and display units, con-
trol systems, motors, transformers, heating devices, lamps
8555-9000-010/1207
23
" EN 50019 or IEC 60 079-7

Electrical apparatus for explosion-hazarded areas - type of protection "e"
Basic principle:
Here, additional measures are implemented in order to increase the safety
margin to prevent the possibility of inadmissibly high temperatures and the
occurrence of sparks and arcs in the inside or at the outside of components of
electrical apparatus which do not otherwise occur in normal operation.
Main application:
Terminal and connector boxes, control boxes for fitting ex-components which
have a different type of protection and lamps.
" EN 50020 or IEC 60 079-11

Electrical safety for explosion-hazarded areas - intrinsically safe "i".
Basic principle:
The apparatus used in explosion-hazarded areas contains only intrinsically
safe circuits. A circuit is intrinsically safe when no spark and no thermal effect
which occur under defined test conditions (which include normal operation
and certain error conditions) can cause ignition of a certain explosive atmos-
phere.
Main application:
Measuring and control technology, communication technology, sensors, actu-
ators.
" EN 60079-10 or VOE 0165 - Part 101

Electrical apparatus for explosion-hazarded areas -
Part 101 "Classification of the explosion-hazarded areas"
• EN 60079-14 or VDE 0165 - Part 1

Electrical installations in explosion-hazarded areas
" EN 60079-17 or VDE 0165 - Part 10

Part 10 "Testing and maintenance of electrical installations in explosion-
hazarded areas"
8555-9000-010/1207
24
1. 7 Carn instructions
ATTENTION!
The surface of the control unit (display, keypad) must not be cleaned with ag-
gressive or acidic media (pH 6-8, tenside content< 5 %, aroma-free, ethanol-
free).
1.8 Storage
ATTENTION!
Improper and incorrect storage of the control system can damage or de-
stroy its components.
Store accessories like spare parts and tools properly!
" The control unit and accessories must be stored dry, dust-free, vibration and
frost-free.
IMPORT ANT: Outdoor exposure is not admissible!
" Protect from excessive heat!

Recommended ?torage temperature: + 5 to+ 45 °C (41 - 113 °F)
1.8.1 After delivery

If the control system is not installed immediately after arrival,
., store the control system in its original transport packaging.
Recommended storage temperature:+ 5 to +50 °C (41 -122 °F)
IMPORTANT:
A storage time of more than 12 months of the control system is only allowed
after consulting the manufacturer.
1.9 Disposal
When the equipment is no more useful or the control system has reached the
end of its service life, the operator will be responsible for appropriate, envi-
ronmentally friendly disposal of its components and materials such as
- metal,
- caoutchouc and rubber
- plastics,
- glass,
- electric and electronic apparatus .
• * •
• ENVIRONMENT Al PROTECTION!
Be sure to adhere to applicable environmental protection legislation!
More information on disposal matters can be obtained from local authorities.
8555-9000-010/1207
25
2 Description
2.1 Function ................................................................................................. 26

2.2 Performance features ............................................................................ 27
2.3 Areas of application ............................................................................... 27
2.4 Functional layout diagram ...................................................................... 28
2.5 Technical data ....................................................................................... 29
2.5.1 Control Unit 010 .................................................................................... 29
2.5.2 Control cabinet ....................................................................................... 31
2.6 Digital inputs and outputs ...................................................................... 32
2.7 Analog inputs and outputs (4 - 20 mA) ................................................. 33
2.7.1 Special versions ..................................................................................... 33
2.8 Configuration ......................................................................................... 34
2.8.1 Front view .............................................................................................. 34
2.8.2 Interior view ............................................................................................ 35
8555-9000-010/1207
26
2. 1 Function
The illuminated four-line LC display provides information on the functional condi-
tions or troubles prevailing on the separator and - depending on program ad-
justment - visualises the corresponding process data.
Besides the control cabinet and the control unit, the control system comprises
all complete line fittings which, due to built-in electrically actuated equipment,
are subject to the control or supervision by the control system. These include:
- dirty-oil supply
- water supply
- operating-water connection
With UNITROL, they also include
- circulation and water discharge valve
- water detector (WMS sensor)
- pressure transmitter for the bypass line in SMS mode
On special order (optional):

- PT100 sensor in a two-wire circuit for min./max monitoring in the dirty oil
supply line
- ievel switch for monitoring the water discharge
- process-dependent control of an external feed pump
- level switch for monitoring the solids vessel
- min./max level switch for controlling a solids pump
- klaxon for audible alarm-signalling
The standard control system is designed for individual control of centrifugal
separators or clarifiers.
If required, in case of two-stage HFO treatment, series operation can be prese-
lected. For this purpose the piping between the separators will have to be laid
out accordingly, in order to connect the MPI interfaces of at least two control
systems.
The control system is built into the door of the control cabinet ready to be
hooked up and programmed for the required control task
The operator is not authorized to carry out program modifications.
The operator can make the follovving settings by means of the keypad:
- machine-specific program selection
- timer value settings
- counter value settings
8555-9000-010/1207
27
2.2 Performance features

The control unit features the following:
- display for machine monitoring and operation
- function keys with LED status signal
- control voltage 24 V
- high operational reliability
- long service life
- user program on Micro Memory Card (MMC)
2.3 Areas of application
Application Description
Single or serial (-91-) The separator is run in single or series opera-
tion (-91-).
Single or series (-01-) The separator is run with activated Water Con-
tent Monitoring System (-01-) (for more details
(Water Content Monitoring
refer to separator manual)
System)
Single or series (-02-) The separator is run in single or series opera-
tion (-01-).
Single or series (-01/36-) The separator is used for heavy fuel oil treat-
ment, with activated Water Content Monitoring
(WMS/SMS - HFO)
System (-01) and Solids Space Monitoring
System (-36-).
Single or series (-01/96-) The separator is used for lube-oil treatment,
with activated Water Content Monitoring Sys-
(WMS/SMS - LO)
tern (-01) and Solids Space Monitoring System
(-96-).
8555-9000-010/1207
28
2.4 Functional layout diagram
Fig. 18
A Water
B Product discharge
C Product feed
Water pressure reducer

2 Feed assembly with solenoid valve for filling-, displacement-, and oper-
ating water
3 Control system and motor starter for separator
- Motor starter for feed pump
- Motor starter for solids pump
4 Terminal box (fitted to separator)
5 Water detector (WMS sensor)
6 Circuit valve
7 Pressure transmitter for solids-space monitoring
8 Water discharge valve
9 Pneumatic 3/2-way valve with manual override and solenoid valve for
control air (built into product feed to separator)
10 Pressure transmitter PSL for product discharge ·.
11 Pressure transmitter PSH for product discharge
8555-9000-01O/i207
29
2.5 Technical data
2.5.1 Control Unit D1 O
Technical data
Dimensions 215 x 165 x 88 mm
(width x height x depth)
Installation I cutout dimensions 202 x 152 mm (tolerance +1 mm)
Weight 1.35 kg
Display, LED background illumina- LED-backlit 4-line LCD display, each line
ti on with 20 digits and 5 mm high
Keypad Foil-protected keyboard,
23 keys with 11 integrated LEDs
Interfaces Standard MPI port for PG and network in-
tegration, P-bus for S7 extension modules
Supply voltage DC 24 V, range DC 20,4; DC 28.8 V
Reverse-polarity protected yes
Voltage cut-off >20 ms
Current consumption (In) 2.4 A
Integrated RAM 48 kByte
Storage memory Plug-in Micro Memory Card (MMC)
Backup Ensured by Micro Memory Card (MMC) no
battery needed.
Configuration software Step 7, Version 5.1 and later; Service
Pack4
HMI software Integrated in Step 7
Inputs 24 digital, DC 24 V
4 analog, 4-20 mA I 0-10 V
1 PT 100
Outputs 16 digital, 0.5 A each, sum current 4 A
2 analog, 4-20 mA
Safety standard DIN EN 61131-2/IEC 61131-2
Enclosure Front of unit: IP 65 according to
IEC 60529, NEMA 4X
Housing: IP 20 according to IEC 60529
Electromagnetic compatibility A according to EN 55011
8555-9000-010/1207
30
Technical data
Climatic conditions Approved according to IEC 60068-2-1,
IEC 60068-2.2
Operation: O - 55 °C (32 - 131 °F) for verti-
cai instaiiation
Storage: -20 °C to +70 °C (-4 to 158 °F)
Humidity: 5 - 95 % at 25 °C (77 °F)
Mechanical ambient conditions Vibrations during operation: Approved ac-
cording to IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2.6
Vibrations during storage/transport:
10 to 58 Hz, amplitude 0.075, 5 - 9 Hz
Shocking during operation: Half-sine:
150 m/s2 (15 g), 11ms,18 shocks
Shocking during storage/transport:
250 m/s2 (25 g), 6 ms, 1000 shocks
Fire resistance Edge connectors: FV2 according to IEC
60707
Headers: FVO according to IEC 60707
Approvals CE (EC Directive EMV 89/336/EWG)
UL (Underwriters Laboratories UL 508)
CSA (Canadian Standard Association
C22.2 No.142)
Prototype technical- release tests GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
I classification societies LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
BV (Bureau Veritas)
ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
RINA (Registro Italiano Navale)
... , .... ..........
jl\JK (l\Jippon Ka1g1 KyoKalJ"
8555-9000-010/1207
31
2.5.2 Control cabinet
Technical data
Connection voltage 115/230 V AC (±10 %) reversible
Frequency 50 to 60 Hz
Max. power consumption 100 VA
Control voltage 24 V DC
Lead-in wire fuse 16 A (slow-blow fuse)
Ambient temperature 0 to 55 °C (32 to 55.00 °C)
Housing Painted sheet steel, RAL 7032
Special design: stainless steel
Enclosure IP 55 (if appropriately fitted according to
chapter 5: "Installation and connection")
Dimensions 380 x 600 x 350 mm
(width x height x depth)
Cable entry from below, through cable glands
Electrical execution according to EN 60204-1 (lead-colour coding optional,
upon agreement)
Ambient conditions. 3C2 according to EN 60721-3-3
8555-9000-010/1207
32
2.6 Digital inputs and outputs
Designation
Digital inputs
Connection
DI 0.0
Function
Separator in operation
I
Term;nal
1X2. 01/02
1n1\
\LJ I I
I
DI 0.1 Separator Fault 1X2. 03/04
DI 0.2 Spare -
DI 0.3 Spare -
DI 0.4 Spare ·~
DI 0.5 WMS-UNITROL 1X2. 11/12

DI 0.6 Spare -
DI 0.7 LSHH - solids vessel 1X2. 15/16
DI 1.0 Feed pump "Operation" 2K2 19/20
---·---~·-~····---·-··-- ------------
DI 1.1 Feed pump "Fault" 202 21/22
·-
DI 1.2 Solids pump "Operation" 5K1 23/24
DI 1.3 Solids pump "Fault" 501 25/26
DI 1.4 LSH Solids vessel, for pump start iX2. 27/28
··--
DI 1.5 LSL Solids vessel, for pump stop 1X2. 29/30

DI 1.6 Vibration stage 1 1X2. 31/32
DI 1.7 Vibration stage 2 1X2. 33/34
DI 2.0 - DI 2.5 Spare -
DI 2.6 Limit switch, steam valve 1X2. 73/74
DI 2.7 Emergency-Off 3K1
--
Digital outputs DOO.O Product valve 1X2. 41/42
(DO)
DO 0.1 Water valve 1X2. 43/44
000.2 Operating water valve 1X2. 45/46
---·-~-----~--·
000.3 Steam valve I heater interlocking (option) 1X2. 47/48
DO 0.4 "UNITROL" circuit valve 1X2. 49/50

000.5 "UNITROL" water discharge valve 1X2. 51/52
000.6 Lamp test (option) -
- - - - · - - · - - - - - - ~----------~--------
000.7 Collective a!arm 1K11/1X2. 67/68
DO 1.0 Separator "Off" 1K12

I 1K13
DO 1.1 Feed pump "Off"
DO 1.2 Solids pump "Off" 1K14
DO 1.3 TSL (option) 1K15
001.4 TSH (option) 1K16
DO 1.5 Brake (option) 1K17
DO 1.6 PIO - open (option) 1K18
DO 1.7 PIO - closed (option) 1K19
8555-9000-010/1207
33
2.7 Analog inputs and outputs (4 - 20 mA)
Designation Connection Function Terminal

Analog inputs Al 01 Motor current and ejection monitoring 1U3 6/7
(Al)
Al 02 Clean-oil discharge 1U2 12+/13-
AI03 SMS transmitter I water discharge 1X2. 61/63/SC
Al 04 PID controller for product temperature 1X2. 76/77
PT 100 PT-100 product temperature 1X2. 78/79
Analog outputs AO 0-1 Motor current 1X2. 93/94/SC
(AO)
AO 1-1 Temperature 1X2. 91/92/SC
2. 7 .1 Special versions
Special versions differing from the one described in this manual are available:
- The housing can have other dimensions.
- The housing can be made of stainless steel.
- Individual components of the control system can be integrated in a compact
cabinet (e.g. with separator motor control etc.) or in a central control sys-
tem.
8555-9000-010/1207
34
2.8 Configuration
The construction can vary depending on the delivery scope.
The control system is assembled ready for use, wired ready for hook-up and
conforms to the regulations of EN 60204.
2.8.1 Front view
r:;;1m1;:1
·········w·········
5.
8555021
Fig. 19
Lock
2 Control Unit 010
3 OFF/ON keys for separator
4 OFF/ON keys for feed pump
5 HAND/OfAUTOMATIC selector for solids pump (option)
6 Main switch
8555-9000-010/1207
35
2.8.2 Interior view
14
13 2
9 5
12 8
11
10
Fig. 20
1 Isolating amplifier for analog output (option)

2 WMS (Water Content Monitoring System) relay, if provided
3 Full-motor-protection module
4 Interface relay
5 Auxiliary contactor
6 Main contactor
7 Current transformer
8 Power supply for PLC (Programmable Logic Control) and valves
9 Terminal strip
10 Control transformer for heating and venting facilities (option)
11 Main switch
12 Control voltage transformer (option)
13 Motor protection switch
14 Safety cut-out
8555-9000-010/1207
36
8555-9000-010/1207
37
3 Operation
3.1 Getting acquainted with the operating elements ................................... 38

3.1.1 Function keys ......................................................................................... 39
3.1.2 System keys ........................................................................................... 41
3.1.3 Softkeys F1 - F4 .................................................................................... 41
3.1.4 Parameter entries .................................................................................. 42
3.2 Switching-on the control unit. ................................................................. 43
3.3 Password protection .............................................................................. 44
3.4 Program sequence diagram .................................................................. 45
3.5 Process data overview (Horne) ............................................................ .46
3.6 User settings .......................................................................................... 50
3.6.1 Calling up user settings ......................................................................... 50
3.6.2 User timings ........................................................................................... 52
3.6.3 Timer lists 1 and 2 ................................................................................. 54
3.6.4 Counters ................................................................................................ 55
3.6.5 Analog inputs (Al) .................................................................................. 59
3.6.6 Analog outputs (AO) .............................................................................. 63
3.6.7 Input list. ................................................................................................. 64
3.6.8 Output list ............................................................................................... 64
3.6.9 PID controller ......................................................................................... 65
3.6.10 Time recording ....................................................................................... 68
3.6.11 Alarm counters ....................................................................................... 70
3.6.12 Alarm memory ....................................................................................... 72
3.6.13 Maintenance .......................................................................................... 73
3.6.14 Volume (option) ..................................................................................... 74
3.6.15 Service information ................................................................................ 77
3.6.16 Date and time ........................................................................................ 78
3.6.17 Separator settings .................................................................................. 79
3.6.18 Contrast ................................................................................................. 84
3.6.19 Language ............................................................................................... 84
3.6.20 Speed monitoring (option) ..................................................................... 86
3.7 Changing the Micro Memory Card (MMC) ............................................. 88
3.8 Memory reset ......................................................................................... 89
3.8.1 Setting the jumper .................................................................................. 89
3.8.2 CPU reset .............................................................................................. 90
8555-9000-010/1207
38
3.1 Getting acquainted with the operating elements
111 3 I!! .4 -
Proc~ss ISERIES ESC
SlDP :JJ<:-/.2__
8 9 0
'Iii! ;im
PID I Home IEDIT ENTER
I DIR
5 4 3
Fig. 21
The 01 O control unit is built into the door of the control cabinet The operating
interface consists of:
Soft keys F1 - F4 (depending on the current display)
2 Text display
3 System keys
4 Function keys
Numerical values can be entered when the EDIT key is actuated.
5 Status and fault indication
6 Operating mode switch (CPU start/stop)
8555-9000-010/1207
39
3.1.1 Function keys

The function keys have a global function: The actions which can be triggered
are independent of the text shown in the display. They each incorporate an LED
which gives information on the state of the respective function.
Key Key designation Description

Separating program "Off' In separation mode, this key closes the feed valve and triggers
a bowl ejection.
On OSC/OSD separators two total ejections are performed au-
tomatically.
The LED lights up when the ejections are being performed.
Separating program "On" This key starts the separating program.
The feed valve is opened when the ejection program has end-
ed.
When the separating temperature falls below its min. level or
when level switch "LSHH solids vessel" responds, no program
start is possible.
The LED lights up when the ejection or separating program is
active.
Lamp test This key launches a function test of the LEDs incorporated in
the keys and of external signal lamps, if provided.
The LEDs for status and fault signalling are not tested.
Series operation When running HFO separators in series, two control systems
can be preselected for this mode within an MPI network. To ac-
tivate series operation, actuate the "SERI ES" key on both con-
trol units.
The LED lights up when series operation is active.
Home/DIR 1. Jumping directly to the process page
(see chapter. 3.5 ".Process Data Overview (Home)")
2. Jumping directly to the user settings
(see chapter 3.6 "User settings")
Fault message page This key is to call up the page giving an overview of pending
fault signals, i.e. the alarm memory.
For a pending alarm signal, a remedy catalog can be retrieved
after having acknowledged with the E~HER key.
When the LED is flashing, information on current remedy opera-
tions can be checked by actuating the F1 key.
The LED will flash as long as a fault signal is queued.
8555-9000-010/1207
40
··--·-
l~I
PIO controller Provided the plant is equipped accordingly, product feed and
temperature control can be activated while the "PIO controller"
key is switched on.
The LED lights up when the control system is in automatic
mode.
For testing operations, first switch off the control system by
means of the "PIO controller" key. In the corresponding screen
menu (see chapter 3.6.9 "PIO control") close/open the motor
control valve by means of soft key F2/F3.
·---
e
Bl Feed pump status This key has no function. The LED in the key shows the current
feed pump status:
- Continuous light: operation
- Slow flashing: post-running phase
- Quick flashing: motor-protection alarm
rel E
Solids pump status This key has no function. The LED in the key shows the current
solids pump status:
- Continuous light: operation
Quick flashing: motor-protection alarm
~ l@I ISeparator status This key has no function. The LED in the key shows the current
separator status:
- Continuous light: Operation
- Slow flashing: start-up phase
- Quick flashinq: motor-protection alarm ~~~"~-<-
8555-9000-01O/i207
41
3.1.2 System keys
~J
Arrow up/down/right/left With these keys one can navigate across the menus.
If a menu has input fields the arrow keys are used to navigate
from one field to another. After the last input field only, the next
menu is selected.
[!] The arrow keys allow to navigate throughout the alarms within
the alarm memory or on the signal level.
EJ
G
ESC (cancel) With this key, field entries can be undone as long as they have
I ESC I not been confirmed with ENTER.
If the ESC key is pressed within a menu, the previous menu or
the signal level is accessed.
From the signal level jumping back is not possible.
ENTER With this key

IENTER • one can confirm and finalize an entry
" one can acknowledge an alarm signal
• one passes from the signal level to the image level
r~ED~
EDIT This key allows to modify parameters or timer/counter setpoints.
The LED lights up when the edit mode is active.
3.1.3 Softkeys FI - F4
8 Softkeys The softkeys have local functions. The actions which can be
triggered depend on the text seen in the display and are at-
tributed to the corresponding images.
~
EJ
B
8555-9000-010/1207
42
3. 1.4 Parameter entries

Numeric values, e.g. passwords or setpoint updates, are entered by means of
the function keys.
Fig. 22
The corresponding figure (1) is seen right-hand above the function key.
If, by mistake, you failed to press the EDIT key correctly before entering param-
eters, the function of the respective function key will be active. Then you might
change the current operating mode of the separator.
However, by pressing the mistakenly actuated key again, you return to the origi-
nal mode.
An entry can be made in a menu when the cursor is flashing.

Changing a value:
.. Press the EDIT key; the LED in the EDIT key lights up .
., Enter the new value or the password by means of the function keys.
" Finish your entry by pressing the ENTER key.
8555-9000-010/1207
43
3.2 Switching-on the control unit
When you switch on the control unit

the adjacent initial display appears.
C7-613 Firmw. :Vl.01
Bootl . : Vl . 01
> Startup <
Fig. 23
Required data is loaded from the Micro

Memory Card (MMC).
$ 002 transfer
> Downloading User-<

> Data <
Fig. 24
Then the unit runs up, showing the ad-

jacent display. The run-up time is ap-
Westfalia Separator prox. 3 minutes.
Mineraloil Systems " Press the ENTER key.
please press
>> ENTER <<
Fig. 25
An overview of all process data is dis-

played. From this overview the individ-
Step: OFF ual menus can be called up - refer to
Step: actual Osec chapter 3.5 "Process data overview
Clean oil out 2.0bar (Home)".
Product Temp. : 93°C
Fig. 26
rmma
To avoid long run-up times the control unit should be under voltage even when
the separator is not used.
8555-9000-010/1207
44
3.3 Password protection

Certain entries and functions require prior entry of a password.
"' Company-related basic settings
- Password Level 1
"' Service
- Password Level 2
,. Loading CPU data
- Password Level 3
When selecting these options you are requested to enter the required password.
m:ml
You can obtain the passwords from Westfalia Separator.
When requested to enter the password

proceed as follows:
Password login: "' Press the EDIT key.
Level 0 - The LED in the EDIT key lights
Password: up.
.. Enter the password by means of the
function keys.
Fig. 27
.. Press the ENTER key.

The password is accepted.
Password login: - A jump into password level 1 fol-
Level : 1 lows.
Password: ...... . .. Press the ENTER key for the se-
cond time.
- A jump back into the previous
menu follows .
Fig. 28 .. Actuate the arrow key, and the first
password-protected menu appears.
If there is no operation made for two minutes, the program returns to entry level
0 (Logout). For further processing the password has to be re-entered anew.
ATTENTION!
Then, however, the menu then called up is not protected. This means that even
unauthorized persons can carry out changes in this menu.
To protect the control unit against unauthorized access you should return within
the menu until you are in the openly accessible menu area.
8555-9000-010/1207
45
3.4 Program sequence diagram
---------·----·----------------------- -----
Separator has been

switched on
A I
mil
Process ·1
START
"Bypass operation" "Standby"
"" ---------- ""- I >
Separation process is interrupted by Separator is at operating speed, sepa-
previous ejection program ration process can be started with the
preselected operating mode and/or se-
lected separator.
1111
~ Process
STOP I
--------
·1, ·2
I
---~---"f" ___
"Separate status"
Separation is started. The individual

program steps are processed with the
times set, depending on the selected
operating mode.
l----------~-~------------····-···--·--···--------
*1 or through external signal
*2 or through fault
Fig" 29
8555-9000-010/1207
46
3.5 Process data overview (Home)
~tep:
After having switched on the control
OFF unit, acknowledged with the ENTER
I ~tep: actual Osec
key, and after the run-up process, first
the ;:idjacent general overview ap-
Clean oil out 2.0bar pears.
Product Temp. : 93°C ., The general overview can be ac-
cessed directly from any other menu
by means of the "Home" key.
Fig. 30
" From the main menu, more program
settings can be called up by means
of the "arrow down" key.
The individual program settings are
described on the following pages.
STATUS-WMS/SMS/PT2
PT2-actual: 4.7bar
PT2-Transm: HIGH
WMS-Sensor: Oil
Fig. 31
Sep-Type:OSD-6
Motor current: O.OA
Speed: Orpm
Mode:Sing-le -01/36
Fig. 32
8555-9000-010/1207
47
Step:
Step: actual Osec
Clean oil out 2.0bar
Product-Temp.: 93°C
Fig. 33
First menu line

The current status within the program cycle is displayed.
Second menu line

Depending on the selected operating mode or separator, the current program
cycle ("step") and the respective countdown are shown in the display.
The subsequent display texts can be shown as described in the following table
(also refer to separate documentation "Settings and faults"
Display Meaning
Off Separator is not switched on.
The separator is in its start-up phase; no process
Run-up
start is possible.
Circulation mode: The feed valve is in recircula-
Circulation mode tion mode. The separator is in its run-up or fault
mode, or the process has not been launched.
Waiting The separating process has been launched.
The bowl content is displaced without loss by
Displacement
opening the displacement water valve.
Waiting after displace- Displacement is followed by a 5 seconds' waiting
ment period.
The solids space of the bowl is emptied by actu-
Total ejection
ating the operating-water valve.
The speed drop occurring during ejection is
Speed recovery
compensated.
The filling operation establishes the required wa-
Filling ter seal in the -96- version of VARIZON E and
UNITROL separators.
The filling cycle is followed by a 5 seconds' wait-
Waiting after filling
ing period.
Feed - open The separating process is activated.
Sensor test (option) The individual sensors are tested.
8555-9000-010/1207
48
Third menu line

Display Meaning
The current pressure in the clean-oil discharge is
Clean oil discharge
I displayed in bar.
Fourth menu line

Display Meaning
The current product-feed temperature is dis-
Product temperature
played in °C.
STATUS-WMS/SMS/PT2
PT2-actual: 4.7bar
PT2-Transm: HIGH
WMS-Sensor: OIL
Fig 34
First menu line

The current status for the WMS-SMS-PT2 sensor arrangement is displayed.
Second menu line
Display Meaning
The current pressure on the PT2 sensor is dis-
PT2-actual
played in bar.
Third menu line

The current pressure of the PT2 transmitter is displayed.
PT2-Transmitter: LOW This is displayed when no pressure prevails.
PT2-Transmitter: HIGH This is displayed when pressure prevails.
--
Fourth 1nenu line

The current status of the WMS sensor is displayed.
This is displayed when the WMS sensor detects
WMS sensor: OIL
oil.
This is displayed when the WMS sensor detects
WMS sensor: WATER
water.
8555-9000-010/1207
49
" From the main menu, more program

settings can be called up by means
Sep-Type:OSD-6 the "arrow down" key.
Motor curr. : O.OA
Speed: Orpm
Mode:Single -01/36
Fig. 35
First menu line

The currently selected separator type (OSD-X, OSE-X) is displayed. The sepa-
rator type is factory-set.
Second menu line

The current separator amperage is displayed. The amperage values differ in the
start-up, ejection, and operation cycles.
Third menu line

During the run-up phase of the separator the starting-time countdown is dis-
played in seconds. As soon as "O sec" appears the separator is ready for opera-
tion. Preselection is done on timer 10.
Fourth menu line

Display of the preselected separator operating mode. The operating mode of the
separator is factory-set. The following displays are possible:
tion (-91-).
Single or series (-01-) The separator is run with activated Water Con-
tent Monitoring System (-01-) (for more details
(Water Content Monitoring
refer to separator manual).
System)
tion (-01-).
Single or series (-01/36-) The separator is used for heavy fuel oil treat-
ment, with activated Water Content Monitoring
(WMS/SMS -HFO)
System (-01) and Solids Space Monitoring
System (-36-).
Single or series (-01/96-) The separator is used for lube oil treatment,
with activated Water Content Monitoring Sys-
(WMS/SMS -LO)
tern (-01) and Solids Space Monitoring System
(-96-).
8555-9000-010/1207
50
3.6 User settings
3.6.1 Calling up user settings
Fig. 36
"User settings" are called up by pressing "Home" key 1 twice.
Six user-setting overviews can be se-

lected by means of the "arrow-down"
Fl-User-Time 1/6 key.Call up the desired menu by
F2-Time list 1 means of the corresponding function
F3-Time list 2 key.
F4-Counter
Fig. 37
Fl-Analog ON 2/6
F2-Analog OFF
F3-Input list \
.)
F4-0utput list
Fig. 38
Fl-PID-Contr. 3/6 ..
F2-Time recording
F3-Alarm counter
F4-Alarm memory
Fig. 39
----· · - - - - - - -
8555-9000-010/1207
51
Fl-Maintenance 4/6
F2-Volume
F3-Service Info
F4-Date/Time
Fig. 40
Fl-Sep.Settings 5/6
F2-Contrast
F3-Language
F4-Speed monitoring
Fig. 41
Fl-Free 6/6
F2-Free
F3-Free
F4-Free
Fig. 42
8555-9000-010/1207
52
3.6.2 User timings

Three groups of timer lists are available:
- User timings
- Timer list 1
- Timer list 2
Only in the "User timings" menu can process-dependent time values be
changed without entering a password. The other two groups are modified by
service staff only.
ATTENTION!
Alter the timer settings only in a passive state. In active state mode, the previ-
ously set time first runs; the time change made does not become effective until
the next activation. All set times run backwards from the entered setpoint and
activate the programmed function when the time has elapsed.
rim
A user timing is changed only when the product is exposed to varying degrees
of contamination or when the water pressure for displacement and filling water
varies (to be gauged by litre now and then). (The required information can be
found in the Installation Guidelines, chapter "Water quantity").
All times are preset in the factory under consideration of the respective separa-
tor model and are adapted to the local conditions during commissioning .
., In the "User settings" overview, ac-

tuate the F 1 key.
Fl-User Time 1/6
F2-Time list 1
F3-Time list 2
F4-Counter
Fig. 43
-------------------------------·
8555-9000-010/1207
53
The individual values can be called up

successively by means of the "arrow-
User Timings down" key.
Changing the timer setting:
T20: Separation .. Press the EDIT key.
P:7200sec A:1234sec The LED in the EDIT key lights up.
.. Enter the new timer value by means
of the function keys .
Fig. 44 ., Press the ENTER key.
The new value is accepted.
" Select the next timer value by
means of the arrow keys.
Actual
Timer Meaning Setpoint
value
T20 Separation 7200 s
T01 Displacement
Auto timer value calculated (option)
T02 Filling
Auto timer value calculated (option)
T10 Separator starting 600 s
T11 Alarm bridging 30 s
m.:ml
In the displayed timer, there is a letter before each value. These letters have the
following meanings:
" P: Preset
.. A: Actual
8555-9000-010/1207
54
3.6.3 Timer lists 1 and 2

Precise information on the timers can be found in the separate description
"Settings and faults".
@ In the "User settings" overview actu-

ate the F2 or F3 key.
Fl-User Time 1/6
F2-Time list 1
F3-Time list 2
F4-Counter
Fig. 45
The timers, except those mentioned in

chapter 3.6.2 "User timings", are only
Time List 1 accessible by entering a password.
.. The first timer menu is called up .
TOO:Partial ejection .. By means of the arrow keys the in-
P: 1.lsec A: Osec. dividual timer menus can be subse-
quently browsed through and ad-
justed.
Fig. 46
Changing a timer setting :
" Press the EDIT key.
The LED in the EDIT key lights up.
" Enter the new value by means of the
function keys.
,. Press the ENTER key.
The new value is accepted .
.. Select the next counter value by
A fixed unit is allocated to each timer. If decimal places are specified, the time
can also be entered with this accuracy. The initial setpoints depend on the se-
lected separator type.
um
In the displayed timer, there is a letter before each value. These letters have the
following meanings:
" P: Preset
" A: Actual
8555-9000-0i O/i 207

55
3.6.4 Counters
• In the "User settings" overview, ac-
tuate the F4 key.
Fl-User Time 1/6
F2-Time list 1
F3-Time list 2
F4-Counter
Fig. 47

down" key.
Cl: Flush ejection
Changing a counter setting:
P: 10 .. Press the EDIT key.
A: 4 The LED in the EDIT key lights up.
.. Enter the new value by means of the
function keys.
Fig. 48 " Press the ENTER key.
" Select the next counter value by
More information on the individual counters (C1 - C5) is found on the following
pages.
Flush ejection:
Cl: Flush ejection

P: 10
A: 4
Fig. 49
Actual
Counter Meaning Setpoint P
value A
C1 Flush ejection 10
The number of total ejections to be performed until an automatic flush ejection is

to be triggered is entered in input field P. When operating without flush ejection,
set the counter to "O".
Upon each total ejection performed, the actual value A is reduced by "one".
When the "O" value is reached, the next total ejection will be followed by the de-
sired flush ejection.
rim
The "Flush ejection" counter generally responds only to total ejections per-
formed. Partial ejections are not taken into account. During flush ejections the
ejection monitoring system is out of action.
8555-9000-010/1207
56
Partial ejection:
C2: Partial ejection

P: 8
A: 2
Fig. 50
Actual
value A
C2 Partial ejection 8
When modifying the operating-water system, partial ejection programs can be

run on OSC and OSD separators as well, if desired.
The number of partial ejections to be performed until a double total ejection is to
be triggered is entered in input field P.
Upon each partial ejection performed, the actual value A is reduced by "one".
When the "O" value is reached, the next partial ejection will be followed by the
desired double total ejection.
Imm
The partial ejection mode can be switched on/off after having entered the pass-
word as described in chapter 3.6.17 "Separator Settings" Factory setting: Off
8555-9000-010/1207
57
Filling in SMS mode:
C3: SMS Filling

P: 3
A: 2
Fig. 51
Actual
value A
C3 SMS Filling 3
For LO separation in 01/96 mode, a system check of the SMS function is carried
out by several filling-water injections. The number of filling-water injection inter-
vals is preselected on counter C3. The factory setting is 3 and should be used
for testing purposes only.
The number of filling-water ejections to be performed until the system pressure
detected by the SMS sensor and switching over from SMS to WMS operation is
established, is entered in input field A.
If no pressure is detected after the third filling-water injection, the ejection pro-
gram is triggered.
Sensor check (option):
C4: Sensor check

P: 5
A: 0
Fig 52
Actual
value A
C4 This is where to define the number of 5
partial ejection intervals prior to an
automatic sensor check.
8555-9000-010/1207
58
Percent (by volume) water
!cs: o. 5-Vol-% Water
L
P: 3
A: 0
Fig. 53
---------~--~
Actual
value A
C5 In the separating program, with dis- 3
charge valve closed and T47 started,
the pressure in the bypass line is reg-
istered and reduced by one.
If, within the separating interval, the
"O" value is reached, the alarm "Cau-
tion, water content> 0.5%" appears.
This alarm is coupled to T17. By
opening of feed valve T17 is activat-
ed, after expiry of T17 the alarm is
still active.
- ·-
3555 .. 9000-010/1207
59
3.6.5 Analog inputs (Al)

To adjust the analog inputs perform the following steps.
" In the "User settings" overview, ac-

tuate the F1 key.
Fl-Analog ON 2/6
F2-Analog OFF
F3-Input list
F4-0utput list
Fig. 54

AIO: Motor current down" key.
1U3 6/7 10.5 A Changing the setting:
function keys.
Fig. 55 • Press the ENTER key.
.. Select the next value by means of
the arrow keys.
More information on how to adjust the analog inputs is given on the following
pages.
Transformer:
AIO: Motor current

1U3 6/7 10.5 A
Transformer:
Fl Key >1:50<
Fig. 56
Input Function Terminal Value

Al 0.0 Motor current 1U3 6/7 10.5 A
By actuating the "F1" key several times, separator 1:10; 1:25; 1:50;
current transformer adjustment can be selected for 1:100
local motor starters.
Due to the different separator motor ratings, the transmission ratio of the current
transformer can be adjusted when using external motor starters, to ensure that
the display of the control unit indicates the correct motor current of the separa-
tor.
The desired transformer ratio can be selected by actuating the F1 key several
times.
8555-9000-010/1207
60
Ejection monitoring:
nff~~~·
Ejection monito~
r~n~~ I
~~~l-~~nitoring::·~~ I
Offset: ~
Fig 57
Function Conditions
Ejection monitoring Just before an ejection the operating current is
read off, and the offset value is added. After
the ejection within the time setting of timer 27,
the operating current has to increase by this
value. The offset value is preset on this page.
While in separating mode, launch a total ejec-
tion by means of the "Start" key and observe
the ejection current in the corresponding dis-
play. The ejection current is normally higher
than the rated current in the separating pro-
gram. Enter the difference between ejection
current and separating current (e.g. 2.0 A) as
offset value.
The ejection monitoring will be out of service if
0,0 A has been entered as offset value. This,
however, should be done in exceptional cases
only.
Bowl monitoring For bowl monitoring, the cyclical closing-water
impulse for the bowl hydraulics is checked, i.e.:
if the closing-water rate is too high, the bowl is
opened which causes the current to rise and is
monitored as follows:
- 3 seconds before closing-water impulse in-
jection, the actual operating current of the
separator is measured and stored.
- 3 seconds after closing-water injection, the
measuring operation is repeated, and the
I value is compared with the previous operat-
ing-current value.
If the value differs from the adjusted bowl-
monitoring offset, a corresponding alarm is
signalled; the separating process is not inter-
rupted.
--·-------· · - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - · -------~~--------------
8555-9000-010/1207
61
Clean oil discharge:
Ail:Cl.oil discharge
Actual: l.4bar
Min: 1.0 Max: 3.0
PT-Key -Fl- 1:16
Fig. 58
Input Function Terminal Setting

Al 0.1 Clean oil discharge 1U212+/13- Min: 1.0 bar
By adjusting Min: 1.0 bar and Max: 3.0 bar, the Max: 3.0 bar
product-discharge signal can be called up if these
values are exceeded.
Actual:
In this line the current pressure in the product dis-
charge is displayed.
PT key: 1:6, 1:10, 1:16
The desired transformer ratio can be selected by ac-
tuating the F1 key several times.
PT2 Transmitter:
AI2:PT2 Transmitter
Actual: l.7bar
Max: Sbar
PT-Key -Fl- 1:10
Fig. 59

Al 0.2 PT2 Transmitter 1X2. Max: 6.0bar
61/63/SC
By adjusting Max: 5.0 bar, an alarm signal can be set
if the value is below or above this setting.
The alarm siqnal depends on the selected process.
Actual:
In this line the current value of the PT2 pressure
transmitter is displayed.
PT key: 1:6, 1:10, 1:16
The desired transformer ratio can be selected by ac-
tuating the F1 key several times.
8555-9000-010/1207
62
PID - temperature control (option):
:~·c
AI3:PID-Controll=---1
1x2.16/77
(Option)
I
Fig. 60

Al 0.3 PIO controller 1X2. 76/77
The control-unit software is provided with a PIO controller which, in combination

with optional hardware components, allows to control the product temperature.
The PID function is selected by actuating the PID key.
Adjustment of the control mode and/or adaptation of the controller to local condi-
tions is described in chapter 3.6.9 "PID Controller".
Temperature monitoring (PT100 signal):
PTlOO Product-Temp.
1X2.78/79 95°C
Min: 60 °C Compens.
Max: 100 °C 7°C
Fig. 61
I input I Function I Terminal

-
j Setting
PT100 Product temperature 1X2.78/79 95 °C (203 °F)
Min: 85 °C (185 °F)
Lowest limit value for
separating temperature
monitoring
I\ n..... , ~. -if\C. or- 1r,ri4 or\
IVldA. I U\J \.J ~LL. I r I
Highest limit value for

separating temperature
monitoring
The control unit has a direct PT100 input in two-line technology.

When the temperature is below the min. separating temperature, a START of
the separating program is impossible. Mind the corresponding note in the dis-
play.
-·------·-------·-----------···---------------------------
8555-9000-01O/i207
63
PIO - temperature control (option):
Temp. registration
Peak: 120°C
Fig. 62
Display Meaning
Temperature regis- The highest temperature occurred is stored for evalua-
tration - peak tion of operating conditions.
3.6.6 Analog outputs (AO)

Process data, e.g. separator current and product temperature, can be forwarded
to a superordinate control system as 4-2 mA (for transmittal an amplifier with
galvanic insulation is provided).
To display the analog outputs perform the following steps.
tuate the F2 key.
Fl-Analog ON 2/6
F2-Analog OFF
F3-Input list
F4-0utput list
Fig. 63
" The individual values can be called

up successively by means of the "ar-
AO.l: Motor current row-down" key.
1X2.93/94/SC 1.9 A " More data can be found in the table
A0.2: Temperature of chapter 2. 7 "Analog in-
1X2. 91/92/SC 3.0 A puts/outputs".
Fig. 64
8555-9000-010/1207
64
3.6.7 Input list

For displaying the digital inputs (DI) perform the following steps .
.. In the "User settings" overview, ac-

tuate the F3 key.
Fl-Analog ON
F2-Analog OFF
F3-Input list
F4-0utput list
Fig. 65

DIO.O:Separator-ON row-down" key.
>0< 1X2.01/02 " More data can be found in the table
DIO.l:Sep.-Fail. of chapter 2.6 "Digital in-
>0< 1X2.03/04 puts/outputs".
Fig. 66
Status Definition:
" 0 = Input signal 24 V DC not available
" 1 =Input signal 24 V DC available
3.6.8 Output list
For displaying the digital outputs (DO) perform the following steps.

tuate the F4 key.
Fl-Analog ON 2/6
F2-Analog OFF
F3-Input list
F4-0utput list
Fig. 67

DOO.O:Product valve row-down" key.
>0< 1X2.41/42 * ~v1ore data can be found in the table
DOO.l:Water valve of chapter 2.6 "Digital in-
>0< 1X2.43/44 puts/outputs".
Fig. 68
Status Definition:
" 0 = Input signal 24 V DC not available
" 1 = Input signal 24 V DC available
8555·9000-010/1207'
65
3.6.9 PID controller

.. In the "User settings" overview, ac-
tuate the F1 key.
Fl-PID-Controller3/6
F2-Time recording
F3-Alarm counter
F4-Alarm memory
Fig. 69

PIO-Controller-Hand down" key.
Valve >Hand < Adjusting the PIO controller:
F2-Key Contr. closed ., Open or close the controller by ac-
F3-Key Contr. open tuating the F2 or F3 key.
the arrow keys.
Fig. 70 " Press the EDIT key.
The LED in the EDIT key lights up .
., Enter the new value by means of the
function keys .
The new value is accepted .
., Select the next value by means of
the arrow keys.
More information on how to adjust the PIO controller is given on the following
pages.
8555-9000-010/1207
66
l ;PID-Controller-Ha!ln
Valve >Hand <
F2-Key Contr. closed
F3-Key Contr. open
Fig. 71
-
Display Meaning
PIO controller - By actuating the PIO controller" key, one of the two op-
Hand/Auto- erating modes of the PIO controller can be selected:
" Hand: Opening of the valve is done via F3, closing
via F2.
" Auto: Automatic control of the valve by the PIO con-
troller, using the preset parameters.
Valve -Hand/Auto- PIO controller status display:
.. Hand: PIO controller in manual operation
" Auto: PIO controller in automatic operation
F2 key The valve is closed while the PIO controller is in manual
-Controller closed- operation.
F3 key The valve is closed while the PIO controller is in auto-
-Controller open- matic operation.
8555-9000-010/1207
67
Setpoint 90°C
Actual 89°C
Kp (P part) 2.00
Fig. 72
Actual
Display Meaning Setpoint
value
Setpoint Entering the desired product
temperature
Actual value Displaying the current product
temperature
Kp (P part) Entering the control mode (pro- 2.00
portional value)
Imm
The control mode (Kp) is factory-set according to general practical experience
and need not be modified under normal conditions.
Adapting the measuring transducer:
AI 0.3PID-controller
1X2. 76/77 89°C
End value: 120 °C
Fig. 73
Actual
value
Al 0.3 PIO con- Current input value of the
troller 1X2. 76/77 PIO controller
End value Setting the end value 120 °C
(248 °F)
In special cases, the 4-20-Ma signal is provided from outside, adaptation to the
local measuring transducer is required.
For this purpose the existing default value is simply overwritten with the desired
value.
8555-9000-010/1207
68
3.6.1 O Time recording

tuate the F2 key.
Fl-PIDcontroller 3/6
F2-Time recording
F3-Alarm counter
F4-Alarm memory
Fig. 74

TRl: WMS Time down" key.
Max in 24h 60min Adjusting the time settings:
Act.in 24h Omin " Select the next value by means of
Recent 24h Omin the arrow keys.
Fig. 75 " Enter the new value by means of the
function keys.
" Press the ENTER key.
the arrow keys.
TRl: WMS Time

Max. in 24h 60min
Act.in 24h Omin
Recent 24h Omin
Fig. 76
Display Meaning
TR1 " During separation the period during which the WMS sensor
detects water is recorded. When TR3 has elapsed the time
recording is reset.
8555-9000-010/1207
69
TR2:Sludge pump time

Max. in 24h 60min
Act.in 24h Omin
Recent 24h Omin
Fig. 77
Display Meaning
TR2 " During separation the running time of the sludge pump is
recorded. When TR3 has elapsed the time recording is re-
set.
TR3: Time Reset

P: 24h
A: 5h
Fig. 78
Display Meaning
TR3 " When the preset "P" time has elapsed, all time records for
TR1 and TR2 are moved to "Last Xh", and the "Act. in Xh"
value is reset.
8555-9000-010/1207
70
3.6.11 Alarm counters

For displaying the operation and alarm signal counters perform the following
steps.

tuate the i'3 key.
Fl-PID-controller3/6
F2-Time recording
F3-Alarm counter
F4-Alarm memory
Fig. 79
.. The individual values can be called

Sep. OP data row-down" key.
OP-hrs: 77h
Ejections 44
Starts 37
Fig. 80
Display Meaning
OP-hrs. Display of the number of operating hours of the sepa-
rator. This number is the basic reference for the re-
quired service operations (see separator manual).
Ejections The number of partial ejections performed is displayed
in this line.
Starts The number of complete start-up cycles performed is
displayed in this line.
WMS/ per. Number of WMS functions for each separation cycle.
On a UNITROL separator with WMS system activated,
(periodic)
the number of water removals for each preset separa-
tion cycle is recorded. In case of a manual separation
stoppage the displayed value is set to zero.
WMS/ tot. Number of WMS functions. On a UNITROL separator
with WMS system activated, the number of water re-
(total)
movals is continuously recorded. The displayed value
cannot be reset.
SMS/ per. Number of SMS functions for each separation cycle.
On a UNITROL separator with SMS system activated,
(periodic)
the number of bowl ejections for each preset separa-
tion cycle is recorded. In case of a manual separation
stoppage the displayed value is set to zero.
SMS/ tot. Number of SMS functions. On a UNITROL separator
with SMS system activated, the number of bowl ejec-
(total)
tions is continuously recorded. The displayed value
cannot be reset.
Water removal time The water valve opening time is continuously record-
ed. The va!ue cannot be reset.
8555·9000-010/1207
71
Display Meaning
Water removal time The water valve opening time is recorded for each
periodic separation interval and is reset when the next ejection
is performed.
PTC-Alarm This alarm is recorded when a switch-off is triggered
by the PCT sensors incorporated in the windings of
the separator motor.
PAL-Alarm This alarm is recorded when the separating process is
cut off by the minimum pressure transmitter installed
in the product discharge line.
PAH-Alarm This alarm is recorded when the separating process is
cut off by the maximum pressure transmitter installed
in the product discharge line
FSH-Alarm This alarm is recorded when the separating process is
cut off by the maximum level switch installed in the
water discharge line (optional, no standard equip-
ment).
LSHH-Alarm LSHH - solids vessel. This alarm is recorded when
the separating process is cut off by the "high/high"
level limit switch installed in the solids vessel.
TSL-Alarm TSL - Product feed temperature. This alarm is record-
ed when the separating process is cut off by the PT
100 temperature sensor installed in the feed line.
TSH-Alarm TSH - Product feed temperature. This alarm is rec-
orded when the separating process is cut off by the PT
100 temperature sensor installed in the feed line.
ISL-Alarm Ejection monitoring. This alarm is recorded when the
ejection program is interrupted because the current
monitoring device responded.
SOLIDS PUMP- Response of the solids-pump motor protection switch
ALARM is recorded.
FEED PUMP Response of the feed-pump motor protection switch is
-ALARM recorded.
Black-outs The number of power failures occurred within the cur-
rent separation program is recorded.
Solids pump counter: The solids pump switch-on intervals of the last 24
recent 24 h hours is recorded.
Water removal alarm The number of continuous water removal cycles
greater than T23 is recorded.
Vibro-1 Alarm Vibration alarm, stage 1
This alarm is recorded when the separating process is
cut off by the (optionally available) vibration sensor in-
stalled on the separator.
Vibro-2 Alarm Vibration alarm, stage 2
This alarm is recorded when the separator is switched
off by the (optionally available) vibration sensor in-
stalled on the separator.
8555-9000-010/1207
72
3.6.12 Alarm memory

On the control unit, fault messages are registered in the alarm memory. Any
change in status (come/over/acknowledged) of a fault message gives a new en-
try in the alarm memory.
Max. 256 entries are memorized. ,A,s soon as the alarm memory cannot take in
more fault messages, the oldest entries are erased automatically.
Precise descriptions of the fault messages can be found in the separate descrip-
tion "Settings and faults".
., In the "User settings" overview, ac-

tuate the F4 key.
Fl-PID controller3/6
F2-Time recording
F3-Alarm counter
F4-Alarm memory
Fig. 81
.. The alarm memory display appears.

- The fault messages are registered
<Fault > K 001/015 in the alarm memory in chronolog-
#009 MOTOR PROTECT. ical order.
on 10.12.02 09:47:48 ., Actuate the up/down arrow buttons.
This is to browse through the alarm
memory .
., Press the ESC key.
Fig. 82 This is to quit the alarm memory.
Legend of the display reading in the example:

Display Meaning
<Fault> A fault message is displayed.
K Status of fault message:
* K = fault message has come
=
" Q fault message was acknowledged
=
" G fault message is over
I 001101s The fault message on display appears in position 1
I (latest signal). The alarm memory contains i 5 fault
messages. 001 to 256 are possible.
·,
#009 MOTOR Fault no. and plain text of fault message.
PROTECT.
on 10.12.02 09:47:48 Date and time at the moment of change in status
(come/acknowledged/over) of the fault message.
..
8555-9000-010/1207
73
3.6.13 Maintenance
tuate the F1 key.
Fl-Maintenance 4/6
F2-Volume
F3-Service Info
F4-Date Time
Fig. 83
.. Press the EDIT key.

Maintenance interval .. Enter the new value by means of the
Setting function keys.
Set: 4000 h • Press the ENTER key.
Actual: 2145 h The new value is accepted.
Fig. 84
Under "Set", a maintenance interval of 4000 h is factory-set as specified in the

separator manual. Under "Actual", the number of separator operating hours is
displayed.
As soon the number of operating hours is reached, a collective alarm is trig-
gered, and a corresponding warning signal is displayed on the screen. The col-
lective alarm does not interrupt the separating program and has to be acknowl-
edged by means of the ENTER key.
For setting the maintenance interval refer to the Instruction Manual of the sepa-
rator installed.
8555-9000-010/1207
74
3.6.14 Volume (option)

For entering data in "Volume info for SMS registration, displacement and filling"
and in "Sensor test", proceed as follows:

tuate the F2 key.
Fl-Maintenance 4/6
F2-Volume
F3-Service Info
F4-Date Time
Fig. 85
Volume info for SMS registration, displacement, and filling:
.. Select the value by means of the ar-

row keys.
Volume until SMS " Press the EDIT key.
Liters The LED in the EDIT key lights up.
Volume displacement ., Enter the new value by means of the
Liters function keys.
Fig. 86
Actual
value
Volume until SMS Depending on the size of the
separator, the value for "Volume
in litres until SMS registration" is
entered here according to the
"Bowl Volume" table (see sepa-
rate description "Settings and
trouble shooting", chapter "Bowl
volume/speed settings").
·-·-·'
Volume Dis- Depending on the size of the
placement separator, the value for "Volume
in litres for displacement" is en-
tered here according to the
"Bowl Volume" table (see sepa-
I rate manual "Parameters and
I ''"'
I.I VUUl'C ~h"Ot;n~"
ohl,..,
VI IV ~h~n+o•
111~ J VI IOt.JLVI "0""''
LJVVVI
I volume/speed settings"). I _J
8555-9000-010/1207
75
Filling water volume

Liters
---->>
Fig. 87
Actual
value
Filling-water vol- Depending on the size of the
ume separator, the value for "Volume
in litres for filling" is entered here
according to the "Bowl Volume"
table (see separate manual "Pa-
rameters and Trouble Shooting",
chapter "Bowl volume/speed
settings").
Sensor check:
.. Select the value by means of the ar-

row keys.
Water impulses for .. Press the EDIT key.
sensor check The LED in the EDIT key lights up.
T60: Start impulse .. Enter the new value by means of the
P: sec A: sec function keys.
• Press the ENTER key.
Fig 88
Actual
Display Meaning Setpoint P
value A
Start impulse After a manual start or when 10.0 s
C4 "Sensor check" has ex-
pired, the filling and displace-
ment water valve is opened for
10 seconds.
8555-9000-010/1207
76
T61: Sensor interval

P: sec A: sec
T62: Sensor impulse
p~ sec
Fig. 89
Actual
Display Meaning Setpoint P
value A
..
Sensor interval Filling (T60) is followed by a 3 3s
seconds' pause via T61.
Sensor impulse When the T61 pause has end- 1s
ed, water is injected via T62
for one second, through the fill-
ing and displacement water
valve.
·-
8555-9000-01O/i207
77
3.6.15 Service information

For displaying the separator data and service addresses perform the following
steps:

tuate the F3 key.
Fl-Maintenance 4/6
F2-Volume
F3-Service Info
F4-Date Time
Fig. 90

Separator ser. no. down" key.
-> 1234-567 <- The serial number and the commis-
Commissioning date sioning date can be adjusted:
-> 17.11.2002 <- " Select the value by means of the ar-
row keys.
Fig. 91 The LED in the EDIT key lights up.
function keys.
" Select the next value or browse the
menus by means of the arrow keys.
Display Meaning
Separator serial no. Entering the serial number of the separator to
be actuated
Commissioning date Entering the date of commissioning
Prog Displaying the current software number
Version Displaying the current software version
Control Unit Part-No. Part number of the control unit
Date Display of the current date
Time Display of the current time
Service Sep. Operating Displaying the number of operating hours
Hours
Operating time of the separator motor
Service addresses Here all the service addresses can be called
one by one.
8555-9000-010/1207
78
3.6.16 Date and time

For calling up date and time proceed as follows:

tuate the F4 key.
r Fl-Mai ntPn<Jn ce 4/6
Volume
Service Info
Date/Time
Fig 92
" Actuate the right/left arrow buttons.

Move the cursor to the desired val-
Change date/time ue.
26. 4. 3 16:13:19 " Press the EDIT key.
"" Adjust the value by means of the
function keys .
., Press the ENTER key.
Fig. 93 The new selection is accepted.
~
The selection is undone by pressing
the ESC key. The current setting is
maintained, and the system jumps
back to the previous menu.
Display Meaning
Date/Time Date and time displays are used to trace alarm sig-
nals accordingly. The date format is language-
dependent.
There is no "leading zero" shown in the display. In
Fig. 93, the year "03" is displayed as "3".
The preset date is memorized for about 6 weeks
when the control unit is switched off.
1
8555-9000-010/1207
79
3.6.17 Separator settings

The preselected separator settings are default factory settings.

tuate the F1 key.
Fl-Sep.Settings 5/6
F2-Contrast
F3-Language
F4-Speed monitoring
Fig. 94
Separator Selection
Fl Key
Model: OSD -6
Fig. 95
Function Conditions
Selecting the separator type =
• F1 OSD-6, OSD-18,
OSD-35, OSD-60,
OSD-80
The control unit is factory-set to the separator type installed; consequently all
corresponding timer settings are loaded automatically. If, for service reasons, al-
location is re-made, the separator type can be selected by actuating the F1 key
several times.
Press the F1 key until the separator type shown in the display changes. To pre-
vent the type from being changed by mistake, selection is delayed by 3 se-
conds.
When exchanging the control unit, the separators of previous OSC, OSB, and
OSA series can be selected as well ..
8555-9000-010/1207
80
Process selection
Fl Key
Op.mode: single -02
l
~ ,. , _,____,___J
Fig. 96
--
Function Conditions
Selecting the separator operating mode " F1 =single -01,
single -02, single -01/36,
single -01/96, single -91
·-·
Actuate the F1 key until the desired operating mode of the separator type is dis-
played. An overview of the separator operating modes can be found in chapter
3.5, Process data overview (Home).
Solids selection
Fl key
MODE: LSHH
Fig. 97
Function Conditions
Selecting a level switch for the solids pump " LSHH, LSHH-LSH, LSHH-
when using Compact Units (CUs9: LSH-LSL,
no solids vessel
Press the F1 key until the desired level switches are shown in the display.
By means of the F1 key the CU function is selected, and the sludge pump is
started automatically when bowl ejection is triggered. In addition, the solids
pump is switched off via timer 40, according to solids tank volume and pump
throughput. The timers have to be adapted to local conditions, if required. Dur-
ing separation, pause-and-impulse cycles are performed which can be modified
by means of the T 41 (pause) and T 40 (operation) keys.
When seiecting LSHH, oniy an aiarrn is produced via the level svvitch.
When selecting LSHH-LSH, the sludge pump is automatically started when bowl
ejection takes place. The pump is also turned on via LSH and stopped via T24.
When selecting LSHH-LSH-LSL, the sludge pump is switched on via LSH and
stopped via LSH when T24 has elapsed.
8555-9000-01011207
81
Sep-off in idle run

Fl Key > OFF <
Sensor Check
F2-Key > OFF <
Fig. 98
Function Conditions
Switch-off of separator in idle run, as soon as a .. F1 =ON/OFF
delay period has elapsed .
.. Actuate the F1 key to activate automatic separator switch-off when running

idle.
When ON is displayed, the separator is turned off with a preceding bowl ejec-
tion, when no switch-over to separation (process) takes place at the end of the
T39 period ..
Idle condition is established when an alarm is given along with feed valve
closing or after start-up. If this condition arises, the corresponding message is
shown in the display, and the alarm system is activated.
By actuating the F1 key again, automatic switch-off of the separator running at
idle is turned off.
Function Conditions
Sensor Check (Option) .. F2 =ON/OFF
On UNITROL separators with activated WMS or SMS sensors, one can check
the WMS transmitter and the pressure switch in the bypass line for proper func-
tion by actuating the F2 key.
When starting the ejection program manually or at the end of the C06 counter
setting, the WMS and SMS sensors are checked for proper signal quality by in-
jecting water. Only when proper functioning is confirmed will the separating pro-
cess be released. In case of malfunction the corresponding alarms will be trig-
gered. The testing period for the WMS and SMS sensors can be preselected by
means of T3.
The sensor check is switched off by actuating the F2 key again.
When activating the sensor check, calculation of the automatic water injection
for displacement and filling is launched as well.
For this purpose, enter the bowl volumes (depending on the separator size) for
the operations "liters up to WMS registration", "liters for displacement" and "li-
ters for filling" from the separate manual "Parameters and troubleshooting" ac-
cording the specified table.
8555-9000-010/1207
82
PSL-Function check
Fl Key > OFF <
Partial ejection:
F2 Key >OFF<
Fig. 99
Function Conditions
PSL function monitoring " F1 =ON/OFF
.. Press the F1 key to activate function monitoring of the pressure transmitter in

the product discharge.
With function monitoring switched on, the pressure transmitter in the ejection
program is checked for 0 status. Faulty permanent signal is thus prevented from
being triggered by a defect on the pressure transmitter.
If this fault arises, the corresponding message is shown in the display, and the
alarm system is activated.
Function monitoring is switched off by actuating the F1 key again.
Function Conditions
Partial ejection program selection ,. F2 =ON/OFF
e Press the F2 key to activate the partial ejection program.

When using OSD separators, partial ejections can be performed if desired, with
the corresponding operating water system. Time-dependent and SMS-
determined bowl ejections are preformed as partial ejections if the current value
on the partial-ejection counter C2 has not returned to zero.
Partial ejections that are launched by means of the "Process stop I start" but-
tons and by zero status of the C2 counter, are generally performed as total ejec-
tions.
The partial ejection program is switched off by actuating the F2 key again.
8555-9000-010/1207
83
Bowl monitoring:
F2 Key >OFF<
Fig. 100
Function Conditions
Bowl monitoring • F2 =ON/OFF
• Press the F2 key to activate separator bowl monitoring.

For bowl monitoring, the cyclical closing-water impulse for the bowl hydraulics is
checked, i.e.: if the closing-water rate is too high, the bowl is opened which
causes the current to rise and/or the bowl speed to fall.
Bowl monitoring is controlled as follows:
- 3 seconds before the closing-water injection impulse, the actual operating
current of the separator is measured and memorized.
- 3 seconds after closing-water injection, the measuring operation is repeat-
ed, and the result is compared with the previously registered current and
speed values.
- If a deviation from the permissible offset value is observed, a corresponding
alarm is triggered.
- The separating process remains uninterrupted.
Bowl monitoring is switched off by actuating the F2 key again.
8555-9000-010/1207
84
Fl-Sep.Settings 5/6
F2-Contrast
F3-Language
F4-Speed monitoring
Fig. 101
.. Actuate the up/down arrow button.

Set the contrast to a value between
Display contrast: Oand15.
- 0 = lowest contrast
Contrast: 6 - 15 = highest contrast
The new selection is accepted.
Fig. 102
m:rm
The selection is undone by pressing
maintained and the system jumps back
to the previous menu.
3.6.19 Language
For language selection proceed as follows:

tuate the F3 key.
Fl-Sep. settings 5/6
II F2-Contrast
F3-Lanauaae
F4-Spe~d ~onitoring
Fig. 103
Selecting a new language:

.. Actuate the up/down arrow button.
Language selection: Browse through the languages.
Current: GER " Press the ENTER key.
New: ENG The new selection is accepted, the
program re-starts.
Fig. 104
8555-9000-010/1207
85
Depending on the program version, five languages are available for selection.
Program version Languages Code

D10-0A1-V1.20* German GER
English ENG
French FRA
Italian ITA
Spanish ESP
* The program version can change due to technical progress.
mml
$ 002 transfer The selection is undone by pressing
maintained and the system jumps back
>Parametrization < to the previous menu.
> running <
Fig. 105
For firmware reasons some system outputs are only available in the languages
of program version D10-0A 1-V1 .20*. If other languages are selected, the output
will be in English.
mml
Following a language selection, the new language is transferred from the Micro
Memory Card (MMD) which takes approx. 3 minutes. During this period, no data
is shown on the display; the selection is accepted only after pressing the
ENTER key, and the program re-starts.
8555-9000-010/1207
86
3.6.20 Speed monitoring (option)

Monitoring of the bowl speed for alarm signalling is pre-set via the min. and
max. values. For adjusting the speed monitoring parameters proceed as follows:

tuate the F4 key.
Fl-Sep. settings 5/6
F2-Contrast
F3-Language
F4-Speed monitoring
Fig. 106
" By actuating the F 1 key, separator

speed monitoring is activat-
Fl-Speed ON/OFF>OFF< ed/deactivated.
Speed max:l2000 rpm " When the min. - max. values are
Speed min:llOOO rpm exceeded, the separator is switched
actual:ll500 rpm off automatically.
Setting the speed monitoring parame-

Fig. 107 ters:
" Select the min. and/or max. value by
'" Enter the new value by means of the
function keys.
8555-9000-010/1207
. ··~ . ··~
87
Offset ejection mon.

270 rpm
Offset bowl monit.
100 rpm
Fig. 108
Function
Offset ejection monitoring
Just before an ejection the bowl speed is read, and the offset value is added.
After bowl ejection within the time setting of timer 27, the speed has to de-
crease by this value.
While in separating mode, launch a total ejection by means of the "Start" key
and observe the ejection speed in the corresponding display. Normally the
ejection speed is lower than the separating speed. Enter the difference be-
tween ejection speed and separating speed as offset value.
Example:
(speed in separating mode: 10,000 rpm - ejection speed: 9,700 rpm) - 10 %
= offset speed: 270 rpm
The ejection monitoring is not operative if 0 rpm has been entered as offset
value. This, however, should be done in exceptional cases only.
Offset bowl monitoring
For bowl monitoring, the cyclical closing-water impulse for the bowl hydraulics
is checked, i.e.: if the closing-water rate is too high, the bowl is opened which
causes the speed to fall and is monitored as follows:
- 3 seconds before closing-water injection impulse, the actual speed of the
separator is measured and memorized.
- 3 seconds after closing-water injection, the measuring operation is repeat-
ed, and the value is compared with the previous speed value.
If the value differs by more than 100 rpm, a corresponding alarm is signalled;
the separating process is not interrupted.
Impules per rev.

2 Imp.
Fig. 109
Function
Impulses per revolution
Number of pulses energizing the bowl sensor per revolution of bowl.
• Set a value between 1 and 10.
8555-9000-010/1207
88
3. 7 Changing the Micro Memory Card (MMC)

The control program and all setting/adjustment data are stored on the remova-
ble Micro Memory Card (MMC). If required, these data can be downloaded, e.g.
when the Micro Memory Card (MMC) is inserted in a new control unit.
The control unit cannot be used without the Micro Memory Card (MMC) or with
a defective card. In this case the message "CPU is in stop" will be displayed.
4 5
Fig. 110
"X7 MMC" port

2 Micro Memory Card (MMC)
Make sure that the power supply unit is switched off prior to changing the Micro
Memory Card (MMC).
'v"v'hen a new Micro MemOi-y Card (MMC) has been inserted, the 010 unit is in
STOP mode when being switched on for the first time.
" Switch the voltage supply off and on again. The 010 will then be in RUN
mode.
The Micro Memory Card (MMC) must not be read out using commercially avail-
able card readers. The program may be destroyed.
Only the control unit purchased from Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH can
read the program content on the MMC, and proper operation can be guaran-
teed.
8555-9000-010/1207
89
3.8 Memory reset
3.8.1 Setting the jumper
Only qualified staff or authorized specialists are allowed to open the control cab-
inet.
Normally the operating modes RUN, STOP, and MRES cannot be changed us-
ing the operating mode selector of the control cabinet. If, however, this is re-
quired for some reason, e.g. to reset the memory, a jumper has to be connected
between the terminals AT1 and AT2 for activating the authorization.
Whenever the operating mode selector switch is pressed, the status of the con-
trol unit is changed.
1
DsF
! DC5V
Process
CJ FRCE STOP
0RUN
[]Stop
L1
M
AT1
At2
Fig. 111
Power supply connector X1

2 Jumper between AT1 and AT2
The RUN key has to be pressed for at least 500 ms to trigger the status change
and to make the key LED light up. The key LEDs do not indicate the operating
status of the control cabinet but the position of the operating-mode keys.
To continue using the unit the jumper has to be removed.
8555-9000-010/1207
90
3.8.2 CPU reset

Under certain circumstances it might be necessary to reset the CPU of the con-
trol unit.
Resetting the CPU means that the CPU is reinitialised. The program currently
stored in the RAM and all data will be overwritten by the content of the Micro
Memory Card (MMC).
[]SP
oocw
QFRCE
(:]RUN
f]St0p
Fig. 112
" Select the operating mode "STOP" by pressing the DOWN key (2):
- the LED "S" lights up,,
- the LED "STOP" lights up,,
.. Select the operating mode MRES by pressing the UP (1) and DOWN (2) keys
simultaneously.
- the LED "M" lights up,,
'" Keep the keys pressed until the status LED "STOP" lights up a second time
and then remains on (after about 3 seconds).
" Then release the keys.
'" You have to press the two keys again within 3 seconds .
.. When the LED "STOP" flashes rapidly (at about 2 Hz), you can release the
keys.
When resetting of the CPU is finished the LED "STOP" stops flashing and
changes into continuous light.
The CPU is now reset, and the program is in STOP mode.
mmm
The steps describe here are only necessary if the user wants to reset the control
unit himself. If the control unit requests to be reset, which is shown by slow
flashing of the "STOP" LED, it will be sufficient to press the UP (1) and DOWN
(2) keys simultaneously in order to start resetting.
8555-9000-010/1207
91
4 Maintenance and servicing
4.1 Accident prevention ............................................................................... 92

4.2 Removing faults ..................................................................................... 93
8555-9000-010/1207
92
4. 1 Accident prevention
Be sure to observe the safety precautions in chapter 1 when carrying out
maintenance and repair work.
To be on the safe side, the most important safety precautions concerning
maintenance and repairs are repeated here.
Before carrying out maintenance and repair work:

" Switch off all electrical appliances via the main
switch,
" Lock the installation to prevent it from being ac-
cidentally switched on.
$7
Fig. 113

Operating, maintaining or repairing the separator, the control system or the sep-
arator plant requires specialized knowledge!
CAUTION!

who
'" have reached a minimum age of 18 years.
'" are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings and train-
ing.
" are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
The operator of the separator, the control system or the separator plant
e is responsible for briefing and training the personnel.
Westfalia Separator offers a an extensive range of training and advanced train-

ing courses. For more in-depth information, please check back with Westfalia
Separator or one of their authorised agencies.
93
.. Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia

Separator.
- safety risks,
- less durability and availability,
If a safety risk occurs when using non-original
Fig. 114 for the responsible persons. In such cases,
ranty claims.
4.2 Removing faults

To remove faults, refer to the separate documentation "Parameters and Trouble
Shooting".
8555-9000-010/1207
94
·----,~·'" ______________ ____________

,, --·----
8555-9000-010/1207
95
5 Installation and connection
5.1 Installation of the control system ........................................................... 96

5.2 Connecting the control system .............................................................. 97
5.3 Centralised control via potential-free contacts ....................................... 98
8555-9000-010/1207
96
5.1 Installation of the control system
General installation instructions

.. Special attention must be paid to the installation guidelines ofWestfalia
Separator.
.. Mount the control system in the vicinity of the separator either on a wall or a
frame.
If you mount the control system on a wall, you must ensure a wall clearance
of approximately 20 mm.
.. Seal the fastening holes on the rear of the control cabinet by putting seals un-
derneath .
., Take into consideration the following criteria when selecting the installation
site:
- Direct sunlight on the display should be avoided if possible to ensure that
the display can be read.
- Heating up of the device by external heat sources should be largely exclud-
ed.
- The control system should not be mounted in moist environments or wet
areas (see also section "Technical data'}
In the case of shipboard operation:

.. Fasten the control system in a way to avoid vibrations.
.. Do not fit the control system in the vicinity of hot pipes .
., Arrange the air discharge from the ventilator and filter so that adequate venti-
lation is assured.
Humidity I dew
If there is a risk that the control system is exposed to dew, the supply voltage
shouid always be switched on to keep the temperature inside the control cabinet
as constant as possible.
If power is supplied via the motor starter, the main switch should remain on.
8555-9000-010/1207
97
Before carrying out work, dis-

connect power to all compo-
tor!

ponents:
standstill.
Fig. 115 " Switch off all electrical appliances
" Lock the installation to prevent it
5.2 Connecting the control system

" Special attention must be paid.to the installation guidelines ofWestfalia
Separator.
" The inputs and outputs are atlocated to the corresponding terminal blocks on
the subplate as specified in the terminal diagrams.
Operating voltages
" Connect the control system only to voltages that are specified on the name-
plate inside the control cabinet.
The standard rating for the control voltage for solenoid valves for operating
water and control air is 24 voe.

The voltage-free contacts of the interface relay carry external voltages if
they are, for example, used as interlocks in pump controls.
The output modules are provided with short-circuit proof transistor outputs.
Installation regulations:
" Lay the signal lines separate from lines with high voltages (e.g. power cables,
motor leads etc.).
" Firmly tighten the cable glands for leading in the cables.
8555-9000-010/1207
98
5.3 Centralised control via potential-free contacts

The integration of local separator control units into the customer's central control
systems requires the communication signals to be discussed when placing the
order.
-1A1 The controi unit can be iinked to a cen-

tralised control system via a hardware
A0.7
signal.
X12_8
A potential-free contact indicating the
A1 collective alarm can be used for cus-
-1 K11 tomer-side evaluation.
A2
-t------24W11 K 114.o
~~------24W11 11•.o
4.6 14
4.6~.-JJ..
152 24
152~ 8555021
Fig. 116 Wiring diagram (example)

99
8555-9000-010/1207
Take the Best • Separate the Rest
Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GrnbH • Werner Habig·Stral>e 1 • D·59302 Oelde (Germany)
0
Phone.: + +49 (0) 25 22/77 ·23 94 •
http://v.J1.Nvv.westfalia-separator.com/. mailto:info@gea-westfalia.de
Take the Best - Separate the Rest
Westfalia Separator Mineraloil Systems GmbH • Werner -Habig-StraBe 1 • D-59302 Oelde (Germany)
Phone.: + +49 (0) 25 22177-23 94 •
http://www.westfalia-separator.com/. mailto:info@gea-westfalia.de
Parts Catalogue
Model: OSE 80-0136-067
Mechanical Separation Technology

GEA Westfalia Separator Systems GmbH
Werner-Habig-Str. 1 - D-59302 Oelde
Tel.: +49 (0)2522 77-0 - Fax: +49 (0) 2522 77-1788
Ws.systems@geagroup.com - www.westfalia-separator.com
Parts Catalogue
Model: OSE 80-0136-067

Werner-Habig-Str. 1 - D-59302 Oelde
Tel.: +49 (0)2522 77-0 - Fax: +49 (0) 2522 77-1788
Spare parts order
This order-specific parts catalogue Only required when ordering spare parts for pump and pump connection
- forms the basis and is decisive for your spare parts order, parts:
- replaces the standard parts list in the manual supplied with the separator. - Model and number of pump see pump nameplate
Use of non-genuine spare parts

Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator.
The information provided must be complete to avoid incorrect
The use of non-genuine spare parts leads to:
deliveries.
- safety risks,
- reduced durability of these parts,
- reduced availability of the separator and Available sets of spare parts
- increased service requirement. The following sets of spare parts are available depending on the
respective technical maintenance intervals:
Set of spare parts "Bowl and Hood" for operation of 1 year or 8000 hours
Set of spare parts "Drive" for operation of 1 year or 8000 hours
If a safety risk occurs when using non-original spare parts, this may Set of spare parts "Drive" for operation of 2 years or 16,000 hours
have legal consequences for the responsible persons.
In such cases, Westfalia Separator accepts no liability or warranty The maintenance schedule (see separator manual) forms the systematic
claims. maintenance basis for the use of these sets of spare parts.
Guide to ordering spare parts Ordering address

A rapid and correct supply of spare parts can only be guaranteed if your Spare parts orders must be sent to
order includes the following details: Westfalia Separator Systems GmbH
- Type see name-plate ASS-Center
- Serial-No. see name-plate Am Neulander Gewerbepark 6
- Designation see order-specific parts catalogue 21079 Hamburg (Germany)
- Part Number see order-specific parts catalogue (see fax form) or the responsible authorized service
company abroad.
Only when ordering spare parts for bowls:

- Bowl S/N: If it differs from the serial number of the ma-
chine,
the bowl serial number is engraved on the
bowl lock ring,
bowl bottom and bowl top.
Faxformular - Fax Form Seite I Page: 1-2
(vor Benutzung kopieren! - Copy before use!)
Zur I for Ersatzteilanfrage Ersatzteilbestellung

D Spare part inquiries D Spare part orders
An/To
Westfalia Separator Systems GmbH
Am Neulander Gewerbepark 6
21079 Hamburg (Germany)
Fax-No: +49 (0) 40 I 7380585
Besteller I Orderer lieferanschrift I Delivery address(falls abweichend I if different)
Firma I Company
Name
Straf3.e, Haus-Nr. I Street, house no.
PLZ, Ort I ZIP, City
Telefon I Phone
Fax
Rechnungsanschrift / Invoice address(falls abweichend I if different)
Firma I Company Gewi.inschte lieferzeit I Desired delivery time:

Name
Straf3.e, Haus-Nr. I Street, house no.
PLZ, Ort I ZIP, City Kommentar I Remarks:
Telefon I Phone
Fax
Ort, Datum I Place, Date Firmenstempel, Unterschrift I Company stamp, Signature

Faxformular • Fax Form Seite I Page: 2-2

WICHTIG! Bei Anfrage oder Bestellung unbedingt angeben (s. Anleitung zur Ersatzteilbestellung):
IMPORTANT! When submitting your inquiry or order, be sure to state (seeguide to ordering spare parts):
WSM-Auftrags-Nr. Maschinen-Nr. Trommel-Fabr.-Nr. Typ I Type

WSM Order No. Serial No. Bowl No. Separator
Kundenauftrags-Nr. Typ I Type

Customer Order No. Pumpe/ Pump
Pos./ltem Bestellnummer I Part-No. Menqe I Qtv. Bezeichnunq I Description

Westfalia Separator AG
PARTS CATALOG
ORDER-NO MACHINE SERIAL-NO PLANT SERIAL-NO.

Main Item 002000 BOWL SERIAL-NO CONVEYOR SCREW SERIAL-NO:
TYPE OSE 80-0136-067 CONTROL CABINET SIN
MATERIAL-NO. Sheet: 5
Explanation
ET-Zeich.-Nr. =Spare part drawing no.
Aufl. in ET-Znr. =Breakdown in the spare part drawing. The respective assembly is shownin more detail in the stated spare part drawing.
POS = Pos. no. of the spare part drawing.
QTY. =Quantity related to the unit of quantity(ME), e.g. 1,00 for 1 piece or 1 set.
ME = Unit of quantity
ST =Piece
MM =Millimeter CM = Centimeter
OM =Decimeter M =Meter
GR =Gram KG =Kilogram
DM3 = Cubic decimeter M3 = Cubic meter
MM2 = Square millimeter CM2 = Square centimeter
DM2 = Square decimeter M2 = Square meter
ETS = Spare part code
1+2 = Part or assembly available.

3+4 = Part or assembly available to a limit extent. Contact manufakturer.
5 = Part or assembly also available as a set
6 = Variant part; stated in another place of the spare parts list.
7 = Part or assembly graphically shown; does not belong to the delivered version
9 = Part or assembly not available in this manufacturing stage.
PARTS CATALOG

Contents
Part-No. Description Sheet SpareP Draw N
2062-9001-000 BETRIEBSANLEITUNG 8
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2062-1100-000 GESTELL VOLLST. 9 2062-4751-000
FRAME, COMPL.
2057-1031-000 BREMSBOLZEN VOLLST. 18 2057-4751-006
BRAKE BOLT, COMPL.
0008-6010-000 HALSLAGERBRUECKE VOLLST. 20 2060-4753-000
NECK BEARING BRIDGE, COMPL.
2062-3429-000 SPINDEL VOLLST. 22 2060-4753-008
SPINDLE, COMPL.
2060-3060-030 SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE 25 2060-4753-007
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
2060-3385-100 FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. 27 2060-4753-006
CENTRIFUGAL CLUTCH, COMPL.
0018-7614-000 MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. 30 2057-4751-009
SOLENOID VALVE ASSEMBLY, COMPL.
2057-1015-000 FUSS VOLLST. 33 2057-4751-013
FOOT, COMPL.
5889-3482-189 DREHSTROMMOTOR 35
THREE-PHASE AC MOTOR
PARTS CATALOG

Contents
Part-No. Description Sheet SpareP Draw N
2060-9928-040 SATZBORDVERSCHRAUBUNGEN 36
SET OF SHIPBOARD SCREW COUPLINGS
2062-8800-000 HAUBE VOLLST. 37 2062-4758-000
HOOD, COMPL.
2062-8828-000 SENSORBLOCK VOLLST. 41 2061-4758-002
SENSOR BLOCK COMPL.
2062-2213-000 GREIFER VOLLST. 43 2062-4752-000
CENTRIPETAL PUMP, COMPL.
2062-6600-500 TROMMEL VOLLST. 45 2062-4756-000
BOWL·, COMPL.
0024-3534-010 KLEBESCHILD 50
ADHESIVE PLATE
PARTS CATALOG

SpareP Draw N Pos Part-No. Description Qty UN ETS AUFLIN ET-

ZEICH.NR.
2062-9001-000 BETRIEBSANLEITUNG 1,000 PC 2
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
PARTS CATAL:::>G
ORDER-NO MACHINE SERIAL-NO 9048-904 PLANT SERIAL-NO.

Main Item 002000 BOWL SERIAL-NO 9048-904 CONVEYOR SCREW SERIAL-NO:
SpareP Draw N Pos Part-No. Description Qty UN ETS AUFUN ET-

ZEICH.NR.
2062-4751-000 2062-1100-000 GESTELL VOLLST. 1,000 PC
FRAME, COMPL.
0010 2060-1001-010 GESTELLUNTERTEIL 1,000 PC 2
LOWER SECTION OF FRAME
0020 2062-1002-010 GESTELLOBERTEIL 1,000 PC 2
UPPER SECTION OF FRAME
0030 0019-7038-400 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE 16,000 PC 2
HEX HEAD SCREW
HEX HEAD SCREW
0040 0000-0006-162 ENTFAELLT 1,000 PC 7
NOT APPLICABLE
0050 0000-0006-162 ENTFAELLT 1,000 PC 7
NOT APPLICABLE
0060 0000-0006-162 ENTFAELLT 4,000 PC 7
NOT APPLICABLE
0070 0019-8910-030 VERSCHLUSSSCHRAUBE 2,000 PC 2
SCREW PLUG
0030 0007-1796-550 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
0090 0001-1457-800 SCHAUGLAS 3,000 PC 2
SIGHT GLASS
01•JO 2060-1038-000 BREMSGEHAEUSE 1,000 PC 2
BRAKE HOUSING
PARTS CATALOG
ORDER-NO MACHINE SERIAL-NO 9048-904 PLANT SERIAL-NO.

Main Item 002000 BOWL SERIAL-NO 9048-904 CONVEYOR SCREW SERIAL-NO:
MATERIAL-NO. Sheet 10

ZEICH.NR.
0110 0006-4354-160 ZYLINDRISCHE DRUCKFEDER 1,000 PC 2
CYLINDRICAL PRESSURE SPRING
0120 2057-1031-000 BREMSBOLZEN VOLLST. 1,000 PC 2057-4751-006
BRAKE SOLT, COMPL.
0130 0021-3525-000 KEGELGRIFF 1,000 PC 2
TAPER ED HANDLE
HEX HEAD SCREW
0150 0008-6010-000 HALSLAGERBRUECKE VOLLST. 1,000 PC 2060-4753-000
0160 0007-2300-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0170 0007-2941-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0180 0011-8090-000 GELENKLAGER 1,000 PC 2
SPHERICAL PLAIN BEARING
0190 0007-2170-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0200 2060-3131-000 LAGERGEHAEUSE 1,000 PC 2
BEARING HOUSING
0210 0026-57 41-300 SCHEIBE 28,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
HEX HEAD SCREW
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
0230 0026-1328-300 FEDER RING 4,000 PC 2
LOCK WASHER
0240 2062-3429-000 SPINDEL VOLLST. 1,000 PC 2060-4753-008
SPINDLE, COMPL.
HEX HEAD SCREW
0260 0026-1330-300 FEDERRING 3,000 PC 2
LOCK WASHER
0270 2060-3060-030 SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE 1,000 PC 2060-4753-007
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
0280 2060-1028-000 ZWISCHENFLANSCH 1,000 PC 2
INTERMEDIATE FLANGE
0290 2062-1089-000 RING 1,000 PC 2
RING
0300 0007-2035-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0310 2062-1066-000 SCHUTZKAPPE 1,000 PC 2
PROTECTIVE CAP
HEX HEAD SCREW
0330 2062-1464-000 ROHRSTUECK 1,000 PC 2
TUBE PIECE
0340 0018-3469-030 VERSCHRAUBUNG 1,000 PC 2
SCREW COUPLING
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
0350 0018-3215-030 STUTZEN 1,000 PC 2
CONNECTOR
0360 0018-7945-000 NIEDERDRUCKSCHLAUCH VOLLST. 1,000 PC 2
LOW PRESSURE HOSE, COMPL.
0370 2062-3266-000 SPINDELKAPPE 1,000 PC 2
SPINDLE CAP
0380 0007-2929-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0390 0018-7614-000 MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. 1,000 PC 2057-4751-009
SOLENOID VALVE ASS EMBLY, COMPL.
0400 0018-6585-710 SCHLAUCH 1,000 PC 2
HOSE
0410 0018-3812-300 SCHLAUCHSCHELLE 2,000 PC 2
HOSE CLIP
0420 0018-0545-260 LANGER BOGEN 1,000 PC 2
LONG BEND
0430 0018-1247-000 ROHRSTUECK 1,000 PC 2
LENGTH OF PIPE
0440 0018-7716-710 SCHLAUCH 1,000 PC 2
HOSE
HOSE CLIP
0460 0018-5168-030 REDUZIERSTUTZEN 1,000 PC 2
REDUCING CONNECTION
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
0470 0018-6620-030 STUTZEN 1,000 PC 2
CONNECTOR
0490 0018-0994-260 STOP FEN 1,000 PC 2
PLUG
0500 0019-667 5-300 SECHSKANTSCHRAUBE 1,000 PC 2
HEX HEAD SCREW
0510 0013-0312-300 SECHSKANTMUTTER 1,000 PC 2
HEXAGON NUT
0520 0005-1735-280 KLEMM EN KASTEN 1,000 PC 2
TERMINAL BOX
0530 0019-2376-030 ZYLINDERSCHRAUBE 2,000 PC 2
ALLEN SCREW
0540 2057-1015-000 FUSS VOLLST. 4,000 PC 2057-4751-013
FOOT, COMPL.
0550 0026-1371-400 SCHEIBE 4,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
HEX HEAD SCREW
0570 0007-3032-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0580 0019-5384-050 RINGSCHRAUBE 4,000 PC 2
EYE SCREW
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
0590 0026-5731-030 SCHEIBE 2,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
SCREW PLUG
0610 0005-1601-700 KABELDURCHFUEHRUNGSTUELLE 1,000 PC 2
CABLE SLEEVE
0620 2062-1145-000 HALTER 1,000 PC 2
HOLDER
0630 0005-0868-000 NAEHERUNGSINITIATOR 1,000 PC 2
PROXIMITY SENSOR
SCREW COUPLING
0650 0005-1720-900 SOCKEL 2,000 PC 2
BASE
ALLEN SCREW
0670 0005-1455-900 KABELBINDER 2,000 PC 2
CABLE TIE
ALLEN SCREW
0690 0024-4310-010 SATZ SCHILDER 1,000 PC
SET OF PLATES
0024-6324-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
PARTS CATALOG

SpareP Draw N Pos Part-No. Description Qty UN ETS AUFUN ET·

ZEICH.NR.
0024-6327-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-6326-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-6426-000 SCHILD 1,000 PC 2
PLATE
0024-6071-000 ABZIEHBILD "PFEIL" 1,000 PC 2
DECAL "ARROW'
0024-6330-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-6329-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-6328-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-6325-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-3500-010 TYPENSCHILD 1,000 PC 2
TYPE PLATE
0000-0006-162 ENTFAELLT 1,000 PC 7
NOT APPLICABLE
0026-1571-300 KERBNAGEL 4,000 PC 2
NOTCHED NAIL
0024-5049-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
0024-5380-000 SCHILD 1,000 PC 2
PLATE
510 560
520--_l 550
530--__.!
570
30
80
420 ~o
430~
45o-$R
440--i
450i
Datum: Zeichnungs-Nr.: Blatt
09.04.2008 2062-4751-000
1 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
2057-4751-006 2057-1031-000 BREMSBOLZEN VOLLST. 1,000 PC
BRAKE BOLT, COM PL.
0010 2057-1039-000 BREMSBOLZEN 1,000 PC 2
BRAKE BOLT
0020 0021-3301-980 BREMSBELAG 1,000 PC 2
BRAKE LINING
0030 0019-2111-400 SENKSCHRAUBE 1,000 PC 2
COUNTERSUNK SCREW
0040 0019-6310-300 GEWINDESTIFT 1,000 PC 2
THREADED PIN
30
20
01.03.2006 2057-4751-006
Blatter
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
2060-4753-000 0008-6010-000 HALSLAGERBRUECKE VOLLST. 1,000 PC
0010 0008-6006-000 HALSLAGERBRUECKE 1,000 PC 2
NECK BEARING BRIDGE
0020 0008-6007-150 HALSLAGERDRUCKRING 1,000 PC 2
NECK BEARING PRESSURE RING
0030 0019-1426-150 GEWINDESTOPFEN 9,000 PC 2
THREADED PLUG
0040 0006-4389-090 SATZ HALSLAGERFEDERN 1,000 PC 2
SET OF NECK BEARING SPRINGS
0050 0026-2225-110 FEDERKOLBEN 9,000 PC 2
SPRING PISTON
0110 0024-6110-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
26.06.02 2060-4753-000
1 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
2060-4 753-008 2062-3429-000 SPINDEL VOLLST. 1,000 PC
SPINDLE, COMPL.
0010 2062-3410-000 SPINDEL 1,000 PC 2
SPINDLE
0020 2060-337 5-000 LAGERDECKEL 1,000 PC 2
BEARING COVER
0030 2060-3375-040 LAGERDECKEL 1,000 PC 2
BEARING COVER
0040 0011-0212-910 ZYLINDERROLLENLAGER 1,000 PC 2
CYLINDRICAL ROLLER BEARING
0050 2060-3419-020 RING 1,000 PC 2
RING
0060 0007-2487-830 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0070 0008-3508-000 KUGELLAGERSCHLUSSRING 1,000 PC 2
BALL BEARING PROTECTION RING
0080 0011-7307-100 SCHRAEGKUGELLAGER 2,000 PC 2
ANGULAR CONT ACT BALL BEARING
0090 0010-8005-010 LAGERHUELSE 1,000 PC
BEARING SLEEVE
0026-2318-400 ZYLINDERSTIFT 1,000 PC 2
CYLINDRICAL PIN
0100 0006-4331-010 TELLERFEDER 8,000 PC 2
CUP SPRING
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
0110 0026-5868-170 SICHERUNGSRING 1,000 PC 2
SECURING RING
12.04.2005 2060-4753- 008
I1 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
2060-4753-007 2060-3060-030 SATZ ANTRIEBSTEILE 1,000 PC
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
0010 2060-3385-100 FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. 1,000 PC 2060-4753-006
HEX HEAD SCREW
0030 0026-2648-300 SCHEIBE 1,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
0040 0026-1330-300 FEDER RING 1,000 PC 2
LOCK WASHER
0050 0021-3381-900 ANTRIEBSRIEMEN 1,000 PC 2
DRIVE BELT
®l----30
I
~40
20
11.03.2005 2060-4753-007
Blatter
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
2060-4753-006 2060-3385-100 FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. 1,000 PC
0010 2060-3365-000 KUPPLUNGSSCHEIBE 1,000 PC 2
CLUTCH PULLEY
0020 0011-6016-680 RILLENKUGELLAGER 3,000 PC 2
GROOVED BALL BEARING
0030 2060-3356-070 DISTANZHUELSE 1,000 PC 2
SPACER SLEEVE
SECURING RING
0050 2060-3483-000 MITNEHMERSCHEIBE MHPA 1,000 PC 2
DRIVER, BALANCED WITH HALF KEY
SECURING RING
0070 2060-3474-010 FLACHRIEMENSCHEIBE 1,000 PC 2
FLAT-BELT PULLEY
ALLEN SCREW
0090 0021-3293-870 KUPPLUNGSKLOTZ 9,000 PC 2
CLUTCH SHOE
0110 2060-3367-000 SCHEIBE 1,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
HEX HEAD SCREW
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
0130 0026-1337-300 FEDERRING 3,000 PC 2
LOCK WASHER
100
50
110
10 02.2005 2060-4753-006
1 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
2057-4751-009 0018-7614-000 MAGNETVENTILBLOCK VOLLST. 1,000 PC
0010 0018-7614-920 DRUCKREGLER 1,000 PC 2
PRESSURE REGULATOR
0020 0018-1763-630 MUFFENKUGELHAHN 1,000 PC
BALL VALVE
0018-1763-280 GRIFF 1,000 PC 2
HANDLE
0030 0001-1572-600 DRUCKMESSGERAET 1,000 PC 2
PRESSURE GAUGE
0040 0018-7614-900 FILTEREINSATZ 1,000 PC 2
FILTER INSERT
0070 0018-6654-010 MAGNETSPULE 2,000 PC 2
SOLENOID
0080 0018-6654-040 GEHAEUSE 2,000 PC 2
HOUSING
0090 0018-594 7-820 MEMBRANE 2,000 PC 2
DIAPHRAGM
0100 0018-7614-930 MAGNETKERN 2,000 PC 2
SOLENOID CORE
0110 0018-5118-040 GERAETESTECKDOSE 2,000 PC 2
COUPLER SOCKET
0130 0018-7614-910 SCHLAUCH 1,000 PC 2
HOSE
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
0140 0018-6654-030 SATZ DICHTUNGEN 1,000 PC 2
SET OF SEALS
ALLEN SCREW
110
110
~150
40
10
Datum:
02.03.07 2057-4751-009
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
2057-4751-013 2057-1015-000 FUSS VOLLST. 4,000 PC
FOOT, COMPL.
0010 2057-1467-000 PLATTE 1,000 PC 2
PLATE
0020 0021-3309-750 MASCHINENFUSS 1,000 PC 2
MACHINE FOOT
HEX HEAD SCREW
HEX HEAD SCREW
0050 0026-1335-300 SCHEIBE 1,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
40
~30
G
20
10
21.02.2008 2057-4751-013
1 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
5889-3482-189 DREHSTROMMOTOR 1,000 PC 2
PARTS CATALOG

SpareP Draw N Pas Part-No. Description Qty UN ETS AUFUN ET-

ZEICH.NR.
2060-9928-040 SATZ BORDVERSCHRAUBUNGEN 1,000 PC
SCREW COUPLING
SCREW COUPLING
SCREW COUPLING
PARTS CATALOG

SpareP Draw N Pas Part-No. Description Qty UN ETS AUFUN ET-

ZEICH.NR.
2062-4758-000 2062-8800-000 HAUBE VOLLST. 1,000 PC
HOOD, COMPL.
0010 2062-8808-000 HAU BE 1,000 PC 2
HOOD
0020 2058-7788-000 BU EGEL 1,000 PC 2
STIRRUP
SECURING RING
0040 0026-0721-090 BOLZEN 1,000 PC 2
BOLT
0050 2062-8828-000 SENSORBLOCK VOLLST. 1,000 PC 2061-4758-002
SENSOR BLOCK COMPL.
0060 0007-2501-830 DICHTRING 3,000 PC 2
GASKET
0080 0018-5956-030 STUTZEN 3,000 PC 2
CONNECTOR
0090 2062-8829-000 SATZ BLENDEN 2,000 PC
SET OF ORIFICE PLATES
2062-84 73-000 BLENDE 1,000 PC 2
LENS COVER
2062-8473-010 BLENDE 1,000 PC 2
LENS COVER
PARTS CATALOG

SpareP Draw N Pos Part-No. Description Qty UN ETS AUFL.IN ET-

ZEICH.NR.
2062-84 73-020 BLENDE 1,000 PC 2
LENS COVER
2062-84 73-030 BLENDE 1,000 PC 2
LENS COVER
2062-8473-040 BLENDE 1,000 PC 2
LENS COVER
2062-84 73-050 BLENDE 1,000 PC 2
LENS COVER
0100 0018-7028-100 WELLROHRSCHLAUCH VOLLST. 2,000 PC
CORRUGATED TUBE, COMPL.
0007-1943-630 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
01'0 0018-6615-000 STUTZEN 1,000 PC 2
CONNECTOR
0120 0019-1611-300 FLACHKOPFSCHRAUBE 2,000 PC 2
PAN HEAD SCREW
0130 2042-2191-000 GRIFFKOERPER GESCHW. 1,000 PC 2
HANDLE CONNECTION PIECE, WELDED
01L0 0007-1944-750 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
0150 2058-8839-000 RUECKSCHLAGVENTIL 1,000 PC 2
NON-RETURN VALVE
0160 0013-1006-600 UEBERWURFMUTTER 1,000 PC 2
COUPLING NUT
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
PRESSURE GAUGE
SCREW PLUG
NON-RETURN VALVE
120 ---i
120
50
----jC>atUm~-rz:eeicic:hh:nungs-Nr.:
------- 29.05.2008
Datum: 2062-4758-000
PARTS CATALOG

Main Item 002000 BOWL SERIAL-NO CONVEYOR SCREW SERJAL-NO:
TYPE OSE 80-0136-067 CONTROL CABlNET SIN
MATERIAL-NO. : Sheet 41

ZEICH.NR.
2061-4758-002 2062-8828-000 SENSORBLOCK VOLLST. 1,000 PC
SENSOR BLOCK COMPL
0010 0018-8133-600 MAGNETVENTIL 2,000 PC
SOLENOID VALVE
0018-5545-830 MEMBRANE 1,000 PC 2
DIAPHRAGM
0007-2987-830 D!CHTRING 3,000 PC 2
GASKET
0020 0005-152 9-300 DRUCKTRANSMITIER 2,000 PC 2
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
0030 0005-1464-030 WASSERDETEKTOR 1,000 PC 1
WATER DETECTOR
0007-1946-750 D!CHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
- ~ 'Z
''eichnungs-Nr.:
------ -----icol3tatunumn::
12.11.2008 2061-4758-002
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
2062-4 752-000 2062-2213-000 GREIFER VOLLST. 1,000 PC
0010 2062-2241-000 GREIFER VOLLST. 1,000 PC 2
0020 0007-1944-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0030 2062-2337-000 STEUERGREIFER 1,000 PC 2
SENSING LIQUID PUMP
0040 0007-3285-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0050 0007-2925-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
27.05.2008 2062-4752-000
Blatter
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
2062-4756-000 2062-6600-500 TROMMEL VOLLST. 1,000 PC
BOWL, COMPL. ·
0005 2062-660 0-508 TROMMEL VOLLST.(VORGEWUCHTET) 1,000 PC 9
BOWL COMPL. (PRE-BALANCED)
0020 2062-6604-000 TROMMELUNTERTEIL VOLLST. 1,000 PC 4
BOWL BOTTOM, COMPL.
0030 0007-3796-760 OICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0040 0004-3273-810 KOLBENFU EHRU NGSRI NG 1,000 PC 2
PISTON GUIDE RING
0050 2063-6698-000 WASSERKAMMERBODEN 1,000 PC 4
WATER CHAMBER BOTTOM
0070 0007-3169-750 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
ALLEN SCREW
0090 2062-6503-000 RINGKOLBEN 1,000 PC 2
ANNULAR PISTON
0100 0007-3751-840 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0110 0007-3795-760 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0120 2062-6426-000 SCHLIESSKAMMERBODEN 1,000 PC 2
CLOSING CHAMBER BOTTOM
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
0130 0007-1732-720 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0140 0007-2692-610 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
0160 0004-1592-810 FUEHRUNGSBAND 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
ALLEN SCREW
0180 2062-6501-000 KOLBENSCHIEBER 1,000 PC 2
SLIDING PISTON
0190 0007-3797-760 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
GASKET
0210 2062-6621-000 VERT EILER 1,000 PC 4
DISTRIBUTOR
0220 2062-6660-500 TELLEREINSATZ VOLLST. 1,000 PC 3
DISC ST ACK, COMPL.
2062-6663-000 TELLER VOLLST. 195,000 PC 2
DISC, COMPL.
2062-6666-000 ABSCHLUSSTELLER 1,000 PC 2
BLIND DISC
0230 2062-6652-000 SCHEIDETELLER 1,000 PC 2
SEPARATING DISC
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
0240 2062-6610-000 TROMMELDECKEL VOLLST. 1,000 PC 3
BOWL TOP, COMPL.
CYLINDRICAL PIN
0250 0007-3750-910 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0260 0007-3353-760 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0270 0007-2080-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0280 2062-6631-000 VERSCHLUSSRING 1,000 PC 4
LOCK RING
0290 0019-6335-400 GEWINDESTIFT 2,000 PC 2
THREADED PIN
0300 0007-2940-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0310 0007-2023-750 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
0320 2178-6642-020 GREIFERKAMMERDECKEL VOLLST. 1,000 PC 2
CENTRIPETAL PUMP CHAMBER COVER,CPL.
0330 2062-6642-000 GREIFERKAMMERDECKEL 1,000 PC 2
CENTRIPETAL PUMP CHAMBER COVER
LOCK RING
PARTS CATALOG


ZEICH.NR.
0350 0019-0966-360 SPINDELSCHRAUBE 1,000 PC 2
SPINDLE SCREW
0360 0007-1941-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0990 0024-6180-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
a:r--340
~--------1
I I I
I· I
I
I
I
I
I ~\__---330
I
I
~----310 I
I
140
I
220 I
I
I
I
I
110 I
I
I
210~
180
I
I
I
-------+- 250 I
I
- - - - ~6~1
29.05.2008 2062-4756-000
1 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG

Main Item d02000 BOWL SERIAL-NO CONVEYOR SCREW SERIAL-NO:

ZEICH.NR.
0024-35,34-010 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
Parts Catalogue
Model: OSE 40-91-067/35

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Werner-Habig-Strasse - D-59302 Oelde
Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 - Fax: +49 2522 77-2488
Ws.production@geagroup.com - www.westfalia-separator.com
Parts Catalogue
Model: OSE 40-91-067/35

GEA Westfalia Separator Group GmbH
Tel.: +49 2522 77-0 - Fax: +49 2522 77-2488
Ws.production@geagroup.com - www.westfalia-separator.com
Spare parts order
This order-specific parts catalogue
- forms the basis and is decisive for your spare parts order, Only required when ordering spare parts for pump and pump connection
- replaces the standard parts list in the manual supplied with the separator. parts:
- Model and number of pump see pump namepiate

The use of non-genuine spare parts leads to: The information provided must be complete to avoid incorrect
- safety risks, deliveries.
- reduced availability of the separator and
If a safety risk occurs when using non-original spare parts, this may
In such cases, Westfalia Separator accepts no liability or warranty
claims.
Guide to ordering spare parts

A rapid and correct supply of spare parts can only be guaranteed if your
order includes the following details:
- Type see name-plate
- Serial-No. see name-plate
- Designation see order-specific parts catalogue
- Part Number see order-specific parts catalogue

- Bowl S/N: If it differs from the serial number of the ma-
chine,
bowl lock ring,
GEA Westfalia Separator GmbH Date: 23.12.2011
PARTS CATALOG

MATERIAL-NO. Page: 3
Explanation
ET-Zeich.-Nr. = Spare part drawing no.
Aufl. in ET-Znr. = Breakdown in the spare part drawing. The respective assembly is shownin more detail in the stated spare part drawing.
QTY. = Quantity related to the unit of quantity(ME), e.g. 1,00 for 1 piece or 1 set.
ST =Piece
MM =Millimeter CM = Centimeter

PARTS CATALOG

Contents
Part-No. Designation Page SparP Drwg N
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
8555-9201-010 EINSTELLWERTE U. BETRIEBSSTOERUNGEN 7
ADJUSTMENT VALUES AND FAULT SIGNALS
2063-1100-000 GESTELL VOLLST. 8 2063-4751-000
FRAME, COMPL.
2057-1031-000 BREMSBOLZEN VOLLST. 15 2057-4751-006
BRAKE BOLT, COM PL.
0008-4510-020 HALSLAGERBRUECKE VOLLST. 17 2057-4753-012
2063-3429-000 SPINDEL VOLLST. 19 2063-4753-000
SPINDLE, COMPL.
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
SOLENOID VALVE ASS EMBLY, COMPL.
2057-1015-000 FUSS VOLLST. 28 2057-4751-013
FOOT, COMPL.
PARTS CATALOG

Contents
9990-0224-175 DREHSTROMMOTOR 30
2063-8800-010 HAUSE VOLLST. 32 2062-4758-001
HOOD, COMPL.
0026-2101-000 HALTERI NG VOLLST. 36 2058-4758-002
HOLDING RING, COMPL.
2063-2213-010 GREIFER VOLLST. 38 2062-4752-000
2063-6600-520 TROMMEL VOLLST. 40 2062-4756-001
BOWL, COMPL.
2063-8829-000 SATZ VENTILE 45
SET OF VALVES
0024-3547-010 KLEBESCHILD 46
ADHESIVE PLATE
0005-1747-000 SCHWINGUNGSAUFNEHMER 47
VIBRATION PICK-UP
PARTS CATALOG

SparP Drwg N Pos Part-No. Designation Qty. ME ETS Expl.in spares drwg.
no.
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
PARTS CATALOG

SparP Drwg N Pas Part-No. Designation Qty. ME ETS Expl.in spares drwg.
no.
8555-9201-010 EINSTELLWERTE U. BETRIEBSSTOERUNGEN 1,000 PC 2
ADJUSTMENT VALUES AND FAULT SIGNALS
PARTS CATALOG

no.
FRAME, COMPL.
HEX HEAD SCREW
HEX HEAD SCREW
SCREW PLUG
0080 0007-1796-550 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
0090 0001-1457-800 SCHAU GLAS 2,000 PC 2
SIGHT GLASS
0100 2057-1038-000 BREMSGEHAEUSE 1,000 PC 2
BRAKE HOUSING
0110 0006-4354-160 ZYLINDRISCHE DRUCKFEDER 1,000 PC 2
CYLINDRICAL PRESSURE SPRING
0120 2057-1031-000 BREMSBOLZEN VOLLST. 1,000 PC 2057-4751-006
BRAKE BOLT, COMPL.
0130 0021-3525-000 KEGELGRIFF 1,000 PC 2
TAPERED HANDLE
PARTS CATALOG

no.
HEX HEAD SCREW
0150 0008-4510-020 HALSLAGERBRUECKE VOLLST. 1,000 PC 2057-4753-012
0160 0007-2643-750 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
0180 0011-8070-000 GELENKLAGER 1,000 PC 2
0190 0007-1958-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0200 2057-3131-000 LAGERGEHAEUSE 1,000 PC 2
BEARING HOUSING
0210 0026-5741-300 SCHEIBE 16,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
HEX HEAD SCREW
0230 0026-1328-300 FED ERRING 7,000 PC 2
LOCK WASHER
SPINDLE, COMPL.
HEX HEAD SCREW
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
PARTS CATALOG

1110.
0290 2062-1089-000 RING 1,000 PC 2
RING
0300 0007-2035-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0310 2062-1066-000 SCHUTZKAPPE 1,000 PC 2
PROTECTIVE CAP
HEX HEAD SCREW
0330 2063-1464-000 ROHRSTUECK 1,000 PC 2
TUBE PIECE
SCREW COUPLING
0350 0018-3215-030 STUTZEN 1,000 PC 2
CONNECTOR
0370 2062-3266-000 SPINDELKAPPE 1,000 PC 2
SPINDLE CAP
0380 0007-2929-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0400 0018-6877-710 SCHLAUCH 1,000 PC 2
HOSE
PARTS CATALOG

no.
HOSE CLIP
0420 0018-6490-710 SCHLAUCH 1,000 PC 2
HOSE
HOSE CLIP
0470 0018-6620-030 STUTZEN 1,000 PC 2
CONNECTOR
0490 0018-0994-260 STOP FEN 1,000 PC 2
PLUG
HEX HEAD SCREW
HEXAGON NUT
0540 2057-1015-000 FUSS VOLLST. 4,000 PC 2057-4751-013
FOOT, COMPL.
0550 0026-1371-400 SCHEIBE 3,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
HEX HEAD SCREW
0570 0007-2638-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0580 0019-5384-050 RINGSCHRAUBE 2,000 PC 2
EYE SCREW
PARTS CATALOG

no.
THREADED PLUG
CABLE SLEEVE
0620 2062-1145-000 HALTER 1,000 PC 2
HOLDER
PROXIMITY SENSOR
SCREW COUPLING
0650 0005-1720-900 SOCKEL 2,000 PC 2
BASE
ALLEN SCREW
0670 0005-1455-900 KABELBINDER 4,000 PC 2
CABLE TIE
ALLEN SCREW
0690 0024-4310-010 SATZ SCHILDER 1,000 PC
SET OF PLATES
0024-6324-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-6327-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
PARTS CATALOG

SparP Drwg N Pos Part-No. Designation Qty. ME ETS Expi.in spares drwg.
no.
0024-6326-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-6426-000 SCHILD 1,000 PC 2
PLATE
DECAL "ARROW"
0024-6330-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-6329-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-6328-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-6325-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-3500-010 TYPENSCHILD 1,000 PC 2
TYPE PLATE
0000-0006-162 ENTFAELLT 1,000 PC 7
NOT APPLICABLE
0026-1571-300 KERBNAGEL 4,000 PC 2
NOTCHED NAIL
0024-6580-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-5380-000 SCHILD 1,000 PC 2
PLATE
510 ~----550
----550
470
i ::
~430
390
02.09.2008 2063-4751-000
Westfalia Separator 1 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG

no.
2057-4751-006 2057-1031-000 BREMSBOLZEN VOLLST. 1,000 PC
BRAKE BOLT, COM PL.
0010 2057-1039-000 BREMSBOLZEN 1,000 PC 2
BRAKE BOLT
0020 0021-3301-980 BREMSBELAG 1,000 PC 2
BRAKE LINING
0030 0019-2111-400 SENKSCHRAUBE 1,000 PC 2
COUNTERSUNK SCREW
0040 0019-6310-300 GEWINDESTIFT 1,000 PC 2
THREADED PIN
30
01.03.2006 2057-4751-006
I 1 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG

Main Item J23000 BOWL SERIAL-NO CONVEYOR SCREW SERIAL-NO:
TYPE ::>SE 40-91-067 CONTROL CABINET SIN
no.
2057-4753-012 0008-4510-020 HALSLAGERBRUECKE VOLLST. 1,000 PC
0010 0008-4506-020 HALSLAGERBRUECKE 1,000 PC 2
NECK BEARING BRIDGE
0020 0008-5007-150 HALSLAGERDRUCKRING 1,000 PC 2
NECK BEARING PRESSURE RING
THREADED PLUG
0040 0006-4377-060 SATZ HALSLAGERFEDERN 1,000 PC 2
SET OF NECK BEARING SPRINGS
0050 0026-1289-110 FEDERKOLBEN 6,000 PC 2
SPRING PISTON
23.04.2009 2057-4753-012
PARTS CATALOG

no.
2063-4753-000 2063-3429-000 SPINDEL VOLLST. 1,000 PC
SPINDLE, COMPL.
0010 2063-3410-000 SPINDEL 1,000 PC 2
SPINDLE
0020 0008-5002-000 HALSLAGERSCHUTZKAPPE 1,000 PC 2
NECK BEARING PROTECTION CAP
0030 0008-5009-050 ABSTANDSRING 1,000 PC 2
SPACING RING
0040 0011-0210-670 ZYLINDERROLLENLAGER 1,000 PC 2
CYLINDRICAL ROLLER BEARING
0050 0026-2499-000 STELLRING 1,000 PC 2
SET COLLAR
0060 0019-8964-400 GEWINDESTIFT 4,000 PC 2
THREADED PIN
ANGULAR CONTACT BALL BEARING
0090 0010-6205-010 LAGERHUELSE VOLLST. 1,000 PC
BEARING SLEEVE, COMPL.
CYLINDRICAL PIN
0100 0026-0314-170 SPANNSTIFT 1,000 PC 2
SPRING DOWEL SLEEVE
10---+
40
50
~
60
70
\ 80
110 ~/
x
\ 80
) 90
Zeichnungs-Nr.: Blatt
04.07.2008 2063-4753-000
1 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG

no.
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
0020 0026-1353-030 SCHEIBE 1,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
HEX HEAD SCREW
DRIVE BELT
®-20
I
30
23.04.2009 2063-4753-001
Westfalia Separator Blatter
PARTS CATALOG

no.
2057-4 753-007 2057-3385-120 FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. 1,000 PC
CLUTCH PULLEY
0030 2057-3356-020 DISTANZHUELSE 1,000 PC 2
SPACER SLEEVE
SECURING RING
SECURING RING
0070 2057-3474-010 FLACHRIEMENSCHEIBE 1,000 PC 2
FLAT-BELT PULLEY
ALLEN SCREW
CLUTCH SHOE
0100 2057-3367-000 SCHEIBE 1,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
SECURING RING
50
100
110
22.02.2005 2057-4 753-007

Blatter
PARTS CATALOG

no.
SOLENOID VALVE ASS EMBLY, COM PL.
0010 0018-7614-920 DRUCKREGLER 1,000 PC 2
PRESSURE REGULATOR
BALL VALVE
0018-1763-280 GRIFF 1,000 PC 2
HANDLE
PRESSURE GAUGE
FILTER INSERT
0070 0018-6654-010 MAGNETSPULE 2,000 PC 2
SOLENOID
0080 0018-6654-040 GEHAEUSE 2,000 PC 2
HOUSING
0090 0018-5947-820 MEMBRANE 2,000 PC 2
DIAPHRAGM
0100 0018-7614-930 MAGNETKERN 2,000 PC 2
SOLENOID CORE
COUPLER SOCKET
0130 0018-7614-910 SCHLAUCH 1,000 PC 2
HOSE
GEA Westfalia Separa:or GmbH Date: 23.12.2011
PARTS CATALOG

no.
SET OF SEALS
ALLEN SCREW
20
110
70
100
70
80
02.03.07 2057-4751-009
1 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG

no.
2057-4751-013 2057-1015-000 FUSS VOLLST. 4,000 PC
FOOT, COMPL.
0010 2057-1467-000 PLATTE 1,000 PC 2
PLATE
MACHINE FOOT
HEX HEAD SCREW
HEX HEAD SCREW
0050 0026-1335-300 SCHEIBE 1,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
21.02.2008 2057-4751-013
1 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG

no.
9990-0224-175 DREHSTROMMOTOR 1,000 PC 2
PARTS CATALOG

no.
SCREW COUPLING
SCREW COUPLING
SCREW COUPLING
0040 0005-4476-630 REDUKTION 1,000 PC 2
REDUCTION
0050 0005-4471-630 REDUKTION 1,000 PC 2
REDUCTION
SCREW COUPLING
PARTS CATALOG

no.
2062-4758-001 2063-8800-010 HAUBE VOLLST. 1,000 PC
HOOD, COMPL.
0010 2063-8808-000 HAU BE 1,000 PC 2
HOOD
0020 0026-2101-000 HALTERI NG VOLLST. 1,000 PC 2058-4758-002
0050 2058-8846-000 VERSCHRAUBUNG M.BLENDE 1,000 PC 2
SCREW COUPLING WITH ORIFICE PLATE
0070 0018-5956-030 STUTZEN 3,000 PC 2
CONNECTOR
0080 2062-8829-000 SATZ BLENDEN 1,000 PC
2062-8473-000 BLENDE 2,000 PC 2
ORIFICE PLATE
2062-8473-010 BLENDE 2,000 PC 2
ORIFICE PLATE
2062-84 73-020 BLENDE 2,000 PC 2
ORIFICE PLATE
2062-84 73-030 BLENDE 2,000 PC 2
ORIFICE PLATE
2062-8473-040 BLENDE 2,000 PC 2
ORIFICE PLATE
PARTS CATALOG

no.
2062-8473-050 BLENDE 2,000 PC 2
ORIFICE PLATE
0007-1943-630 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
0100 0018-6615-000 STUTZEN 1,000 PC 2
CONNECTOR
PAN HEAD SCREW
0130 0007-1944-750 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
NON-RETURN VALVE
COUPLING NUT
PRESSURE GAUGE
0180 0005-1529-300 DRUCKTRANSMITTER 2,000 PC 2
PARTS CATALOG

no.
SCREW PLUG
NON-RETURN VALVE
0210 0018-1593-000 ROHRSTUECK 1,000 PC 2
LENGTH OF PIPE
0220 0005-17 42-808 SCHUTZSCHLAUCH 0,500 M 2
PROTECTIVE HOSE
0230 0005-1539-280 KLEMM EN KASTEN 1,000 PC 2
TERMINAL BOX
ALLEN SCREW
120
90
~170
80~
)~
100----8
60
90
10
23 240
09.09.2008 2062-4758-001
Westfalia Separator
1 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG

no.
2058-4758-002 0026-2101-000 HALTERI NG VOLLST. 1,000 PC
0010 2058-7788-000 BUEGEL 1,000 PC 2
STIRRUP
HEX HEAD SCREW
HEXAGON NUT
10
26.02.2002 2058-4 758-002

Westfalia Separator
Blatter
PARTS CATALJG

no.
2062-4 752-000 2063-2213-010 GREIFER VOLLST. 1,000 PC
0020 0007-1944-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0030 2062-233 7-000 STEUERGREIFER 1,000 PC 2
SENSING LIQUID PUMP
OOLO 0007-3285-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0050 0007-2925-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
50
JllJ------- 40
27.05.2008 2062-4752-000
Blatter
PARTS CATALOG

no.
BOWL, COMPL.
0005 2063-6600-528 TROMMEL VOLLST.(VORGEWUCHTET) 1,000 PC 9
0020 2063-6604-000 TROMMELUNTERTEIL VOLLST. 1,000 PC 4
BOWL BOTTOM, COMPL.
0030 0007-3796-760 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0040 0004-3273-810 KOLBENFUEHRUNGSRING 1,000 PC 2
PISTON GUIDE RING
0070 0007-3169-750 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
ALLEN SCREW
0090 2063-6503-000 RINGKOLBEN 1,000 PC 2
ANNULAR PISTON
0100 0007-3799-840 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0110 0007-3457-790 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
PARTS CATALOG

no.
0130 0007-2827-790 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0140 0007-3216-760 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
GASKET
ALLEN SCREW
SLIDING PISTON
0190 0007-3798-760 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
GASKET
0210 2063-6621-000 VERTEILER 1,000 PC 4
DISTRIBUTOR
0220 2063-6660-500 TELLEREINSATZ VOLLST. 1,000 PC 3
DISC STACK, COMPL.
2063-6663-000 TELLER VOLLST. 135,000 PC 2
DISC, COMPL.
BLIND DISC
SEPARATING DISC
PARTS CATALOG

no.
0240 2063-6610-000 TROMMELDECKEL VOLLST. 1,000 PC 3
BOWL TOP, COMPL.
CYLINDRICAL PIN
0250 0007-3800-910 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0260 0007-2625-830 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0270 0007-2080-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
LOCK RING
0290 0019-6335-400 GEWINDESTIFT 2,000 PC 2
THREADED PIN
0300 0007-2940-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0310 0007-2023-750 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
0325 0007-2825-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
PARTS CATALOG

no.
0335 2063-6691-000 SATZ REGULIERSCHEIBEN 1,000 PC
SET OF REGULATING RINGS
2042-6726-130 REGULIERSCHEIBE 1,000 PC 2
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
LOCK RING
SPINDLE SCREW
0360 0007-1941-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0990 0024-6180-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
CD
~--------,
I I
I· I MO
I
I
I
I
~ 330
I ::-=:1---::::..\---- 325
120 I -~~/ + - - - - 335
I
~r=,,., ' < \ - - - - - - - 310
I
I l~~~'!ff----320
I
220-----, I
I
I
I
I
I
I
20
30.04.2009 2062-4756-001 I
Westfalia Separator
I 1 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG

no.
2063-8829-000 SATZ VENTILE 1,000 PC
SET OF VALVES
0010 0018-6092-600 MANOMETERHAHN 2,000 PC 2
PRESSURE GAUGE COCK
0020 0018-3525-030 ANSCHLUSSSTUTZEN 2,000 PC 2
CONNECTION PIECE
SCREW COUPLING
GEA Westfalia Separetor GmbH Date: 23.12.2011
PARTS CATALOG

SparP Drwg N Pos Part-No. Designation Qty. ME ETS Expi.in spares drwg.
no.
0024-3547-010 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
PARTS CATALOG

no.
0005-17 4 7-000 SCHWINGUNGSAUFNEHMER 1,000 PC 2
VIBRATION PICK-UP
Parts Catalogue
Model: OSE 20-91-067.

Tel.: +49 (0)2522 77-0 - Fax: +49 (0) 2522 77-1788
Parts Catalogu~
Model: OSE 20-91-067.

Tel.: +49 (0)2522 77-0 - Fax: +49 (0) 2522 77-1788
Spare parts order
This order-specific parts catalogue Only required when ordering spare parts for pump and pump connection
- forms the basis and is decisive for your spare parts order, parts:
- replaces the standard parts list in the manual supplied with the separator. - Model and number of pump see pump nameplate

The information provided must be complete to avoid incorrect
The use of non-genuine spare parts leads to:
deliveries.
- safety risks,
- reduced availability of the separator and Available sets of spare parts
- increased service requirement. The following sets of spare parts are available depending on the
respective technical maintenance intervals:
Set of spare parts "Bowl and Hood" for operation of 1 year or 8000 hours
Set of spare parts "Drive" for operation of 1 year or 8000 hours
If a safety risk occurs when using non-original spare parts, this may Set of spare parts "Drive" for operation of 2 years or 16,000 hours
In such cases, Westfalia Separator accepts no liability or warranty The maintenance schedule (see separator manual) forms the systematic
claims. maintenance basis for the use of these sets of spare parts.
Guide to ordering spare parts Ordering address

A rapid and correct supply of spare parts can only be guaranteed if your Spare parts orders must be sent to
order includes the following details: Westfalia Separator Systems GmbH
-Type see name-plate ASS-Center
- Serial-No. see name-plate Am Neulander Gewerbepark 6
- Designation see order-specific parts catalogue 21079 Hamburg (Germany)
- Part Number see order-specific parts catalogue (see fax form) or the responsible authorized service
company abroad.

- Bowl SIN: If it differs from the serial number of the ma-
chine,
bowl lock ring,
(vor Benutzung kopieren! - Copy before usel)

An /To
Westfalia Separator Systems GmbH
Am Neulander Gewerbepark 6
21079 Hamburg (Germany)
Fax-No:+49(0)40/7380585
Besteller I Orderer Lieferanschrift I Delivery address(falls abweichend I if different)
Firma I Company
Name
StraP.,e, Haus-Nr. I Stree:, house no.
PLZ, Ort I ZIP, City
Telefon I Phone
Fax
Rechnungsanschrift / Invoice address(falls abweichend I if different)
Firma I Company Gewunschte Lieferzeit I Desired delivery time:

Name
StraP.,e, Haus-Nr. I Street, house no.
PLZ, Ort I ZIP, City Kommentar I Remarks:
Telefon I Phone
Fax


WICHTIG! Bei Anfrage oder Bestellung unbedingt angeben (s. Anleitung zur Ersatzteilbestellung):
IMPORTANT! When submitting your inquiry or order, be sure to state (seeguide to ordering spare parts):
WSM-Auftrags-Nr. Maschinen-Nr. Trommel·Fabr.-Nr. Typ I Type

WSM Order No. Serial No. Bowl No. Separator
Kundenauftrags-Nr. Typ /Type

Customer Order No. Pumpe/ Pump
Pos./ltem Bestellnummer I Part-No. Menge I Qty. Bezeichnung I Description

PARTS CATALOG

Main Item BOWL SERIAL-NO CONVEYOR SCREW SERIAL-NO:
Explanation
ET-Zeich.-Nr. = Spare part drawing no.
Aufl. in ET-Znr. = Breakdown in the spare part drawing. The respective assembly is shownin more detail in the stated spare part drawing.
QTY. = Quantity related to the unit of quantity(ME), e.g. 1,00 for 1 piece or 1 set.
ST =Piece
1\1'.M =Millimeter CM = Centimeter

PARTS CATALOG

Contents
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2064-1100-000 GESTELL VOLLST. 9 2064-4751-000
FRAME, COMPL.
2058-1015-000 FUSS VOLLST. 16 2058-4751-008
FOOT, COMPL.
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
2064-3429-010 SPINDEL VOLLST. 20 2064-4753-000
SPINDLE, COMPL.
2064-8800-010 HAUSE VOLLST. 28 2064-4758-000
HOOD, COMPL.
0026-2101-000 HALTERING VOLLST. 32 2058-4758-002
PARTS CATALOG

Contents
2058-2213-060 GREIFER VOLLST. 34 2059-4752-000
2064-6600-510 TROMMEL VOLLST. 36 2064-4756-001
BOWL, COMPL.
0024-3553-010 KLEBESCHILD 41
ADHESIVE PLATE
PARTS CATALOG

SparP Drwg N Pos Part-No. Designation Qty. ME ETS Expl.in spares

drwg. no.
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
PARTS CATALOG

TYPE OSE 20-91-067. CONTROL CABINET SIN

drwg. no.
FRAME, COMPL.
0020 0011-8060-000 GELENKLAGER 1,000 PC 2
SECURING RING
0050 0007-1958-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0060 2059-337 5-000 LAGERDECKEL 1,000 PC 2
BEARING COVER
HEX HEAD SCREW
0080 0026-1371-300 SCHEIBE 1,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
HEX HEAD SCREW
HEX HEAD SCREW
0110 0006-4329-010 TELLERFEDER 4,000 PC 2
CUP SPRING
0120 2058-1015-000 FUSS VOLLST. 4,000 PC 2058-4751-008
FOOT, COMPL.
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
HEX HEAD SCREW
0160 0007-3414-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0170 0026-1371-300 SCHEIBE 3,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
0180 0007-2581-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0190 0008-3533-000 ULTRA-BUCHSE 1,000 PC 2
RUBBER-MET AL BUSH
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
PROXIMITY SENSOR
0220 2065-1145-000 HALTER 1,000 PC 2
HOLDER
CABLE SLEEVE
ALLEN SCREW
SCREW COUPLING
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
0270 5889-7828-139 DREHSTROMMOTOR 1,000 PC 2
0290 2057-3367-000 SCHEIBE 1,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
SECURING RING
0310 0026-2407-300 SCHEIBE 1,000 PC 2
WASHER I DISK
HEX HEAD SCREW
THREADED PLUG
0340 0007-2566-600 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0350 2066-1066-000 SCHUTZKAPPE 1,000 PC 2
PROTECTIVE CAP
0360 2058-1089-000 RING 1,000 PC 2
RING
HEX HEAD SCREW
0380 0007-2730-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
0390 2066-3266-000 SPINDELKAPPE 1,000 PC 2
SPINDLE CAP
SCREW COUPLING
0410 2064-1464-000 ROHRSTUECK 1,000 PC 2
LENGTH OF PIPE
0420 0018-3215-030 STUTZEN 1,000 PC 2
CONNECTOR
0460 0018-67 44-710 SCHLAUCH 1,000 PC 2
HOSE
HOSE CLIP
0480 0018-6479-710 SCHLAUCH 1,000 PC 2
HOSE
HOSE CLIP
SCREW PLUG
0510 0007-1796-550 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
0520 0001-1457-800 SCHAU GLAS 2,000 PC 2
SIGHT GLASS
HEX HEAD SCREW
HEXAGON NUT
0550 0018-0992-260 STOP FEN 1,000 PC 2
PLUG
0560 0005-1720-900 SOCKEL 2,000 PC 2
BASE
ALLEN SCREW
0580 0005-1455-900 KABELBINDER 2,000 PC 2
CABLE TIE
0610 0018-6620-030 STUTZEN 1,000 PC 2
CONNECTOR
0620 2058-1061-010 DECKEL 1,000 PC 2
COVER
0630 0024-4382-010 SATZ SCHILDER 1,000 PC
SET OF PLATES
0024-6327-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-6326-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
0024-6426-000 SCHILD 1,000 PC 2
PLATE
DECAL "ARROW"
0024-6330-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-6329-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-6328-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-6325-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-3500-010 TYPENSCHILD 1,000 PC 2
TYPE PLATE
0026-1571-300 KERBNAGEL 4,000 PC 2
NOTCHED NAIL
0024-5049-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
0024-5380-000 SCHILD 1,000 PC 2
PLATE
150
170
290 - -
300
310
320
400
410
y
;
)
490 430
420~t:J
g
.-480
490
~ '®._.
430 440 520
Blatt
2064-4751-000
Westfalia Separator
~380
a ~39o
I ~ 370
- ; - - - - 360
\"--.:.:..---; ,_,__ _ _ 350
)J----340
----70
)}------- 180
41----190
~~----20
)j-------30
----50
k-~~----110
-+-----60
,-------70
----100
2
14.09.2008 2064-4751-000
Westfalia Separator
2 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
2058-4751-008 2058-1015-000 FUSS VOLLST. 4,000 PC
FOOT, COMPL.
0010 2058-1467-000 PLATTE 1,000 PC 2
PLATE
MACHINE FOOT
HEX HEAD SCREW
HEX HEAD SCREW
20
10
e::-A . Sep arator AG

Westfaha
Datum:
21.02.2008
Zeichnungs-Nr.:
2058-4751-008
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
SET OF DRIVE PARTS
SPINDLE, COMPL.
DRIVE BELT
CLUTCH SHOE
\
20
30
Westfalia Separator
12.05.2009 2064-4753-001
Blatter
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
2064-4753-000 2064-3429-010 SPINDEL VOLLST. 1,000 PC
SPINDLE, COMPL.
0010 2064-3410-010 SPINDEL 1,000 PC 2
SPINDLE
0020 2058-3375-000 LAGERDECKEL 1,000 PC 2
BEARING COVER
0030 2058-3375-010 LAGERDECKEL 1,000 PC 2
BEARING COVER
SECURING RING
ANGULAR CONT ACT BALL BEARING
0080 0010-5205-000 LAGERHUELSE 1,000 PC 2
BEARING SLEEVE
20
60
70
70
80
Zeichnungs-Nr.:
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
2059-4753-002 2059-3385-010 FLIEHKRAFTKUPPLUNG VOLLST. 1,000 PC
CLUTCH PULLEY
0030 0026-2501-400 ABSTANDSBUCHSE 1,000 PC 2
DISTANCE SLEEVE
SECURING RING
SECURING RING
'-.
40
10
'-.
'-.
'-.
'-.
'-.
. '-.
'-.
'-.
'-
. '-.
'-.
'-.
'-.
'-.
'-.
05.06.2002 2059-4753-002
Westfalia Separator
I1 Blatter
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
0010 0018-7614-920 DRUCKREGLER 1,000 PC 2
PRESSURE REGULATOR
BALL VALVE
0018-1763-280 GRIFF 1,000 PC 2
HANDLE
PRESSURE GAUGE
FILTER INSERT
0070 0018-6654-010 MAGNETSPULE 2,000 PC 2
SOLENOID
0080 0018-6654-040 GEHAEUSE 2,000 PC 2
HOUSING
0090 0018-5947-820 MEMBRANE 2,000 PC 2
DIAPHRAGM
0100 0018-7614-930 MAGNETKERN 2,000 PC 2
SOLENOID CORE
COUPLER SOCKET
0130 0018-7614-910 SCHLAUCH 1,000 PC 2
HOSE
GEA Westfalia Separator GmbH Date: 16.07.201 O
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
SET OF SEALS
ALLEN SCREW
10
100
80
1Datum:
PARTS CATALOG

SparP Drwg N Pos Part-No. Designation Qty. ME ETS Expi.in spares

drwg. no.
SCREW COUPLING
SCREW COUPLING
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
2064-4 758-000 2064-8800-010 HAUBE VOLLST. 1,000 PC
HOOD, COMPL.
0010 2064-8808-000 HAU BE 1,000 PC 2
HOOD
0020 0026-2101-000 HALTERI NG VOLLST. 1,000 PC 2058-4758-002
0060 0007-1936-750 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
NON-RETURN VALVE
COUPLING NUT
PAN HEAD SCREW
SCREW PLUG
PRESSURE GAUGE
0130 0018-6035-030 STUTZEN 3,000 PC 2
CONNECTOR
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
0140 2065-8829-000 SATZ BLENDEN 1,000 PC
2065-8473-010 BLENDE 2,000 PC 2
LENS COVER
2065-84 73-030 BLENDE 2,000 PC 2
LENS COVER
2065-84 73-050 BLENDE 2,000 PC 2
LENS COVER
2065-8473-070 BLENDE 2,000 PC 2
LENS COVER
2065-84 73-090 BLENDE 2,000 PC 2
LENS COVER
2065-8473-100 BLENDE 1,000 PC 2
LENS COVER
0007-1729-830 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
NON-RETURN VALVE
0170 0018-1566-000 ROHRSTUECK 1,000 PC 2
LENGTH OF PIPE
0180 0018-6652-000 STUTZEN 1,000 PC 2
CONNECTOR
PARTS CATALOG

SparP Drwg N Pas Part-No. Designation Qty. ME ETS Expl.in spares

drwg. no.
0190 0005-1529-300 DRUCKTRANSMITTER 2,000 PC 2
0210 0005-1742-808 SCHUTZSCHLAUCH 1,000 M 2
PROTECTIVE HOSE
0220 2058-8846-000 VERSCHRAUBUNG M.BLENDE 1,000 PC 2
SCREW COUPLING WITH ORIFICE PLATE
90 230
~-·-·- - - -- - -·- -·- -·- - - - -.,
- - -·- - <(~~gg
"
/
/
I
I
I
I
, .1
/
130 ~/
160 ~
170~
~(;)
11.09.2008 2064-4 7 58-000

PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
2058-4 758-002 0026-2101-000 HALTERI NG VOLLST. 1,000 PC
0010 2058-7788-000 BU EGEL 1,000 PC 2
STIRRUP
HEX HEAD SCREW
HEXAGON NUT
30
26.02.2002 2058-4758-002
Westfalia Separator Blatter
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
2059-4752-000 2058-2213-060 GREIFER VOLLST. 1,000 PC
0020 0007-1936-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0030 2168-2337-020 STEUERGREIFER 1,000 PC 2
SENSING LIQUID PUMP
0040 0007-1904-750 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
0050 0007-2925-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0060 2142-2239-000 DISTANZRING 1,000 PC 2
DISTANCE RING
0070 0007-2485-600 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
50
70
~"---- 60
~===~
05.06.2002 2059-4752-000
Blatter
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
BOWL, COMPL.
0005 2064-6600-518 TROMMEL VOLLST.(VORGEWUCHTET) 1,000 PC 9
0020 2064-6601-000 TROMMELUNTERTEIL 1,000 PC 4
BOWL BOTTOM
0030 0007-2385-760 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0040 0004-327 4-810 KOLBENFUEHRUNGSRING 1,000 PC 2
PISTON GUIDE RING
0060 0007-1997-750 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
0070 0007-1987-750 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
ALLEN SCREW
0090 2064-6503-000 RINGKOLBEN 1,000 PC 2
ANNULAR PISTON
0100 0007-3804-840 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0110 0007-3794-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
0130 0007-3794-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0140 0007-2338-720 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0150 0007-2706-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
SLIDING PISTON
0200 0007-3247-760 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0210 2064-6621-000 VERTEILER 1,000 PC 4
DISTRIBUTOR
0220 2064-6660-500 TELLEREINSATZ VOLLST. 1,000 PC 2065-4756-000
DISC STACK, COMPL.
2064-6663-000 TELLER VOLLST. 110,000 PC 2
DISC, COMPL.
BLIND DISC
SEPARATING DISC
0240 2064-6611-000 TROMMELDECKEL 1,000 PC 4
BOWL TOP
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
0250 0007-3803-840 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0260 0007-2739-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0290 0019-6324-400 GEWINDESTIFT 2,000 PC 2
THREADED PIN
0310 0007-1861-750 DICHTRING 2,000 PC 2
GASKET
LOCK RING
SPINDLE SCREW
0360 0007-2393-750 DICHTRING 1,000 PC 2
GASKET
0370 2064-6691-000 SATZ REGULIERSCHEIBEN 1,000 PC
SET OF REGULATING RINGS
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
PARTS CATALOG

SparP Drwg N Pos Part-No. Designation Qty. ME ETS ExpUn spares

drwg. no.
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
REGULATING RING
0990 0024-6180-000 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
,---
80
120
I
70 I
60 I I 250
I 200 I
I I 260
50
I
80 L
- - - - L
Datum: Zeichnungs-Nr.:
Westfalia Separator
07.05.2009 2064-4756-001
1 Blatter
GEA Westfalia Separator GmbH
- Date: 16.07.2010
PARTS CATALOG


drwg. no.
0024-3553-010 KLEBESCHILD 1,000 PC 2
ADHESIVE PLATE
Li.quids to Value
Instruction manual
Designation Mineral oil centrifuge with self-cleaning bowl
Type OSE 80-0136-067
No. 2062-9001-000
Edition 0510
GEA Mechanical Equipment I GEA Westfalia Separator

Instruction manual
Type OSE 80-0136-067
No. 2062-9001-000
Edition 0510

2 2062-9001-000 I 0510
ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

the documentation. They can be addressed to:
GEA Mechanical Equipment

Werner-Habig-Sir. 1, 59302 Oelde (Germany)
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@geagroup.com,www.westfalia-separator.com

2062-9001-000 I 0510 3

59302 Oelde, Germany
Type S/N: " - I_ _ _ _ _ ,
Year of manufacture
1
Max. admissible rated bowl speed in min-
3
Max. admissible density in kg/dm of product
Heavy 3
3 Solids kg/dm \.__ _ _ _____,
liquid kg/dm
3
Min/max throughput m /h
Min/max temp. of product in °C
Min/max housing pressure range in bar

'------~
This nameplate must be filled in by the operator.
Please transfer the data from the centrifuge nameplate.

4 2062-9001-000 I 0510
For your safety

.. Take special care when carrying out operations marked with this
symbol -
• Strictly adhere to instructions marked with this symbol.

This avoids damage to the separator and other equipment.
!1m .. This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-
mation which help to better understand the separator or plant compo-
nents and the processes.
• Observe the accident prevention regulations!

• When operating electrical apparatus, certain parts carry danger-

ous voltage.
measures according to the national provisions (in Germany in accor-
dance with the rules and regulations of the VOE (Verein Deutscher
Elektrotechnik I Association of German Electrical Engineering) or of
• Only qualified or authorized specialized staff may operate, main-

tain and repair the separator.
• Follow the instructions in the manual.

Follow only the instructions given in this manual.
in this manual may not be carried out.
• Operate the separator only in accordance with agreed process


2062-9001-000 I 0510 5
• Maintain the separator

as specified in this manual.
• Carry out safety checks on the separator,

as described in chapter "Safety precautions" in this manual
• Liability for the function of the machine passes to the owner.

than GEA Westfalia Separator service personnel or if the machine is
not applied in accordance with the intended use.
GEA Westfalia Separator shall not be liable for damage which occurs
as a result of non-observance of the above. Warranty and liability con-
ditions in the Conditions of Sale and Delivery of GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator are not extended by the above.

6 2062-9001-000 I 0510
1 sJ
1.1 Correct usage ..... ............................................................... 10
1.3 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 12
1.4 Basic operating principles ...................................................................... 17
1. 5 Operations on the separator .................................................................. 18
1.5.3 Assembly.............................................................................. 19
1.5.5 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 23
1.5.6 Start-up .................................................................................................. 25
1.5.8 Voltage cutoff during operation .............................................................. 28
1.6 Corrosion ............................................................................................... 33
1. 7 Erosion ................................................................................................... 34
1.8 The health hazards involved when handling heavy oils and lube oils ... 36
1.8.1 Code of practice and personal protective measures ............................. 36
/__
2 __M_a_c_h_i_n_e_d_e_s_c_r_i_p_ti_o_n_____________
2.1 Standard dimensioned drawing of the separator ................................... 38

2.2 Section through separator ..................................................................... 40
2.3 General .................................................................................................. 41
2.4 OSE ... -0136-......................................................................................... 41
2.4.1 Separator with water content and sludge space monitoring system
(WMS and SMS) for fuel oil treatment.. ................................................. 42
2.5 Main components of the separator ....................................................... .43
2.5.1 Centripetal pump ................................................................................... 45
2.5.2 Bowl ....................................................................................................... 46
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics ...................................................................................... 47
2.5.4 Drive ....................................................................................................... 50
2.5.5 Solenoid valve block .............................................................................. 51
2.6 Supervisory equipment .......................................................................... 55
2.6.1 Pressuretransmitter ............................................................................... 55
2.6.2 Water detector ....................................................................................... 56
2.6.3 Solenoid valve ....................................................................................... 58
2.6.4 Vibration monitoring (Option) ................................................................. 60
2.6.5 Speed monitoring ................................................................................... 61
2.7 Product feed and discharge lines .......................................................... 62
2.7.1 Throughput monitoring (Product feed line A) ......................................... 62
2.7.2 Determining the throughput (Product feed line A) ................................. 63
2.7.3 Pressure monitoring (Product discharge line B) .. ..................... 64
2.8 Technical data ....................................................................................... 65
Operation ss /
3.1 Technical information ............................................................................ 70
3.1.1 Separating with the unitrolplus system .................................................. 70
3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection .................................................... 70
3.2 Before start-up.... ......................................................... ........ 72

2062-9001-000 I 0510 7
3.2.1 Before the first start-up - after maintenance and repair ........................ 72
3.2.2 Before every start-up ............................................................................. 74
3.3 Starting the separator ............................................................................ 75
3.4 Monitoring of operation .......................................................................... 76
3.5 Setting the separation time .................................................................... 78
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation ....................................................................... 78
3.6 Ejecting the bowl. ................................................................................... 79
3.7 Shutting down the separator .................................................................. 80
3.7.1 Shut-down "Emergency-Off' .................................................................. 82
3.8 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 85
3.8.1 Trouble shooting .................................................................................... 85
3.8.2 Bowl faults .............................................................................................. 87
4 Installation - Maintenance - Repair
4.1 Installation of the separator ................................................................... 94

4.1.1 Separator transport ................................................................................ 96
4.1.2 Installing the separator .......................................................................... 97
4.1.3 Motor ...................................................................................................... 98
4.1.4 Direction of rotation of the bowl ........................................................... 101
4.1.5 Speed and starting time of the bowl .................................................... 102
4.2 Valves and flow indicator ..................................................................... 104
4.2.1 Installing valves ................................................................................... 105
4.3 Maintenance and lubrication ................................................................ 107
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule ......................................................................... 107
4.3.2 Hoses and hose pipes ......................................................................... 114
4.3.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................... 115
4.3.4 Lubrication Chart ................................................................................. 118
4.3.5 Table of lubricating oils ........................................................................ 120
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from GEA Westfalia
Separator ............................................................................................. 121
4.4 B~ ..................................................................................................... 1n
4.4.1 Dismantling the bowl. ........................................................................... 124
4.4.2 Cleaning the bowl ................................................................................ 144
4.4.3 Cleaning the frame .............................................................................. 145
4.4.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system ........... 145
4.4.5 Cleaning the motor .............................................................................. 146
4.4.6 Important instructions for assembling the bowl ................................... 147
4.4.7 Assembling the bowl ............................................................................ 149
4.4.8 Replacing the polyamide gasket (bowl top) ......................................... 164
4.4.10 Reworking the sliding piston ................................................................ 173
4.5 Closing the hood .................................................................................. 174
4.6 Drive ..................................................................................................... 176
4.6.1 Important instructions for fitting and removing the drive ...................... 178
4.6.2 Removing the drive belt and spindle assembly ................................... 180
4.6.3 Dismantling the spindle assembly ....................................................... 185
4.6.4 Removing the centrifugal clutch .......................................................... 187
4.6.5 Fitting the spindle assembly ................................................................ 193
4.6.6 Fitting the centrifugal clutch ................................................................. 196
4.6.7 Replacing the neck bearing springs (neck bearing bridge) ................. 203
4.6.8 Fitting the motor ................................................................................... 206
4.6.9 Replacing the clutch shoes in the separator ........................................ 211
4.7 Height adjustment ................................................................................ 213
4.7.1 Bowl height .......................................................................................... 213
4.7.2 Centripetal pump clearance ................................................................. 215
4.8 Final checks after assembling the separator ....................................... 217
4.9 Before a long-term shut-down of the separator ................................... 217

8 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.9.1 Preserving the separator ....... ....... ..... ........ .......................... ...... .... 2i 7
4.9.2 Preserving the motor ........................................................................... 218
4.10 Storage ................................................................................................ 219
4.10.1 After delivery ....................................................................................... 219
4.10.2 Separator ............................................................................................. 219
4.10.3 Control system ..................................................................................... 219
4.11 Before restarting .................................................................................. 220
4.12 Disposal ............................................................................................... 221
4.12.1 Gear and lubricating oils ...................................................................... 221
4.12.2 Cleaning liquids ................................................................................... 222
4.12.3 Separator ............................................................................................. 222
4.13 Standard tools.............................................. . ................ 224
4.14 Special tools ........................................................................................ 226
5 Spare parts
5.1 Spare part requirements ...................................................................... 230

5.2 Guide to ordering spare parts .............................................................. 230
--------------· - - - - - - - -
2062-9001-000 I 0510 9
1.1 Correct usage ........................................................................................ 10

1.3 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 12
1.5 Operations on the separator .................................................................. 18
1.5.3 Assembly ............................................................................................... 19
1.5.5 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 23
1.5.6 Start-up .................................................................................................. 25
1.6 Corrosion ............................................................................................... 33
1.7 Erosion ................................................................................................... 34

10 2062-9001-000 I 0510
1.1 Correct usage

Centrifugal separators - called separators in short - are used
" for the separation of liquid mixtures which consist of two liquids, with simulta-
neous removal of the solids contained in the liquids.
" for removing (clarifying) solids from a liquid.
The separator is designed

,. for a very high bowl speed.
The admissible bowl speed depends on the chemical and physical properties
of the product:
- Temperature
- Density of the fluid and solid components.
" for products which contain no corrosive and erosive components.
The aggressiveness of the product influences the careful selection of the bowl
material.
Only products conforming to the specifications on the nameplate may be
processed.
" in accordance with the method of application of the separator agreed with
GEA Westfalia Separator. Refer to the data sheet and contractually agree-
ments .
.. in accordance with the admissible utilities (cleaning agents, lubricants, operat-
ing liquids etc.) specified in the documentation or on the data sheet.

" paying attention to the safety precautions, the instruction manual of the sepa-
rator and the safety markings on the separator.
" adhering to the data on the nameplate, e.g. maximum admissible bowl speed.
Further information on the intended use of the separator such as
- agreed areas,
- density of the product
- throughput capacities
- temperatures
- pressures etc.
is given in the documentation or the data sheet furnished with the documenta-
tion.
The contractually agreed conditions agreed with GEA Westfalia Separator on
the intended use of the separator must be passed on to the operating personnel
by the plant operator.

2062-9001-000 I 0510 11

compliant.
The separator may not be operated by:

.. Persons who have not read and understood these basic safety precautions.
.. Persons who have not read and understood the instruction manual of the
separator .
.. Persons who have not been briefed on proper and correct operation.
" Persons who have not been adequately trained.
" Persons who have not reached the minimum age of 18 years.
The separator may not be operated

" when the product fed does not conform to the specifications on the name-
plate.
- Product with excessively high density
- Solids with excessively high density
- Product with excessively high temperature
• when the max. admissible bowl speed has been exceeded through electrical
or electronic manipulation of the drive.
• in an incomplete state of assembly, e.g.
- required supervisory equipment is not activated or has been switched off.
- the required safety and/or protective covers have not been installed.
• by persons who are not adequately trained.
• when the separator is operated with spare parts which do not come from GEA
Non-compliance with intended use can result in severe damage to prop-

erty and persons!

12 2062-9001-000 I 0510
1.3 Safety markings

The safety markings (adhesive and metal plates) are attached to all separators
on the hood and frame of the respective separator in such a way that they are
cieariy visible.
All safety markings on the separator, control system and plant components must
always be in perfect condition .
.. Clean dirty safety markings.
" Replace damaged safety markings.
I 00;". - - Is
2~
~ 2057023
Fig. 1 Example of markings on a separator
1 Pictograms (safety stickers)

2 Oil quality
3 Plates
4 Nameplate
5 Maker's nameplate

2062-9001-000 I 0510 13
1.3.1 Safety markings and their meaning

The following safety markings must be attached to the separator as adhesive
labels.
Niemals Teile losen vor Bei stark en Vibrationen

Stillstand des Separator sofort mtt
Separators gefi.illter Trommel uber
NOT-AUS stoppen.
Do not loosen any part
before the separator has Stop separator with
stopped completely filled bowl immediately
by EMGENCY OFF when
strong vibration occurs.
002454..'!XCO
Fig. 2
Refer to the machine documen-

tation!
" Every person who is assigned the
taining and repairing the machine
must have read and understood the
documentation.
• The documentation must be com-
plete kept near to the machine and
be readily accessible to the opera-
tors. It must be available to the op-
erators at all times!
Fig. 3

14 2062-9001-000 I 0510

tor!

ponents:
.. Make sure the separator is at a
standstill.
.. Lock the installation to prevent it
Danger to life and limb through

rotating machine parts!
.. Do not loosen any part and do not
carry out maintenance or repair
work on the separator before the
separator is at a standstill.
Methods of how to check standstill
are described in the machine docu-
mentation.
S1
Fig. 5
Warning of unusual noises or

vibrations!
When unusual noises or vibrations
occur on the separator:
., Immediately shut down the separa-
tor with filled bowl via "emergency-
off'.
., Evacuate the room .
.. Do not re-enter the room until the
Fig. 6

2062-9001-000 I 0510 15
' Frequency converter operation!
&
.. When setting the frequency con-
verter, do not exceed the admissible
bowl speed (see nameplate)
Fig. 7
~ 0014.MH-OOO
~
This adhesive plate is only used for
frequency converter operation.
Warning of extreme surface

temperatures!
The surfaces of the separator and

plant components can be hot!
~
This adhesive plate is only used for hot
operation.
Fig. 8

Before working on electrical separa-

tor/plant components:
• Switch off all electrical appliances
S5
Fig. 9
CAUTION:
The parts marked in this way can carry voltage even when the main
switch is off!
" Lock the separator/plant to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.
• Take adequate preventive measures according to the national provisions (in
Deutscher Elektriker I Association of German Electrical Engineers) or of the
" The work may only be carried out by competent persons (qualified technical
specialists).

16 2062-9001-000 I 0510

examples:
- With warning text (Voltage is also present .. ),
- with signal word (ATTENTION!) and warning text.
Bei ausgeschal!etem Sous tension meme

Hauptschalter enpositiond'auetde
unter Sp:mnung! l'inhmupteur principal !
Voltagea!sopresent Con<lllnlerruptot
when main
switch is turned off!
principaldesconectadose
encu.entra bajotens16n! is turned off!
CAUTION:
switch is off!
Fig. 10 Example 1
ACHTUNG! Danger through external voltage!

Hauptschalter k6nnen
orangefarbige Leitungen ATTENTION!
ATTENTION!
Also in case of switched off tor orange coloured cores can be un-
can be under voltage. der voltage.
ATTENTION!
est 1\teint les files orange
switch is off!
Fig. 11 Example 2
rm
Orange coloured leads are fitted as standard at GEA Westfalia Separator.

2062-9001-000 I 0510 17

earth.
S6
Fig. 12
1.4 Basic operating principles

Separators are used for the separation of liquid mixtures or for the separation of
solids out of liquids or liquid mixtures.
High centrifugal forces are produced in

the rotating bowl.
S01
Fig. 13
Under the influence of the centrifugal forces, separation of the liquid mixture
and/or ejection of the solids particles takes place most rapidly.
The specifically heavier components are displaced to the bowl periphery, whe-
reas the specifically lighter components are displaced towards the centre of the
bowl.
The high centrifugal force is produced by very high bowl speeds. On the one
hand, high bowl speeds signify high efficiency, while on the other hand, they
signify high material stressing of the separator.

18 2062-9001-000 I 0510
1.5 Operations 011 the separator
The separator works reliably, provided

that it is operated and maintained in
accordance with our operating instruc-
tions.
Fig. 14

" Assembly
" Before start-up
" Start-up
.. Shut-down

Operating, maintaining or repairing the separator or the separator plant requires
specialized knowledge.
CAUTION!
GEA Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by un-

qualified or unauthorized personnel!
who
" have reached a minimum age of 18 years.
" are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings and train-
ing.
• are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
E!ectrica! work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
The operator of the separator or separator plant

GEA Mechanicai Equipment I GEA Westfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 19
GEA Westfalia Separator offers an extensive range of training and advanced

training courses. You can obtain further information from GEA Westfalia Sepa-
rator or from one of the authorized representatives.
.. Use only genuine spare parts from GEA

Westfalia Separator. The original spare parts
are listed in the spare parts catalog.
Westfolia Separator 0 The use of non-genuine parts leads to:
genuineparts - safety risks,
Fig. 15 If a safety risk occurs when using non-original
for the responsible persons. In such cases, GEA
ranty claims.
1.5.3 Assembly
" If the plant has several centrifuges,

be careful not to interchange parts of
different bowls since each bowl has
been balanced individually.
The bowl parts are marked with the
serial-number of the machine or with
the last three digits of the serial-
number.
T2059019
Fig. 16
" Damaged parts must be replaced
00 immediately by new or reconditioned

parts.
'
S8
Fig. 17

20 2062-9001-000 I 0510
CAUTION:
.. Some bowl parts may be pre-
assembled and balanced only by
specialists from GEA Westfalia
Separator or in workshops au-
thorized by Westfalia Separator.
Unqualified balancing can lead to
dangerous operating states (vi-
brations) and destruction of the
separator with danger to life.
S9
Fig. 18
"' To avoid unbalance, when replacing

some bowl parts like
- Lock ring
- Bowl top
- Distributor
- Bowl bottom
- Water chamber bottom
GEA Westfalia Separator must be
consulted.
These parts
- are marked with a footnote in the
separator manual (see section
8555017
"Bowl").
Fig. 19 - are marked in the column "ETS" of
the parts list with a 3 or 4.
" Some bow! parts are arranged in

fixed positions relative to one an-
other.
• Locking devices and alignment
marks must be in perfect condition.
The bowl must otherwise not be op-
erated.
S10
Fig. 20
" When transporting and assembling

machine parts, avoid crushing and
shear strain.
. ...
SAOl
Fig. 21
GEA Mechanical Equipment I GEA Westfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 21
., When assembling the bowl, be sure

to strictly adhere to the assembly in-
structions in order to avoid undue
imbalance .
.. Before starting the bowl, be sure to
fit all parts.
T2044092
Fig. 22
" Tighten the bowl lock ring securely:

the "O" marks on the bowl bottom or
bowl top and on the lock ring must
be in line with each other.
" Pay attention to the position of the
marks!
CAUTION:
A loose lock ring can endanger life!
Fig. 23
.. Tighten the spindle screw with the

separator-specific torque (left-hand
thread).
CAUTION:
A loose spindle screw can endanger
life!
Fig. 24
" Tighten the centripetal pump cham-

ber lock ring or cover securely (left-
hand thread).
CAUTION:
A loose lock ring or cover can en-
danger life!
Fig. 25

22 2062-9001-000 I 0510
@ Carefully fasten hood 1, feed and

discharge housing 2 and centripetal
pump 3.
Fig_ 26
--- S12
" Check if the machine is completely

assembled and properly installed.
Fig_ 27
., Electrical work may only be car-

cian!
appliances and installations .
.. Special attention must be paid to the
installation guidelines of GEA West-
falia Separator .
., The frequency and voltage of the
S32
Pig. 28
" Carry out voltage equalization.

" Observe legal regulations; e.g. in the EU:
·- Low-voltage guideline 2006/95/EC,
- Electromagnetic compatibility 2004/108/EC,

2062-9001-000 I 0510 23
1.5.5 Before start-up
.. Check that the bowl lock ring has

been firmly tightened.
• The "O" marks on bowl bottom or
be aligned.
Fig. 29
• The bowl must rotate in clockwise

direction (see arrow on frame or sol-
ids collector).
+ +
Fig. 30
• The separator may only be operated

with protection devices conforming
to EN 294.
" Equip solid and liquid discharges
accordingly where appropriate.
33
Fig. 31

24 2062-9001-000 I 0510
" Check that the lubrication and cool-

ing systems are serviceable.
Fig. 32
., Check whether the supervisory

·c equipment is operational and the
correct limit values are adjusted.
" When hoods, concentrate collectors
and vessels are pressurized, e.g. by
- inert gas blanketing,
- cooling,
- steam sterilization etc.
the pressures stated on the boiler
plate must not be exceeded.
A205l222
Fig. 33
" Check that the product lines are set

to operation.
" Regularly check hoses for signs of
ageing .
.. Check sight glasses for mechanical
damage.
immediately by new or reconditioned
parts.
Fig. 34
GEA Mechanical Equipment i GEA Westfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 25
1.5.6 Start-up
GEA Weslfalla Separator Systom.'J GmbH

.. Refer to chapter "operation".
593020elde,Ge,many
.. Note nameplate. The values for
Typ IL-_ _ ____,1 Masch.-Nr. IL-_ ___,I
- bowl speed,
Bauiahr I I - density of the heavy liquid,
max zula.ss1ge Trommel-Nenndrehzahl in m1n·
1
JL-_ __,1 - density of the solids (centrifugally
max zulassige Dichte des Aufgabegutes Jn kg/dm
3
IL-_ __,1 dry)
1 Schwere [:==J Feststoffkg/dm
3
1
are maximum values and must not
Flussigkeit kgldm 3 L----' be exceeded.
min /max. Durchsatz mJfh I I
min./max. Temperatur des Aufgabegutes in °C I I
min /max Gehausedruckbereich in bar I I
Fig. 35
.. Wear ear protection.
Fig. 36
In case of frequency converter
A
operation:
• Do not under any circumstances
manipulate the frequency converter
to exceed the permissible bowl
speed (see nameplate).
[~]
with an independent device for
speed limiting .
.
OO?+e4HOOO
Fig. 37

26 2062-9001-000 I 0510
" Do not feed product which is catego-

rised as explosive.
" The separator must not be used in
areas where explosion protection is
required.
Fig. 38
" When processing products harmful

to persons, observe the pertinent
safety regulations.
.. Refer to the safety data sheet of the
product.
.. Use protective gear, e.g.
- Protective clothing
- Eye protection
- Protective mask
Fig. 39

• Immediately shut down the separa-
off' .
.. Never trigger a bowl ejection!
.. Evacuate the room .
separator has come to a standstill.
S2
Fig. 40
Only in case of hot operation:

" Product-contacting parts such as
- pipes and hoses,
- hood,
- solids catcher
reach temperatures over 80 °C
1-t;r- Or\
\I 10 r ).
Fig. 41

2062-9001-000 I 0510 27
.. The bowl is not allowed to run with-

out liquid supply for more than 15 -
30 minutes, as otherwise it would
result in overheating of the bowl ma-
terial.
A2057223
Fig. 42
1.5.7 Shut-down and "Emergency-Off"
" For shut-down of the separator refer

to the chapter "Operation" of this
manual and follow the start-up and
shut-down instructions.
STOP 824
Fig. 43

28 2062-9001-000 I 0510
1.5.8 Voltage cutoff during operation

When the voltage is cut off for longer than one second during operation, the
control system switches off automatically and the separating process is aborted.
Important:
- The bowl is not emptied. Product and solids remain in the bowl.
- The separator motor and product feed pump will be switched off.
- The control system switches itself back on automatically when the power
returns.
After the power returns

" Switch on the separator motor and product feed pump.
A closing water pulse after run-up of the separator triggers a total ejection
automatically.

" Immediately shut down the separa-
off'.
" Evacuate the room .
S2
Fig. 44

2062-9001-000 I 0510 29

Unfavourable operating conditions may require shorter maintenance intervals.
The factors listed below are unfavourable because they either attack the sepa-
rator material directly or impair the lubrication/cooling system:
.. Aggressive product (chemical or physical)
.. High product temperature
.. Product with grease-decaying properties
.. Environment: Temperature, dust, vapours
Particularly high-stressed separator

parts like
- Bowl lock ring,
- bowl bottom,
- bowl top and
- other bowl parts with a large outer
diameter
must be checked regularly to assure
safe and efficient operation.
Fig. 45
Timely maintenance of the separator and replacement of worn or damaged ma-

chine parts is essential for safe operation of the machine.
risks may arise (see section 1.5.2)
:... Carry out the required cleaning thoroughly.

One-sided solid deposits in the bowl cause severe unbalance!
manufacturer.
We, therefore, recommend in your own interest to have your separator in-
spected by our service engineers at regular intervals. These checks help to
maintain the operating safety and avoid unexpected downtime.

30 2062-9001-000 I 0510

ponents:
standstill .
.. Switch off all electrical appliances
"' Lock the installation to prevent it
Fig. 46
" Do not loosen any part and do not

The standstill check is described in
the section "bowl".
Sl
Fig. 47
" Do not climb onto or stand on the

machine or parts of the machine.
" Make provision for and use a sturdy
working platform.
Fig. 48
" Place dismantled machine parts on

a suitable base, e.g. rubber mat.
• Secure machine parts from rolling
away and overturning using suitable
aids!
Fig. 49

2062-9001-000 I 0510 31
" Do not heat bowl parts with the

naked flame .
.. Bowl parts must never be welded.
This also applies for hood and
solids catcher parts of steam-
sterilizable separators.
" Even during cleaning the bowl parts
the temperature must not exceed
100 °C (212 °F).
Fig. 50
.. Load-carrying equipment such as

- lifting devices for bowl or distribu-
tor,
- chains etc.
may only be used for their intended
purpose, i.e. the work routines as
described in this instruction manual.
" Do not use damaged or incomplete
load carrying equipment.
$52
Fig. 51
• All load suspension devices have to be checked for completeness and for
possible damage at least once a year.
" In addition, when using load suspension devices and hoists, the applicable
legislation and safety rules have to be strictly observed.
CAUTION: Danger to life when transporting heavy parts!

• Do NOT step under hanging load.
" Special tools (e.g. compressing, assembly devices, pin spanners) may only
be used for their intended purpose, i.e. the work routines as described in this
instruction manual.
" Before using the standard and special tools supplied, check them for damage
and completeness.
Make sure that
- all moving parts are correctly aligned and not seized.
- that no parts are broken and that there is otherwise no damage which could
affect the operation of the tool.
" Have damaged tools repaired by specialists before using them again.
- Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator. Otherwise, the
safety of the tool can be impaired.
" Keep the tools clean and keep them in a dry, safe place.
Properly maintained and cleaned tools work more precisely and can be
checked better.

32 2062-9001 -000 I 0510
.. Collect dripping oil to prevent danger

of slipping or product infection.
" When handling waste oils note:
- They can be injurious to health,
depending on their chemical com-
position.
- Waste oil must be disposed of in
accordance with local regulations.
Fig. 52

2062-9001-000 I 0510 33
1.6 Corrosion
Corrosion can also affect bowl parts made of stainless steel. This corrosion can
be flat-spread or pit- or crack-shaped and merits special attention.
Corrosion on stainless steel bowl material should be examined thoroughly and
documented.
Flat-spread corrosion can usually be measured (reduction of wall thickness)
Pit- or crack-shaped corrosion cannot be measured without the risk of damage.
At the initial stage pit-shaped corrosion is generally caused by chlorine ions.
Depending on the stressing of the part, pit-shaped corrosion can result in crack-
shaped corrosion.
Possible formation of pit-shaped cor-

rosion.
$35
Fig. 53
Such pittings can only be investigated by a materials expert.
In case of crack-shaped corrosion attack with or without superposed flat-

spread and pit-shaped corrosion on main bowl components, the machine
must be shut down immediately.
Contact your nearest Westfalia Separator representative for a thorough exami-

nation.
Pittings
Pittings which are close together or
form a linear pattern can signify crack
formation beneath the surface.
Such pittings should be investigated by
a materials expert.
Fig. 54

34 2062-9001-000 I 0510
1.7 Erosion
Erosion is caused by solid particles in the process liquid.
These solid particles grind marks into the surfaces with which they come into
contact.
The following factors favour the occurrence of erosion:
"' hard solids particles
"' high throughput capacities
The first signs of erosion should be carefully observed and documented. Ero-
sion can deepen rapidly, thereby weakening the bowl material.

nation. Information on the nature of the damage can be provided by photos,
plaster casts or lead molds.
$40
Fig. 55
The surfaces most susceptible to erosion are:
1) the bottom of the distributor, the rising channels and the ribs,
2) the centripetal pump (cavitation).
3) all surfaces in the area of the solids discharge ports,
4) the nozzles.

2062-9001-000 I 0510 35
Signs of erosion which you should

immediately report to your nearest
Westfalia Separator representative:
.. The bottom of the erosion mark has
radius < 1mm a radius smaller than 1 mm (large
notch effect).
" The depth of erosion mark exceeds
1 mm (0.04 inch) at the deepest
point.
526
Fig. 56

36 2062-9001-000 I 0510
11 8 The health hazards involved when handling heavy oils and lube oils
. As a result of the deterioration in quality of fuel oils, the danger has arisen that the heavy oils used on
board contain greater amounts of substances injurious to health. These include:
- polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons,
- lead compounds,
- chemical residues.
An increased amount of polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons is also present in used lube oils (waste oils).
The health hazards for the engine room staff depend to a large extent
.. on the concentrations of the dangerous substances,
'" the ambient air (inhalation of oil vapours/oil mist),
.. the intensity and duration of the contact with the skin or mucous membrane.
Possible short-term effects:

" headaches,
" dizziness,
.. nausea,
.. itching or burning of the skin,
Possible long-term effects:

., allergic reactions, especially skin allergies,
.. festering inflammation of the skin pores (oil-acne),
.. damage to the central nervous system after inhalation over a long period,
" skin cancer caused by direct skin contact over a long period,
.. Lung cancer or cancer of the digestive organs after inhalation over a long period
(not certain as the causes are difficult to separate from the effects of smoking and alcohol).
1.8.1 Code of practice and personal protective measures
.. Avoid skin contact with heavy oils or lube oils if possible!

- Wear suitable protective gloves.
- Apply a protective ointment to the skin (e.g. ointment no. 76), especially if no protective gloves are
worn!
" Avoid breathing in oil vapours if possible!
" If possible, improve the air circulation in the room!
Fully open the air regulation flaps in the outlets of the air supply ducts in the centrifuge and filter area.
.. Wash affected areas of skin frequently and thoroughly!
Apply protective ointment to the skin!
,. Personal hygiene is of the utmost importance!
" Change dirty overalls regularly!
.. Exercise special care when carrying out maintenance work on and cleaning heavy oil and lube oil cen-
trifuges and filters!
GEA Mechanical Equipment I GEA Westfa!ia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 37
2 Machine description

2.3 General .................................................................................................. 41
2.4 OSE ... -0136-......................................................................................... 41
(WMS and SMS) for fuel oil treatment.. ................................................. 42
2.5 Main components of the separator ........................................................ 43
2.5.2 Bowl ....................................................................................................... 46
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics ...................................................................................... 47
2.5.4 Drive ....................................................................................................... 50
2.6.1 Pressuretransmitter ............................................................................... 55
2.6.2 Water detector ....................................................................................... 56
2.6.3 Solenoid valve ....................................................................................... 58
2.7.3 Pressure monitoring (Product discharge line B) .................................... 64
2.8 Technical data ....................................................................................... 65

38 2062-9001-000 I 0510
2.1 Standard dimensioned drawing of the separator
.. For further information see installation guidelines.
1100
800
Pressure transmitter (product discharge)

Pressure transmitter (self-thinker)
2/2-way solenoid valve (water discharge)
2/2-way solenoid valve (circuit)
Water detector:
Centre of gravit
DN50
(060.3)
The complete Ji>owl can then be
transported via' the adjacent ©Water discharge/operating water discharge
separators of the same type. E8
1
430 ® Filling, displacement and operating water discharge
460 ~
t-----+--~__,__-, ~~I
"
Product discharge
© Water discharge/operating water discharge

Q.,Sol!ds discharge
r-~~-=""'
~ These functional dimensions must be adhered to!

E8 Discharge must not feed into public water system! 2062.4100-000-1
Fig. 57 Note project-specific dimensioned drawing!

2062-9001-000 I 0510 39
Anschlusstabelle ICONNECTIONTABLE
£leschreibung
DN
DESCRIPTIONS
G) Schmulz61 40
siehe Detail Y
DIRTY OIL SEE DETAIL
""'Rein61
40 slehe Detail W
\6J CLEAN OIL EE DETAIL
@ Schlamm-Ablauf 125
Schlauch I Schlauschelle
SLUD_G_E DISCHARGE~--- FLEXIBLE HOSICLHOSE CLIP
@) Wasser-Ablauf 50 Schlauch I Schlauschelle
WATER DISCHARGE FLEXIBLE HOSE I HOSE CLIP
Steuerwasser-Ablauf
OPEARTING-WATER DISCHARGE
euerwasser Aussengewinde
FOll-und Verdrangungswasser 31 MALE
® OPERATING-WATER I
FILLING AND DISPLACEMENT WATER
Connector:
w y
1 :2 1:2
4
®
Product discharge
Discharge via the centripetal pump installed in the separator
2 G) Product feed
839
Filling, displacement and operating® E£> Water discharge
water discharge 5 © Operating water discharge
Solenoid valve block

Filling, displacement and operating
water

212-way solenoid valve (water discharge)
Water detector:
Service side
1650
The foundation must not contact the foundations of other units (e.g. auxiliary diesel en-
gines, pumps) in order to prevent damage to ball bearings.
C:::> These functional dimensions must be adhered to!

EE> 2062-4100-000-2
Discharqe must not feed into public water system!

40 2062-9001-000 I 0510
2.2 Section through separator
~=~=}
, ..r===::::;;.;:i
,.,. ..r______ '
·-----"--
\;,,,,,:;;: :::. "":==:=:=:= ::= """"" ~
't:'~_:'~-·---- ...,._..,..--.,)
I ·- - - -I
I '
1 ____ ·------I
''
, '
,----~-----------------~----,I
I
'
\-----··--··---·-------·......-....--·---- ·-· ------------- --··-- --------_-_..:
l------------------
1----------------
,
'------···----------··
" - - - ·- ··- -- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
--
..... _-_-_-_-.;::.::.::.::. ::.-:.-:. ::. ::. ::. ::. :: ::.

' -----1--,----- '
,
_______ J'
-
-;;_-
-
··-------
-
________
- - - --J
I
l
'
- J_ I
------------------~==- .!
I
'
I ;------------,
- - '
' '
' ' '
'C':~/ ''T ;"'
'-· ILJ JU o
%7//~~ff/7~§mlJY;////7//%
2062·· 1000-000-0136-0196
Fig. 59

2062-9001-000 I 0510 41
2.3 General
The machine described in this manual is a high-speed centrifugal separator with
self-cleaning bowl.
"Separation" means the separation of liquid mixtures which consist of two liq-
uids, with simultaneous removal of the solids contained in the liquids.
"Clarification" is the removal of solids from a liquid.
Prerequisite for treatment technology (separation) is that the components of the
product
- can be separated mechanically,
- have different densities and
- do not emulsify.
2.4 OSE ... -0136-...

The OSE separator ... -0136- ... with unitrolplus-System is equipped with a self-
cleaning disk bowl. It is used for clarification and purification of fuel oil (heavy oil
up to a density of 1.01 g/ml).
The separator with unitrol plus-System has two built-in monitoring functions:
- WMS - (water content monitoring system)
- SMS (sludge space monitoring system)

42 2062-9001-000 I 0510
(WMS and SMS) for fuel oil treatment
The simultaneous water content and sludge space monitoring systems (WMS
and SMS) are used for the continuous purification of fuel oil.
L
Fig. 60
·---- -·--·~--------
Example of monitoring
--- -----· --·- -·-~---·
2058019
1Dirty oil feed 11 Sensing liquid pump

2Clean oil discharge 12 Centripetal pump (clean oil)
3Displacement water 13 Separating disk
4Pressure transmitter (clean oil) 14 Dirty water discharge
5Water detector: 15 Solids holding space
6Pressure transmitter 16 Solids discharge
7Solenoid valve circuit 17 Operating water discharge
~o
8 Solenoid V8!vc Vv'ator discharge IU Operating vvater feed
9 Partial flow 19 Solenoid valve block
10 Control and monitoring device 20 Throttle
The fuel oil is conveyed to the separator via a separate pump.
The dirty oil feed occurs (1) through a closed line system.
The clean oil is discharged (2) under pressure by centripetal pump (12) via the
clean oil discharge.
The bowl is automatically opened and closed for desludging at full bowl speed
by means of a solenoid valve (19) in the operating water line.
The partial flow (9) diverted from the bowl via the separating disk (13) and the
sensing liquid pump (11) is monitored by a water detector (5) and a pressure
transmitter (6).
When the water detector (5) registers water (high capacity), the solenoid valve
(8) opens and the water is discharged through the dirty water outlet (14).
If the high capacity (water) changes due to oil flow (low capacity), the solenoid
valve (8) closes and the solenoid valve (7) opens intermittently. The partial flow
(9) is then recycled into the dirty oil feed (1).
When the sensing liquid inlet becomes blocked with water or solids accumula-
tion in the sludge space (15), the pressure transmitter (6) sends a pulse to the
control unit (1 O and the automatic ejection program is initiated.
The control and monitoring unit (10) ensures unmanned operation.
GEA Mechanical Equipment I GEA Westfalia

2062-9001-000 I 0510 43
2.5 Main components of the separator
Fig. 61
IPos. Designation Function

Handle connection .. connects centripetal pump and hood.
piece ., takes up the filling and displacement water
feed line.
2 Centripetal pump See section 2.5.1

Sensing liquid pump
3 Hood " covers the rotating bowl.

• holds the feed and discharges (see section
2.7).
4 Sensor block • mounted on the hood.

" is replaceable as a unit.
• includes the following parts:
- Pressure transmitter (product discharge
line) (see section 2.6.1:
- Pressure transmitter (unitrolplus-System -
SMS function) (see section 2.6.1)
- 2/2-way solenoid valve (water discharge)
(see section 2.6.3)
- 2/2-way solenoid valve (circulation) (see
section 2.6.3)
- Water detector (unitrolplus-System - SMS
function) (see section 2.6.2)
5 Bowl: See section 2.5.2

Bowl hydraulics See section 2.5.3
6 Frame .. contains the drive parts.

" supports motor, bowl and hood.

44 2062-9001-000 I 0510
lPos. Designation Function

7 Sight glass allows oil-level check.
8 Sight glass for observation of the drive belt.
9 Brake .. The run-down time of the bowl can be short-

ened by applying the brake (e.g. for servicing
and maintenance work). See section 2.8.
Applying the brake

" is not necessary in the case of a normal sepa-
rator shut-down (section 3.7).
" is ineffective if a drive belt is torn, defective or
has come off!
Be sure to observe the run-down time of 200
minutes until dismantling the separator! See
section 3.7.)
10 Solenoid valve block See section 2.5.5
11 Drive See section 2.5.4
12 Motor " accelerates the separator to the required

speed.
" is protected against overload during operation.
GEA Mechanical equipment I GEA Westfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 45
2.5.1 Centripetal pump
T2058081
Fig. 62
Centripetal pump • discharges the purified liquid under pressure.

" is firmly connected to hood 2 of the separator.
.. The disk provided with channels

dips into the liquid rotating with the
bowl.
• The liquid
- is pared off by the centripetal
pump and
- flows through its spiral channels
from the outside to the inside.
By this means the kinetic energy is
converted into pressure energy
which makes possible discharging
the liquid under pressure.
3 Sensing liquid pump • operates on the same principle as centripetal

pump 1.
• conveys the sensing liquid to the monitoring
system.

46 2062-9001-000 I 0510
2.5.2 Bowl
T2058077
Fig. 63
j Pos. Designation Function

Bowl produces high centrifugal forces through rotation
making possible separation and clarification.
2 Distributor accelerates the product fed in through feed A to
the rotational velocity of the bowl and then con-
veys it into the disk stack.
3 Disk stack .. splits the liquid mixture consisting of a light
and heavy phase, e.g. oil-water, into its com-
ponents.
" consists of a large number of conical disks
positioned on top of one another.
Each disk is provided with spacers so that pre-
cisely defined interspaces are formed between
the individual disks.
The smooth disk surfaces facilitate sliding of the
solids and hence self-cleaning of the disks.
Separation chamber The separation space consists of a large number
of parallel chambers of low height. This pro-
duces very small radial sedimentation paths for
the product.
Solids collect on the upper wall of each disk interspace

and slide down into the solids holding space.
4 Solids holding space collects the solids separated in the disk stack.

2062-9001-000 I 0510 47
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics
T2059004
Fig. 64
A Separation - Bowl closed

B Ejection - Bowl open
Operating liquid In the rotating bowl the incoming, rotating oper-

(usually water) ating liquid generates a high centrifugal pres-
sure. This pressure is utilised for actuating the
annular piston and sliding piston which closes
and opens the bowl.
2 Annular piston • is inside the bowl bottom,

• rotates with the same angular velocity as the
other bowl parts,
.. is axially movable.
3 Sliding piston " is located inside the bowl bottom,

other bowl parts,
• is axially movable.

48 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Closing the bowl (separation)
T2059005
Fig. 65

After starting the separator the solenoid valve for operating liquid is actuated
with the aid of the control unit, and the bowl is closed as follows:
Operating liquid .. flows into the injection chamber 4 of bow!

bottom 5 and
'" from there through feed holes into closing
chamber 6.
This initiates closing of the bovvl.
? Annular piston '" moves into closed position.
3 Sliding piston " is raised due to the hydrostatic pressure in

closing chamber 6.
" is pressed against the gasket 7 of bowl top
due to the hydrostatic pressure and
.. closes the bowl.
GEA lviechanicai Equipment I GEA Westfalia

2062-9001-000 I 0510 49
Opening the bowl (ejection)
T2059005
Fig. 66

The solenoid valve for operating liquid is opened with the aid of the control unit,
and the ejection cycle is triggered as follows:
Operating liquid • flows first into injection chamber 4 and

• from there into opening chamber 8.
2 Annular piston • rises and

• empties closing chamber 6.
3 Sliding piston .. moves downwards and

.. opens the ejection ports in bowl bottom 5 for
the separated solids 9.

50 2062-9001-000 I 0510
2.5.4 Drive
L_
I _ _ _ _ _ _ __
Fig. 67
~0 ~"'
j Pos. Designation Function
Drive motor drives the separator.
Power transmission to the bowl spindle is via the
centrifugal clutch to the motor belt pulley and via
the drive belt.
2 Centrifugal clutch " ensures power transmission between motor,

drive belt and spindle.
" accelerates the bowl gradually to rated
speed;
.. is gentle on the drive belt and motor.
Important!
- The driving effect of nevv clutch shoes will
improve after several starts.
Smoking of the centrifugal clutcl·1 during the
first few starts is perfectly normal and will dis-
appear after a short time of operation.
- Wear to the clutch shoes depends on the
number of starts and the ejection frequency
(see section 4.3.1 ).
3 Drive belt transfers the drive power of the drive motor 1 to

the bowl spindle 4.
Regularly check the seat and condition of the
drive belt. The inspection and replacement inter-
vals are given in the maintenance schedule (see
4.3.1).
4 Bowl spindle supports the bowl.
GEA~ ~"~echanica! Equipment I GEA \lVestfaila Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 51
2.5.5 Solenoid valve block

The solenoid valve block for operating, filling and displacement water consists of
two 2/2-way solenoid valves with servo control. They are equipped with a man-
ual override for testing purposes.
10
40
0018-7614-000
Fig. 68
10 Pressure controller 90 Diaphragm

20 Sleeve-type ball valve 100 Magnet core
30 Pressure gauge 110 Coupler socket
40 Filter insert 130 Hose
70 Magnet coil
80 Housing A Manual override
Manual override A
The manual override can only be

actuated with a screwdriver!
1 closed
2 open
Fig 69

52 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Adjusting the pressure setpoint

~ pressure controller 10
If necessary:
'" Correct the pressure setpoint by
turning the setpoint screw 1 Uaw
span 7).
Pressure setpoint correction

.. Open the operating water valve
using the manual override (see Fig.
69).
Pressure setpoint is too low.

" Increase the pressure setpoint.
~ - Turn setpoint screw clockwise.
~~+ \\
f \
( -
0 ) -
Pre.ssure sett,ohoint is too hight. . •
" 0 ecrease e pressure se point.
Turn setpoint screw counter-
clockwise.
~W7~ ./ The adjusted pressure setpoint is indi-

~ t ~ cated on pressure gauge 30.
,,.. 0018-7614-000-1 I .
. . SW =Jaw span
Fig. 70
'
GE::/\ Mechanical Equipment I GEA Westfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 53
Technical data
ATTENTION:
" Note the specifications on the nameplate of the solenoid valve block and
.. the installation guidelines.
Part-No. see parts list

Operating principles 2/2-way solenoid valve
NC
Material: Gasket EPDM
Housing CuZn
Solenoid
Coil size 32 mm
valves:
Nominal diameter
13 mm
(ON)
Operating voltage: 24V DC
Rating 8 W (per solenoid valve)
Coupler socket with built-in electronics,
24 V DC, LED and free-wheeling diode
with fitted cable (1.5 m lonq)
Pressure Medium 0 to 10 bar
Control range 1 to 6 bar
Pressure setpoint 2 bar
with open operating water solenoid
valve
Temperature: Medium -10 to +80 °C (14 -176 °F)
In case of electrical faults
CAUTION: Danger due to electrical current!

• Switch off the main switch and lock it.
" Close the main valve for operating water, filling and displacement water.
CAUTION: Danger of injury through very hot separator parts!

When carrying out maintenance work, there is a danger of injury through hot
separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 °C(158 - 212 °F)).
ATTENTION:
• Refer to the instruction manual and nameplate of the solenoid valve block.
• Direct intervention in the solenoid valve block only by authorised specialists
and with suitable tools!

54 2062-9001-000 I 0510
/ .· ·. ..
Problem···
, :.
' ,,· . / ' , '
Cause Action /
'
Solenoid valve does Control unit is defective. Contact service backup
not function. support.
Wire break in the connect- Replace wire.
ing terminal.
Connecting terminal on the Tighten the screw of the
connector block is loose. connectina terminal.
Bad contact on the con- Clean or replace the con-
necting terminal. tact.
Coupler socket loose. Tighten coupler socket.
Magnet coil defective. Replace the solenoid head.
Diaphragm defective. Replace diaphragm.
GE.A. iviechanicai Equipment I GEA Westfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 55
2.6 Supervisory equipment

The separating process is monitored and controlled by an automatic control unit.
For further details, refer to the control unit manual.
2.6.1 Pressuretransmitter
Pressure transmitters PT1 and PT2

(Pressure Transmitter)
- are included in the standard scope
of supply,
- provide alarm logging PAH (Pres-
sure Alarm High) and PAL (Pres-
sure Alarm Low),
- switch process-specifically in case of
pressure drop or increase,
- can be software-checked for correct
functionality and
can be adjusted to their switching
0005-1529-300
points,
Fig. 71 - are maintenance-free.
The pressure transmitter
- PT1 is installed in the product discharge line.
- PT2 is installed on the Unitrolplus-System.
l~lt@I
Refer to the circuit diagram in the control cabinet and the manual of the control
system.
Setting the switching points

The switching points are set at the factory using appropriate software.
Factory settings
Product discharge line Un itrolplus-System
Pressure transmitter Pressure transmitter
PT1 PT2
PAL PAH PAL
1 2
1.0bar( l 3.0 bar ( l 1.0 bar
(1)
The product discharge pressure on the pressure gauge (separator) must be 0.5 to
1 bar above the switching point.
(2)
1 bar under the switching point.
IMPORTANT:
• Pay special attention to order-specific settings (see operating data sheet in
the order documentation)!

56 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Technical data
Voltage 24 V DC
Range 0-16bar
Output signal 4-20 mA
Pressure connection G 1/4in outer (0-ring seal)
Tightening torque
Pressure connection max. 25 Nm
Connector plug IVI 12 x 1; 5-pole
Cable PUR-2 core, 1 .5 m
Cable box IVI 12 x 1; 5-pole
Pini-, white; Pin4+, black
Enclosure IP 67
Working temperature :
-40 to +125 °C (-40 to +257 °F)
Medium temperature
2.6.2 Water detector
The WMSwater detector (WIVIS sen-

sor)
- is included in the standard equip-
ment,
- is built into the unitrolplus-System,
- monitors the partial flow that is dis-
charged from the bowl via the sepa-
rating disk and the sensing liquid
pump.
- can be checked for functionality
using appropriate software.
0005-1464-030
Fig. 72
l•'@mil
Refer to the terminal connection plan in the control cabinet and the manual of
the control system.

The switching points are preset for the specific area of application (HFL or LO)
at the factory.

2062-9001-000 I 0510 57
Technical data
Switching hysteresis Depending on the process HFO/LO
Ambient temperature -30 to +125 °C (-22 to +257 °F)
(LED: -30 to 100 °C I -22 to 212 °F)
Temperature drift dependent on medium
Enclosure (according to IEC 60529) Terminal strip: IP 54
Probe: IP 68 - 10 bar
Housing material MS
Immersion tube: PTFE
Connector plug Terminals
See terminal allocation
Connection M30x1.5
Jaw span 32
Supply voltage U8 10 to 35 V DC
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
Conformity
accordin!'.] to IEC 60947-5-2)

c::o
JU 2062-9001-000 I 0510
2.6.3 Solenoid valve
The solenoid valve is a 2/2-way diaph-

ragm straight-way valve with internal
piloting.
Main components:
1 Diaphragm
2 Emergency locking manual override
A Operating mode
8 Emergency manual override
Fig. 73
11!/m'W The emergency manual override (2)

- is secured against accidental activation: see operating status (A).
- can be pressed and turned through 90°: see emergency manual override (8).
Technical data
-- -
IPart-No.
~-
see parts list

-· --
Operating principles 2/2-way valve normally closed
Nominal width 3mm
Gasket material FKM
Material Cu Zn
Line connection G-1 /4 sleeve
Voltage 24 v
Kind of current DC (direct current)
Rating 8 \IV
In case of e!ectrica! faults

"' Switch off the main switch and lock it.
.. Close the main valve for operating water, filling and displacement water.

IMPORTANT:
" Refer to the instruction manual and nameplate of the solenoid valve.
" Direct intervention in the solenoid valve may only be done by authorised spe-
cialists and with suitable tools!
GEA. iviechanicai Equipment I GEA Westfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 59
Problem Cause Action

Valve does not Control unit is defective. Contact service backup
function. support.
ing terminal.
connector block is loose. connectinq terminal.
nectinQ terminal. tact.

60 2062-9001-000 I 0510
2.6.4 Vibration monitoring (Option)

The separator is protected against inadmissibly high vibrations by means of an
electronic vibration monitoring system.
0005-4253-0
Fig. 74 Installation example
Vibration pick-up " is installed at the upper part of the frame.

" converts the separator vibrations into electric
signals.
2 Terminal box .. is mounted at the lower part of the frame.
3 Vibration monitoring " is installed in the control cabinet.
............
Ullll " evaluates the signals coming from the vibra-
tion pickup.
The evaluation of the signal - depending on the version - takes place
in the control cabinet, on the control unit or directly on the vibration
pickup.
When the limit value or values are exceeded, an alarm and follow-up
measures are triggered and the separator motor switches off automati-
cally.
The operating status can be read off on the control unit.
ATTENTION!
Pay attention to the following instructions and plans:
" instruction manual of the vibration monitoring system
"' instruction manual of the control unit
" terminal allocation in the terminal diagram of the control cabinet
.. circuit diagram

2062-9001-000 I 0510 61
2.6.5 Speed monitoring

Speed monitoring device
.. displays bowl speed.
Speed deviations of up to 5 % are permissible.
" monitors speed drop as well as excess of speed and starting time.
@i] '~D~ ~
88888888
Hl!~x
BBBBl
2062-3243-
Fig. 75
1 Spindle • rotates and generates speed pulses at prox-

imity switch 2.
2 Proximity switch • transmits the pulses triggered from the spindle

to control unit 3.
ATTENTION!
Align the proximity switch as illustrated.
The distance X between the spindle and the
proximity switch must be 2.5 mm.
3 Control unit • evaluates the speed pulses.

" triggers an alarm if the bowl speed is too low
or too high.
• initiates a shut-down process if the bowl speed
is too low or too high.
" indicates the current bowl speed and
• permits setting of limit values.
ATTENTION!
Pay attention to the terminal allocation in the terminal diagram of the
refer to the instruction manual of the control unit.

62 2062-9001-000 I 0510
2.7 Product feed and discharge lines
By fitting pre-set valves into the prod-

uct feed A and product discharge B
lines (see Section 4.2), the separator
can be adjusted to the conditions and
requirements of the throughput capaci-
ty and line pressure.
Fig. 76
2n 7n1 Throughput monitoring (Product feed line A)

The effective separator throughput capacity is listed on the order-specific oper-
ating data sheet.
The required pre-set valve inner diameters for the various throughput capacities
can be taken from the following table:
Flow indicator - scale: 0 -10

Throughput capacity Pre-set valve inner diameter
[Ith] [mm]
--
3 000 - 5 000 12
5 000 - 8 000 15
8 000 - 11 000 18
11 000 - 15 000 21
15 000- 23 000 24
23 000 - 52 000 No pre-set valve
On Using the 010 Control Unit

., When starting up, use the sticker provided to mark the indicated scale range
on the flow indicator 2 (see Fig. 76).
On Using the E40 Control Unit

The effective throughput capacity is shown on the control unit.
Variations in the throughput capacity between the actual value and setpoint can
be adjusted in the control unit.

2062-9001-000 I 0510 63
2.7.2 Determining the throughput (Product feed line A)
A 012 015 018 021 024

10
r:
c0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334
B ~
Fig. 77 Diagram for determining throughput
A Pre-set valve inner diameter (mm)

B Throughput capacity (x 1000 l/h)
C Scale range of the flow indicator
The diagram can be used to determine the separator throughput capacity (add-
ed feed per time unit).
Procedure:
• Read the scale value at the flow indicator (see Fig. 76):
e.g. 3
" Proceed horizontally with the scale value (e.g. 3) to the curve of the fitted pre-
set valve diameter A (e.g. 0 18).
• Vertically read off the throughput capacity B:
e.g. 10 (= 1O 000 l/h)
The accuracy of the determined throughput depends on the following properties

of the feed:
- Viscosity
- Temperature
- Density
The stipulated properties can result in variations in determining the throughput
capacity.

64 2062-9001-000 I 0510
2.7.3 Pressure monitoring (Product discharge line B)

The product discharge line pressure is shown on the pressure gauge 1 (see Fig.
76) .
.. Note the factory settings of the switching points (see Section 2.6.1 ).
Pressure gauge - measuring range: 0 - 10 bar

[Ith] [mm]
3 000 - 5 000 10
--··-··--~~··-------
5 000- 7 500 12
7 500 -12 000 15
12 000 - 17 000 18
17 000 - 24 000 21
24 000 - 32 000 24
GEA Mechanical Equipment I GEA Westfa!ia

2062-9001-000 I 0510 65
2.8 Technical data

The order-specific process data are given on the operating data sheet in-
cluded in the documentation.
Bowl
3
Solids holding space (total) 11 dm
1
Speed 6 800 min-
- for densities of the product up to
3 (see name-plate)
1.01 kg/dm (at 15 °C) and
- for densities of the separated solids up to
1.4 kq/dm 3
Speed for higher densities contact the factory
Starting time 6-10 min

Run-down time
120 min
(without braking, with drive belts)
Run-down time (with braking) approx. 20 min
Run-down time (without drive belts, i.e. in
the case of torn, jumped off or defective drive 200 min
belt)
Centripetal pump
Output (depending on medium) max. 37 500 l/h
Pressure head 2 - 3 bar
Operating water
Qty. min. 3 000 l/h
Pressure (with open valve) 2-3 bar
Standard operating water specification
Suspended matter max. 10 mg/I
Particle size max. 50 µm
Hardness:
- up to 55 °C separating temperature < 12° dH
- above 55 °C separating temperature < 6° dH
To convert the hardness values stated use the following equation:
1°dH = 1.79°fH = 1.25°eH = 17.9ppmCaC03
Chlorine ions < 100 mg/I
pH 6.5- 7.5

66 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Normal separating temperature of the product
DO 20°C (68 °F)
MDO 40°C (104 °F)

----~---•~'-·~w~~>•-
LO 90°C (194 °F)
LOHD 95 °C (203 °F)
HFO 98 °C (208 °F)

Due to the large number of products to be treated, it is not possible
to specify an exact separating temperature of the product in this
manual.
The exact separating temperature of the product (in °C) is stated in
the order-specific data sheet.
Motor
' '
I Power rating 50 Hz
60 Hz
18.5-45kW
21 - 55 kW
Speed 50 Hz 1 455 RPM
60 Hz 1 745 RPM
-
Design IMV1
Enclosure IP 55
Drive 50/60 Hz
Oil filling approx. 5 I
Oil quality, see section 4.3.3
Product feed pump
Pump unit (gear or screw pump)

I I
Output depending on plant rating
Suction height max. 0.4 bar
Pressure head 2 bar
GEA Mechanical Equipment I GEA \Nestfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 67
Weights
Separator (without motor, without bowl)) 860 kg
Bowl: 400 kg
Motor Size 180
Rating 18.5 kW- 50 Hz

124 kg
21/22 kW - 60 Hz
22 kW-50 Hz
141 kg
26 kW-60 Hz
Size 200
Rating 30 kW-50 Hz
180 kg
35/36 kW - 60 Hz
Size 225
Rating 37 kW-50 Hz
215 kg
43 kW-60 Hz
45 kW-50 Hz
230 kg
55 kW-60 Hz

68 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Notes
Notizen

2062-9001-000 I 0510 69
3 Operation
3.1 Technical information ............................................................................. 70

3.1.1 Separating with the unitrolplus system .................................................. 70
3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection ................................................... .70
3.2 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 72
3.8.2 Bowl faults .............................................................................................. 87

70 2062-9001-000 I 0510
3.1 Technical information

Take note of the following sections:
3.1.1 Separating with the tmitrolplus system

The separator with unitrol plus-System has two built-in monitoring functions:
- vvater content monitoring system \''J~"~S
- sludge space monitoring system - SMS
Procedure:
" Select the desired operating mode on the control unit.
" Set the separating time on the control unit.
.. Start the separator (see 3.2).
3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection

The bowl is ejected automatically at full speed during the program sequence.
The time at which the ejection is triggered is
" determined by the preset separating time
or
.. by the solids level in the bowl,
if:
- SMS was selected on the control unit,
- the sludge space is full before the separating time has elapsed.
For determining the separating time see 3.5.
Sequence of an ejection (example without "Fi!!ing")

1. Separating time has elapsed.
2. Product feed valve is closed.
3. Displacement water displaces the fuel oil to the clean oil- ~ide.
1
4. Operating water opens and closes l11e bowl hydraulically at full bowl
speed.
5. Waiting time for speed recovery.
6. Product valve is opened.
7. Separating time resumes.
Displacement
., When separating, the loss of feed liquid unavoidable during ejection can be
reduced to a minimum by displacing the feed liquid with water before sludge
ejection takes place (especially important when processing valuable feed liq-
uid) .
.. The duration of displacement water supply is given in the timer overview (see
control unit manual).

2062-9001-000 I 0510 71
.. If the displacement time is too long, water will discharge through the light liq-
uid outlet.
.. If the displacement time is too short, part of the product remains in the bowl
and is lost during desludging.
Flush ejection
If the solids cant be completely ejected,
- due to an excessively long dwell time in the bowl or
- are stuck too firmly on the wall of the solids holding space due to the solids
properties,
• either the separating time must be shortened or
• a flush ejection must be carried out after the total ejection by filling the bowl
with water or product and emptying it again.
Program control
• "Displacement", "ejection" and "flush ejections" at precisely defined intervals
are best carried out with the automatic control unit.
• The clean oil discharge and water discharge can be monitored.
" Faults can be signalled visually or audibly.

72 2062-9001-000 I 0510
3.2 Before start-up
Note:
'" Safety precautions in chapter 1.
" Instruction manual of the corresponding control unit.
'" Instructions "Settings and malfunctions"
: Instruction manuals for other auxiliary equipment
.. Process-related deviations are possible
(refer to the order-specific operating data sheet!)
3.2.1 Before the first start-up - after maintenance and repair
ATTENTION!
In order not to endanger the operating safety of the separator, keep
to the recommended maintenance intervals.
If the bowl has been out of operation for longer than 6 months (e.g. due
to a long standstill period or storage),
,. check all bowl parts as specified in the maintenance schedule (table "Main-
tenance after 4000 operating hours or after 6 months at the latest").
" Replace if necessary.
If the separator has been out of operation for longer than 12 months (e.g.
due to a long standstill period or storage),
• check all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule (ta-
ble "Maintenance after 8000 operating hours or after 1 year at the latest).
"Replace if necessary.
Ensure that
" the sight glasses in the frame for observing the drive belt are clean.
" the sight giass in the frame for observing the oii ievei is clean.
" the drive chcimher is filled with oil in accordance with section 4.3.3 .
.. the bowl height is correct (see section 4.7.1).
" the brake housing is correctly mounted.
" the brake is released by turning the handle clockwise.
,. the bowl can be rotated by hand.
" the machine is correctly assembled.
- Tighten the bowl lock ring securely (left-hand thread).
- Tighten the spindle screw with the separator-specific torque (left-hand
thread).
- Tighten the centripetal pump lock ring securely (left-hand thread).
" the hood is mounted correctly (see 4.5).
" the handle connection piece is tightly bolted to the centripetal pump (see 4.5).
" the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.3.2).

2062-9001-000 I 0510 73
" the feed and discharge lines are connected (see 4.5) .
.. the supervisory equipment is complete, mechanically and electrically func-
tional.
.. the product and supply lines are ready-for-operation.
- Pay attention to the air and water pressures (see order-specific operating
data sheet).
" the product heating devices are ready for operation (option).
- Pay attention to the volumes, pressure and temperature (see order-specific
operating data sheet) .
.. the plant components such as valves, water pressure reducer, compressed
air control unit etc. are operational.
., the motor is correctly connected (see 4.1.3) .
., the motor is correctly mounted.
Important!
" Check the remaining plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for
signs of aging and mechanical damage.
" Damaged plant components must be replaced immediately by new parts.

74 2062-9001-000 I 0510
3.2.2 Before every start-up
Ensure that
" the sight glasses in the frame for observing the drive belt are clean.
" the sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean.
a the drive chamber is fi!!ed vvith oil in accordance Vv'ith section 4.3.3.
" the brake is released by turning the handle clockwise.
thread).
" the hood is correctly mounted (see 4.5).
" the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.3.2) .
.. the feed and discharge lines are connected (see 4.5) .
tional.
" the product and supply lines are ready-for-operation.
data sheet) .
.. the product heating devices are ready for operation (option).
.. the motor is correctly mounted.
Important!

2062-9001-000 I 0510 75
3.3 Starting the separator

" See section 3.2.2 or 3.2.2.
" Switch on the control unit.
" Switch on the separator motor.
Compare the starting current and starting time with the diagram (section
4.1.3) until the bowl reaches the speed specified on the separator nameplate.
tmml
The run-up phase of the separator motor is signalled by slow flashing of the
LED in the "Status Separator" key.
ATTENTION! Before the first start-up - after maintenance and repair work
on the separator -
., Check the direction of rotation of the bowl.
The bowl must rotate in clockwise direction when looked at from above.
The direction of rotation of the bowl is

correct when the drive belt rotates
clockwise (check through the sight
glasses in the frame).
When the direction of rotation is incor-
rect the motor connections must be
reversed by an authorised specialist.
Fig. 78
• Switch on the product feed pump (option).

- Ensure that the product feed valves to the suction and pressure side are
open!
on the product feed pump -
• Check the direction of rotation of the product feed pump.
The direction of rotation of the product feed pump is correct when the fan
wheel of the pump motor rotates clockwise.
• Put the preheater in operation (option).
Pre-conditions:
- Steam or thermal oil feed and discharge valves are open!
- Electric preheater is switched on!
• Open the product discharge valve in the product discharge line (option).

! /'
76 2062-9001-000 I 0510
" Open the shut-off flap in the solids

discharge (option).
1 Shut-off flap
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge
Fig. 79
.. Start the program.

Pre-conditions:
- Continuous lighting of the LED in the "Status Separator" button.
- The specified separating temperature has been reached.
- The solids tank has been released (level switch lSHH).
- The solids tank is empty.
" After the product feed valve has automatically opened.
- Set the backpressure in the product discharge line to approx. 1.5 to 2.5 bar
(see order-specific operating data sheet).
- Adjust the desired throughput capacity; while doing so, maintain the back-
pressure in the product discharge line in the specified area.
ATTENTION!
" Check the discharges for solids and dirty water; there must be no oil flow
during the separating process!
3.4 Monitoring of operation

The machine is monitored largely by the separator control.
Operations to be carried out regularly:

" On your daily round, especially during the first 1500 operating hours, pay at-
tention to the following:
- Oil level
- Temperatures
- Pressures
- Leakage
- Vibrations
- Current consumption
- Starting time
- Hoses and hose pipes
- Pipe joints
" Keep to the maintenance schedule (see 4.3.1)!

2062-9001-000 I 0510 77
.. Inspection
spected by our service engineers once a year. These checks help to
- maintain the operating safety of the machine and
- avoid unscheduled downtime.
Important!
.. Regularly check plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for signs
of aging and mechanical damage .
.. Damaged plant components must be replaced immediately by new parts.

78 2062-9001-000 I 0510
3.5 Setting the separation time

When using time-dependent automatic control programs, accurate setting of the
separation time (time between ejection cycles) is only possible if the throughput
capacity and solids loading in the feed remain constant. If this is not the case, it
may be necessary to correct the settings during operation.
The separating time depends on
.. the preselected operating mode (partial or total ejection mode),
"' the solids loading in the feed,
" the consistency of the solids,
" the effective solids space volume in the bowl,
" the separator throughput.
Given constant conditions, the separating time can be determined by calcula-
tion.
The following times have proven appropriate in practice (examples):
Product Total ejection Partial ejection

HFO max. 2 h max. 1 h
MOO max. 2 h max. 1 h
DO max. 4 h max. 2 h
LO mild max. 4 h max. 2 h
--~~'
LO HD max. 2 h max. 1 h
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation

Example for mathematical calculation of the separating time:
Given: Solids content (1 > p ::: 0.05 %

Solids holding space volume v = 11 I
Solids holding space given 75 % utilisation V' ::: 8.251
Throughput capacity ( 1
>
yo = 7 000 l/h
Wanted: Separating time t =?min
The separating time to be set is calculated as follows:
V' 8.25
t ::: • 60 • 100 ::: • 6 000 = i41 min = 2.35 h
7 000 • 0.05
1
( > Solids content and throughput capacity must be determined on site or taken from
the order specification.

2062-9001-000 I 0510 79
3.6 Ejecting the bowl
Automatic operation
.. Initiate ejection program by pressing the key "Process START":

- Product feed is closed.
- Displacement
- Bowl ejection
- Speed recovery
- Filling water (process-dependent)
" The product valve opens aqain.
Manual operation (in the case of unscheduled shut-down)
• Close the product feed line.

- Close the product feed valve manually.
" Eject the bowl:
- Open the operating liquid valve using the manual override for approx. 2 -
3 seconds.
• Speed recovery
- Wait for approx. 20 - 30 seconds.
" New separating operation
- Open the product feed valve manually.

80 2062-9001-000 I 0510
3.7 Shutting down the separator

.•.
Automatic operation
" End the separation program with the key "Process STOP".
- Two total ejections are performed automatically.
.. Switch off the preheater (option).

- Continue to feed product for a few minutes since the preheater continues
to heat for a short time.
" Close the product feed line.
- Close the product feed valve manually .
.. Displacement:
Open the displacement vvater valve using the manual override.
(The bowl contents are displaced without loss by opening the displace-
ment water valve).
" Eject the bowl:
3 seconds.
" Speed recovery
" Switch off the product feed pump (option).

- The product feed pump continues to run (timer 23)!
- The LED in the "FEED" button shows the post-run phase by slow flashing.
- The control valves for thermal oil and steam preheater close automatically.
ATTENTION!
If the control unit or the control voltage 24 VDC fails, the automatic post-run
phase of the product feed pump is disabled.
The product feed pump may never be switched off to the steam shut-off valve
without a delay time. The pre-heater could get damaged!
All heaters (e.g. stearn-fired; therrnal oil; electric heaters) rnust be rnanually
shut down.
Manual shut-down of the product feed pump must be carried out delayed .
.. Close the product feed valve in the suction side of the product feed pump (op-
tion).
" Switch the separator motor off.
" Close the discharges.
" Close the supply lines such as heating steam, water, compressed air lines
with hand valves.
, CAUTION: Danger to life through high-speed rotating separator parts!

., Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a
standstill.
- The run-down time of the bowl is 120minutes after switching off the motor
(without braking!).
- Bowl standstill is indicated by standstill of the drive belt.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -..·-··--··- -----
GEA Mechanicai Equipment I GEA \llJestfa!ia
2062-9001-000 I 0510 81
Standstill of drive belt

" Shine a torch through the sight
glasses in the frame.
" Visually check that the drive belt is
no longer moving.
Fig. 80
If sight glass is misted over:

" Unscrew the sight glass,
.. shine a torch through the sight glass opening!
CAUTION: Risk of injury through rotating drive belts!
• Only visually check that the drive belt is no longer moving.
- Do not reach for the drive belt through the sight glass opening!
" Clean the sight glass and screw it back on.
CAUTION: Danger to life through high-speed rotating separator parts!

In the case of torn or defective drive belts or if the belts have come off:
" Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a
standstill .
., Be sure to observe the run-down time of 200 minutes until dismantling the
separator!
• Applying the brake is not effective!
ATTENTION!
Only after standstill of the bowl,
.. Close the shut-off flap in the solids
discharge (option).
1 Shut-off flap
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge
Fig. 81

82 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Risk of injury due to electrical vol-

tage and unintended start-up of the
separator!

ponents:
@ISvvitch off al! e!ectrica! app!i2nces
Fig. 82

separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 °C ( 158 - 212 °F).)
3.7.1 Shut~down "Emergency-Off"

In a hazardous situation (unusual noises or vibrations) or in the case of damage
to the separator or plant components (e.g. burst hoses), a manual quick shut-
down of the installation can be carried out.
Depending on the version, the control cabinet is equipped with:
- a main switch (yellow-red) with integrated "Emergency:Off" function and
additional connection for an external "Emergency-Off"-switch (example 1),
- an "Emergency-Off' switch (yellow-red), a main switch (grey-black) and ad-
ditional connection for an external "Emergency-Off"-switch (example 2) or
ditional connection, via approved "Emergency-Off' relay for several "Emer-
gency-Off'-switches (example 2).
Main switch (yellow-red) with inte-

grated "Emergency-Off" function
" Actuate the main switch with "Emer-
gency-Off" function.
- The complete control unit is de-
energised.
- No bowl ejection is performed.
" CAUTION! Evacuate the room .

STOP S24
Fig. 83 Example 1

2062-9001-000 I 0510 83
"Emergency-Off"-switch (yellow-
red) and main switch (grey-black)
.. Actuate the "Emergency-Off switch.
- The complete drives of the control
unit are de-energised.
- The separator is shut down in a
controlled manner with two total
ejections.
STOP " CAUTION! Evacuate the room.

s25 separator has come to a standstill.
Fig. 84 Example 2

I t.
84 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Note
Notes
Notizen
Notater
Notes
Note
GEA fVlech::rniccil Equipment I GEA WesHalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 85
3.8 Trouble shooting

The following tables are an aid for locating and eliminating faults.
If assembly operations have to be carried out refer to the section "Maintenance
and Repair".
3.8.1 Trouble shooting
Failure Possible causes Action

The bowl does not come up Brake is applied. " Release brake by turning the handle
to rated speed or takes too clockwise.
long to do so. Oil has run down the spindle onto the " Clean belt contact surface of the
drive belt; the drive belt is slipping on spindle and flat belt pulley.
the bowl spindle. " Replace the drive belt.
Motor is incorrectly connected. • Check connection.
Insufficient number of clutch shoes. • Increase the number of clutch
shoes.
" Make sure that the
clutch shoes are
evenly spaced.
Drive belt has stretched and is slipping • Replace drive belt.

on the bowl spindle.
Drive belt has not been fitted correctly. • Check position of drive belt on cen-
trifu al clutch and bowl spindle.
Liquid or dirt has collected in the upper • Check operating water discharge:
section of frame and is braking the Liquid must flow off freely.
bowl. " Clean inside of upper section of
frame.
The bowl speed drops during Friction surfaces of clutch shoes are " Wipe dry friction surfaces.
operation. ' oily. • ATTENTION: Do not use
benzene, trichlorethy-
lene or any other sol-
vent!
Drive belt has stretched and is slipping • Replace the drive belt.
The motor speed drops during opera- • Check motor and line voltage.
tion.
The bowl reaches the rated Too many clutch shoes are used. " Reduce the number of clutch shoes.
speed too fast (in less than 3 • Make sure that the
minutes). The starting current clutch shoes are
of the motor is hence inad- evenly spaced.
missibly high.(lm,, >2 x IN).

86 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Uneven run of the centrifuge. Bowl is out of balance for the following For pos. 1 - 4:
reasons: " Shut down separator .
., Apply brake.
" Close the product feed and dis-
charge.
, . CAUTION:
" Bowl must not be emptied
as otherwise the vibrations
occurring during shut-down
will intensify.
If bowl leaks,
en the water su I .
1. The separated dirt has deposited " Clean bowl.
unevenly in the bowl.
2. Bowl has not been correctly as- " Assemble bowl properly.
sembled or parts of different bowls
(if plant has several separators)
have been interchanged.
3. The tension in the disk stack has
slackened:
- The bowl lock ring is not screwed VORSICHT: A loose lock
on until 0 mark alignment. ring can endanger life!
" The 0 marks of

the bowl bottom
and the lock ring
must be aligned.
- Insufficient number of disks.
4. Bowl parts are damaged. .. Send bowl to factory for repair.

.. CAUTION: Do not carry out
. your own repairs!
Do not weld or solder as this
would weaken the howl I
Ball bearings are worn. " Replace damaged bearings.
ATTENTION!
Use only the ball bearings
specified in the parts list.
GE/\ Mechanical Equipment I GEA Westfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 87
3.8.2 Bowl faults
23 24
22
2062-6600-BA
Fig. 85 Bowl and operating water feeding system
1 Gasket (bowl top) 13 Operating water feeding system

2 Gasket (bowl top) 14 Injection chamber
3 Gasket (sliding piston) 15 Closing chamber bottom
4 Guide band (sliding piston) 16 Bowl bottom
5 Gasket (annular piston) 17 Drain hole
6 Gasket (closing chamber bottom) 18 Annular piston
8 Guide band (closing chamber bottom) 20 Sliding piston
9 Gaskets (closing chamber bottom) 21 Bowl top
10 Piston guide ring (bowl bottom) 22 Solenoid valve block
11 Gasket (bowl bottom) 23 Solenoid valve for operating water
12 Gasket (water chamber bottom) 24 Solenoid valve for filling and displacement wa-
ter
25 Filling and displacement water line
26 Strainer
27 Shut-off valve
28 Operating water line

2062-9001-000 I 0510
The bowl does not close. Operating water

Control unit is defective or " Check control unit.
IMPORTANT:
Motor is not correctly set. .. Check program parameters and
- Product flows out of the
reset if possible.
solids discharge.
(See control unit instruction ma-
- Current consumption is too
nual.)
high.
Closing water pulse too short. .. Set 3 seconds (see also control unit
manual).
Strainer 66.04 cm the operating, filling " Close shut-off cock 27 .
and displacement water line is dirty. ., Clean strainer 26 (see 4.4.4 ).
The operating water capacity is too .. Check line pressure, increase if
low. necessary.
Operating water data:

- Pressure 2 - 3 bar (with open vaive)
I - Volume flow min. 3 000 l/h (gauge
the capacity by litres):= 2.5 I in 3 sec
The operating water line 28 has be- " Clean or replace operating water
come constricted due to dirt accumula- line 28.
tion or damage. Insufficient operating
water is entering the injection
chamber.
The operating water solenoid valve 23 " Check and replace solenoid valve
does not open properly. 23.
Bowl hydraulics
Bowl hydraulic system is soiled. .. Remove hood and
or .. Dismantle and clean the bowl (see
section 4.4.1 and 4.4.2) .
.. Thoroughly clean all bores.
Gaskets, guide bands, piston guide ., Replace all seals.
ring are damaged or Use set of spare parts "bowiihood"
(see spare parts list).
Important: Time-consuming instai-
lation!
I I I
.. Only replace the polyamide gasket 5
if drimriqP.rl (sP.P. sP.r.tion 4 4 R)I
Sealing surface of sliding piston 20 is .. Very slightly remachine the sealing
damaged. surface - max. 1 mm! - (see sec-
tion 4.4.10) or
.. send in the sliding piston for repair.
GEA Mechanical Equipment i GEA Westfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 89
1
21 2
20 3
-4
19----.._
-~5
18
6
17
7 23 24
22
2062-6600-BA
Fig_ 86 Bowl and operating water feeding system

ter
26 Strainer
27 Shut-off valve

90 2062-9001 -000 I 0510
The bowl does not open, or Operating water

only partially so ·-
Control unit is defective or " Check control unit.
Motor is not correctly set. '" Check program parameters and
reset if possible.
(See contra! unit instruction ma
nual.)
Time for opening water too short. " Set 3 - 4 seconds (see also control
unit manual).
Strainer 66.04 cm the operating, filling .. Close shut-off cock 27.
and displacement water line is dirty. " Clean strainer 26 (see 4.4.4 ).
The operating water capacity is too " Check line pressure, increase if
low. necessary.

- Pressure 2 - 3 bar (with open valve)
- Volume flow min. 3 000 l/h (gauge
the capacity by litres)= 2.5 I in 3 sec
water is entering the injection cham-
ber.
The operating water solenoid valve 23 .. Check and replace solenoid valve
Bowl hydraulics
Bowl hydraulic system is soiled. " Remove hood and
section 4.4.1 and 4.4.2).
" Thoroughly clean all bores.
- Carefully check and clean drain
hole 19.
Gaskets, guide bands, piston guide " Replace all seals.
ring are damaged. Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood"
I I 1 important: Time-consuming instai-
lationi
., Only replace polyam1de gasket 5 if
damaged (see section 4.4.9)1
.. Carefully check polyamide gasket 5
for firm seating in the groove.
GEA Mechanicai Equipment I GEA Westfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 91
1
2
20 3
4
19-..__
5
18
6
23 24
22
2062-6600-BA

ter
26 Strainer
27 Shut-off valve

2062-9001-000 I 0510

The bowl does not empty The operating water capacity is too '" Check line pressure, increase if
completely. Solids remain in low. necessary.
the bowl.
The separating time has been set too .. Shorten the separating time (see
long with the result that the solids con- section 3.5).
tent is too high.
The bowl opens during sepa- Closing water pulse is too short. .. Correct closing water impulse (see
ration. - Closinq water has evaporated. control unit documentation).
Closing water pulse is too long.
- Closing water impulse opens the
bowl.
GE/\ ~Jlechanical Equipment I GEA VVestfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 93

4.1.1 Separator transport ................................................................................ 96
4.1.3 Motor ...................................................................................................... 98
4.3.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................... 115
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from GEA Westfalia
Separator ............................................................................................. 121
4.4 Bowl ..................................................................................................... 122
4.4.1 Dismantling the bowl ............................................................................ 124
4.4.9 Replacing the pol yam ide gasket (bowl top) ......................................... 166
4.5 Closing the hood .................................................................................. 174
4.6 Drive ..................................................................................................... 176
4.6.4 Removing the centrifugal clutch .......................................................... 187
4.6.9 Replacing the clutch shoes in the separator ........................................ 211
4.7.1 Bowl height .......................................................................................... 213
4.9.1 Preserving the separator ..................................................................... 217
4.10 Storage ................................................................................................ 219
4.10.1 After delivery ........................................................................................ 219
4.10.2 Separator ............................................................................................. 219
4.10.3 Control system ..................................................................................... 219
4.12 Disposal ............................................................................................... 221
4.12.3 Separator ............................................................................................. 222
4.13 Standard tools ...................................................................................... 224
4.14 Special tools ........................................................................................ 226

94 -~-~~·~~-·------ -------------------------
2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.1 Installation of the separator
" For further information see installation guidelines.
l
Water detector:
Cenire of gravii
DN50
(060.3)
The complete ' owl can then be
transported via the adjacent 0 Water discharge/operating water discharge
separators of the same type. EE>
Ci) Water discharge/operating water discharge

®soijds discharge
t=~~_J
c::> These functional dimensions must be adhered to!

EE> Discharge must not feed into public water system! 2067-4100-000-1
Fig_ 88 Note project-specific dimensioned drawing!
--------------------
GE/\ ~v1cchanica! Equipment I GEA \lVestfalia Separator
2062-9001-000 I 0510 95
lleschreibung
DN
DESCRIPTIONS
CD Schmutz61
40
siehe Detail Y
""'Reinol
40 siehe Detail W
W CLEAN OIL EE DETAIL
@ Schlamm-Ablaut 125
SLUDGE DISCHA~R~G~E_ _ FLEXIBLE HOSE I HOSE CLIP...
,_,._

Steuerwasser-Ablauf
eueiwasser Aussengewinde
t2' FOll-und Verdrangungswasser 31
MALE
""'OPERATING-WATER/
Connector:
w y
1 :2 1 :2
:t
Product discharge
G) Product feed
839
Filling, displacement and operating@ (8 Water discharge
water discharge 5 © Operating water discharge

water

2/2-way solenoid valve {circuit)
Water detector:
Service side
1650

8)
2062-4100-000-2
Discharqe must not feed into public water svstem!

96 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.1.1 Separator transport
., CAUTION: Use appropriate lifting devices to prevent accidents!

- Be sure to use suitably rated, intact hoists for transport and installation.
" CAUTION: Danger to life under hoists!

- Do NOT step under hanging load.
" Always transport the separator withoutinstalled bowl!
.. For special tools, see section 4.14 or parts list.
" Ensure that

- two eye bolts 1 are screwed into
the upper section of the frame.
- Screvi1 two eye bolts 2 vvith \Nash~
ers 3 into the intermediate flange I
frame holes.
Fig. 90
" CAUTION! Do not use the eye bolt

of the motor to suspend the sepa-
rator.
.. IMPORT ANT: Do not damage any

machine attachment parts when fas-
tening the ropes!
.. Attach the transport ropes

- Thread through the four eye bolts
and
- hang them into the load hook of
the hoist as illustrated.
IMPORTANT: Prevent the ropes from

slipping!
.. Wind a piece of rope twice around
the ioad hook (see detail).
" Make sure the machine touches

down gently.
2062001
Fig 91
GE.A. Mechanical Equipment I GEA Westfa!ia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 97
• Unscrew two eye bolts 1.
Fig. 92
4.1.2 Installing the separator

" Before installing the separator make sure that
- sufficient space is available for operating and dismantling the machine.
- the foundation is not connected to foundations of other vibrating units to
avoid the transfer of vibrations.
• Align separator 1 with feet 2 and

plates 3 on foundation 4.
• Tack plates 3.
• Unscrew screws 5.
• Lift separator with feet (see section
4.1.1 ).
" Weld plates 3 to foundation 4.
• Place the separator on plates 3 and
• bolt tight with hexagon nuts 5.
" Screw tight hex head screws 6.
Fig. 93

98 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.1.3 Motor
200% Rated current%
100%
150 90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
,___rt\ _ _~ I
20 40 60 80 100% 0 25 5075100%
Separation I_~ ,,..Separation
\___) ~
·--------·~·---~··-·-··-------------~
P2042001
Fig. 94 Start-up diagram (current and speed characteristics) - example
r'_'vz__
Bl
~ ~ rpm min
@~
s
50 Hz
kW
60 Hz
De-
sign
Enclo-
sure*
50 Hz
rpm
at
60 Hz
rpm
IP 55
see name-
p!ate
6 -10 3
18.5-
45
21 - !M ·-- -
1;::.u- I 1 400 I 1 t4o I
.
ciass
F*
I I I
* WS standard
The separator is driven by a three-phase AC motor via a centrifugal clutch and
the drive belt.
The specified motor ratings are minimum values which are based on the in-
creased starting current. Since the current consumption of the motor drops after
start-up, overloading of the motor during operation is not possible.
The starting time depends on the
- flywheel effect of the bowl,
- number of clutch shoes used,
- condition of the clutch shoes.
The starting current can peak at about 1.8 - 2 times the rated current (see start-
up diagram). This is to be considered when selecting switches, lead-in wires
and fuses.
The motor
- can be started direct online (WS standard) or via a motor control for star-
delta switching (Ex-zone).

2062-9001-000 I 0510 99
- is protected against overheating by thermal overload releases or a PTC

thermistor as sole protection.
(As WS standard, the motor is protected against overheating by three PTC
thermistors).
- can be equipped with a frequency converter if requested by the customer.
When using thermal overload releases, the motor has to be protected as fol-
lows:
- during operation by a release set to the rated current and
- during start-up by a second release set to 1.8 - 2 times the rated current.
The release set to the rated current must be bridged during start-up.
Note:
• The temperature feelers must be connected to a commercial tripping device.
• External voltage higher than 2.5 volts must not be applied to the connection
terminals of the temperature feelers.
" When testing for continuity, use an ohmmeter and not a test lamp.
Electrical connection
CAUTION: Danger to life and limb through electric current!

There might be residual voltage!
In the case of motors with space heaters, residual voltages in the motor
terminal box are possible despite switched off main switch.
Prior to working on the motor:

• Refer to the motor nameplate .
.. Refer to the motor instruction manual.
Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VOE (Associa-
tion of German Electrical Engineers) or of the local electric power company.
• Any work on the motor may be carried out by an authorized electrician
only.
" Connect the motor.

Refer to the motor instruction man-
ual.
Motor-1
Fig. 95 Connection scematic
The terminal board in the terminal box can be connected in star or delta.
" Check correct switching of the motor (star or delta).
Refer to the motor instruction manual.

100 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Star switching (example)
U1
L1
L2
L3
PE
Motor-y
Fig. 96
Delta switching (example)
( w7 U2?
I I
I
L1
L2
L3
PE
Fig. 97
IMPORTANT:
" In the case of additional electrical components, PTC thermistors or space
heaters, refer to the motor manual.
Shipboard operation
" When operating the machine on board of ship, pay attention to the installation
guidelines issued by the respective classification societies.
• When using ship wiring ccibles, rnble entry must be by me<lns of mmine-type
glands.

2062-9001-000 I 0510 101
4.1.4 Direction of rotation of the bowl
" Fill the drive chamber with oil up to

the half way mark on the sight glass.
" Switch on motor.
Fig. 98

glasses in the frame).
Fig. 99

operation:
• Before working on the motor,
note that residual voltage may be
present!
• In this connection:
- Read the documentation supplied
by the frequency converter manu-
facturer.
- Have protective measures imple-
mented by suitably qualified per-
sonnel.
Fig. 100

102 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4. 1,5 Speed and starting time of the bowl
Speed see name-plate

3
rnax. 1.01 kg/dm and
- for densities of separated solids up to
3
max. 1.4 kg/dm
Starting time 6-10 min
The bowl speed has been rated so as to ensure the operating safety of the se-
parator.
Before the first start-up

" Check spindle speed (= bowl speed)
with a hand tachometer before fitting
the bowl.
CAUTION!
Risk of injury through rotating
spindie.
" Keep a safe distance away from the
rotating spindle.
" Do not wear long, open hair or wide,
loose clothing!
" Wear a hairnet!
" IMPORT ANT: Do not exceed the

maximum spindle running time of
1 minute!
.. Speed deviations of up to 5 % are

permissible.
L · - - · · - - -
Fig. 101
A20G2010
GE/\ Mechanical Equipment I GEA Westfa!!a Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 103
In case of frequency converter operation:

The frequency converter is equipped with a reliable frequency limitation to pre-
vent operation at inadmissibly high bowl speeds.
CAUTION!
A
.. Operate the separator with fre-
quency converter, speed monitor-
ing device and hardware-
controlled speed shut-off device.
" Do not under any circumstances
manipulate the frequency con-
~
verter to exceed the permissible
bowl speed (see nameplate)!
" Check from time to time that
- the bowl speed (see nameplate)
00l•H41<~000
and
Fig. 102 - motor frequency (see nameplate
and frequency converter display!)
coincide with the separator speed.

104 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.2 Valves and flow indicator

A set of valves (with various inner diameters) and a set of commissioning parts
are included in the separator delivery.
- The set of valves is attached to the separator hood.
- The commissioning parts set includes flow indicator 3.
Mounting of a valve allows separator flow rate monitoring.
H2062003
Fig. 103
A Product feed line

B Product discharge line
1 Pre-set valve
2 Pre-set valve
3 Flovv indicator
4 3/2-way valve
ATTENTION! Pay attention to mounting of the foiiowing parts before

commissioning the separator:
Valves 1 and 2
" Select valves according to required flow capacity from the provided valve set
(see section 2.7).
" Mount vaive 1 on product feed iine A (see section 4.2.1 ).
" Mount valve 2 on product discharge line B (see section 4.2.1 ).
Flow indicator 3
"' Remove plug from the corresponding bore of 3/2-way valve 4.
• Secure threading of flow indicator 3 with Loctite 245.
" Install flow indicator 3 on 3/2-way valve 4.

2062-9001-000 I 0510 105
4.2.1 Installing valves

Valve installation is explained by example for product discharge line B.
Required equipment:
- Open-ended wrench
- Lubricating grease
• Screw off corrugated hose 3.

.. Insert selected valve 2 in connector
1 and push in evenly by hand.
Fig. 104
" Lightly lubricate threading of con-

nector 1.
" Insert corrugated hose 3 and firmly
tighten with hexagon nut 2.
Fig. 105

106 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
MuistHnpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

2062-9001-000 I 0510 107
4.3 Maintenance and lubrication
.. Special care must be taken when performing maintenance and lubrication

operations.
Conscientiously performed maintenance and lubrication operations improve
the service life of the separator .
.. In the case of accessories (motor, product pump, preheater, solenoid valve
block etc.) the manufacturer's maintenance and lubrication instructions must
be observed .
.. Maintenance and repair work may be carried out only by persons
- who are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings
and training.
- who are adequately qualified for performing the work and checking it.
" Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
\t\festfa!io Separator~-
.. Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator.
gen U i nepa
4.3.1 Maintenance schedule
ATTENTION!
The following maintenance intervals are recommendations which apply only for normal operating
conditions.
Negative operating conditions (e.g. low-grade fuel, excessively high temperature, strong vibrations,
frequent starting and stopping of the separator etc.) can necessitate shorter maintenance intervals.
To assure correct functioning and operating safety,

• in case of non-routine shut-down, see section 3.7 - manual operation.
• Pay attention to the following points during servicing:
- Oil level - Current consumption
- Temperatures - Starting time
- Pressures - Hoses and hose pipes (see 4.3.2)
- Leakage - Pipe joints
- Vibrations
• Before every assembly, grease the main components of the bowl at guide and contact surfaces (see section 4.3.4 -
lubrication schedule).
• in the case of frequent starting and stopping of the separator, shaft-driven alternator operation and in power plants, the
condition of the clutch shoes must be checked more often than stated in this schedule. It is not possible to state a defini-
tive time. We recommend checking the clutch shoes after 1000 operating hours or after 2 months at the latest.
• We recommend having the separator checked by a WS service specialist once a year.

2062-9001-000 I 0510
I 3HY
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
1_ _ _ 190 __ j
2062-9902-00J~M
Fig. 106 Set of spare parts ,,bowl/hood" (operation: 1 year or 8,000 hours)
GEA Mechanical Equiprnent ! GEA ',/Vestfa!~a Separator
'... .
2062-9001-000 I 0510 109
Commissioning date:
(to be filled in by user)
Maintenance work Remark

-After 4000 operating hours - after 6 months at the latest
-After 12,000 operating hours - after 1 % years at the latest
Bowl inspection • Dismantle bowl and centripetal pump.
• Clean the bowl and centripetal pump parts and check for
corrosion and erosion.
• Clean all holes, nozzles and chambers of the hydraulic
system.
• The cones of bowl and spindle must be clean and dry
when fitting.
Replace gaskets (see accompanying illustration). • Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood"
(Operation: 1 year or 8,000 hours).
See spare parts list.
Important: Time-consuming installation!
Only replace polyamide gasket 100 if damaged (see section
4.4.9)!
Check the motor. • See instructions of motor manufacturer
Re-lubricate motor bearings (if required)
When using mineral oil: • See section 4.3.3 - oil quality and oil change.
Oil chanoe and thorouoh cleanino of the drive chamber
Clean the strainer and pipe in the operating liquid feed • See section 4.4.4.
svstem on the self-cleaninq separator.
Carefully clean the holes in the non-return valve in the • See section 4.5.
water feed and rinse with water.
Check the functionality of the non-return valve.
Carefully clean the water detector (if installed) with a soft
cloth, use diesel oil if necessary.
Clean the sight glass/glasses in the frame for observation
of the drive belt.
Check the hoses and hose pipes and replace when neces-
sarv.
Clean the filter in the suction line of the product feed pump
(option).

110 2062-9001-000 I 0510
-- - -1 ··- - i
I
I
I
I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 200 I
I- - -190
---
J
Fig. 107 Sot of spare parts ,,bowl/hood" (operation: 1 year or 8, 000 hours)
(
I
:WS0-9902-130-hs
Fig. 108 Set of spare parts ,,drive" (operation: 1 year or 8,000 hours)
------· - - - - - - - - - - - -
~~ ,.
GEA. r,f!echanica! Equipcnent I GEt\ VVestfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 111

-After 8000 operating hours- after 1 year at the latest
-After 24 000 operating hours - after 3 years at the latest
- After 40 000 operating hours - after 5 years at the latest
Bowl inspection .
Dismantle bowl and centripetal pump .
•
Clean the bowl and centripetal pump parts and check for
system.
" The cones of bowl and spindle must be clean and dry
when fittinq.
Replace gaskets, piston guide ring and guide strips (see .
Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood"
adjacent figure). (Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).
See parts list.
Change polyamide gasket 100 only when it is damaged (see
section 4.4.9).
Clean the inside of the upper section of frame. • Remove bowl.
Check or replace neck bearing springs. • See section 4.6.7.
Replace qaskets. .
Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace the drive belt. (Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).
Replace cylindrical roller bearings and angular contact ball See Fig. 108 or section Parts list.
bearinqs of spindle.
Check ball bearings of centrifugal clutch and replace if • Use set of spare parts "drive"
necessary. (Operation: 2 years or 16,000 hours).
Check thickness of the clutch shoes (1) and replace when See Fig. 110 or section Parts list.
m'--t'.J hi h smaller than 18 mm.

New condition of clutch shoes h =26 mm
Check thickness of brake lining and replace when New condition of the fitted brake lining
h = 10 mm
~////~~h h smaller than 3 mm.

Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber When using mineral oil (2)
When using synthetic oil (2)
Check the bowl height. • See section 4.7.1.
In case of direct current: • Check only after motor or drive replacement.
Check the spindle speed (bowl). • See section 4.1.5.
Check the starting time. • See section 4.1.5.
Clean the strainer and pipe in the operating liquid feed • See section 4.4.4
system on the self-cleaning separator.
Carefully clean the water detector (if provided) with a soft
Clean the sight glass(es) in the frame for observing the
drive belt.
sary.
Check that vibration absorbers are fully functional (option).
(option).
(1) In the case of frequent starting and stopping of the separator, shaft-driven alternator operation and power plants shorter maintenance
intervals are required It is not possible to state a definitive time. We recommend checking the clutch shoes after 1,000 operating
hours or after 2 months at the latest.
(2) See section 4.3.3 - Oil quality and oil change

112 2062-9001-000 I 0510
~-------1
K~2lt---- AOO
·--~~-390
i
I 200 I
I_ _ _190
___ J
Fig. 109 Set of spare parts ,,bowl/hood" (operation.· 1 year or 8,000 hours)
10
I
I
J
~////
. /
v 2060-9902-150-hs
Fig. 110 Set of spare parts ,,drive" (operation. 2 years or 16,000 hours)
GF:A ~v~echanica! Equipment I GEA V'Jestfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 113

-After 16 000 operating hours - after 2 years atthe latest
- After 32 000 operating hours - after 4 years at the latest
-After 48 000 operating hours - after 6 years at the latest
system.
when fitting.
Replace gaskets, piston guide ring and guide strips (see • Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood"
See parts list.
Change polyamide gasket 100 only when it is damaged (see
section 4.4.9).
Replace gaskets. • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace the drive belt. (Operation: 2 years or 16,000 hours).
Replace cylindrical roller bearings and angular contact ball See Fig. 110 or section Parts list.
Replace ball bearinqs of centrifuqal clutch.
Check thickness of the clutch shoes (1) and replace when
[··1·] hj h smaller than 18 mm.
New condition of clutch shoes h =26 mm

Check thickness of brake lining and replace when New condition of the fitted brake lining:
h = 10 mm
L/(//~~h h smaller than 3 mm.

Re-lubricate motor bearinqs (if required)
Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber When usinq mineral oil (2)
When using synthetic oil (2)
In case of three-phase current: • Check only after drive replacement.
system on the self-cleaninq separator.
operating water feed.
drive belt.
sary. .
(option).
(1) In the case of frequent starting and stopping of the sepilriltor, shilfl-rlriven alternator operation and power plants shorter maintenance

114 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Maintenance work
-After 48,000 operating hours - after 6 years at the latest
Equip the separator with new vibration isolators.

We recommend having the separator checked by a WS service engineer.
4.3.2 Hoses and hose pipes

Replace hose pipes when an inspection reveals one or more of the following de·
fects:
"' Damage of the outer layer down to the fabric (e. g. chafe marks, cuts or
cracks).
" Leaky spots.
'" Damage to or deformation of the hose fittings.
- Slight surface damage is not a reason for replacement.
.. The hose becomes dislodged from the fitting.
"' Corrosion of the fitting diminishing function and strength.
~---·----·~--~······-------~
Protective hose 1
" Fit the protective hoses at all contact

points to the separator.
" Adapt the length of the protective

hose.
Fig. 111
GE.A. iv!echanlca! Equiprnent ! GEA \tVestfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 115
4.3.3 Lubrication
The spindle bearings are splash-lubricated from a central oil bath.
MOTOR BEARINGS
For re-greasing the motor bearings, refer to the instructions of the motor manu-
facturer.
OIL QUALITY (mineral oil)

The mineral gear oil tested by Westfalia Separator with the designation "Separa-
tor lube oil CLP 100" meets the requirements and should preferably be used.
Designation according to DIN

51502
Designation as per ISO 3498

~
cc
0
100
Viscosity class SAE 30
Viscosity (at 40 °C/104 °F) 100 ± 1O mm 2/s (cSt)
Part Number 0015-0003-080 (2.5 litres)
Dispose of the oil as per instructions of the oil manufacturer.
The viscosity class SAE 30 covers a larger viscosity range than specified here.
However, only oils with the viscosity range specified here may be used.
OIL QUALITY (synthetic oil)

Use the synthetic lube oil tested by Westfalia Separator AG!
Viscosity class (ISO) VG 68

Viscosity
- at 40 °C (104 °F) 65 mm 2 /s
- at 100 °C (212 °F) 10,4 mm 2 /s
Viscosity index (VI) 147
Density (at 15 °C/59 °F) 0.857 g/ml
based on Polyalphaolefin
Part Number 0015-0020-010 (1 litre)

116 2062-9001-000 I 0510
OIL QUANTITY
IMPORTANT: Do not forget to top up the oil in good time!
Filling in oil
Fill the drive with oil before commis-
sioning the separator .
., Unscrew the screw plug and
"' fill in oil through the charge hole.
Filling quantity approx. 5 litres
Fig. 112
Oil level
IMPORTANT:
., Check the oil level only when the
separator is at standstill.
1 " The oil level must never drop below
the lower third of the sight glass dur-
2 I ing operation.
Fig. 113
,~,J 1 Maximum oil level
2 Minimum oil level
Minimum oil level approx. up to lower third of sight glass

(at separator standstill)
Maximum oil level up to middle of sight glass

OIL CHECK
.. Check the oil level every week!
" From time to time undo the oil drain screw and check whether there is water
in the oil bath. When the oil exhibits a milky colouring (emulsification), the oil
must be changed immediately.
OIL CHANGE
" Change oil after about
- 4000 operating hours or 6 months at the latest (mineral oil).
- 8000 operating hours or 1 year at the latest (synthetic oil) .
.. Clean sight glass.
GE/'\ ~J!echanica! Equipment I GEA 'w'\/estfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 117
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

118 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.3.4 Lubrication Chart
A2062002
Fig. 114 Lubrication schedule
GE/\ ~v1echan!ca! Equlprnent i GE.11~ V'Vestfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 119
Lubricant Lubrication frequency

Lubricat- Amount of
after Lubrication point
irig point lubricant
Designation Designation operating per year
hours
Lube oil
~0
DIN 51502 3
4 000 2x 5 000 cm Drive chamber
(mineral)
1
cc 100
ISO 3498
Lube oil Mobil SHC 626 3

(synthetic) ISOVG 68
2 according to instructions of motor manufacturer Motor bearings
Threads and sliding sur-

3 2x
faces of bowl
Lubricating see
4 as required 1x apply sparingly Threads of fittings
grease parts list
Manually-operated parts
5 1x
such as locking brake
• Check oil level regularly through sight glass.

• Manual lubrication
" Refer to lubricating oil table in section 4.3.5!

120 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.3.5 Table of lubricating oils
lubricating oil sorts suggested by some firms
Manufac-
Viscosity
Designation at 40 °C (104 °F)
turer 2
mm /s (cSt)
lubricating oil table
for separators in onshore and shipboard opera- BLASIA 100
tion RADULA 100 100
DIESEL GAMMA 30
Separator lube oil
ATLANTA MARINE 30
Viscosity 105
DISOLA M 3015
MONTANOL HK 100 100
Kinematic
Type viscosity ENERGOL GR-XP 100 100
at 40 °C ENERGOL DL-MP 30 114
(104 °F)
1=>--""""l-"""'"---...m-m__1s.....,c_s_t,..)i-------mt '.~Castioi)HYSPIN AWS 100

2
100
BTC 3 ALPHA ZN 100
CTC 1 MARINE HEAVY 99
1crr,3·---,
MTC 3 1.3 GST OIL 100
100
OTC2 NL Gear Com ound 100
OTC 3 Veritas Marine Oil R&O 30 108
WTC2 DELO 3000 Marine Oil 30 104
OSE 5
ATLANTA MARINE 30
105
CSD 1 DISOLA M 3015
OSD2 TURBINE T 100 95
SD 1 1.3
SSD 2 EXX-MAR XP 110
TSO 2 NUTO H 100
100
SPARTAN EP 100
ESD18 GULF HARMONY 100 95

GSC15 VERITAS 30 110
OSD6
lcLPl 90 to 11 O 0015-0003-080
OSD 18
WSD8
2.5 ~ (2.5 I) !@I 1'f ! i HIDRAOIL HD 70 95
IWSD 18
_OSE10
I OSE 20
IL__:::::·_ I
Mnhl!
MOBILGARD 312 ---±=
_______1 _
106 ·--i
_____ J
GADINIA 30 104
GSC 25 ROTELLA MX SAE 30 105
OSD 20
OSD 25
OSD 30 HYDRA WAY HIVIA 100
3.7 100
OSD 35 LOAD WAY EP 100
SD 30
-----
WSD35
OSE 40 DORO AR SAE 30 119
OSD 50 TARO XD SAE 30 105
OSD60
OSD80
5.0
SD 50
WSD60
OSE 80
-
2062-9001-000 I 0510 121
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from GEA Westfalia Separator
Faultless functioning of separators very much depends on the proper type of lubricating oil used, since a
high grade oil, selected to meet all service requirements, will minimize the wear, thus extending the ser-
vice life and increasing the operating safety.
For the lubrication of our separators we recommend to use the oils specified by us since continuous qual-
ity checks are performed by GEA Westfalia Separator. Oils proposed from some firms are not subjected
to these tests.
Therefore, GEA Westfalia Separator cannot give a performance guarantee for those oils.
Be sure to select only high grade solvent refined products.
The specified oil types meet the requirements according to DIN. Under unfavourable operating condi-
tions, e.g. high temperatures, the quality of the oils may be insufficient so that more efficient oils, e.g.
synthetic oils, must be used. If necessary, consult GEA Westfalia Separator.
For the different separator types and oil types the viscosity ranges are specified in the table of lubricating
oils.
The operating temperature of the separator exceeds normally 80 °C (176 °F). At those temperatures
some oils age quickly, so that they have to be changed prematurely.
Be sure not to use lubricating oils with viscosities lower than those specified in the table. Due to the pos-
sibility of the oil film breaking down, oil of too low a viscosity will give insufficient lubrication, resulting in
increased wear. However, oils with a slightly higher viscosity than specified may be used.
Bear in mind that the viscosity groups SAE 30, 40 and 50 (SAE = Society of Automotive Engineers)
cover larger viscosity ranges and be sure to select lubricating oils with viscosities not lower than the
minimum values of the viscosity ranges restricted for the different separator types.

122 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.4 Bowl
----550
·~--540
---530
---310
\\.~~~~1-'!----- 320
190-~~
200--c--~~-.....
170 --~
)
280
90
,___v--; 250 I
'---;-:.... I
__,,/ ~~ 260 I
- I
230
220
I
I
L --
2062-6600-500-Gr
Fig_ 115 Exploded view of the bowl and centripetal pump
. . ~ . . ' ~ .
2062-9001-000 I 0510 123
I Pos. Designation Dimensions
20 (1) Bowl bottom, compl.

30 Gasket
40 Piston guide ring
50 (2) Water chamber bottom
70 Gasket
80 Allen screw ISO 4762 - M 10 x 20 -1.4571
90 Annular piston
100 Gasket
110 Gasket
120 Closing chamber bottom
130 Gasket
140 Gasket
160 Guide band
170 Allen screw ISO 4762 - M 12 x 40 -A4-80
180 Sliding piston
190 Gasket
200 Guide band
210 (1) Distributor
220 Disk stack, complete
230 Separating disk
240 (1) Bowl top, complete
250 Gasket
260 Gasket
270 Gasket
280 (2) Lock ring
290 Threaded pin ISO 4026- M 12x16-1.4571
300 Gasket
310 Gasket
320 Centripetal pump chamber
cover, compl.
cover
340 Lock ring
350 Spindle screw:
360 Gasket
510 Centripetal pump, compl.
520 Gasket
530 Sensing liquid pump
540 Gasket
550 Gasket
(1) IMPORTANT: This part can only be replaced by a WS service specialist!
The complete bowl must be re-balanced in one of our authorized workshops or in the manufacturer's plant.
A vibration check must be carried out on the machine by a WS service specialist.

124 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.4.1 Dismantling the bowl

" Switch off the main switch and lock it.

standstill.
(without braking!).

.,, Shine a torch through the sight
glasses in the frame.
no longer moving.
Fig. 116

'" shine a torch through the sight giass opening!
" Only visually check that the drive belt is no longer moving.
~- Do not reach for the drive belt through the sight glass opening!
., Clean the sight glass and screw it back on.

In the case of tom or defective drive belts or if the belts have come off:
standstill.
" Be sure to observe the run-down time of 200 minutes until dismantling the
separator!
" Applying the brake is not effective I
CAUT!ON: Danger of injury through very hot separator parts!

VVhen carrying out maintenance Vv'ork, there is a danger of injury through hot
GE/\ !v!echanicai Equiprnent ! GE ..t, \lllestfa;~a Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 125


" Refer to the motor nameplate .
" Take adequate preventive measures according to the national provisions (in
Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VOE (Verband
Deutscher Elektrotechnik/ Association of German Electrical Engineering) or of
" Any work on the motor may be carried out by an authorized electrician
only.
" Avoid damage to bowl parts when fitting and removing by

- precise positioning,
- no diagonal pull!
- selecting the low lifting speed of the hoist.
CAUTION: Use appropriate lifting devices to prevent accidents!

• Use suitably rated, intact hoists.

,., CAUTION: Avoid accidents by using undamaged, complete tools!

• Use tools only for their intended use!
• For special tools, see section 4.14 or spare parts catalog.
• For standard tools, see section 4.13.
• Do not use force when removing or fitting parts.
" Treat all bowl parts

- gently.
- Always set them down on a rubber mat or a wooden pallet.
CAUTION: Danger of imbalance!

If an installation is equipped with several separators:
• Do not interchange parts from different bowls.
The bowl parts are marked with the serial number of the machine or the last
three digits of the serial number.
CAUTION:
• Certain bowl parts (see sect. 4.4)
may be pre-assembled and ba-
lanced only by specialists from
Westfalia Separator or in work-
shops authorized by Westfalia
Separator.
S9
Fig. 117

126 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Hinge up hood
" Unscrew filling and displacement

water line 1.
Fig. 118
" Unscrew the handle connection

piece by lightly hammering with a
mallet (left-hand thread}, at the
same time
" hold the centripetal pump with sock-
et wrench 2.
Fig. 119
.. Remove handle connection piece 1.
Fig. 120
GE.t\ Mechanical Equipment i GEA \lVestfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 127
.. Unscrew four hex head screws with

washers.
Fig. 121
" Hinge up hood.
CAUTION: Danger of Injury by in-

correct hinging up of the hood!
" The stirrup must register properly.
Fig. 122
If necessary (see section 4.3.1:

• Take gasket 1 out of the upper sec-
tion of the frame.
Fig. 123

128 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Remove centripetal pump
Required special tools

- Ring spanner
- Mallet
" Undo the centripetal pump chamber

lock ring by striking the arm of the
ring spanner using a mallet (left-
hand thread}.
Fig. 124
., Unscrew the centripetal pump

chamber lock ring 1 by hand and
remove it.
" Press off centripetal pump chamber
cover 2 using a screwdriver.
Fig. 125
.. Screw handle connection piece into

the centripetal pump (left-hand
thread).
" Lift off the complete centripetal
pump and centripetal pump chamber
cover together.
Fig. 126
2062-9001-000 I 0510 129
" Screw centripetal pump chamber

lock ring on bowl top (left-hand
thread).
Fig. 127
.. Position the complete centripetal

pump with chamber cover onto cen-
tripetal pump chamber lock ring.
" Screw handle connection piece one
turn into the centripetal pump (left-
hand thread).
" Detach the sensing liquid pump by
striking lightly with a mallet.
Fig. 128
• Remove the following parts:

- sensing liquid pump 1 with in-
serted gaskets,
- centripetal pump chamber cover 3
with gaskets 2 and
- centripetal pump 4 with inserted
gasket.
Fig. 129
" Unscrew the centripetal pump

chamber lock ring (left-hand
thread).
Fig. 130

130 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Lifting out the bowl
Required special tool

0'>-------"""1i
- Socket wrench
" Unscrew the spindle screw (with

inserted gasket) with socket wrench
and commercially available ratchet
wrench (left-hand thread) and re-
move it.
Fig. 131

- Eye bolt 1
" Unscrew hexagon nut 2.

" Screw eye bolt 1 into the bowl bot-
tom.
" Force the bowl off the spindle cone
using an open ended wrench
Fig. 132
" CAUTION: Danger to life when

transporting heavy parts!
" Lift the bowl out of the frame with
the aid of a hoist.
" Set the bowl down on a rubber mat
or a wooden pallet for further dis-
mantling.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --···-······-······--·· ·----·--·-~······-·----
GEA rv1echanicai Equiprr,ent I GEA \PJestfaUa Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 131
Compressing the disk stack
.. Clean the threads in the distributor 1

with a brush .
.. Grease the thread of bowl top 2 (see
chapter 4.3.4).
Fig. 134

Compressing device
- Bolt unit 1
- Bell-shaped piece 2
Fig. 135
Bolt unit 1 comprises ring nut, lever, and bolt.

CAUTION: Avoid accidents by using undamaged, complete tools!
- The ring nut must always be screwed into the bolt and be secured with Loctite
275.
- The lever must always have smooth impingement surfaces (deburr if neces-
sary).
" Grease the thread and contact sur-

0 0 face of bell-shaped piece 2 (see
l chapter 4.3.4).
• Place bell-shaped piece 2 on the
bowl top.
- The 0 marks of the bell-shaped
piece and the bowl bottom must
be aligned.
• Screw on centripetal pump chamber
lock ring 3 as far as it will go (left-
hand thread).
Fig. 136

132 2062-9001-000 I 0510
.. Screw bolt unit 1 through the bell-

shaped piece and thread it into the
distributor as far as it will go, using
an open-ended wrench.
Fig. 137
"' Unscrew two threaded pins from the

bowl lock ring.
11~
L~----~·
Fig. 138
T2062031

- complete ring spanner 1
" Remove two hexagon nuts 3 from

hex head screws 2.
T2062032
Fig. 139
··~ .
2062-9001-000 I 0510 133
Important:
'" The 0-marks of the bowl lock ring
and of the bowl bottom must be visi-
ble.
- Do NOT hide them under ring
spanner 1 !
" The arrow and the "open" mark must
show upwards.
- The bushes of the ring spanner 1
must register in the holes of the
bowl lock ring.
Fig. 140
• Bolt ring spanner 1 to the bowl lock ring.

" Screw in two hex head screws 2 of the ring spanner and tighten firmly.
" Screw on the lever until it rests on

the bell-shaped piece.
" CAUTION: Danger of injury
through rotating lever!
- Be careful when working in the
area around the lever.
.. Firmly hit the lever with the mallet
- The disk stack is thus com-
pressed.
Fig. 141

through the lever!
• Strike open the bowl lock ring with a
mallet (left-hand thread).
- The bowl lock ring is thus un-
screwed from the thread of the
bowl bottom.
Fig. 142

134 2062-9001-000 I 0510

" Hold the bowl lock ring together with

the ring spanner and lift them off us~
ing chains and hoist.
Fig. 143
Remove bowl top
" CAUTION: Risk of injury through

rotating lever!
- Work cautiously in the area
around the lever .
.. Carefully loosen bolt unit vvith mal-
let.
Fig. 144
.. Remove bolt unit from distributor

using the wrench.
Fig. 145
GEA rv1ecl1anical Equipment I GEA \iV'estfa;ia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 135
.. Screw bolt unit into the bell-shaped

piece .
.. Screw the bolt unit far enough to
display thread start (see detail).
Fig. 146
.. Before lifting off the bowl top, check

that the centripetal pump chamber
lock ring is firmly bolted to the bowl
top.
CAUTION: Danger to life when

• Carefully lift off only the bowl top
(with fitted gaskets) using the centri-
petal pump chamber lock ring, bolt
T2os2041 unit and hoist.
'-F-ig-.--~--------"-"----' - Immediately interrupt transport if
147
the bowl bottom is lifted more than
1 cm above the positioning sur-
face.
- With a few mallet strikes to the edge of the bowl bottom, carefully separate
the bowl top from it.
- If the bowl top cannot be separated from the bowl bottom because of heavy
soiling, lower again and remove as follows.

136 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Remove heavily soiled bowl top (see Fig. 148 to Fig. 154):
Additional required special tools

~Disk 3
~
l-·--·-·
2
Fig. 148
" Screw bolt unit 1 into the distributor

with a wrench as far as it will go.
Fig. 149
" Turn lever 1 to under the eye bolt.

.. Unscrew the centripetal pump
chamber lock ring 2.
Fig. 150
GEA fJ1echanical Equipn1ent I GEA \lVestfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 137
" Raise bell-shaped piece 1.

.. Slide washer 2 on the bolt offset
(see detail).
Fig. 151
" Set bell-shaped piece 2 back on

0 0 bowl top.
- The O mark on the bell-shaped
piece and bowl top must be
aligned .
.. Screw in centripetal pump chamber
hand thread).
Fig. 152
.. Completely unscrew the bolt unit

from the distributor by turning coun-
ter-clockwise with wrench complete-
ly to end of thread.
- The bowl top is forced off.
Fig. 153

138 2062-9001-000 I 0510
" Before lifting off the bowl top, check

top.

" Do NOT step under hanging load.
" Only lift off the bowl top.
- Immediately interrupt transport if
the distributor is lifted together
T2062041 with the disk stack.
Fig. 154
" Carefully lift off the bowl top (with fitted gaskets) using the centripetal pump
chamber lock ring, bolt unit and hoist.
" Detach the compressing device from the bowl top.
Removing the separating disk
" Remove the separating disk from

the distributor neck.
Fig. 155
Remove disk stack and distributor
e Screvv the bolt unit of the compress~

ing device into the distributor with
the wrench.
Fig. 156
c-;EA Pv1echanlcal Equipment I GEA \PJ"estfaHa Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 139

" Using bolt unit and hoist, lift off and
set aside distributor together with
disk stack.
" Remove hoist and screw out bolt
unit.
Fig. 157
Remove sliding piston
.. Insert spindle screw 1 in the hub.
Fig. 158
• Lubricate sliding piston 1 thread

(see section 4.3.4).
" Screw bell-shaped piece of com-
pressing device on sliding piston.
• Screw bolt unit 2 through the bell-
shaped piece into the sliding piston.
Fig. 159

2062-9001-000 I 0510
" Force the sliding piston from the

bowl bottom by turning clockwise.
Fig. 160

" Remove the sliding piston (with fitted
gaskets) using bolt unit, bell-shaped
piece and hoist.
unit.
Fig. 161
Remove annular piston and dosing chamber bottom
" Loosen the twelve Allen screws

holding the closing-chamber bottom
and the bowl bottom together.
Fig. 162
-----------·-··-··------····-··---··-·-·········-·····-······--····-----
C;EA Pv1echanical Equipment i GEA \lVestfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 141
~
- Compressing device:
Bolt unit 1
~2 Bell-shaped piece 2
- Assembling device 3
T2062062
Fig. 163
" Mount bell-shaped piece 1 in bowl

bottom.
• Mount assembling device 2 on bell-
shaped piece 1.
" Loosen three Allen screws 3 with
ratchet (using extension and insert).
" Slide washers 4 of the assembling
device outward under the edge of
the annular piston 5.
" Make sure that washers 4 properly
bite under the annular piston .
.. Firmly re-tighten three Allen screws
Fig. 164
3.
• Screw bolt unit 1 into the bell-

shaped piece .
.. Force off closing chamber bottom 3
together with annular piston 4 by
turning bolt unit clockwise.
Fig. 165
• CAUTION: Danger to life when

• Lift out closing chamber bottom 3
and annular piston 4 (with fitted
gaskets) using hoist.
Fig. 166

142 2062-9001-000 I 0510
'" Drive apart annular piston 1 and

closing chamber bottom 2 with mal-
let as illustrated.
T2062073
" Remove spindle screw 1.
Fig. 168
If necessary:
'" Remove gasket 1 and piston guide
ring 2.
Fig. 169

2062-9001-000 I 0510 143
Remove water chamber bottom

- Eye bolt 1

.. Screw eye bolt 1 in bowl bottom and
firmly tighten with wrench.
Fig. 170

- Do NOT step under hanging load .
.. Attach bowl bottom in the load hook
of the hoist and lift to eye level.
• Remove four Allen screws 1 from

water chamber bottom 2 .
.. Force off water chamber bottom 2
with a screwdriver and remove with
fitted gaskets.
T2062077
Fig. 171

144 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.4.2 Cleaning the bowl

It is generally not necessary to dismantle self-cleaning bowls for cleaning after
separation unless
- the nature of the product makes it necessary,
- the separator is to be shut down for a lengthy period (see section 4.9) .
.. Dismantle and clean the bowl for checking from time to time. See section
4.3.1 - Maintenance schedule.
" Use only a cleaning agent that is approved for the field of application!
" Do not use acid or chloric cleaning agents.

Chlorine attacks stainless steel parts.
" Dissolve dried scale with citric acid .
., For cleaning the individual disks and bowl parts

Do not use metal scrapers and metal brushes!
" Take the gaskets out of the bowl

parts.
" Clean the grooves and gaskets to
avoid corrosion in the grooves.
" Replace damaged, very swollen,
hardened or brittle gaskets immedi-
ately.
Fig. 172
., Clean the small holes for the feed and discharge of the operating liquid with
particular care to ensure trouble-free bowl ejections.
" Clean the distributor between the

ribs with the brush on the inside and
outside.
When the distributor neck is very
dirty, the feed clogs which can
cause overflow.
T20530S2
Fig. 173
.. Apply a thin coat of grease to the guide surfaces and threads of the bowl
parts after drying (see 4.3.4 Lubrication schedule).
" Reassemble the bowl immediately after cleaning!
- - - - - ..-----·····--··· -·----·-·
(J[A rv1echanical Equipn1ent I GEA \iVestfaiia Sep!.trator
2062-9001-000 I 0510 145
4.4.3 Cleaning the frame
CAUTION: Danger to life through electrical components!

" Never rinse off the motor with a direct water jet.
ATTENTION!
• Do not use acid or chloric cleaning agents.
Chlorine attacks stainless steel parts .
.. Dissolve dried scale with citric acid.
" Clean the inside of the upper section of the frame from time to time:
To do this:
- Refer to themaintenance schedule (section 4.3.1 ),
- dismantle the bowl (section 4.4.1 ).
IMPORTANT: Cleaning liquid is es-

caping!
1 When the bowl has been removed, no
cleaning liquid must spill onto the drive
belt via the spindle.
.. Make sure that protection cap 2 and
spindle cap 1 are installed with in-
serted gasket.
Fig. 174
4.4.4 Cleaning the strainer and the operating water feeding system
• The strainer and the operating water feeding system must be cleaned de-
pending on the quality of the operating water and overall load. See section
" Use citric acid in case of furring.
• Thoroughly clean the parts with water.
Replacing or cleaning the filter element

" Close the main valve for operating water, filling and displacement water.

separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 °C (158 - 212 °F) ).

146 2062-9001-000 I 0510
" Undo screw 1 (jaw span 22) with

fitted gasket 2.
" Remove filter element 3.
" Clean or replace filter element 3.
- Use citric acid in case of furring.
- Thoroughly clean the parts with
water.
2058029
Fig. 175
"' Fit the cleaned or new filter element 3.

IMPORTANT: Cooper strip to the inside!
" Firmly screw in screw 1 with fitted gasket 2 so that it seals well.
4.4.5 Cleaning the motor

" Keep the motor clean as specified in the manual.
GEA rv1ecl"'1anical Equiprnent I GEA \lVesiJaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 147
4.4.6 Important instructions for assembling the bowl

When the bowl has not been correctly assembled or is inadequately cleaned,
forces can be produced in the high-speed rotating bowl which endanger the
operating safety of the separator!
Therefore, the cleaning instructions (section 4.4.2) and assembling instructions
(section 4.4.7) must be exactly followed.
Pay particular attention to the following:
ATTENTION!
• Before assembling the bowl, check to be sure that the guide and contact sur-
faces of the bowl are clean .
.. Grease the guide surfaces as specified in the lubrication schedule (see 4.3.4) .
.. Some bowl parts are arranged in

I fixed positions relative to one an-
other.
Q • Locking devices and alignment

IMPORTANT:
Fig. 176
0 S10
erated.
" When fitting the bowl parts, make

sure that the "O" marks on all parts
are aligned.
(Only then will the parts fit correctly
over arresting pins and guide ribs).
Fig. 177
• Avoid damage to bowl parts when fitting and removing by

- no diagonal pull!
" CAUTION: Use appropriate lifting devices to prevent accidents!



148 2062-9001-000 I 0510
·--------------------------------------~""""""---

.. Use tools only for their intended use!
- For special tools, see section 4.14 or spare parts catalog.
- For standard tools, see section 4.13.
" Do not use force when removing or fitting parts.

" If the plant has several separators,
be sure not to interchange parts of
different bowls.
The parts are marked
- with the serial number or
- the last three digits of the serial
number.
Fig. 178
e Thoroughly clean the gasket

grooves of the individual bowi parts
and apply a thin coat of grease .
., After fitting check that
- the gaskets are not twisted,
- the gaskets are evenly positioned
in the groove.
T2059018
Fig. 179
GEA Mechanical Equiprneni I GEA \Nesi:faiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 149
4.4.7 Assembling the bowl
• Pay special attention to sections "Safety", 4.4.2 and 4.4.6

• For dimensions of the parts see 4.4 - exploded view.
Installing the water chamber bottom

- Eye bolt 1
" Unscrew hexagon nut 2

.. Screw ring nut 1 into the bowl bot-
tom and tighten with the wrench.
Fig. 180
• Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in the

0 0 grooves of the water chamber bot-
tom .
.. CAUTION: Danger to life when
" Hang the bowl bottom into the load
hook of the hoist and transport
above eye level.
" The 0 marks of the bowl bottom and
the water chamber bottom must be
aligned.
• Place water chamber bottom in the
bowl bottom.
• Screw in the four Allen screws 3
holding the water chamber bottom
and bowl bottom together tight.
Torque: 35 Nm
3
35Nm
T2062081
Fig. 181

150 2062-9001-000 I 0510
.. Clean the bowl hub with a suitable

cloth.
The cone must be clean and dry.
" ATTENTION: Do not grease the
bowl hub!
"' CAUTION: Danger to life when

.. Set down the bowl bottom with fitted
water chamber bottom.
Fig. 182
.. Remove the hoist and unscrew the ring nut.
Installing the annular piston and the closing chamber bottom
.. Grease guide surfaces as specified

in the lubrication schedule (see
.1 4.3.4).
" Insert gasket 1 and piston guide
ring 2 into the grooves of the bowl
bottom.
Fig. 183
.. For replacing the polyamide gas-

ket 1 see section 4.4.9.
" Place gasket 2 into the groove of the
annular piston and press in evenly
and firmly .
4.3.4).
Fig. 184
~·-,----···-·----·----------------------------------
GE/\ fv1echGnic~i Equipment i GEA \i'Vestfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 151
" Insert annular piston 1 into bowl

bottom 2.
Fig. 185
.. Insert guide strip 1 bit by bit into the

groove of the closing chamber bot-
tom and carefully tap it in with a mal-
let!
" Thoroughly clean guide strip 1 and
its guide surfaces.
Fig. 186
• Insert gaskets 1 and 3 in the

grooves of the closing chamber bot-
tom.
4.3.4).
Fig. 187

- Two complete assembling devices:
Hex head screw 1
Wing nut 2
Pipe 3
Hexagon nut 4
r2062104
Fig. 188

152 2062-9001-000 I 0510
'" Insert two assembling devices into

opposite bores of closing chamber
bottom 5 and fasten with hexagon
nuts 4.
" The "O" marks of the closing cham-
ber bottom and the bowl bottom
must be aligned.
" Insert closing chamber bottom 5 into
the annular piston by means of the
assembly devices.
Fig. 189
'" Remove two hexagon nuts 4.

" Screw two assembling devices into
the bowl bottom.
" Insert the closing chamber bottom
into the bowl bottom by turning wing
nuts 2 clockwise
" Remove the assembling devices.
Fig. 190
" The "O" marks of the bowl bottom

and the closing chamber bottom
must be aligned.
" Fasten closing chamber bottom 1
onto the bowl bottom by tightening
twelve Allen screws 2 crosswise.
Fig. 191
" Screw tight the twelve Allen screws

holding the closing chamber bottom
Torque: 80 Nm
Fig. 192
GEA rv1echanical Equiptr1ent I GEA \llfesifaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 153
.. Make sure that piston guide ring 1 is

firmly located in the groove.
Fig. 193
Installing the sliding piston
.. Insert spindle screw 1 into the hub.
Fig. 194
" Insert guide strip 2 bit by bit into the

groove of the sliding piston and
carefully tap it in with a mallet!
• Thoroughly clean guide strip 2 and
its guide surfaces.
• Insert gasket 1 in the groove of the
sliding piston.
" Grease guide surfaces as specified
4.3.4).
Fig. 195

154 2062-9001-000 I 0510
.. Grease the thread of sliding piston 1

(see chapter 4.3.4).
.. Screw bell-shaped piece 3 of the
compressing device into the thread
of the sliding piston.
" Screw bolt unit 2 into the sliding
piston, through the bell-shaped
piece.
Fig. 196

" Install the sliding piston (with fitted
gasket) into the bowl bottom using
compressing device and hoist.
" Remove the hoist and unscrew the
bolt unit.
Fig. 197
"' Unscrew spindle screw i.
Fig. 198
.. Place disk 1 onto the bell-shaped

piece.
" Screw the complete eye bolt 2 into
the bowl hub as far as it will go.
" Press the sliding piston into its seat,
as far as it will go, by turning the
hexagon nut clockwise with an
open-ended wrench .
.. Remove the tools.
Fig. 199
GEA ivlechanicai Equipment i GEA \iVestfa:ia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 155
Installing the distributor and the disk stack
ATTENTION: Pay attention for cor-

rect total number of disks!
It is marked on the blind disk, e.g.
84/1:
- Total number of disks A and B = 84
(number of disks with spacers A +
number of blind disks B)
- Number of blind disks B 1=
T2062100
Fig. 200
ATTENTION: The last disks must be

properly located in the guide ribs of
the distributor!
" Stack the disks carefully on the dis-

tributor neck.
Fig. 201
" Screw the bolt unit of the compress-

ing device into the distributor with a
wrench as far as it will go.
Fig. 202

156 2062-9001-000 I 0510

,. Install the distributor together with
the disk stack with the bolt unit and
hoist.
- The 0 marks of the bowl bottom
and the distributor must be
aligned.
" Pay attention to correct positioning!
" Remove the hoist and unscrew the

bolt unit.
Fig. 203
Fitting the separating disk
" Place the separating disk on the

0 0 distributor neck.
and the distributor must be
aligned.
)
_,.//
Fig. 204
Installing the bowl top
" Thoroughly clean the grooves for

gaskets 1 and 2 in the bowl top.
" Check gaskets 1 and 2:
- replace when damaged,
- install if missing.
" For replacing the polyarnide gasket
3 see section 4.4.8.
120!:>/041
Fig. 205
GEA rv1echanical Equiprnent I GEA \tVestfa!ia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 157

Compressing device
- Bolt unit 1
Fig. 206

- The ring nut must always be screwed into the bolt and be secured with Loc-
tite 275.
sary).
" Grease the thread of the bowl top

• Place bell-shaped piece 2 on the
bowl top.
" The "O" marks of the bell-shaped
piece and the bowl top must be
aligned.
hand thread).
• Screw in bolt unit completely into the
bell-shaped piece.
Fig. 207

0 transporting heavy parts!
• Install the bowl top using bolt unit
and hoist.
.. Pay attention to correct positioning!
• The "O" marks must be aligned.
• Remove the hoist.
T206?055
Fig. 208

158 2062-9001-000 I 0510
" Screw bolt unit 1 through the bell-

Fig. 209
IMPORTANT: Prevent seizing of

threads!
" The following parts must be carefully
cleaned, wiped dry and greased in
accordance with the lubrication
schedule (see 4.3.4).
- threads and guide surfaces of
bowl bottom and lock ring
- contact surfaces of bowl top and
bowl lock ring
Fig. 210
'" CAUTION: Danger to life when

" Hold bowl lock ring together with

ring spanner and gradually lower
them onto the bowl bottom using
chains and hoist.
.. Screw the bowl lock ring by hand
into the thread of the bow! bottom
as far as possible (left-hand
I thread).
T2062091 I
Fig. 211
" Remove hoist and chains.
GEA rv1echanical Equiprnent I GEA \lVestfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 159
.. Screw on the lever until it rests on

" Firmly hit the lever with the mallet.
pressed.
Fig. 212

through the lever!
" Strike the bowl lock ring with a mal-
let until the "O" mark is reached
' (left-hand thread).
CAUTION:
Fig. 213
.. Remove centripetal pump chamber lock ring, compressing device and com-
pressing device.
• Screw in two threaded pins.
T2062106
Fig. 214

160 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Installing the complete bowl and the centripetal pump
., Clean and wipe dry the spindle

cone with a suitable cloth.
IMPORTANT:
Do not grease the conical parts!
12062057
Fig. 215

- Eye bolt 1

" Screw eye bolt 1 completely into the
bow! bottom.
Fig. 216
"' CAUTION: Danger to life when

"' Carefully place the bowl using eye
bolt and hoist on the spindle cone.
Fig. 217
------------------------------------- ·-~~~---~-···
GEA Mechanical Equiprnent I GEA '1N'estfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 161
" Unscrew the eye bolt from the bowl

bottom.
Fig. 218
Required tools
- Socket wrench
- Torque wrench
" Provide spindle screw 2 with gas-

ket 1.
• Put spindle screw into socket
wrench and screw in (left-hand
thread).
Fig. 219
CAUTION:
life!
• Tighten spindle screw.

Torque: 80 Nm
Fig. 220
• Check that spindle and bowl are

centred.
The control dimension B
- is 5 ±1.5 mm
- between the bowl and the upper
section of the frame.
• Pay attention to bowl height A (see

section 4.7.1).
Fig. 221

162 2062-9001-000 I 0510
" Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in the

grooves of the bowl top.
Fig. 222
" Insert gasket 1 in the centripetal

pump groove.
'" Lightly grease threads and contact
surfaces of the centripetal pump .
.. Install centripetal pump 2.
Fig. 223
.. Mount the centripetal pump chamber

cover .
., The 0 mark on the centripetal pump
chamber cover and bowl bottom
must be aligned .
., Pay attention to correct positioning.
Fig. 224
" Insert the gasket in the groove of the

centripetal pump chamber cover.
Fig. 225
GEA !viechanical Equiprnent I GEA v~vestfaBla Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 163
.. Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in the sensing

liquid pump grooves.
.. Grease guide surfaces.
" Install sensing liquid pump.
Fig. 226

cover.
.. The "O" marks of the centripetal
pump chamber cover and the bowl
bottom must be aligned.
Fig. 227
• Grease the threads on the bowl top

and on the centripetal pump cham-
ber lock ring as specified in the Lu-
brication schedule (see 4.3.4).
CAUTION:
A loose centripetal pump chamber
lock ring can endanger life!
• Screw tight the centripetal pump
chamber lock ring using the ring
spanner (left-hand thread).
• Pay attention to section 4.7.1.

164 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.4.8 Replacing the polyamide gasket (bowl top)

., For standard tools, see section 4.13.
REMOVAL
IMPORTANT: Fragile bowl part!
- Do not damage the bowl top groove
when drilling!
.. Drill through the damaged polya-

mide gasket twice centrically and
vertically.
- with a 2 mm drill bit
- at a distance of approx. 50 to
60mm.
T2062068
Fig. 229

while screwing!
.. Screw two wooden screws in the
holes in the polyamide gasket.
., Force off the old polyamide gasket
with the wood screws.
" Lever it out of the groove bit by bit
using a screwdriver.
T2062069
Fig. 230
If the polyamide gasket can't be removed, repeat this procedure.
FITTING
.. Thoroughly clean and dry the groove.
"' Heat the gasket in approx. 80 °C (176 °F) water for 5 minutes.
:; Wipe dry the gasket.
" Fit the gasket into the groove of the

bowl top (with the narrow side facing
the bowl top).
.. Place on a wooden block.
"' hammer the gasket evenly into the
groove.
Fig. 231
GEA Pv1echanical Equipment I GEA VVestfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 165
., The sealing surface of the gasket

must not protrude by more than 0.5
mm from the surface "A" of the bowl
top.
E
E
lJ')_
0
x
ro
E
T2059027
Fig. 232

166 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.4.9 Replacing the polyamkle gasket (bowl top)
Important: Time·consuming installation!

Change the poiyamide gasket only when it is damaged .
.. For standard tools, see section 4.13.
REMOVAL
IMPORT ANT: Sensitive bowl part!

- Do NOT damage the ring piston
groove when drilling!
" Drill through the damaged polyam-

ide gasket twice centrically and
vertically.
60mm.
T2059105
Fig. 233
IMPORTANT: Sensitive bowl part!

groove when screwing in!
" Screw two wooden screws in the
.. Force off the old polyamide gasket
with the wood screws and
.. lever it bit by bit out of the groove
12059106
Fig. 234
Note:
GE.A Mechanical Equipment I GEA Westfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 167
FITTING
., Thoroughly clean and dry the

groove .
.. Heat the new polyamide gasket in
approx. 80 °C (176 °F) water for 5
minutes.
" Wipe the gasket dry and press it
evenly and firmly into the groove, at
four opposite points
Fig. 235
• Insert annular piston 1 into bowl

bottom 2.
Fig. 236

let!
its guide surfaces.
Fig. 237

168 2062-9001 -000 I 0510

tom.
4.3.4).
Fig. 238
" Clamp mounting ring 1 under the rim

of the closing chamber bottom.
Fig. 239

Hex head screw 1
Wing nut 2
Pipe 3
Hexagon nut 4
T2062104
Fig. 240
e Insert two assembling devices into

nuts 4.
~ The 0 marks of the closing chamber
bottom and the bowl bottom must be
aligned .
.. Insert closing chamber bottom 5 into
assembly devices.
Fig. 241
GEA Mechanical Equipment I GEA. Westfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 169
" Remove two hexagon nuts 4.

the bowl bottom.
nuts 2 clockwise
~
T2062095
Fig. 242
" The 0 marks of the bowl bottom and

the closing chamber bottom must be
aligned.
Fig. 243
• Screw tight the twelve Allen screws

Torque: 80 Nm
Fig. 244
• Insert spindle screw 1 into the hub.
Fig. 245

170 2062-9001-000 I 0510
" Unscrew the twelve Allen screws

holding the bowl bottom and the
closing-chamber bottom together.
Fig. 246
9-2
- Compressing device
Bolt unit 1
Bell-shaped piece 2
Fig. 247
" Insert bell-shaped piece 1 into the

bowl bottom.
" Fit assembling device 2 onto bell-
shaped piece 1.
" Loosen three Allen screws 3 using
the ratchet wrench (with extension
and socket).
" Slip three disks 4 of the assembling
device towards the periphery, under
the rim of annular piston 5.
"' Make sure that disks 4 are properly
positioned under the annular piston.
Fig. 248 " Firmly re-tighten Allen screws 3.
"' Screw bolt unit 1 into bell-shaped

piece 2
" Force off closing chamber bottom 3
turning the bolt unit clockwise.
Fig. 249

2062-9001-000 I 0510 171

., Lift out closing chamber bottom 3
and annular piston 4 (with fitted gas-
kets) using the hoist.
Fig. 250
" Separate annular piston 1 from clos-

ing chamber bottom 2 by tapping
with a mallet - as illustrated.
1
T2062098
Fig. 251
• Remove the mounting ring.
Fig. 252
• Unscrew spindle screw 1.
Fig. 253

172 2062-9001-000 I 0510
" By carrying out several measure-

ments around the entire circumfer-
ence of the annular piston, check
that the polyamide gasket is seated
parallel in the groove.
TZ04E057
Fig. 254

2062-9001-000 I 0510 173
4.4.10 Reworking the sliding piston

The bowl seal consists of
.. sealing surface A of the sliding piston (Fig. 255) (new condition of the sliding
piston rim H: 41.0 mm high) and
.. polyamide gasket B of the bowl top (Fig. 256).
When worn, the sealing surface A of

the sliding piston can be remachined
up to max. 1.0 mm several times be-
fore it has to be replaced.
ATTENTION! When the first erosion

marks (0.2 to 0.3 mm deep) are de-
tected, i.e. as soon as the bowl
starts to leak:
• Remachine the sealing surface of
the sliding piston.
T2062017
Fig. 255
.. When remachining, make sure that

- the sealing surface A is machined cleanly and
- the sliding piston rim His still at least 40.0 mm high.
Standard parameters for remachining the sealing surface A

Surface quality Ra 2 µm (Rz 12.5 µm)
Tool Hard metal steel of ISO quality M 30 or K 20
Speed 55 min- 1
Cutting depth max. 0.15 mm
Forward feed max. 0.1 mm/lrevolution
ATTENTION! After facing

• fit a new polymide gasket B into the
bowl top (see section 4.4.8)!
B T2060012
Fig. 256

174 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.5 Closing the hood
If the gasket has been removed to

keep to the service intervals:
" insert a new gasket 1 in the groove
of the upper part of the frame.
Fig. 257
CAUTION: Danger of injury!

.. Unlock the shackle.
"' Carefully close the hood.
Fig. 258
,. Screw in four hex head screws (M

12 x 50) with washers.
\ T2062011 I
Fig. 259

2062-9001-000 I 0510 175
If the gaskets 2 have been removed

to keep to the service intervals:
.. Provide handle connection piece 1
with new gaskets 2 .
.. Apply a thin coat of grease to the

guide surfaces and threads of the
handle connection piece as speci-
fied in the lubrication schedule (see
4.3.4).
T2062012
Fig. 260

- Socket wrench 2
• Introduce handle connection piece 1

into the hood .
., Hold the centripetal pump with the
socket wrench and screw in by
lightly hammering the handle con-
nection piece with a mallet (left
1 hand thread).
Fig. 261
.. Carefully clean the holes in the non-

return valve and
• rinse with water.
• Check the functionality of the non-
return valve.
T2057226
Fig. 262
.. Assemble and connect filling and

displacement water feed line 1.
Fig. 263

176 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.6 Drive
280.4
~-- 80.1
'' - --- 280.6
280.2
A20G0138
Fig. 264 Exploded view of th e d nve

.
2062-9001-000 I 0510 177
Pos. Designation Dimensions
Neck bearing bridge, comp!.

10 .1 Neck bearing bridge:
10 .2 Neck bearing pressure ring
10 .3 Threaded plug
10 .4 Set of neck bearing springs
10 .5 Spring piston
20 Gasket
30 Pivoting bearing
35 Cylindrical pin (secured with Loctite 275)
40 Bearing housing
50 Gasket
60 Washer 12.5x22x1
70 Hex head screw M 12 x 45
75 Lock washer
Spindle assembly
80 .1 Spindle
80.2 Bearing cover
80.3 Bearing cover
80 .4 Cylindrical roller bearing
80.5 Ring
80.6 Gasket
80.7 Ball bearing protection ring
80.8 Angular contact ball bearing
80.9 Bearing sleeve
Cylindrical pin (secured with Loctite 275)
80 .10 Cup spring
80 .11 Retaining ring 16 x 1
90 Lock washer
Centrifugal clutch, comp!.
280 .1 Clutch pulley
280.2 Grooved ball bearing
280 .3 Distance sleeve
280 .4 Retaining ring 125 x 4
280.5 Clutch driver
280.6 Retaining ring 80 x 2.5
280.7 Flat belt pulley
280.8 Allen screw M 10 x 45
280.9 Clutch shoe
280 .10 Weight
280 .11 Washer
280 .12 Hex head screw M 10 x 50
280 .13 Lock washer
290 Disk (motor size: 180) 17x42x3
290 Disk (motor size: 200, 225) 22 x 42 x 3
300 Lock washer
310 Hex head screw (motor size: 180) M 16 x 140
310 Hex head screw (motor size: 200, 225) M20x140
320 Drive belt

178 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.6.1 Important instructions for fitting and removing the drive


"' Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a
standstill.
(without braking!).

.. Shine a torch through the sight
glasses in the frame .
.. Visually check that the drive belt is
no longer moving.
Fig. 265

.. Unscrew the sight glass,
.. shine a torch through the sight giass opening!
.. Only visually check that the drive belt is no longer moving.
- Do not reach for the drive belt through the sight glass opening!
" Clean the sight glass and screw it back on.

,. Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a
standstill.
.. Be sure to observe the run-down time of 200 minutes until dismantling the
separator!
,. Applying the brake is not effective!

separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 °C (158 - 212 °F)).
GFA ~v~.echanical Equipment! GEA~ '1'VestfaHa Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 179


.. Refer to the motor nameplate.
" Refer to the motor instruction manual.
the local electric power company .
., Any work on the motor may be carried out by an authorized electrician
only.
• Avoid damage to drive parts when fitting and removing by

- no diagonal pull!

" Use suitably rated, intact hoists.


- Do not use force when removing or fitting parts.
• Treat all drive parts
- gently.
IMPORTANT: Before fitting the drive parts

• Thoroughly clean and dry the drive chamber.
Use only a cleaning agent that is approved for the field of application!
• Check the ball bearings of the spindle and centrifugal clutch.
Use only the ball bearings specified in the parts list!
IMPORTANT: To avoid bearing damage,

• always operate the separator with installed bowl!

180 ·------··-------------------------~·-·~--~-~-~·~------
2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.6.2 Removing the drive belt and spindle assembly
, .. Pay special attention to section 4.6.1
.. Undo the oil drain screw and

" Drain the oil into an oil pan (approx.
5 litres).
Fig. 266
., Undo four hex head screws 1.

" Remove the brake with brake hous-
ing 2.
Fig. 267
" Remove eight hex head screws 1
r=~~ r fastening the flange on the lower

r~;c~~i/
l\,_\•·····~O:~o~
Fig. 268
GE.A. iv!echanica! Equiprnent I GE.L\ VVestfai;a Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 181
., Pull the motor together with inter-

mediate flange and centrifugal clutch
out of the flange guide (approx. 10
mm) with the aid of the hoist.
- Drive belt is slackened!
ATTENTION!
" Pull the drive belt off the flat belt
pulley (centrifugal clutch) down-
wards.
Fig. 269
Required tools:
- Two screw in guide pins 1
(M 16 x 180)
• Place the motor together with the

intermediate flange and centrifugal
clutch back onto the lower section of
frame.
ATTENTION!
To avoid damage to the unit "motor-
intermediate flange-centrifugal
clutch":
Fig. 270 • screw two guide pins 1 diametrical-
ly opposite.
• Lift the motor together with the in-

termediate flange and centrifugal
clutch out of the lower section of the
frame.
Fig. 271
Remove the operating water con-

nection in the upper section of
frame:
• Undo nut 2.
• Take off tube 3.
Fig. 272

182 2062-9001-000 I 0510
-----------------------------------~-··--------·--·-----~~·-~~~---~~-
., Remove spindle cap 1 with fitted

gasket.
Fig. 273
" Undo six hex head screws 1.

" Remove ring 2 and protection cap 3
with fitted gasket 4.
Fig. 274
Remove speed monitoring device:

" Unscrew hex head screw 1.
" Remove speed monitoring device 2
and keep in lower part of frame.
A206201B
--- I
Fig. 275
.. Take the drive belt out of the lower

section of frame.
----....
------ -------------- -~ /\2062011
Fig. 276
GEA fviechanicai Equipment I GEA \iiJestfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 183
Required tools:
- Three hex head screws 4
(M 10 x 80)
• Unscrew the three hex head screws

1 with lock washers 2.
" Force spindle assembly 3 out of the
lower part of the frame by means of
hex head screws 4.
(For dismantling the spindle assem-
bly, see section 4.6.3.)
Fig. 277
Required tools:
(M 10 x 80)
., Screw hex head screws 1 into the

puller holes.
" Force the neck bearing bridge 2 off
the frame by turning the screws 1
clockwise.
Fig. 278
ATTENTION!
Before dismantling the neck bearing
bridge
• Mark the side of the neck bearing
bridge facing the motor.
A Motor side
A2060129
Fig. 279
• Remove the neck bearing bridge

with neck bearing pressure ring from
the lower section of the frame.
(For dismantling the neck bearing
bridge, see section 4.6.7.)
A2052006
Fig. 280

184 2062-9001-000 I 0510
® Unscrew the four hex head screws 1

with lock washers 2.
(/
A2060017
Fig. 281
Required tools:
- Two hex head screws 2
(M 10 x 50)
" Force bearing housing 1 off with hex

head screws 2.
.. Remove bearing housing from lower
section of frame together with pivot-
ing bearing 3, washers 4 and in-
serted gasket 5.
Fig. 282
2062-9001-000 I 0510 185
4.6.3 Dismantling the spindle assembly
Spindle assembly
A2060079
Fig. 283
If necessary:
.. Loosen retaining ring 1 from the
bearing sleeve groove and
" remove the eight cup springs 2.
A2060080
Fig. 284

186 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Required tools:
- Hex head screw ( M 10 x 85)
~
- Hexagon nut (M 10)
" Force the bearing sleeve 1 together

\ 2 1 with cylindrical pin 2 off the spindle.
A2060081
Fig. 285
---7-- Required tools:

- commercially available pulling devi-
ce
- Open-ended wrench
2 " Pull off from the spindle:

- two grooved ball bearings 1
- Ball bearing protection ring 2
A2060082
Fig. 286
Required tools:
- commercially available pulling devi-
ce
- Open-ended wrench
" Pull off from the spindle:

- ring 1 with inserted gasket
- cylindrical roller bearing 2
- bearing cover 3
- bearing cover 4
Fig 287
GE/\ iv1echGnicoi Equipment i GEA \iVestfana Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 187
4.6.4 Removing the centrifugal clutch
I· Pay special attention to section 4.6.1
" Undo four hex head screws 1.

ing 2.
I
//
'I
I
I
A2057110
Fig. 288
" Remove eight hex head screws 1

fastening the flange on the lower
Fig. 289
• Pull the motor together with inter-

mediate flange and centrifugal clutch
out of the flange guide (approx. 1a
mm) with the aid of the hoist.
ATTENTION!
• Pull the drive belt off the flat belt
wards.
Fig. 290

188 2062-9001-000 I 0510
" Place the motor together with the

clutch back onto the lower section of
frame.
ATTENTION!
4 To avoid damage to the unit "motor-
intermediate flange-centrifugal
clutch":
.. Screw in two guide pins 1 (M 16 x
180) diametrically opposite.
Fig. 291
"' Lift the motor together with the in-

termediate flange and centrifugal
clutch out of the lower section of the
frame.
Fig. 292

90° transporting heavy parts!
.. Turn the motor together with the
clutch through 90° (upside down)
with the aid of the hoist.
.. CAUTION: Secure from rolling
away and overturning using suit-
able aids!
Fig. 293
" Unscrew the three hex head screws

" Take off disk 3.
A2060026
Fig. 294
GEA rv'lechanical EquipiT1ent I GEA '/Vestfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 189
.. Take clutch shoe 1 and weights 2

out of the clutch driver.
A2060027
Fig. 295
.. Screw two studs 1 and ring nuts 2

into the tapholes of the centrifugal
clutch.
.. Hang the centrifugal clutch into the
hoist.
• CAUTION: Secure from rolling
able aids!
A2060062
'
Fig. 296
• Arrest the clutch driver 1 with an

open-ended wrench.
• Unscrew hex head screw 2 with lock
washer 3 from the motor shaft end.
" Take off disk 4.
A2060028
Fig. 297

Motor sizes 180:
- Threaded pin 2 (M 16 x 50)
Motor size 200, 225:
- Threaded pin 2 (M 20 x 50)
" Arrest the clutch driver 1 with an

open-ended wrench.
ATTENTION! For protecting the mo-
tor shaft end:
" Screw threaded pin 2 into the thread
of the motor shaft end.
Fig. 298

190 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Required special tools:

- Hex head screw (M 30 x 240)
" Screw the hex head screw into the

clutch driver .
.. Arrest the clutch driver with an open-
ended wrench .
.. Force the centrifugal clutch off the
motor shaft end by turning the hex
head screw clockwise.
Fig. 299
" Remove hex head screw 1 from the

clutch driver and threaded pin 2 from
the motor shaft end.
'
Fig. 300
l
.. Place the centrifugal clutch on a
suitable base with the aid of a hoist.
" CAUTION: Secure from rolling
able aids!
Fig. 301
" Take the retaining ring out of the

clutch driver groove.
Fig. 302
GE/\ ~v~echc-1nical Fquipment I GEA VVestfal~a Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 191
.. Place the clutch pulley with fitted flat

belt pulley and clutch driver on a
wooden base.
" Position wooden block.
" Drive the clutch driver downwards
by means of light hammer blows.
" Loosen the clutch driver from the
seat of the ball bearings.
Fig. 303
.. Turn the clutch pulley together with

fitted flat belt pulley 90° (upside
down) with the aid of the hoist.

able aids!
.. Take the retaining rings out of the

clutch drum grooves.
A2060031
Fig. 304
Required tools
- Disk (0 86 - 94 mm)
- Wooden block
- Hammer
.. Turn the clutch pulley with fitted flat

belt pulley through 180° and
" place it on wooden supports as
shown.
• Drive the three grooved ball bear-
ings and distance sleeve out of the
clutch pulley.
Fig. 305
• Remove the hoist, ring nuts 1 and

studs 2.
Fig. 306

192 2062-9001-000 I 0510
If necessary
.. sUns crew eight
· Alie
3~elt
eparate the fl t
the clutch pulle; fro~
n screws 1 t
pulley 2
Fig. 307
2062-9001-000 I 0510 193
4.6.5 Fitting the spindle assembly
., Pay special attention to section 4.6.1

" For dimensions of the parts see 4.6 - exploded view.
.. Clean the bearing housing with fitted

pivoting bearing and cylindrical pin.
r~ma
The cylindrical pin is glued in with
Loctite 275 .
.. Insert gasket in groove of bearing
housing.
Fig. 308
• Screw bearing housing 1 together

with pivoting bearing 2 into place
with the four hex head screws 3,
lock washers 4 and washers 5.
.. For number of washers, refer to
section 4.7.1.
Fig. 309
.. Ensure correct assembly of neck

bearing bridge (section 4.6.7).
• Provide neck bearing bridge 1 with
gaskets 2.
IMPORT ANT: Pay attention to the
correct fitting position of the neck
bearing bridge!
- The holes in the neck bearing bridge
must be aligned with the holes in
• Fit neck bearing bridge 1 in the low-
er part of the frame with the marked
Fig. 310 side facing the motor.

194 2062-9001-000 I 0510
!la
When the drive belt is dismantled, torn
or not tensioned, the neck bearing
pressure ring 1 is eccentric relative to
the side facing away from the motor in
the neck bearing bridge.
The neck bearing pressure ring 1 is
pulled into the centric axis when the
belt is tensioned!
A = Motor side
Fig. 311
! 100 "C
5 " Turn spindle through 180° (upside
down) .
.. Mount bearing covers 1 and 2.
" Heat cylinder roller bearing 3 in oil to
100 °C (212 °F).
IMPORTANT: Pay attention to the
~ 1-®.~
correct fitting position of the cylin-
drical roller bearing!
-- The large outer diameter of the
bearing inner ring must face bearing
cover 2.
Fig. 312
" Slide cylinder roller bearing 3 onto the spindle.

" Slide ring 4 with fitted gasket 5 on to the spindle as far as it will go (cylindrical
roller bearing).
• Heat ball bearing protection ring 1
~~
and angular contact ball bearing 2 in
oil to 100 °C (212 °F).
IMPORT ANT: Bearing damage is
caused by incorrect fitting!
HA
- When fitting angular contact ball
bearings 2 on the spindle, make
sure that the narrow rim of each
ball bearing inner ring faces toward
tho cninrflo anrl
I ~ ,.....1a•~tV
.. ...... ...... .._.11\...11.
~~11
.. . I I A20600051
" Slide ball bearing protection ring 1
and angular contact ball bearing 2
Fig. 313 onto the spindle.
GEA ~v~er-hanical Equipment I GEA \lVestfa!!a Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 195
.. Fit cylindrical pin 1 in the bearing

sleeve and secure with Loctite 275 .
.. Heat bearing sleeve 2 in oil to
100 °C (212 °F) .
.. Important! Before installation of
bearing sleeve 2, make sure that the
fitted angular contact ball bearings
have cooled to room temperature.
" Slide bearing sleeve 2 over the an-
gular contact ball bearing and ball
bearing protection ring.
A2060086
Fig. 314

correct fitting position of the cup
springs (see sketch)!
" Fit eight cup springs 1 to the bearing
sleeve.
,. Fit the retaining ring 2 in the groove
of the bearing sleeve.
Fig. 315
" Install the assembled spindle as-

sembly 1 in the lower part of the
1--1- frame.
Pay attention to correct positioning!
Pay attention to the correct fitting
position of the spindle!
- The holes in the bearing cover must
be aligned with the holes in the low-
er section of the frame.
• Screw tight the spindle with the
three hex head screws 2 and lock
washers 3.
Fig. 316
" Place drive belt on the spindle.
A2062013
Fig. 317

196 2062-9001-000 I 0510
-----·-------------
4.6.6 Fitting the centrifugal clutch
" Pay special attention to section 4.6.1

., For dimensions of the parts see 4.6 • exploded view.
If necessary:
., Clean clutch pulley 1 and flat belt
pulley 2 and
., firmly secure with eight Allen
screws.
A2060040
Fig. 318
.. Clean clutch pulley 1 with fitted flat

belt pulley 2.
" Insert retaining ring 3 in the lower
groove.
" Check correct fitting of retaining ring
3.
Fig. 319
GE,L\ ~..~echanical Equipment I GEA \"lestfa!ia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 197
Required tools:
- Disk 2 (0 86 - 94 mm)
- Wooden block
- Hammer
ATTENTION: incorrect fitting may

lead to damaged bearings!
- Disk 2 may only contact the outer
ring of grooved ball bearing 1!
.. Carefully drive the first grooved ball

bearing 1 with disk 2 up to the re-
taining ring.
Fig. 320

ring of grooved ball bearing 1 !
.. Carefully drive the second grooved

ball bearing 1 with disk 2 up to the
first grooved ball bearing.
Fig. 321

198 2062-9001-000 I 0510

- Distance sleeve 1 may only contact
the inner ring of grooved ball bearing
2!
" Position distance sleeve 1 on the

grooved ball bearing inner race.
Fig. 322

" Carefully drive the third grooved

\ JI
distance sleeve.
Fig 323
CAUTION: Danger of imbalance

through incorrect fitting!
" Insert retaining ring 2 180° offs et
relative to retaining ring 1 in the up-
per groove.
Fig. 324
···-···-·--·-··--··-----
GLA rv1echanical Equipn1ent I GEA \PYestfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 199
Required tools:
- two studs 1
- two ring nuts 2
.. Screw studs 1 and ring nuts 2 into

the tapholes of the centrifugal clutch.
" Hang the centrifugal clutch into the
hoist.
Fig. 325
Required tools:
- Disk 1 (0 61 - 69 mm)

• Turn clutch pulley with fitted flat belt
pulley and installed grooved ball
bearings through 180° with the aid of
the hoist.
Fig. 326
ATTENTION: incorrect fitting may lead to damaged bearings!

- Disk 1 may only contact the inner ring of the grooved ball bearing!
" Place the ball bearing inner race on disk 1.
IMPORTANT:
" Distance sleeve 1 must be flush with
the inner rings of the grooved ball
bearings .
.___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.A2060132
Fig. 327

200 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Required tools:
- Wooden block
- Rubber mallet
" Carefully hammer the clutch driver

into the grooved ball bearing with
light blows.
Fig. 328
" Turn clutch pulley with fitted flat belt

pulley and inserted clutch driver
through 180° with the aid of the
hoist.
" Fit the retaining ring in the groove of
the clutch driver.
Fig. 329
If the intermediate flange has been

dismantled:
" Bolt tight the motor and intermediate
flange with four hex head screws 1.
Fig. 330

goo - Do NOT step under hanging load.
" Turn the motor together with the
intermediate flange through 90° (up-
side down) with the aid of the hoist.
able aids!
A2060125
----···--·-··---------~
Fig. 331
GE/\ ivlechanical Equipn1ent I GEA '\lVcstfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 201
Required tools for motor sizes 180:

- Hex head screw 3 (M 16 x 300)
- Hexagon nut 4 (M 16)
Required tools for motor sizes 200, 225:

• IMPORTANT: Pay attention to the

feather key groove.
'" Fit the assembled centrifugal clutch
on the motor shaft end .
.. Arrest the clutch driver 1 with an
open-ended wrench .
.. Insert assembling device 2 - as
shown - and
" Screw hex head screw 3 with hex-
2 agon nut 4 into the motor shaft end.
Fig. 332
., Pull the centrifugal clutch onto the

motor shaft end as far as it will go,
by turning hexagon nut 4 with a
second open-ended wrench.
Fig. 333
• Undo hex head screw 3 together

with hexagon nut 4 and
• detach assembling device 2.
Fig. 334

202 2062-9001-000 I 0510
ATTENTION! With driver 1 arrested:

" Provide hex head screw 2 with lock
washer 3 and washer 4 and
© screw it into the motor shaft end.
Fig. 335

- Always replace all clutch shoes
simultaneously!
Never replace individual clutch
shoes.
- Make sure that the clutch shoes are
evenly spaced!
" Fit weights 1 and clutch shoes 2.
A2062025
Fig. 336
., Insert disk i.
,. Fasten disk with three hex head
screws 2 and lock washers 3.
A2060061
~--------···-·---------······--········J
Fig. 337
" Remove the hoist, ring nuts 1 and

studs 2.
Fig. 338
GEA fvlechanicai Equipment i GEA \iVestfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 203
4.6.7 Replacing the neck bearing springs (neck bearing bridge)
General
The neck bearing springs 2 are ex-
posed to different stresses due to the
drive belt tension (stronger stress on
the motor side of the neck bearing
2 bridge).
To check the condition of the neck
bearing springs 2,
" they must be dismantled periodically
(see section 4.3.1) and individually
(see Fig. 340).
A2060121 " and their length measured (see Fig.
~-F,-.g.------------~ 341 -dimension A) .
339
., Dismantle threaded plug 1, neck
bearing spring 2 and spring piston 3
from the marked motor side of the
neck bearing bridge.
A2060136
Fig. 340
" Check neck bearing spring 2 for

deformation.
Neck bearing spring - New con-
dition:
A= 48 ±0.5 mm
Neck bearing spring - Deforma-
tion limit:
A= 47 mm
• If dimension "A" is below the de-

A2057188 formation limit:
- Replace neck bearing springs ac-
Fig. 341
cording to Fig. 342 in the neck
bearing bridge.

204 2062-9001-000 I 0510
.. Replace the neck bearing springs

H1 of the strongly stressed motor
side as illustrated with the neck
bearing springs H2 of the less
stressed side of the neck bearing
bridge.
" To fit the neck bearing springs refer

to Fig. 343.
Fig. 342
.. Coat spring piston 3 liberally with

grease .
.. Insert the neck bearing springs 2 in
the spring pistons 3.
" Fit threaded plug 1.
" Screw threaded plug 1 together with

neck bearing spring 2 and spring
piston 3 into the taphole of the neck
bearing spring and tighten.
Fig. 343
~
Do not forget to order a new set of neck bearing springs from Westfalia Separa-
tor!
The deformed neck bearing springs must be replaced after 8000 operating
hours.
Dismantling the complete neck bearing bridge
., Remove nine threaded piugs 1, neck

bearing springs 2 and spring piston
3.
" Lift neck bearing pressure ring 4 out
of neck bearing bridge 5.
A2060004
Fig. 344
2062-9001-000 I 0510 205
Assembling the complete neck bearing bridge

Ila
The spindle cylindrical roller bearing is inserted into neck bearing pressure ring
4, which is held in position by a radial arrangement of nine evenly distributed
springs 2.
" Install neck bearing pressure ring 4

in the neck bearing bridge 5.
ATTENTION: The nine recesses of
the pressure ring must be located at
the nine holes in the neck bearing
bridge.
" Coat spring piston 3 liberally with
grease.
" Insert the neck bearing springs 2 in
A2060005
.. Fit threaded plug 1.
Fig. 345
" Screw the nine threaded plugs 1 together with the neck bearing springs 2 and
spring pistons 3 into the nine tapholes of the neck bearing bridge 5 and
tighten.

206 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.6.8 Fitting the motor
~l"~P-ay_s_p_e_ci_al_a_tt_e_nt_io_n_to~se_c_ti_on_d_.._s_.1_.~~~~~~~~~~~
ATTENTiONi To avoid damage to
the unit "motor-intermediate flange-
centrifugal clutch":
" Screw in guide pins (M 16 x 180)
diametrically opposite.
Fig. 346

~ Do NOT step under hanging load.
'" Carefully place the motor with
bolted intermediate flange and
mounted centrifugal clutch on lower
section of frame with the aid of a
hoist.
Fig. 347
" Unscrew guide pins 1.
Fig. 348
c.-;EA rv1echanicai Cqulpment I GEA \t'Vestfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 207
" Pull the motor together with inter-

mediate flange and mounted cen-
trifugal clutch out of the flange guide
(approx. 10 mm) with the aid of the
hoist.
.. Use the hoist to move the motor to
the upper section of the frame.
Fig. 349
ATTENTION:
" Degrease the belt contact surfaces
of the spindle and clutch drum.
" Fit the drive belt:
- through upper section of frame
opening 1 and
- through brake housing opening 2
(centrifugal clutch).
• Pay attention to correct seating of
the drive belt on flat belt pulley and
spindle pulley.
Fig. 350
" Unscrew the screw plug 1 from the

lower part of the frame.
Fig. 351
• Screw the complete clamp bolt

through the hole in the frame and
into tapped hole of centrifugal clutch
as shown.
" Tension the drive belt by turning
hexagon nut 2 clockwise until the
intermediate flange locks into the
frame opening.
A2060056
Fig. 352

208 2062-9001-000 I 0510
© Fasten the intermediate flange with

eight hex head screws 2 (M 16 x
I 40).
i==:::i-'
~~=======4
2J .. ATTENTION: Unscrew complete
clamp bolt 1 out of the centrifugal
clutch againi
A2060057
Fig. 353
@ Screw in the screw plug 1.

" Firmly tighten four hex head screws
2 (M 16 x 40) which connect the mo-
tor to the intermediate flange.
" Remove the hoist.
Fig. 354
~
Due to the design concept used, the spindle is at an inclined angle relative to
the opposite side of the motor when the drive belt has not been fitted or ten-
sioned (see Fig. 355, pos. 2).
The spindle is pulled into the centric axis when the belt is tensioned (see Fig.
355, pos 1)!
" Check
- that the spindle 1 can be turned
easily.
- whether the spindle 3 has been
pulled into the centric axis by
tensioning the drive belt 3 {see
Fig. 221.
A206200B I
Fig. 355
GEA Mechanical Equiprnent I GEA Wesi.faiia Separnlor

2062-9001-000 I 0510 209
Installing the speed monitoring de-

vice:
.. Place speed monitoring device 2 on

the lower section of frame and
" fasten with hex head screw 1.
.. Align proximity switch 1 as illus-

trated.
ATTENTION!
The distance X between the spindle
and the proximity switch must be 2.5
mm.
Fig. 357
.. Insert protective cap 3 with fitted

gasket 4 and ring 2 and
.. Fasten with six hex head screws
(M8x16).
Fig. 358
• Place spindle cap 1 with fitted gas-

ket on the spindle.
• Pay attention to correct positioning!
Fig. 359

210 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Fitting the operating water feeding

TOP device in the upper section of
frame:
.
· c : : ; f . · .
. .. Slide nut 2 over pipe 3.
/ .. Fit pipe with nit into the screwed
3 connection 1 and slide on as far as it
will go.
ATTENTION: The narrow end of the

pipe must be directed upwards!
A2062017a " Tighten nut 2 firmly.

Fig. 360
" Fit brake and brake housing 2 to the

lower section of the frame with four
hex head screws 1 (M 10 x 20).
Fig. 361
.. Screw in oil drain screw 1 with fitted

gasket.
" Screw in the sight glass 2.
" Fill in oil as described in section
4.3.3 and
.. Screw in plug 3 with gasket
A2057123
Fig. 362
Danger to life and limb through electric current!

.. Have the motor connected by an authorized electrician!
C3EA Pv'lechanical [quipn1ent I GEA VVestfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 211
4.6.9 Replacing the clutch shoes in the separator
, .. Pay special attention to section 4.6.1
REMOVAL
.. Undo four hex head screws 1.

.. Remove the brake with brake hous-
ing 2.
Fig. 363
" Loosen three hex head screws 1

with lock washers 2 which connect
disk 3 to the clutch driver until the
first clutch shoes can completely be
seen.
IMPORTANT: Loosen the hex
head screws evenly (do not un-
screw completely!) .
.. Take out all clutch shoes individual-

I ly.
A2060073
ii
Fig. 364
FITTING
IMPORTANT:
• Insert the clutch shoes in the clutch
driver, one after the other (3 shoes
for each groove!)
• Make sure that the clutch shoes are
evenly spaced.
I
Fig. 365

212 2062-9001-000 I 0510
IMPORTANT: Avoid damaging parts

through tilting!
- Screw in three hex head screws 2
evenly.
" Fasten disk i with three hex head

screws 2 and lock washers 3.
A2060075
Fig. 366
" Fit brake and brake housing 2 to the

lower section of the frame with four
Fig. 367
GEA fv'lechanical Equiprnent I GEA V'Vestfaila Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 213
4.7 Height adjustment
For reasons of operating reliability, adjustment of

• bowl height
• and centripetal pump play
must be performed with particular care.
4.7.1 Bowl height

The bowl height is correctly adjusted at the factory before shipment of the sepa-
rator.
IMPORTANT: The bowl height may only be measured with installed and
tensioned drive belts!
CHECKING
Check the bowl height and readjust if necessary:
- after replacing the drive parts,
- after fitting another bowl,
- after fitting a different centripetal pump,
- as soon as the centripetal pump exhibits grinding marks.
CAUTION:
• Firmly tighten bowl lock ring.

- The "O" marks on the bowl bottom
or top and on the bowl lock ring
must be aligned.
Fig. 368
The control dimension A

- is 20.5 ±2 mm
- between upper edge of bowl lock
ring and upper section of frame.
Fig. 369

214 2062-9001-000 I 0510
ADJUSTING
Bowl too high Increase number of washers 3.
Bowl too low Reduce number of washers 3.
Washer:
Inner diameter, 12.5 mm - outer diameter, 22 mm - thickness, 1 mm
_,_,, __ ·--
CAUTION: Danger of crushing by

falling separator parts!
" Four hex head screws 1 of bearing
housing 2 must be
- unscrewed evenly and in di-
agonal sequence (do not re-
move!);
- loosen until a gap A is created for
the required number of washers 3
between the lower section of the
frame and the bearing housing.
A20600~
Fig. 370
" Remove hex head screw 1 indivi-

dually and
" add or remove washer(s) 3.
" Screw in hex head screw 1 again.
" Remaining hex head screws 1 must
be:
- removed individually
- fitted with the same number of
washers 3 and
- screwed in again.
A2060019
Fig. 371
.. Screw bearing housing 2 tightly into

place via the four hex head screws 1
with the necessary washers 3.
.. Check bowl height.
\r A2060020
Fig. 372
GEA l'v1echanical Equipn1ent I GEA \lVestfaUa Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 215
4.7.2 Centripetal pump clearance
., Move the centripetal pump axially to

and fro in the centripetal pump
chamber .
.. Measure the total clearance A (ap-
prox.10 mm).
" Close the hood .
.. Check:
- Is the hood correctly seated on
the frame rim?
- Are the hood screws tightened
T2()44()09 firmly?
Fig. 373
.. Lightly apply a thin coat of lubricant
! to the threads of the centripetal

pump as specified in the lubrication
schedule.
" Fit handle connection piece 1 into
the centripetal pump.
• hold the centripetal pump with sock-
et wrench 2 .
the centripetal pump as far as it will
go (left-hand thread).
Fig. 374
" Hold the handle connection piece 1.

" Turn the socket wrench 2 until the
handle connection piece is raised
slightly from the hood (approx. 0.5
mm).
Fig. 375

216 2062-9001-000 I 0510
" Raise the handle connection piece

t to its maximum.
" Measure the axial clearance.
A12= 4-6 mm
T204401Z
Fig. 376
Check:
" Axial clearance too large:
- Lift off the bowl, see section 4.7.1 - Adjustment.
" Axial clearance too small:
- Lower the bowl, see section 4.7.1 -Adjustment.
GEA IV1ecl·1anical Equipn1ent I GEA VVestfaHa Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 217
4.8 Final checks after assembling the separator
Before starting the separator

Perform the following checks after assembling and before starting the separator
depending on the scope of the repair work:
Checks Section
1. Bowl height 4.7.1

2. Oil level in drive chamber 4.3.3
3. Direction of rotation of the bowl 4.1.4
4. Bowl speed 4.1.5
5. Starting time of bowl I current consumption 4.1.5
6. Running characteristics of the separator 3.8.1
7. Suction line of the product pump (if installed) for leakage
When starting the separator

Perform the following checks after carrying out repairs:
Checks Section
1. Tern perature of product

2. Observe discharges for water, solids and oil to see if the 3.3
bowl is operating correctly.
4.9 Before a long-term shut-down of the separator

" Disconnect all electrical connections .
.. Thoroughly clean the separator (see section 4.4.2, 4.4.3 and 4.4.4).
• Dry and grease the clean bowl parts and all unvarnished machine parts to
avoid corrosion damage.
• Store the clean, greased bowl in a dry place until reuse .
., Store the gaskets in a cool, dry, dust-free dark room to prevent them from be-
coming brittle.
" Check if the shut-off valves for water leak.
• If necessary, disconnect the water lines to prevent damage by dripping water.
4.9.1 Preserving the separator

• Drain the lube oil completely.
Observe the local regulations on disposal of the lubricating oil.
" Fill the drive chamber with a slushing oil, e.g. Shell oil S.7294 (SAE 30/SAE
50), to the middle of the sight glass .
.. Let the separator run without bowl for approx. 1 minute to make sure that all
drive parts are coated with slushing oil.

218 2062-9001-000 I 0510
CAUTION!
Risk of injury through rotating separator parts.
" Keep a safe distance away from the rotating spindle .
.. After switching off the separator, wait until the spindle has stopped rotating .
.. Take off the drive belt.
4.9.2 Preserving the motor

.. Follow the instructions of the motor manufacturer.

2062-9001-000 I 0510 219
4.1 O Storage
ATTENTION!
Improper and incorrect storage of the separator and control unit can dam-
age or destroy their components.
Store accessories like spare parts, tools, lubricants properly!
~
Gaskets, hoses and hosepipes, for example, change their physical properties in
unfavourable storage conditions. This can result in a shorter service life. They
can be rendered useless due to excessive hardening, softening, permanent de-
formation, flaking, cracks or other surface damage.
IMPORTANT:
• Outdoor exposure is not admissible!

If the separator and control unit are not installed immediately after delivery,
" store the separator and control unit in the original transport packaging.
Recommended storage tern perature: + 5 to +50 °C (41 - 122 °F)
IMPORTANT:
A storage time of more than 12 months of the separator and control unit is only
possible after consulting the manufacturer.
4.10.2 Separator
The following procedure applies
- for storing the separator before commissioning and
- for storing the separator before a prolonged standstill period.
IMPORTANT:
.. Store the separator with dismantled bowl!
• Store the clean, greased bowl in a dry place.

• Store the gaskets in a cool, dry, frost-free, dust-free dark room to prevent
them from becoming brittle.
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to +50 °C (41 - 122 °F)
• The separator with dismantled bowl must be stored dry and free from vibra-
tions.
(Vibrations during standstill can cause bearing damage!).
" Protect the drive spindle and motor from dust.
• Store all other separator parts dry and frost-free.
4.10.3 Control system

• The control unit and accessories must be stored dry, dust-free, vibration and
frost-free.
• Protect from excessive heat!

220
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~·
2062-9001-000 I 0510
Recommended storage tern perature: + 5 to + 45 °C (41 - 113 °F)
4. 11 Before restarting
Before re-starting, the operator must ensure

.. that all separators and plant components have been function-checked
by competent personnel (qualified specialists) .
.. that the maintenance intervals are adhered to.
,. that the separator is assembled correctly by competent persons.
Note:
If the bowl has been out of operation for longer than 6 months (e.g. due to a
long standstill period or storage),
,. check all bowl parts as specified in the maintenance schedule (table "Mainte-
nance after 4000 operating hours or after 6 months at the latest").
If the separator has been out of operation for longer than 12 months (e.g. due
" check all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule (table
"Maintenance after 8000 operating hours or after 1 year at the latest).
e Replace if necessary.
Procedure:
" Drain the slushing oil.
Observe the local regulations on disposal of the slushing oil.
" Remove the grease from all unpainted machine parts .
., Check gaskets.
Replace damaged, very swollen, hardened or brittle gaskets immediately .
., Assemble the bowl (see section 4.4.7) .
.. Check the ball bearings of the spindle and centrifugal clutch (if applicable).
When damaged, replace the ball bearings immediately !
"' Fit drive belt (see section 4.6.5 or 4.6.8).

When damaged, replace the drive belt immediately !
.. Assemble the separator correctly .

.. Fill the drive chamber with the specified lube oil as specified in section 4.3.3.
GEA lv1ed1ar1ic21i Equiprnent I GEA Westfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 221
4.12 Disposal
When the equipment is no more useful or the separator has reached the end of
its service life, the operator is responsible for appropriate, environmentally
friendly disposal of its components and materials such as
- metal,
- plastics,
- glass,
- gear and lube oils on a mineral-oil basis,
- synthetic gear and lube oils,
- cleaning liquids,
- electric and electronic apparatus.
• ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION!
Be sure to adhere to applicable environment-protection legislation!
4.12.1 Gear and lubricating oils
Replacement and disposal of waste

oils recovered during the oil changes
and maintenance work must be carried
out carefully.
• Collect dripping oil to prevent danger
• They can be injurious to health,
depending on their chemical compo-
sition.
• Waste oil must be disposed of in
Fig. 377
llm
Special attention must be paid to
the directive issued by the operator
on handling waste oils and the local
regulations.

222 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.12.2 Cleaning liquids

Only those cleaning agents may be used that are specified in the overall docu-
mentation (see data sheet).
CAUTION: Danger of chemical burns!

The cleaning agents can be acids and caustics which, if used carelessly,
can cause severe damage to persons.
~
Pay particular attention to the directive issued by the operator on handling the
cleaning agents used and the local disposal regulations.
4.12.3 Separator
Before disposing of the separator
.. Drain the gear oil and dispose of it properly in accordance with section 4.12.1.
,. Dismantle the separator, remove any lubricant sticking to separator parts and
dispose of them separately or recycle them where appropriate.
GEA rv1echanical Equiprnent I GEA \lVestfaiia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 223
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

224 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.13 Standard tools

are commercially available tools to be supplied by the customer.
~-~_:J
=----------
4 5 ~ 7
su .~
9
~ 10 11
14
i
16
i
17
I18
2062-9901-St
Fig. 378
GEA rv'lec1~1anical Equipn1ent I GEA Vllestfaiia Separator

226 2062-9001-000 I 0510
4.14 Special tools
~g ® @ _./,
10 20 30 40 100 110
~ w
~
~
~
a
• i
~ 310
ll
340 400
200 320 330
~
~
500 600 610
620 630 640 650

2062-9901-000
Fig. 379
-·--·---·-·--------· - - - -
2062-9001-000 I 0510 227
.. Special tools are provided by the manufacturer.

., For the delivery of special tools, the packing list supplied with the sepa-
rator is applicable.
Pos. Designation
10 Socket wrench, (centripetal screw)

20 Mallet
30 Offset screwdriver (centripetal pump)
40 Ring spanner (centripetal pump lock ring)
100 Hexagon nut M 16 (centrifugal clutch)
(motor size: 180)
(motor size: 200, 225)
110 Lifting-eye nut (centrifugal clutch)
200 Lubricating grease
310 Hex head screw M 16 x 300 (centrifugal clutch)
(motor size: 180)
320 Hexagon nut M 30 x 240 (centrifugal clutch)
330 Hexagon stud M 12 x 80 (centrifugal clutch)
340 Threaded pin M 16 x 50 (centrifugal clutch)
(motor size: 180)
340 Threaded pin M 20x50 (centrifugal clutch)
400 Clamp bolt, compl. (centrifugal clutch)
500 Disk (centrifugal clutch)
600 Compressing device, complete (disk stack compressing device)
610 Assembling device complete (sliding piston I closing chamber bottom
I annular piston)
620 Mounting ring
630 Ring spanner (bowl lock ring)
640 Eye bolt, compl. (bowl)
650 Jack, complete (closing chamber bottom I annular piston)

228 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Notizen
Notater
Notes
GE!\ rv1echanica! Equipment/ GEA \/Vestfa!ia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 229
5 Spare parts


230 2062-9001-000 I 0510
5.1 Spare part requirements
" Use only genuine spare parts from GEA

Westfalia Separator. The original spare parts
are listed in the spare parts catalog.
- safety risks,
for the responsible persons. In such cases, GEA
VIJestfalia Separator accepts no liability or war-
ranty claims.
5.2 Guide to ordering spare parts

A rapid and correct supply of spare parts can only be guaranteed if your order
includes the following details:
.. Separator model see name-plate

e.g. OSE 80-0136-067
" Serial-No. see name-plate

e.g. 9000-223
.. Designation see order-specific parts catalog

e.g. frame
" Part Number see order-specific parts catalog

e.g. 2050-1100-020
The part number is also marked on almost all the
individual parts.

.. Bowl S/N If this differs from the serial number.
The bowl serial number is engraved on the bowl
lock ring, bowl bottom and bowl top.
Only required when ordering spare parts for pump and pump connection parts:
" Model and number of see pump nameplate

pump
The information provided must be complete to avoid incorrect deliveries.
Available sets of spare parts

The following sets of spare parts are available depending on the respective
technical maintenance intervals:
- Set of spare parts "bowl and hood" for operation of 1 year or 8000 hours
- Set of spare parts "Drive" for operation of 1 year or 8000 hours
- Set of spare parts "Drive" for operation of 2 years or 16,000 hours
The maintenance schedule forms the systematic maintenance basis for the use
of these sets of spare parts.
GCA rv1echanical Cquiprnent / GEA V\lestfalia Separator

2062-9001-000 I 0510 231
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
/
Notater
Notes
Note

232 2062-9001-000 I 0510
Notes
Notizen
Notes
;(
GEA Mechanicai Equipment I GEA Westfaiia Separator


Werner-Habig-Sir. 1, 59302 Oelde (Germany)
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@qeaqroup.com, www.westfalia-separator.com

Werner-Habig-Str. 1, 59302 Oelde (Germany)
Phone +49 2522 77-0, Fax +49 2522 77-2488
ws.info@qeaqroup.com, www.westfalia-separator.com
I Instruction manual
Type OSE 40-91-067
No. 2063-9001-200
Edition 0609
Mechanical Separation I GEA Westfalia Separator

J Instruction manual
Type OSE 40-91-067
No. 2063-9001-200
Edition 0609

2 2063-9001-200 I 0609
TRANSLATION OF ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Werner-Habig-StraBe 1 · D-59302 Oelde (Germany)
Tel.: +49 (0) 25 22 I 77-0 Fax: +49 (0) 25 22 I 77-17 78
ws.systems@geagroup.com · www.westfalia-separator.com

2063-9001-200 I 0609 3

Type S/N:~I--~
Year of manufacture
Max. admissible rated bowl speed in min- 1
3
Max. admissible density in kg/dm of product
Heavy
liquid kg/dm
3 Solids kg/dm
3
I
~----~
3


4 2063-9001-200 I 0609
For your safety

e Take special care when carrying out operations marked with this
symbol -
e Strictly adhere to instructions marked with this symbol.

~ e This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-

nents and the processes.
e Observe the accident prevention regulations!

• When operating electrical apparatus, certain parts carry danger-

ous voltage.
• Only qualified or authorized specialized staff may operate, main-

e Follow the instructions in the manual.

• Operate the separator only in accordance with agreed process


2063-9001-200 I 0609 5
e Maintain the separator

e Carry out safety checks on the separator,

e Liability for the function of the machine passes to the owner.


6 2063-9001-200 I 0609
-----------------------------,·-~·--------·---------
\____ ~____s_a_fe_t_y_.p_r_e_c_a_u_ti_o_n_s_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _s~j
1. 1 Correct usage ........................................................................................ i 0

1.3 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 12
1.3.1 Safety markings and their meaning....................... .. ......... 13
1.5.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel ....................... 18
1.5.3 Assembly ............................................................................................... 19
1.5.4 Electrical installation ............................................................................. 22
1.5.5 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 23
1.5.6 Start-up .................................................................................................. 25
1.6 Corrosion ............................................................................................... 33
1.7 Erosion ................................................................................................... 34

2.3 General .................................................................................................. 41
2.4 OSE ... -91- ............................................................................................. 41
2.5.2 Bowl...................... ................ .. .......................................... 47
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics.............................. ............................... 48
2.5.4 Drive............. .. ..................................... 51
2.6 Regulating ring.... ............... .. ...................................................... 56
2.6. 1 Determination by table...................... ..... . 56
2.6.2 Determination by experiment.. ............................................................ 57
2.7 Supervisory equipment.. ............................................... 59
2. 7. 1 Pressure transmitter .............................................................................. 59
2.7.2 Vibration monitoring (Option). ........... 61
2.8 Product feed and discharge lines ..................................................... 63
2.8. 1 Throughput monitoring (Product feed line A) ........................................ 63
2.8.2 Determining the throughput (Product feed line A). .. .................... 64
2.9 Technical data................... .. ............................................... 66
3 Operation ss j
3.1 Technical information.......... . ... ........ ... . . .. ....... ... 70

3. 1. 1 Notes on separation ............................................................................ 70
3.1.2 General information on bowi ejection ..... . ...................... 70
Mechanical Separation I GEA Westfaiia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 7
3.2 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 72

3.8.2 Bowl faults .............................................................................................. 86
4 Installation - Maintenance - Repair 93

4.1.1 Transporting the separator .................................................................... 96
4.1.3 Motor ...................................................................................................... 99
4.3.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................... 115
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from Westfalia
Separator ............................................................................................. 121
4.4 Bowl ..................................................................................................... 122
4.4.1 Dismantling the bowl ............................................................................ 124
4.4.7 Ass em bli ng bowl .................................................................................. 149
4.5 Closing the hood .................................................................................. 175
4.6 Drive ..................................................................................................... 178
4.6.4 Dismantling the centrifugal clutch ........................................................ 189
4.7.1 Bowl height .......................................................................................... 211

8 2063-9001-200 I 0609

4.10 Storage ................................................................................................ 217
4.10.1 After delivery ........................................................................................ 217
4.10.2 Separator ............................................................................................. 217
4.10.3 Control system ..................................................................................... 217
4.12 Disposal ............................................................................................... 219
4.12.3 Separator ............................................................................................. 220
4.13 Standard tools ...................................................................................... 222
4.14 Special tools ........................................................................................ 224
5 Spare parts

~Jlechanical Separation I GEA 'w'Vestfalia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 9
1.1 Correct usage ........................................................................................ 10

1.3 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 12
1.5.3 Assembly ............................................................................................... 19
1.5.5 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 23
1.5.6 Start-up .................................................................................................. 25
1.6 Corrosion ............................................................................................... 33
1.7 Erosion ................................................................................................... 34

10 2063-9001-200 I 0609
1.1 Correct usage

"' for the separation of liquid mixtures which consist of two liquids, with simulta-
neous removal of the solids contained in the liquids.
"' for removing (clarifying) solids from a liquid.

,. for a very high bowl speed.
of the product:
- Temperature
" for products which contain no corrosive and erosive components.
material.
processed.
Westfalia Separator. Refer to the data sheet and contractually agreements.
" in accordance with the admissible utilities (cleaning agents, lubricants, operat-
ing liquids etc.) specified in the documentation or on the data sheet.

" paying attention to the safety precautions, the instruction manual of the sepa-
"' adhering to the data on the nameplate, e.g. maximum admissible bowl speed.
- agreed areas,
- temperatures
- pressures etc.
tion.
tended use of the separator must be passed on to the operating personnel by
the plant operator.
i'v1echanicai Separation I GEA Westfaiia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 11

compliant.

.. Persons who have not read and understood these basic safety precautions.
.. Persons who have not read and understood the instruction manual of the
separator .
.. Persons who have not been briefed on proper and correct operation .
.. Persons who have not been adequately trained .
.. Persons who have not reached the minimum age of 18 years.

plate.
• when the max. admissible bowl speed has been exceeded through electrical
or electronic manipulation of the drive .
., in an incomplete state of assembly, e.g.
• by persons who are not adequately trained.
" when the separator is operated with spare parts which do not come from

erty and persons!

12 2063-9001-200 I 0609
1.3 Safety markings

clearly visible.
All safety markings on the separator, control system and p!ant components must
always be in perfect condition.
" Clean dirty safety markings.
r~-~-- 1 s
11
:::::~ 2 r-;;;:;i
. ~.::,.·_··---~ ~ 2057023
1 Pictograms (safety stickers)

2 Oil quality
3 Plates
4 Nameplate
5 Maker's nameplate
l-:inr111'=1rtcc- rc-.r11 1irAr1 h\I {-hr. ,..... ,...,.-1-,.....0'V'\,..._ ...
1u1 l~UU~;f'-'V I C'"'!Ull CU U J ll IV VUVlVI I IC:I.
· - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ··••··•···············
~JlechanicalSeparation I GEA VVestfaHa Separator
2063-9001-200 I 0609 13

labels.
Niemals Teile losen vor Bei starken Vibrationen

Stillstand des Separator sofort mlt
Separators gefOllter Trommel Ober
NOT-AUS stoppen.
before the separator has Stop separatorwith
by EMGENCY OFF when
002454260:1)
Fig. 2

tation!
" Every person who is assigned the
documentation.
Fig. 3

14 2063-9001-200 I 0609

tor!

ponents:
standstill.
,. Lock the installation to prevent it

mentation.
$1
Fig. 5

vibrations!
off'.
" Evacuate the room.
Fig. 6

2063-9001-200 I 0609 15
Frequency converter operation!
A
" When setting the frequency con-
Fig. 7
'-
~ 002-H·!HOOO
~

temperatures!

~
operation.
Fig. 8


.. Switch off all electrical appliances
SS
Fig. 9
CAUTION:
switch is off!
.. Lock the separator/plant to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.
specialists).

16 2063-9001-200 I 0609

examples:
- with signal word (ATTENTION!) and warning text
Bei aus9esd1a!!etem Sous tension meme

Hauplschalter en position d'au~t de
unle1 Spannung! nn!i;rrop1eurprincipal !
Voltagea!sopresenl Con(l,linteiruptor
when main
switchisturnedotfl
principal descorwctado se
cncuentrabajotensi6n! is turned off!
CAUTION:
switch is off!
Fig. 10 Example 1

Hauptschalter kbnnen
orangefarbige Leitungen
ATTENTION!
ATTENTION!
ATTENT!ON!
est •Heinl les flies orange
switch is off!
Fig. 11 Example 2
111!1
Orange coloured leads are fitted as standard at Westfalia Separator.
fv1echanicai Separation I GEA Westfaiia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 17

earth.
S6
Fig. 12


the rotating bowl.
S01
Fig. 13
bowl.

18 2063-9001-200 I 0609
1.5 Operations on the separator

tions.
Fig. 14

" Assembly
.. Electrical installation
" Before start-up
" Start-up
" Shut-down

Operating, maintaining or repairing the separator or the separator p!ant requires
CAUTION!
'v'Vestfalia Separntor accepts no liability for damage caused by unquaiified

who
; have reached a minimum age of 18 years .
., are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings and train-
ing.

.. is responsible for the necessary skills and knowledge of the personnel.
.. must be sure that the personnel have read and understood the manuals nec-

2063-9001-200 I 0609 19

courses. You can obtain further information from Westfalia Separator or from
one of the authorized representatives.
.. Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia

Separator. The original spare parts are listed
in the spare parts catalog.
V\lcs.tfu!io Scpurntor 0 The use of non-genuine parts leads to:
genuineparts - safety risks,
for the responsible persons. In such cases,
ranty claims.
1.5.3 Assembly
" If the plant has several centrifuges,

number.
T2059019
Fig. 16
0\
0
I
parts.
SB
Fig. 17

20 2063-9001-200 I 0609
CAUTION:
"' Some bowl parts may be pre-
specialists from Westfalia Separa-
tor or in workshops authorized by
S9
Fig. 18
.. To avoid unbalance, when replacing

- Lock ring
- Bowl top
- Distributor
- Bowl bottom
Westfalia Separator must be con-
sulted.
These parts
8555017
"Bowl").
.. Some bowl parts are arranged in

other.
Q " Locking devices and alignment

erated.
Fig. 20
0
shear strain.
SA01
Fig. 21
ivlechanical Separation I GEA Westfaiia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 21
'" When assembling the bowl, be sure

imbalance.
" Before starting the bowl, be sure to
fit all parts.
T2044092
Fig. 22

" Pay attention to the position of the
marks!
CAUTION:
Fig. 23
.. Tighten the spindle screw with the

thread).
CAUTION:
life!
Fig. 24
• Tighten the centripetal pump cham-

ber lock ring securely (left-hand
thread).
CAUTION:
Fig. 25

22 2063-9001-200 I 0609
" Carefully fasten hood 1, feed and

pump 3.
S12
Fig. 26
.. Check if the machine is completely

Fig. 27

cian!
" Special attention must be paid to the
installation guidelines of Westfalia
Separator.
" The frequency and voltage of the
532
f-ig. 28
" Carry out voltage equalization .

.. Observe legal regulations; e.g. in the EU:
- Low-voltage guideline 2006/95/EC,
fv1echanicai Separation I GEA \IVestfaiia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 23

been firmly tightened .
.. The "O" marks on bowl bottom or
be aligned.
Fig. 29
" The bowl must rotate in clockwise

ids collector).
+ +
563
Fig. 30
" The separator may only be operated

to EN 294.
• Equip solid and liquid discharges
$3
Fig. 31

24 2063-9001-200 I 0609
" Check that the lubrication and cool-

814
Fig. 32
" Check whether the supervisory

equipment is operational and the
- cooling,
A2057222
Fig. 33
" Check that the product lines are set

to operation.
" Regularly check hoses for signs of
ageing.
" Check sight glasses for mechanical
damage.
immediately by nevv or reconditioned
parts.
Fig. 34
Mechanical Separation i GEA Westfaiia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 25
1.5.6 Start-up
.. Refer to chapter "operation".

GEA Wostfot;~
593020ekle,Germany
Separator Systems GmbH
G::::./\
" Note nameplate. The values for
Typ Masch.-Nr. c=J - bowl speed,
'
Baujahr
- density of the heavy liquid,
max. zulass1ge Trommel-Nenndrehzahl 1n min·' - density of the solids (centrifugally
max zulassige Dichte des Aufgabegutes in kgfdmJ dry)
s~.hwere. ~
1
l
Flu,,igke<I kgldrn'
3
be exceeded.
min.lmax. Ourchsatz m /h
min.fmax. Temperatur des Aufgabegutes in ·c
min /max Gehausedruckbereich in bar ~
----·---·-----------
Fig. 35
• Wear ear protection.
Fig. 36

operation:
speed limiting.
Fig. 37

26 2063-9001-200 I 0609
.. Do not feed product which is catego-

rised as explosive.
required.
Fig. 38
~------------··-----
" When processing products harmful

safety regulations.
" Refer to the safety data sheet of the
product.
"' Use protective gear, e.g.
- Eye protection
- Protective mask
Fig. 39

"' Immediately shut down the separa-
off'.
" Evacuate the room .
separator has come to a standstiii.
S2
Fig. 40

.. Product-contacting parts such as
- pipes and hoses,
- hood,
- solids catcher
reach temperatures over 80 °C .
(176 °F).
Fig. 41

2063-9001-200 I 0609 27
" The bowl is not allowed to run with-

terial.
A2057223
Fig. 42
1.5. 7 Shut-down and "Emergency-Off"
• For shut-down of the separator refer

STOP s24
Fig. 43

28 2063-9001-200 I 0609

Important:
~ The bowl is not emptied. Product and solids remain in the bowl.
returns.

automatically.

off'.
.. Evacuate the room.
S2
Fig. 44
-----------------·-· -------------------------
fv1echanicai Separation I GEA Westfaiia Separator
2063-9001-200 I 0609 29

" Aggressive product (chemical or physical)
.. Environment: Temperature, dust, vapours

parts like
- Bowl lock ring,
- bowl bottom,
- bowl top and
diameter
Fig. 45

Carry out the required cleaning thoroughly.

manufacturer.

30 2063-9001-200 I 0609

separator and electrical plant com·-
ponents:
standstill.
" Switch off aii eiectricai appiiances
Fig. 46

the section "bowl".
81
Fig. 47

" Make provision for and use a sturdy
working platform.
Fig. 48

a suitable base, e.g. rubber rnat.
" Secure machine parts from rolling
aids'
Fig 49
i\tlechanicai Separation i GEA Westfaiia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 31
.. Do not heat bowl parts with the

naked flame .
., Bowl parts must never be welded.
sterilizable separators.
.. Even during cleaning the bowl parts
100 °C (212 °F).
Fig. 50
'" Load-carrying equipment such as

tor,
- chains etc.
.. Do not use damaged or incomplete
552
Fig. 51
• All load suspension devices have to be checked for completeness and for
" In addition, when using load suspension devices and hoists, the applicable

• Special tools (e.g. compressing, assembly devices, pin spanners) may only
instruction manual.
• Before using the standard and special tools supplied, check them for damage
and completeness.
Make sure that
" Have damaged tools repaired by specialists before using them again.
• Keep the tools clean and keep them in a dry, safe place.
checked better.

32 2063-9001 -200 I 0609
" Collect dripping oil to prevent danger

They can be injurious to health,
position.
Fig. 52

2063-9001-200 I 0609 33
1.6 Corrosion
documented.
shaped corrosion.

rosion.
S35
Fig. 53


nation.
Pittings
a materials expert.
S24
Fig. 54

34 2063-9001-200 I 0609
1.7 Erosion
contact.
.. hard solids particles
" high throughput capacities

S40
Fig. 55
1) the bottom of the distributor, the rising channels and the ribs,
2) the centripetal purnp (cavitatior1) 1
3) all surfaces in the area of the solids discharge ports,

4) the nozzles.
fv1echanicai Separation i GEA Westfaiia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 35

.. The bottom of the erosion mark has
radius < 1mm a radius smaller than 1 mm (large
notch effect) .
.. The depth of erosion mark exceeds
point.
526
Fig. 56

36 2063-9001-200 I 0609
1.8 The health hazards involved when handling heavy oils and lube oils
As a result of the deterioration in quality of fuel oils, the danger has arisen that the heavy oils used on
~ polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons,
- lead compounds,
.. on the concentrations of the dangerous substances,
" the ambient air (inhalation of oil vapours/oil mist),
., the intensity and duration of the contact with the skin or mucous membrane.

" headaches,
.. dizziness,
., nausea,
.. itching or burning of the skin,

.. allergic reactions, especially skin allergies,
" festering inflammation of the skin pores (oil-acne),
" damage to the central nervous system after inhalation over a long period,
" skin cancer caused by direct skin contact over a long period,
.. Lung cancer or cancer of the digestive organs after inhalation over a long period
" Avoid skin contact with heavy oils or lube oils if possible!
- \Near suitable protective gloves.
worn!
" If possible, improve the air circulation in the room! \
.1
Fu!!y open the air regulation flaps in the outlets of the air supply ducts in the centrifuge and filter area.
" \Nash affected areas of skin frequently and thoroughly!
., Personal hygiene is of the utmost importance!
" Exercise special care when carrying out maintenance work on and cleaning heavy oil and lube oil cen-

2063-9001-200 I 0609 37

2.3 General .................................................................................................. 41
2.4 OSE ... -91-............................................................................................. 41
2.5.2 Bowl ....................................................................................................... 47
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics ...................................................................................... 48
2.5.4 Drive ....................................................................................................... 51
2.6 Regulating ring ....................................................................................... 56
2.6.1 Determination by table ........................................................................... 56
2.6.2 Determination by experiment.. ............................................................... 57
2.7.1 Pressure transmitter .............................................................................. 59
2.9 Technical data ....................................................................................... 66

38 -----~·~~~. - - - -2063-9001-200
- - - - -I - 0609
-
" For further information see installation guidelines.
;------.* 646
ON 50
060.3)
The complete bowl ·,an then be (3) EB Water I operating water discharge
transported via the adjacent
separators of the same type_
@) Filling, displacement and operat-
430 @ ing water supply
z 1:2
173
c=i These functional dimensions must be adhered to!

EB Discharge must not feed into public water system! 2063-4100-010-1
Fig. 57 Note project--specific dimensioned drawing!
iviechanicai Separation I GEA Westfalia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 39
Anschlusstabelle iCONNECTIONTABLE
Beschreibung
kg~
DN
DESCRIPTIONS
Min. lifting capacity of hoist: 500 CD Schmutzol siehe Detail y
For maintenance and repair 40
Bowl, motor
I @ Reinol 40 siehe Detail w
CLEAN OIL SEE DETAIL
Schlamm-Ablauf Schlauch I Schlauschelle
® SLUDGE DISCHARGE
125
FLEXIBLE HOSE I HOSE CLIP
Steuerwasser-Ablauf
I ::;1euerwasser I Aussengewinde
Ftill-und Verdrangungswasser ~3/4
MALE
"'"'
N
Connectors:
/
1:2 1:2
_!f
Product discharge G) Product feed
Water discharge
Operating water discharge
649 211 263
Filling, displacement and operating @ Pressure transmitter (product discharge)
water supply
I @ Solids discharge

water
Pressure switch (water discharge)

0
0
"'
1318
Service side

EB Discharqe must not feed into public water svstem! 2063-4100-010-2

40 2063-9001-200 I 0609
'
7=:=:=:=::::.::i,
,-/ ,
___________' _,,__
""'======::=e:-:"'====J
'<;""""~=:=o=:::.=.·=:::::::::~1)
1-----------,
I I
I - - - - - - - - - - 1,
'
-~·--··- ,, ' --
r - - - - 4 -- -~~------------~----~
I I
I
I ---~~
'1------------------,.,---...,-_,---_-__________________________,
I I
I I
\---------------------------~
r--------------------------,
-r
'
'I
I ! --------
/ ' I !
T ·= ;_~:~;~~;~=~~~-~~~::-i ----· -----------------------i ~ : : ~ ; 1 1
---,
:----------;
.---
~-= .:r_::_::.,:_::..:J - ~
I I
~=7·
I_
I I
'I
I
~H~~
2062-1000 000· 0136-0196
Fig. 59

2063-9001-200 I 0609 41
2.3 General
self-cleaning bowl.
product
- do not emulsify.
2.4 OSE ... -91-...

The separator OSE ... -91-...
" is equipped with a self-cleaning disk bowl,
" is used for clarification and separation in fuel and lube oil treatment plants.
• operates with regulating rings (see section 2.6).
The most important part of the separator is the bowl. The bowl
" is configured as a purifier bowl at the factory,
.. can - depending on the application - be converted to function as a clarifier or
purifier bowl.
Conversion of the purifier bowl into a clarifier bowl is possible in a few simple
steps (see diagrams).
In the case of the purifier bowl:

• Mount the centripetal pump chamber
cover with bores.
IMPORTANT: All holes of the cen-
tripetal pump chamber cover must
be open!
" Select the regulating ring (see sec-
tion 2.6).
T2059074
Fig. 60 Centripetal pump chamber cover

with 2 bores (example)

42 2063-9001-200 I 0609
In the case of the clarifier bowl:

.. ATTENTION! Mount the centripetal
pump chamber cover (without
bores!) for operation in clarifier
mode.
" Request the part number of the cen-
tripetal pump chamber cover from
the supplier.
T2059075

without bores (example)
Operating principles of the separator

-------------------------~,·-~---·---
r-----------------
1 6
I
I
I
2058007-91
Fig. 62
1 Dirty oil feed 11 Separating disk

2 Clean oil discharge 12 Solids holding space
3 Displacement water 13 Dirty water discharge
4 Pressure transmitter (product discharge) 14 Operating water discharge
5 Pressure transmitter (water discharge) 15 Solids discharge
6 Throttle 16 Operating water feed
7 Ref]ulating rinf] 17 Solenoid valve block
8 Control unit
9 Sensing liquid pump (dirty water)
10 Centripetal pump (clean oil)
The fuel oil or lube oil is conveyed to the separator via a separate pump.
The product is fed in through a closed line system (1 ).
The dirty water is discharged (13) by sensing liquid pump (9) via a throttle (6).
The clarified clean oil is discharged (2) under pressure by centripetal pump (10).

2063-9001-200 I 0609 43
by means of a remote controlled solenoid valve (17) in the operating water line.
The opening time of the solenoid valve is up to 3 seconds.

44 2063-9001-200 I 0609
~~~~---2
~,.---3
A2062000-91
Fig. 63
~os. Designation Function

1 Handle connection " connects centripetal pump and hood.
piece .. holds the filling and displacement water supply
line.

Sensing liquid pump

" holds the feed and discharges (see section
2 8).
5 Bowl See section 2.5.2

Bowl hydraulics See section 2.5.3
6 Frame " contains the drive parts.

" supports motor, bowi and hood.
7 Sight glass allows checking the oil level.
8 Sight glass for checking the drive belt
9 Brake .. The run-down time of the bowl can be short-

ened by applying the brake (e.g. for servicing
and maintenance work). See section 2.9.
Applying the brake

"' is not necessary in the case of a normal sepa-
rator shut-down (section 3. 7).
" is ineffective if a drive belt is torn, defective or
has come off!

2063-9001-200 I 0609 45

Be sure to observe the run-down time of 120
minutes until dismantling the separator! See
section 3.7.
12 Motor " accelerates the separator to the required

speed .
.. is protected against overload during operation.

46 2063-9001-200 I 0609
L_
----····-······-l- - ;:::itb[l;;C _ T2058081
Fig. 64
. . - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ··--------·····
Centripetal pump .. discharges the purified liquid under pressure .

.. is firmiy connected to hood 2 of the separator .
.. The disk provided with channels

bowl.
.. The liquid
pump and
3 Sensing !iquid pump e operates on the same principle as centripetal

pump 1.
e conveys the sensing liquid to the monitoring
system.
------------------·-·-
fvlechanicai Separation i GEA Westfaiia Separator
2063-9001-200 I 0609 47
2.5.2 Bowl
T2058077
Fig. 65

the rotational velocity of the bowl and then con-
3 Disk stack e splits the liquid mixture consisting of a light
ponents .
.. consists of a large number of conical disks
duces very small radial sedimentation paths for
the product.


48 2063-9001-200 I 0609
T2059004
Fig. 66

Poso Designation Function

and opens the bowl.
2 Annular piston .. is inside the bowl bottom,

" rotates with the same angular velocity as the
other bowl parts,
" is axially movable.
3 Sliding piston .. is located inside the bowl bottom,

.. rotates with the same angular velocity as the
other bowi parts,
.. is axially movable.

2063-9001-200 I 0609 49
T2059005
Fig. 67

Operating liquid • flows into the injection chamber 4 of bowl

bottom 5 and
" from there through feed holes into closing
chamber 6.
This initiates closing of the bowl.
2 Annular piston • moves into closed position.
3 Sliding piston • is raised due to the hydrostatic pressure in

closing chamber 6.
• is pressed against the gasket 7 of bowl top
" closes the bowl.

50 2063-9001-200 I 0609
T2059005
Fig_ 68

8 Ejection - Bowl open
Function
" flows first into injection chamber 4 and

" from there into opening chamber 8.
,. rises and
.. empties closing chamber 6.
.. moves downwards and

" opens the ejection ports in bowl bottom 5 for

2063-9001-200 I 0609 51
2.5.4 Drive
A2062001
Fig. 69

the drive belt.
2 Centrifugal clutch • ensures power transmission between motor,

drive belt and spindle.
• accelerates the bowl gradually to rated
speed;
• is gentle on the drive belt and motor.
Important!
- The driving effect of new clutch shoes will
- Smoking of the centrifugal clutch during the
(see section 4.3.1 ).

the bowl spindle 4.
4.3.1).
4 Bowl spindle supports the bowl.

52 2063-9001-200 I 0609

Fig. 70

70 Magnet coil
Manual override A

1 closed
2 open
Fig. 71

2063-9001-200 I 0609 53

- pressure controller 10
If necessary:
" Correct the pressure setpoint by
turning the setpoint screw 1 Uaw
span 7).

• Open the operating water valve
71 ).
Pressure setpoint is too low.

• Increase the pressure setpoint.
- Turn setpoint screw clockwise.
~ Pressure setpoint is too high.
+ .. Decrease the pressure setpoint.
0 - Turn setpoint screw counter-

clockwise.
The adjusted pressure setpoint is indi-

cated on pressure gauge 30.
0018-7614-000-1
SW= jaw span

Fig. 72

54 2063-9001-200 I 0609
Technical data
ATTENTION:
.. Note the specifications on the nameplate of the solenoid valve block and
" the installation guidelines.

NC
Housing CuZn
Solenoid
Coil size 32mm
valves:
Nominal diameter
13 mm
(ON)
Operating voltage: 24 V DC
with fitted cable (1.5 m lonq)
t----·-'"' ~· ~
valve
Temperature: Medium -10 to +80 °C (14 - 176 °F)

.. Close the main valve for operating water, filling and displacement water.
CAUTiON: Danger of injm-y through very hot separator parts!

ATTENTION:
.. Refer to the instruction manual and nameplate of the solenoid valve block .
.. Direct intervention in the solenoid valve block only by authorised specialists
and with suitable tool81

2063-9001-200 I 0609 55

ing terminal.
connector block is loose. connecting terminal.
nectinq terminal. tact.

56 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
2063-9001-200 I 0609
2.6 Regulating ring

Perfect separation of a liquid mixture is only possible when the bowl has been
correctly adapted to the density difference between the light liquid (e.g. oil) and
the heavy liquid (e.g. water).
To achieve this, select and fit the regu-

lating ring from the set furnished (with
different inner diameters) whose inner
diameter corresponds to the difference
in density between the two liquid com-
ponents.
8205211
Fig. 73 Regulating ring (example)
The inner diameter of the regulating ring to be selected can be determined from
the table or empirically. The general rule of thumb is:
" narrow regulating ring for heavy oil
.. wide regulating ring for light oil.
2.6.1 Determination by table
Density of the light liquid,

at 15 °C (59 °F)
Inner diameter
of the regulating ring I
3
k:g/dm mm
0.80 - 0.82 128
0.83 - 0.85 123
0.86- 0.88 117
·-
A A~
U.Ctl - A~~
U.t!L
11 ("\
I IV
0.93 - 0.96 99
0.97 - 0.991 89
IDensity difference of the liquids _o-·~-·~

·-~~U~·~·-A "~·-~--· --~-,
3
Min. density difference 0,02 kg/dm
3
Max. density difference 0.20 kg/dm
3
The max. density of the light liquid is 0.991 kg/dm with a density of the heavy
3
liquid of 1.0 kg/dm .
Important!
If light liquid discharges through the heavy liquid discharge, the next smaller
regulating ring must be fitted.

2063-9001-200 I 0609 57
2.6.2 Determination by experiment

(explained using the example of oil purification)
Always try a wide regulating ring and then the next smaller ring.
When the regulating ring is too wide the discharging water contains oil.
When the regulating ring is too narrow the discharging clean oil contains water.
The water may look milky or dirty. The coloration comes from the washing of the
oil.
In the bowl, a separation zone is formed between the light and heavy phases
whose centre is the separating line.
After opening the bowl, the position of the separating zone can be recognised
by the almost always visible separating line between water and oil on the under-
side of the separating disk.
Correctly selected regulating ring

The separating line between water and
variable
oil is at the outer edge of the discs.
Effect:
- The discharging clean oil is free of
water.
- The discharging water is free of oil.
Fig 74
Regulating ring too wide

too wide oil runs
- far outside the discs and
- too close to the outer edge of the
separating disk.
Effect:
water.
- The discharging water contains oil or
- oil breaks the water seal.
Fig. 75

58
------------------------------·~··
2063-9001-200 I 0609
Regulating ring too narrow

too narrow The separating line between the liquid
components does not pass at the outer
edge of the discs but further inwards.
Effect:
- The discharging clean oil contains
water.
Fig. 76

2063-9001-200 f 0609 59

2.7.1 Pressure transmitter
The pressure transmitters PT1 and

1------------- PT2
1
I - are included in the standard scope
I
I of supply,
- serve to register alarms PAH (Pres-
sure Alarm Low),
- switch process-specifically n case of
~
functionality and
0005-1529-300
points,
- PT1 is fitted in the product discharge line.
- PT2 is fitted in the water discharge line.
rim
system.

Factorv settings
Product discharge Water discharge
PT1 PT2
PAL PAH PAH
1 3.0 bar (Z)
1.0 bar ( ) 1.0 bar
(1)
1 bar above the switching point.
(<')
1 bar below the switchinq point.
IMPORTANT:

60 2063-9001-200 I 0609
Technical data
Voltage
124 V DC
Range 0-16 bar
Output signal
~-~~-~-~-~
4-20 mA I
Tightening torque
Connector plug M 12 x 1; 5-pole
Cable PUR-2 core, 1.5 m
Cable box M 12 x 1; 5-pole
Pin1-, white; Pin4+, black
--
Enclosure IP67
-
Working temperature
-40 to +125 °C (-40 to +257 °F)
Medium temperature
Mechanical Separation I GEA Westfa!ia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 61

0005-4258-B
Vibration pick-up " is installed at the upper part of the frame.

• converts the separator vibrations into electric
signals.
2 Terminal box • is mounted at the lower part of the frame.
3 Vibration monitoring • is installed in the control cabinet.

unit • evaluates the signals coming from the vibra-
tion pickup.

pickup.
cally.
ATTENTION!
• instruction manual of the vibration monitoring system
" instruction manual of the control unit
.. terminal allocation in the terminal diagram of the control cabinet
., circuit diagram

62 2063-9001-200 I 0609

" displays bowl speed.
Speed deviations of up to 5 % are permissible .
., monitors speed drop as well as excess of speed and starting time.
~ '~DP
88888888
~~m~ ~~
BBBB
2062-3243-
Fig. 79
Spindle " rotates and generates speed pulses at prox-

imity switch 2.
2 Proximity switch .. transmits the pulses triggered from the spindle

to control unit 3.
ATTENTION!
3 Control unit " evaluates the speed pulses.

or too high.
" initiates a shut-down process if the bowl speed
is too low or too high .
.. indicates the current bowl speed and
" permits setting of limit values.
ATTENTION!

2063-9001-200 I 0609 63
2.8 Product feed and discharge lines
By fitting pre-set valves into the prod-

uct feed A and product discharge B
lines (see Section 4.2), the separator
can be adjusted to the conditions and
requirements of the throughput capaci-
ty and line pressure.
Fig. 80
2.8.1 Throughput monitoring (Product feed line A)

The effective separator throughput capacity is listed on the order-specific oper-
ating data sheet.
Flow indicator - scale: 0 - 10

[l/h] [mm]
3 000- 5 000 12
5 000 - 8 000 15
8 000 -11 000 18
11 000 - 15 000 21
15 000- 23 000 24
On Using the 010 Control Unit

• When starting up, use the sticker provided to mark the indicated scale range
on the flow indicator 2 (see Fig. 80).
On Using the E40 Control Unit

The effective throughput capacity is shown on the control unit.
Variations in the throughput capacity between the actual value and setpoint can
be adjusted in the control unit.

64 2063-9001-200 I 0609
2.8.2 Determining the throughput (Product feed line A)
A 012 015 018 024

10 - .
I If
I /
9 I
'I v
8
I ,
I /
~ )I ~;
6
' I
/
5
I
;
, I
;" "
r~
~
4
~I
;
....
If
~
.....
~~
~
~"
i'. "
J
~
' ... ~
~ ~ " ~ "
"
c0 ," ""' ~~
"
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334
B ~
Fig. 81 Diagram for determining throughput
A Pre-set valve inner diameter (mm)

C Scale range of the flow indicator
The diagram can be used to determine the separator throughput capacity (add-
ed feed per time unit).
Procedure:
.. Read the scale value at the flow indicator (see Fig. 80):
e.g. 3
.. Proceed horizontally with the scale value (e.g. 3) to the curve of the fitted pre-
set valve diameter A (e.g. 0 18) .
.. Vertically read off the throughput capacity B:
e.g. '10 (= 1 O 000 l/h)
The accuracy of the determined throughput depends on the following properties

of the feed:
- Viscosity
- Temperature
- Density
The stipulated properties can result in variations in determining the throughput
capacity.

2063-9001-200 I 0609 65
2.8.3 Pressure monitoring (Product discharge line B)

The product discharge line pressure is shown on the pressure gauge 1 (see Fig.
80) .
.. Note the factory settings of the switching points (see Section 2.7.1 ).
Pressure gauge - measuring range: 0 - 10 bar

[l/h] [mm]
3 000- 5 000 10
5 000 - 7 500 12
7 500 - 12 000 15
12 000-17 000 18
17 000 - 24 000 21
24 000 - 32 000 24

66 2063-9001-200 I 0609
2.9 Technical data

Bowl
3
Solids holding space (total) 4 dm
Speed 8 200 min- 1

(see name-plate)
0.991 kg/dm 3 (at 15 °C) and
3
i .4 kg/dm
Starting time approx. 3 - 6 min
Run-down time
90 min
(without braking, with drive belts)
Run-down time (with braking) approx. 7 min

belt)
Centripetal pump
[ Operating water
Qty. min. 1 800 l/h
Pressure (with open valve) 2- 3 bar
Standard operating water specification
Suspended matter
Particle size
1 max. 10 mg/I
max. 50 pm
I
Hardness:
- up to 55 °C separating temperature < 12° dH
-·
1°dH = 1.79°fH = 1.25 ° eH = 17 .9 ppm CaC03
Chlorine ions <100 mg/I
pH 6.5- 7.5
-----~-------'--------------'
fv'lechanicai Separation I GEA \NestfaHa Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 67
DO 20 °C (68 °F)
MOO 40°C (104 °F)
LO 90 °C (194 °F)
LO HD 95 °C (203 °F)
HFO 98°C (208 °F)

manual.
Motor
Power rating 50 Hz 11 -15 kW
60 Hz 15-18 kW
60 Hz 3 600 RPM
Design IMV1
Enclosure IP 55
Drive 50/60 Hz
Oil filling approx. 3.7 I

Product feed pump
Pressure head 2 bar
Weights
Separator (with motor, without bowl) 860 kg
Bowl 190 kg
Motor 107 kg

68 2063-9001-200 I 0609
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones

2063-9001-200 I 0609 69
3 Operation

3.1.1 Notes on separation ............................................................................... 70
3.2 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 72
3.8.2 Bowl faults .............................................................................................. 86

70 2063-9001-200 I 0609

3.1. 1 Notes on separation

The separator is used for clarification and separation in fuel and lube oil treat-
ment plants.
The best separation effect is obtained with low viscosity of the product to be
separated.
The separator operates economically with the separating temperatures and ca-
pacities specified by us. Refer to the data sheet and contractual agreements.
Procedure:
" Select the desired operating mode on the control unit.
., Set the separating time on the control unit.
" Start the separator (see 3.2).

The ejection time is determined by the preset separating time.
Sequence of an ejection (example)

3. Displacement water displaces the fuel oil to the clean oil side.
4. Operating water opens and closes the bowl hydraulically at full bowl
speed.
6. Filling water supply
~-

Displacement
.. When separating, the loss of feed liquid unavoidable during ejection can be
uid).
" The duration of displacement water supply is given in the timer overview (see
" If the displacement time is too long, water will discharge through the light liq-
uid outlet.
.. If the displacement time is too short, part of the product remains in the bowl

2063-9001-200 I 0609 71
Flush ejection
- are stuck to firmly on the wall of the solids holding space due to the solids
properties,
., either the separating time must be shortened or
.. a flush ejection must be carried out after the total ejection by filling the bowl
Program control
.. "Displacement", "ejection", "filling" and "flush ejections" at precisely defined
intervals are best carried out with the automatic control unit.
• The clean oil discharge and water discharge can be monitored.
" Faults can be signalled visually or audibly.

72 2063-9001 -200 I 0609
3.2 Before start-up
Note:
" Safety precautions in chapter 1.
" Instruction manual of the corresponding control unit.
.. Instructions "Settings and malfunctions"
.. Instruction manuals for other auxiliary equipment
" Process-related deviations are possible
3.2.1 Before the first start-up - after maintenance and repair
ATTENTION!
" check all bowl parts as specified in the maintenance schedule (table "Main-
tenance after 4000 operating hours or after 6 months at the latest") .
.. Replace if necessary.
.. check all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule (ta-
ble "Maintenance after 8000 operating hours or after 1 year at the latest).
"Replace if necessary.
Ensure that
" the sight glass in the frame for observing the drive belt is clean.
" the sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean .
.. the drive chamber is filled with oil in accordance with section 4.3.3.
" the bowl height is correct (see section 4.7.1).

"' the brake is released by turning the handle clockwise.
" the bowl can be rotated by hand.
thread).
e the hood is correctly mounted (see 4.5).

2063-9001-200 I 0609 73
.. the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.3.2) .
.. the feed and discharge lines are connected (see 4.5).

" the supervisory equipment is complete, mechanically and electrically func-
tional.
data sheet) .
operating data sheet).
" the plant components such as valves, water pressure reducer, compressed
" the motor is correctly connected (voir 4.1.3) .
.. the motor is correctly mounted.
Important!
• Check the remaining plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for
• Damaged plant components must be replaced immediately by new parts.

74 2063-9001-200 I 0609
3.2.2 Before every: start-up
Ensure that
" the sight glass in the frame for observing the drive belt is clean .
.. the sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean .
" the brake housing is correctly mounted .
.. the brake is released by turning the handle clockwise.
thread).
- Tighten the centripetal pump lock ring securely (left-hand thread) .
.. the hood is correctly mounted (see 4.5).
"' the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.3.2).
" the feed and discharge lines are connected (see 4.5).
tional.
data sheet).
" the product heating devices are ready for operation (option).
" the plant components such as valves, water pressure reducer, compressed
" the motor is correctly mounted.
Important!
-----. ··----··- - - - - ·
fViechanicai Separation i GEA '\iliestfaiia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 75

.. See section 3 .2 .1 or 3 .2 .2
.. Switch on the control unit.
mm
on the separator -
.. Check the direction of rotation of the bowl.

glass in the frame).
Fig. 82
• Switch on the product feed pump (option).

open!
• Check the direction of rotation of the product feed pump.
wheel of the pump motor rotates clockwise .
.. Put the preheater in operation (option).
Pre-conditions:

76 2063-9001-200 I 0609
" Open the shut-off flap in the solids

discharge (option).
1 Shut-off flap
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge
Fig. 83
'" Start the program.

Pre-conditions:
- The solids tank has been released (level switch LSHH).The solids tank is
empty .
.. After the product feed valve has automatically opened.
- Set the backpressure in the product discharge line to approx. 1.5 to 2.5 bar
ATTENTION!
.., Check the discharges for solids and dirty water; there must be no oil flow


- Oil level
Temperatures
- Pressures
- Leakage
- Vibrations
Current consumption
- Starting time
- Pipe joints
.. Keep to the maintenance schedule (see 4.3.1)!

2063-9001-200 I 0609 77
" Inspection
Important!
" Regularly check plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for signs
of aging and mechanical damage.

78 2063-9001-200 I 0609
---------------- . ·-·----~,~~~··-·~ ---------------------

" the preselected operating mode (partial or total ejection mode),
" the solids loading in the feed,
,. the consistency of the solids,
.. the separator throughput.
tion.

--
LO HD max. 2 h max. 1 h
3.5. 1 Mathematical calculation

Given: Solids content (

1
' p =0.05 %
Solids holding space volume v =1.5 I
Solids holding space given 75 % utilisation V' "' 1.13 I
Throughput capacity (ll vo ::: 2 000 Ith
Wanted: Separating time t "'?min
The separating time to be set is calculated as follows: )

V' 1.13
t = • 60 • 100 = • 6000 = 67.8min = 1.1 h
yo • p 2 000 • 0.05
(l) Solids content and throughput capacity must be determined on site or taken from

2063-9001-200 I 0609 79
Automatic operation
., Initiate ejection program by pressing the key "Process START":

- Displacement
- Bowl ejection
- Speed recovery
" The product valve opens again.

• Eject the bowl:
3 seconds.
" Speed recovery
" New separating operation

80 2063-9001-200 I 0609

·.
Automatic operation
..
" End the separation program with the key "Process STOP".
" Switch off the preheater (option).

" Displacement:
- Open the displacement water valve using the manual override.
ment water valve).
" Eject the bowl:
3 seconds.
" Speed recovery

- The product feed pump continues to run (timer 23)i
ATTENTION!
The product feed pump may never be switched off to the steam shut-off valve
All heaters (e.g. steam-fired, thermal oil, electric heaters) must be manually
shut down.
Manual shut-down of the product feed pump must be carried out delayed.
" Close the product feed valve in the suction side of the product feed pump (op-
tion) .
.. Switch the separator motor off.
with hand valves.

" Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
still.
- The run-down time of the bowl is 90 minutes after switching off the motor
(without braking!).

2063-9001-200 I 0609 81

" Shine a torch through the frame
sight glass.
no longer moving.
Fig. 84
When the sight glass is turbid:

• Unscrew the sight glass,
" shine a torch through the sight glass opening in the frame!
CAUTION: Danger of injury through rotating drive belt!
" Check ONLY visually that the drive belt is no longer moving.
- Do NOT touch the drive belt through the sight glass opening in the frame!
" Clean the sight glass and screw it back in.

• Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
still .
separator!
" Applying the brake is not effective!
ATTENTION!
• Close the shut-off flap in the solids
discharge (option).
1 Shut-off flap
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge
Fig. 85

82 2063-9001-200 I 0609
----·~-~----- --------------------------~·
Risk of injury due to electrical vol-

tage and unintended start-up of the
separator!

ponents:
., Switch off all electrical appliances
Fig. 86

separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 °C (158 - 212 °F).
3. 7.1 Shut-down "Emergency-Off"

additional connection for an external "Emergency-Off"-switch (example 1),
- an "Emergency-Off' switch (yeiiow-red), a main switcr1 (grey-black) and ad-
ditional connection for an external "Emergency-Off'-switch (example 2) or
ditional connection, via approved "Emergency-Off' relay for several "Emer-
gency-Off"-switches (example 2).

gency-Off" function.
anorrticorl
VllVl!jlV..._.'-A,
" CAUTION! Evacuate the room.

s Do not re-enter U1e roor11 until the
Fig. 87 Example 1

2063-9001-200 I 0609 83
" Actuate the "Emergency-Off switch.
ejections.

S25 separator has come to a standstill.
Fig. 88 Example 2

84 2063-9001-200 I 0609

and Repair".
3.8.1 Trouble shooting
The bowl does not come up Brake is applied. '" Release brake by turning the handle
to rated speed or takes too clockwise.
long to do so. Oil has run down the spindle onto the " Clean belt contact surface of the
drive belt; the drive belt is slipping on spindle and flat belt pulley.
the bowl spindle. .. Replace the drive belt.
Motor is incorrectly connected. " Check connection.
Insufficient number of clutch shoes. " Increase the number of clutch
shoes.
" Make sure that the
clutch shoes are
evenly spaced.
Drive belt has stretched and is slipping '" Replace drive belt.
Drive belt has not been fitted correctly. " Check position of drive belt on cen-
trifu al clutch and bowl spindle .
Liquid or dirt has coiiected in the upper .. Check operating water discr1arge:
frame.
operation. oily. " ATTENTION: Do not use
1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - - - -vent!
-------------<
Drive belt has stretched and is slipping " Replace the drive belt.
The motor speed drops during opera- .. Check motor and line voltage.
tion.
I The bowl reaches the rated 1. Too many ciutch shoes are used . " Reduce the number of clutch shoes.
. speed too fast (in !ess than " Make sure that the
1.5 minutes). The starting clutch shoes are
current of the motor is hence evenly spaced.
inadmissibly high.(lm,, >2 x IN).

2063-9001-200 I 0609 85

reasons: .. Shut down separator .
.. Apply brake.
" Close the product feed and dis-
charge.
~,. - CAUTION:
~ .. Bowl must not be emptied
will intensify.
If bowl leaks,
en the water su I .
1. The separated dirt has deposited • Clean bowl.
2. Bowl has not been correctly as- " Assemble bowl properly.
slackened:
- The bowl lock ring is not screwed
on until 0 mark alignment.
.. The 0 marks of
the bowl bottom
and the lock ring
must be aligned.
- Insufficient number of disks. " Check number of disks; add a spare

disk if necessary.
4. Bowl parts are damaged. • Send bowl to factory for repair.
~- - CAUTION: Do not carry out
your own repairs!
Do not weld or solder as this
would weaken the bowl!
Ball bearings are worn. " Replace damaged bearings.
ATTENTION!

86 2063-9001-200 I 0609
3.8.2 Bowl faults
25
-~
22
2062-6600-BA

10 Piston guide ring (bovvl bottorn) 22 Solenoid valve block
ter
26 Strainer
27 Shut-off valve

2063-9001-200 I 0609 87

I
Control unit is defective or .. Check control unit.
IMPORTANT:
Motor is not correctly set. " Check program parameters and
reset if possible.
solids discharge.
nual.)
high.
Closing water pulse too short. .. Set 3 seconds (see also control unit
manual).
Strainer 66.04 cm the operating, filling " Close shut-off cock 27.
and displacement water line is dirty. • Clean strainer 26 (see 4.4.4 ).
The operating water capacity is too .. Check line pressure, increase if
low. necessary.

the capacity by litres)::= 1.0 I in 3 sec
The operating water line 28 has be- • Clean or replace operating water
chamber.
The operating water solenoid valve 23 • Check and replace solenoid valve
Bowl hydraulics
Bowl hydraulic system is soiled. • Remove hood and
• Thoroughly clean all bores.
Gaskets, guide bands, piston guide • Replace all seals.
ring are damaged or Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood"
Important: Time-consuming instal-
lation!
" Only replace the polyamide gasket 5
if damaged (see section 4.4.9)!
Sealing surface of sliding piston 20 is • Very slightly remachine the sealing
damaged. surface - max. 1 mm! - (see sec-
tion 4.4.10) or
• send in the sliding piston for repair.

88 2063-9001-200 I 0609
20
19
5
18--
17 F'-'·~'""'"''"" 6
7
23 24
8
..
!
12 25
·--~ 22
2062--0600-BA

ter
26 Strainer
27 Shut-off valve
~.,~echanica! Sep3ration I GEA \lVestfatia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 89

..
The bowl does not open, or Operating water

only partially so Control unit is defective or • Check control unit
Motor is not correctly set. • Check program parameters and
reset if possible.
nual.)
Time for opening water too short • Set 3 - 4 seconds (see also control
unit manual).
Strainer 66.04 cm the operating, filling • Close shut-off cock 27.
and displacement water line is dirty. " Clean strainer 26 (see 4.4.4 ).
low. necessary.

chamber.
The operating water solenoid valve 23 • Check and replace solenoid valve
Bowl hydraulics
or • Dismantle and clean the bowl (see
" Thoroughly clean all bores.
- Carefully check and clean drain
hole 19.
Gaskets, guide bands, piston guide • Replace all seals.
ring are damaged. Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood"
Important: Time-consuming insta!-
lation!
• Only replace polyamide gasket 5 if
damaged (see section 4.4.9)'
• Carefully check polyamide gasket 5
for firm seating in the groove.

90 2063-9001-200 I 0609
5
6
7
23 24
8
16 15 14 T
13 12
22
27 2062-6600-BA

4 Guide band (sliding piston) 16 Bow! bottom
6 Gasket (closing chamber bottom) i8 Annular piston
7 Gasket (annular piston) ·19 Drain hole
10 Piston guide ring (bowi bottom) 22 Solenoid valve block
ter
26 Strainer
27 Shut-off valve
··------~----------

2063-9001-200 I 0609 91

The bowl does not empty The operating water capacity is too ,. Check line pressure, increase if
the bowl.
the capacity by litres)~ 1.0 I in 3 sec
The separating time has been set too " Shorten the separating time (see
tent is too high.
The bowl opens during sepa- Closing water pulse is too short. .. Correct closing water impulse (see
ration. - Closing water has evaporated. control unit documentation).
bowl.

92 2063-9001-200 I 0609
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Notater
Notes
Note

2063-9001-200 I 0609 93

4.1.3 Motor ...................................................................................................... 99
4.3.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................... 115
Separator ............................................................................................. 121
4.4 Bowl ..................................................................................................... 122
4.4.7 Assembling bowl .................................................................................. 149
4.5 Closing the hood .................................................................................. 175
4.6 Drive ..................................................................................................... 178
4.7.1 Bowl height .......................................................................................... 211
4.10 Storage ................................................................................................ 217
4.10.1 After delivery ...................................................................................... 217
4.10.2 Separator ............................................................................................. 217
4.10.3 Control system ..................................................................................... 217
4.12 Disposal ............................................................................................... 219
4.12.3 Separator ............................................................................................. 220
4.13 Standard tools ...................................................................................... 222
4.14 Special tools ........................................................................................ 224

94 2063-9001-200 I 0609
4.1 Installation of the separator
,. For further information see installation guidelines.
646
r
The complete bowl can then be
transported via the adjacent
@
DN 50
060.3)
i:B Water I operating waier discharge

separators of the same type.
@ Filling, displacement and opera\-
430
® ing water supply
z 1:2
~'
173
(2) Product discharge
~(!\~ W'tCC I opernliog ~tee dl"h"ll'
7-·' J G) Prndod feed
@ Solids discharge
324
C:) These functional dimensions must be adhered to!

© Discharge must not feed into public water system! 2063-4100-010-1

2063-9001-200 I 0609 95
Anschlusstabelle iCONNECTIONTABLE
Beschreibung
ON
DESCRIPTIONS
Min. lifting capacity of hoist: 500 k g ; Schmutzol siehe Detail y
For maintenance and repair <D DIRTY OIL
40
SEE DETAIL
Bowl, motor
40 siehe Detail w
I @ Reinol
CLEAN OIL ""'E DETAIL
Schlamm-Ablauf Schlauch I Schlauschelle
® SLUDGE DISCHARGE
125
FLEXIBLE HOSE I HOSE CLIP
@ Wasser-Ablauf 50 Schlauch I Schlauschelle
Steuerwasser-Ablauf
IOteuerwasser 1 Aussengewinde
FOll-und Verdrangungswasser G 3/4
MALE
Connectors:
1:2 1:2
~
Product discharge G) Product feed
Water discharge
649 211 263
Filling, displacement and operating @ Pressure transmitter (product discharge)
water supply
I @ Solids discharge

Filling. displacement and operating
water
Pressure switch (water discharge)

0
g
1318
Service side
c=) These functional dimensions must be adhered to!

EB Discharqe must not feed into public water svstem! 2063-4100-010-2

96 2063-9001-200 I 0609
4.1.1 Transporting the separator
., CAUTION: Use appropriate lifting devices to prevent accidents!

- Be sure to use suitably rated, intact hoists for transport and installation .
.. CAUTION: Danger to life under hoists!

" Always transport the separator without installed bowl!
., For special tools, see section 4.14 or parts list.
.. Unscrew the screw plug 1 from the

Fig. 94
'" Make sure that two eye bolts 1

have been screwed into the upper
section of frame .
.. Screw double nipple 2 into the hole
in the frame.
Fig. 95
····- ..· · · · - - · - - · · · - · - · · · · - · - - - - - - - · - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - · -..- - -

2063-9001-200 I 0609 97
., CAUTION! Do not use the eye bolt

rator.
" IMPORTANT: Do not damage any

tening the ropes.
" Attach the transport ropes

- around the double nipple,
- Thread through the eye bolts and
IMPORTANT: Prevent the ropes from

slipping!
" Wind one piece of rope twice round
the hook (see detail).
.. Make sure the machine touches

down gently.
2063003
Fig. 96
" Unscrew two eye bolts 1 and double

nipple 2.
Fig. 97
• Screw in the screw plug 1.
Fig. 98

98 2063-9001-200 I 0609

'" Before installing the separator make sure that
" Align separator 1 with feet 2 and

" Tack plates 3.
" Unscrew screws 5.
'" Lift separator with feet (see section
4.1.1 ).
'" Place the separator on plates 3 and
.. bolt tight with hexagon nuts 5 .
.. Screw tight hex head screws 6.
Fig. 99

2063-9001-200 I 0609 99
4.1.3 Motor
0
200°1. Rated current%
100%
150 90
80
70
100 60
50
40
50 30
20
10
20
...,.______
40~60
______ 80 1010;},
.,._ ~
~
Separation
?25 5075100%
I§.
....,..,. Separation
?2042001
y C) § 50 Hz 60 Hz
De-
if .
Enclo-
-
50 Hz
at
60 Hz
sign sure*
rpm min s kW rpm rpm
IP 55
see name- approx. 3- 11 - 15- IM ISO-

3 3 000 3 600
plate 6 15 18 V1 class
F*
* WS standard
the drive belt.
and fuses.
The motor

100 2063-9001-200 I 0609

thermistors).
lows:
Note:
" The temperature feelers must be connected to a commercial tripping device.
" External voltage higher than 2.5 volts must not be applied to the connection
terminals of the temperature feelers.
" When testing for continuity, use an ohmmeter and not a test lamp.


" Refer to the motor nameplate.
tion of German Electrical Engineers) or of the local electric power company .
.. Any work on the motor may be carried out by an authorized electrician
only.

• ...... 1
UC11.
Motor-1
The terminal board in the terminal box can be connected in star or delta.
"' Check correct switching of the motor (star or delta).

2063-9001-200 I 0609 101

W2 U2 V2
0--0--0
L1
L2 ------+----+---
L3 - - - - - - e - - - + - -
PE ---------<1>---
Motor~y
Fig. 102

W2 U2 V2
11
L1
L2
L3
PE
Motor~d
Fig. 103
IMPORTANT:
• In the case of additional electrical components, PTC thermistors or space
Shipboard operation
• When operating the machine on board of ship, pay attention to the installation
• When using ship wiring cables, cable entry must be by means of marine-type
glands.

102 2063-9001-200 I 0609
·-----~--·-··--------------------------------
4.1.4 Direction of rotation of the bowl
Provided that:
··- The drive chamber is filled with oil
up to the half way mark on the sight
glass.
@ Switch on motor.
Fig. 104
The bowl must rotate in clock.wise direction when looked at from above.

Fig. 105
(----·····-······---.. In case of frequency converter
A
operation:
.. Before working on the motor,
note that residual voltage may be
present!
.. In this connection:
l!~JJ
II . 11
facturer.
sonnel.
Fig. 106

2063-9001-200 I 0609 103
4.1.5 Speed and starting time of the bowl

3
max. 0.991 kg/dm and
- for densities of separated solids up to
3
max. 1.4 kg/dm
Starting time approx. 3 - 6min
The bowl speed has been rated so as to ensure the operating safety of the se-
parator.

the bowl.
CAUTION!
spindle.
" Keep a safe distance away from the
rotating spindle.
• Do not wear long, open hair or wide,
loose clothing'
• Wear a hairnet!
" IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the

maximum spindle running time of
1 minute!
" Speed deviations of up to 5 % are

permissible.
A2062010
Fig. 107

104 2063-9001-200 I 0609
1111 case of frequency converter operation:

CAUTION!
" Operate the separator with fre-
I~
" Check from time to time that
and

2063-9001-200 I 0609 105
4.2 Valves and flow indicator

A set of valves (with various inner diameters) and a set of commissioning parts
are included in the separator delivery.
- The set of valves is attached to the separator hood.
- The commissioning parts set includes flow indicator 3.
Mounting of a valve allows separator flow rate monitoring.
H2062003
Fig. 109
A Product feed line

1 Pre-set valve
2 Pre-set valve
3 Flow indicator
4 3/2-way valve
ATTENTION! Pay attention to mounting of the following parts before

commissioning the separator:
Valves 1 and 2
• Select valves according to required flow capacity from the provided valve set
(see section 2.8).
" Mount valve 1 on product feed line A (see section 4.2.1 ).
• Mount valve 2 on product discharge line B (see section 4.2.1).
Flow indicator 3
• Remove plug from the corresponding bore of 3/2-way valve 4.
• Secure threading of flow indicator 3 with Loctite 245 .
.. Install flow indicator 3 on 3/2-way valve 4.

2063-9001-200 I 0609
4.2.1 Installing valves

Valve installation is explained by example for product discharge line B.
Required equipment:
- Open-ended wrench
.. Screw off corrugated hose 3 .

.. Insert selected valve 2 in connector
1 and push in evenly by hand.
/
r
H2062001'J/.
/
Fig. 110
.. Lightly lubricate threading of con-

nector 1.
.. Insert corrugated hose 3 and firmly
H206200Y
/
Fig. 111

2063-9001-200 I 0609 107

operations.
the service life of the separator.
" In the case of accessories (motor, product pump, preheater, solenoid valve
be observed .
.. Maintenance and repair work may be carried out only by persons
and training.
" Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
Westfalia Separator" .. Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia Separator.
genuineparts
ATTENTION!
conditions.

- Vibrations

108 2063-9001-200 I 0609
---- ,---1
~''"
~=;'=---- l
I I
I I
~
I I
r:kQ~
... -0196-...
~---®
I~-
370
1 __ ,_ •
-390
-310
380
2062-9902-000·6M

2063-9001-200 I 0609 109
Commissioning date:

Bowl inspection . Dismantle bowl and centripetal pump .
system.
when fittinq.
4.4.9)!
Oil chanqe and thorouqh cleaning of the drive chamber
svstem on the self-cleaninq separator.
of the drive belt.
sary.
(option).

110 2063-9001-200 I 0609
-----·
,-----1
~""
1--------
l
I I
I I
~
I I
I
r:.Q~
I I
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I
I ~" ' $-··
~-- . ·---·-.·® 370
I I
-400
I I -----390
30
I I 310
40 I I
380
I I
I I
I I ..
I I
I I
I I
L L
2062-9902-000-1 J

2063-9001-200 I 0609 111

-After 8000 operating hours - after 1 year at the latest
system.
when fittino.
Replace gaskets, piston guide ring and guide bands (see • Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood"
accompanying illustration). (Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).
See parts list.
4.4.9)!
1--R_e-'-'!p;_l'-ac-'-e-><--'-g.as-'-'k-'-'e-'-ts_._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-1 • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace cylindrical roller bearings and angular contact ball See spare parts list.
Check ball bearings of centrifugal clutch and replace if • Use set of spare parts "drive"
necessary. (Operation: 2 years or 16000 hours).
Check thickness of clutch shoes(1 ), replace if See spare parts list.
~ his smaller than 18 mm.

New condition of clutch shoe h = 26 mm
Check thickness of brake lining and replace when New condition of the fitted brake lining
h = 10 mm
~~h h is smaller than 3 mm.

Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber when using mineral oil (2)
when usinq synthetic oil (2)
Check the bowl height. • Seesection4.7.1.
of the drive belt.
sarv.
(option).
(1) In the case of frequent starting and stopping of the separator, shaft-driven alternator operation and in power plants, shorter mainten-
ance intervals are required. It is not possible to state a definitive time. We recommend checking the clutch shoes after 1,000 operat-
ing hours or after 2 months, at the latest.
(2) see section 4.3.3 - oil quality and oil change

112 2063-9001-200 I 0609
'.------1
~""
~
I
I
~
I
(;~~-'-$®-
. O~
I
I
I
I I
I I
I I ~l_ -· .
370
I I
·---400
I I ''""""~----------- 390
I I 310
I I
I I
I I
420
I I
I I
I I
I 200 I I
L ____ _ L _______ I
2062-9902-000-1 J
Fig. 114 Set of spare parts ,,bowl/hood" (operation. 1 year or 8,000 hours)
-~--~-·-··---······----- ----------------------
2063-9001-200 I 0609 113

Bowl inspection .
•
system.
Replace gaskets, piston guide ring and guide bands (see
accompanying illustration).
.
when fittinq.
(Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).
See parts list.
Clean the inside of the upper section of frame.

Check or replace neck bearing springs.
4.4.9)!
.
Remove bowl.
• See section 4.6.7 .
Replace qaskets. • Use set of spare parts "drive"
Replace the drive belt. (Operation: 2 years or 16000 hours).
Replace cylindrical roller bearings and angular contact ball See spare parts list.
Replace ball bearinqs of centrifuqal clutch.
Check thickness of clutch shoes(1 ), replace if
BW!J hi his smaller than 18 mm.
New condition of clutch shoe h = 26 mm

Check thickness of brake lining and replace if New condition of the fitted brake lining:
h = 10 mm
Lzm~~h h is smaller than 3 mm.
Check the motor.

. See instructions of motor manufacturer
Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber when using mineral oil (2)
when using synthetic oil (2)
Check the bowl height. • See section 4.7.1 .
In case of direct current:
Check the spindle speed (bowl). .
• Check only after motor or drive replacement.
See section 4.1.5 .
In case of three-phase current:
Check the spindle speed (bowl).
Check the starting time.
.
• Check only after drive replacement.
See section 4.1.5 .
• See section 4.1.5 .
Carefully clean the holes in the non-return valve in the • See section 4.5 .
of the drive belt.
sarv.
(option).
(1) In the case of frequent starting and stopping of the separator, shaft-driven alternator operation and in power plants, shorter mainten-
ance intervals are required. It is not possible to state a definitive time. We recommend checking the clutch shoes after 1,000 operat-
ing hours or after 2 months, at the latest.
(2) see section 4.3.3 - oil quality and oil change

114 2063-9001-200 I 0609
--·-----·--~-·.--------------------------------
Maintenance work


Replace hose pipes when an inspection reveals one or more of the following de-
fects:
.. Damage of the outer layer down to the fabric (e. g. chafe marks, cuts or
cracks) .
., Leaky spots .
.. Damage to or deformation of the hose fittings.
.. The hose becomes dislodged from the fitting .
.. Corrosion of the fitting diminishing function and strength.
Protective hose 1

" Adapt the length of the protective

hose.
Fig. 115

2063-9001-200 I 0609 115
4.3.3 Lubrication
MOTOR BEARINGS
facturer.


51502

~
cc
0
100
Viscosity class SAE 30
2
Viscosity (at 40 °C/104 °F) 100 ± 10 mm /s (cSt)
Part Number 0015-0003-080 (2. 5 litres)

Designation according to ISO Mobil SHC 626

Viscosity
2
- at 40 °C (104 °F) 65 mm /s
2
- at 100 °C (212 °F) 10,4 mm /s

116 2063-9001-200 I 0609
OIL QUANTITY
Filling in oil
Fill the drive with oil before commis-
sioning the separator.
" Unscrew the screw plug and
" fill in oil through the charge hole.
Filling quantity approx. 3. 7 litres
Fig. 116
Oil level
IMPORTANT:
" Check the oil level only when the
2 ing operation.
1 Maximum oil level

A2057239
2 Minimum oil level
Fig. 117

(at separator standstill) _J
Oil CHECK
" Check the oii level every week!
"' From time to time undo the oil drain screw and check whether there is vvciter
OIL CHANGE
'" Change oil after about
- 8000 operating hours or 1 year at the latest (synthetic oil).
" Clean sight glass.

2063-9001-200 I 0609 117
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

118 2063-9001-200 I 0609
A?OG2002

2063-9001-200 I 0609 119

Lubricat- Amount of
ing point lubricant
hours
Lube oil
~ 0
DIN 51502 3
(mineral)
1
cc 100
ISO 3498


3 2x
faces of bowl
Lubricating see
4 as required 1x apply sparingly Threads of fittings
grease parts list
Manually-operated parts
5 1x
such as locking brake

• Refer to lubricating oil table in section 4.3.5!

120 2063-9001-200 I 0609
Lubricating oil sorts suggested by some firms

Viscosity
Manufac-
turer 2
mm /s est
ti on RADULA 100 100
DIESEL GAMMA 30
Separator lube oil
ATLANTA MARINE 30
I Viscosity 105
"EN DISOLA M 3015
00
01
8m lD MONTANOL HK 100 100
c - ~
0
..0 c
lD Kinematic
<;:::: Sql~·<:\~,r*
Type E :2 ~ viscosity gemiineparts ENERGOL GR-XP 100 100

0 ;:.,mo
fl) c 0
at 40 °C ENERGOL DL-MP 30 114
oi~
·u; Ol
(104°F)
Q) c
0 ·-
2
mm /s (cSt) HYSPIN AWS 100
100
BTC 3 ALPHA ZN 100
CTC 3
MTC3 1.3
100
OTC2 NL Gear Compound 100
OTC3 Veritas Marine Oil R&O 30 108
WIC2 DELO 3000 Marine Oil 30
ATLANTA MARINE 30
105
CSD 1 DISOLA M 3015
OSD2 1.3 TURBINE T 100 95
SD 1
EXX-MAR XP 110
NUTO H 100
100
SPARTAN EP 100
ESD 18 GULF HARMONY 100 95

GSC15 VERITAS 30
~
OSD6
90 to 110 0015-0003-080
~11 'f_!J
OSD18 HIDRAOIL HD 70 95
2.5 0 (2 5 I)
WSD8
WSD 18
OSE10
OSE 20 I Mobil
MOBILGARD 312 106
t_~6DI tJ IA_~Q-~--·-··· .J... _JOj _____j

OSD20
OSD25
OSD 30 HYDRA WAY HMA 100
3.7 100
SD 30
WSD35
OSE40 DORO AR SAE 30 119
OSD60
OSD80
5.0
SD 50
WSD60
OSE 80

2063-9001-200 I 0609 121
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from Westfalia Separator
ity checks are performed by Westfalia Separator. Oils proposed from some firms are not subjected to
these tests.
Therefore, Westfalia Separator cannot give a performance guarantee for those oils.
synthetic oils, must be used. If necessary, consult Westfalia Separator.
oils.

i
I
I
I
----220
I
I
I
L _______ _
2062-6600-520-Gr
Fig. 119 Exploded view of the bowl and centripetal pump

2063-9001-200 I 0609 123
20 (1) Bowl bottom, compl.

30 Gasket
70 Gasket
80 Allen screw ISO 4762 - M 10 x 16 - 1.4571
90 Annular piston
100 Gasket
110 Gasket
130 Gasket
140 Gasket
160 Guide strip
180 Sliding piston
190 Gasket
200 Guide strip
210 (1) Distributor
230 Separating disk
240 (1) Bowl top, complete
250 Gasket
260 Gasket
270 Gasket
280 (2) Lock ring
290 Threaded pin ISO 4026- M 12x16-1.4571
300 Gasket
310 Gasket
cover, compl.
325 Gasket
cover
335 Regulating ring
340 Lock ring
350 Spindle screw
360 Gasket
510 Centripetal pump, compl.
520 Gasket
540 Gasket
550 Gasket

124 2063-9001-200 I 0609


still.
- The run-down time of the bowl is 90 minutes after switching off the motor
(without braking!).

sight glass ..
no longer moving.
A2058047
L-L..---'Cl..--"""'=<.f...f...!__ __,___ _ _ / ·--
Fig. 120

.. Clean the sight glass and screw it back in.

stiii.
.. Be sure to observe the run-down time of 120 minutes until dismantling the
separator!
" Applying the brake is not effective!

iNhen carrying out maintenance work, there is a danger of injury through hot

2063-9001-200 I 0609 125


only.

- no diagonal pull!

.. Use suitably rated, intact hoists.


" Use tools only for their intended use!
" Treat all bowl parts

- gently.

• Do not interchange parts from different bowls.

126 2063-9001-200 I 0609
CAUTION:
© Certain bowl parts (see sect 4.4)
may be pre-assembled and bal-
anced only by specialists from
shops authorized by \'Vestfalia
Separator.
brations) am! destruction of the
S9
Fig. 121
Hinge up hood
" Unscrew filling and displacement

water line 1.
Fig. 122
.. Unscrew the handle connection

piece by lightly hammering with a
mallet (left-hand thread), at the
same time
" ho!d the centripetal pump with sock-
et wrench 2.
Fig. 123

2063-9001-200 I 0609 127
" Remove handle connection piece 1.
T2062002
Fig. 124
.. Unscrew four hex head screws with

washers.
Fig. 125
" Hinge up hood.
CAUTION: Danger of injury by in-

Fig. 126
If necessary (see section 4.3.1:

tion of the frame.
/T2062005
Fig. 127

128 2063-9001-200 I 0609
----------------------·~-··-----~-"-~-------------------
Removing the centripetal pump

-- Ring spanner
- Mallet
" Undo the centripetal pump chamber

lock ring by striking the arm of the
ring spanner using a mallet (left-
hand thread).
Fig. 128
,. Screw the centripetal pump chamber

lock ring 1 off by hand and remove
it.
.. Force off the centripetal pump
chamber cover 2 with gasket by
means of a screwdriver.
Fig. 129
" Screw handle connection piece into

thread).
" Lift off the complete centripetal
pump, regulating ring and centripetal
pump chamber cover together.
Fig. 130
Mechnnical Separation I GEA Westfalia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 129
" Screw the centripetal pump chamber

lock ring on the bowl top and tighten
securely (left-hand thread).
T2057018
Fig. 131
" Position the complete centripetal

pump with centripetal pump cham-
ber cover onto the centripetal pump
chamber lock ring.
thread) by one turn .
.. Separate the sensing liquid pump
from the centripetal pump with a
mallet.
Fig. 132
" Remove the following parts:

serted gaskets,
- regulating ring 2,
with gaskets 3 and
gasket.
Fig. 133
• Unscrew the centripetal pump lock

ring (left-hand thread).
T2057019
Fig. 134

130 2063-9001-200 I 0609

0
·~
Socket wrench
" Unscrew the spindle screw (with

and commercially available ratchet
move it.
Fig. 135

- Eye bolt i

" Screw eye bolt i into the bowl bot-
tom .
.. Force the bowl off the spindle cone
using an open ended wrench
Fig. 136

the aid of a hoist.
.. Set the bowl down on a rubber mat
mantling.
Fig. 137

2063-9001-200 I 0609 131
.. Clean the threads in the distributor 1

with a brush .
.. Grease the thread of bowl top 2 (see
chapter 4.3.4).
Fig. 138

Compressing device
- Bolt unit 1
Fig. 139

- The ring nut must always be screwed into the bolt and be secured with Loctite
275.
sary).
.. Grease the thread and contact sur-

face of bell-shaped piece 2 (see
chapter 4.3.4) .
.. Place bell-shaped piece 2 on the
bowl top.
- The 0 marks of the bell-shaped
piece and the bowl bottom must
be aligned.
hand thread).
Fig. 140

132 2063-9001-200 I 0609
----~-~---~--r·-·------------------------------~
© Screw bolt unit 1 through the bell-

Fig. 141
@ Unscrew two threaded pins from the

bowl lock ring.
Fig. 142
Required special tooi

- complete ring spanner 1
.. Remove two hexagon nuts 3 from

hex head screws 2.
T2062032
Fig. 143
Important:
.. The 0-rnarks of the bowl lock ring
and of the bowl bottom must be visi-
ble.
spanner 1 !
• The arrow and the "open" mark must
show upwards.
" Bolt ring spanner 1 to the bowl lock

ring.
" Screw in two hex head screws 2 of
Fig. 144 the ring spanner and tighten firmly.

2063-9001-200 I 0609 133

the bell-shaped piece .
., CAUTION: Danger of injury
., Firmly hit the lever with the mallet.
pressed.
Fig. 145
• CAUTION: Danger of injury

through the lever!
.. Strike open the bowl lock ring with a
mallet (left-hand thread).
- The bowl lock ring is thus un-
screwed from the thread of the
bowl bottom.
Fig. 146

" Hold the bowl lock ring together with

the ring spanner and lift them off us-
ing chains and hoist.
Fig. 147

134 2063-9001-200 I 0609
Remove bowl top
CAUTION: Risk of injury through

rotating lever!
- Work cautiously in the area
around the !ever .
.. Carefully loosen bolt unit with mal-
let.
Fig. 148
.. Remove bolt unit from distributor

using the wrench.
Fig 149
.---------····
" Screw bolt unit into the bell-shaped
piece.
" Screw the bolt unit far enough to
display thread start (see detail).
Fig 150
·------·---~·-·--·····--··········-----
Mechanical Separation/ GEA Westfaiia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 135

top.

.. Do NOT step under hanging load.
• Carefully lift off only the bowl top
(with fitted gaskets) using the centri-
petal pump chamber lock ring, bolt
T2062041 unit and hoist.
L-Fi-.---'-'--------~--_J
9 151
the bowl bottom is lifted more than
1 cm above the positioning sur-
face.
- With a few mallet strikes to the edge of the bowl bottom, carefully separate
the bowl top from it.
- If the bowl top cannot be separated from the bowl bottom because of heavy
soiling, lower again and remove as follows.

136 2063-9001-200 I 0609
Remove heavily soiled bowl top (see Fig. 152 to Fig. 158):
Additional required special tools

- Disk 3
~ ~~2062042
2
Fig. 152
" Screw bolt unit 1 into the distributor

with a wrench as far as it will go.
Fig. 153
.. Turn lever 1 to under the eye bolt.

" Unscrew the centripetal pump
chamber lock ring 2.
Fig. 154

2063-9001-200 I 0609 137
.. Raise bell-shaped piece 1.

.. Slide washer 2 on the bolt offset
(see detail).
Fig. 155
.. Set bell-shaped piece 2 back on

0 0 bowl top.
- The 0 mark on the bell-shaped
piece and bowl top must be
aligned .
.. Screw in centripetal pump chamber
hand thread).
Fig. 156
" Completely unscrew the bolt unit

from the distributor by turning coun-
ter-clockwise with wrench complete-
ly to end of thread.
- The bowl top is forced off.
Fig. 157

138 2063-9001 -200 I 0609

top.
CAUTION: Danger to life \Nhen

" Only lift off the bowl top.
the distributor is lifted together
T2062041 with the disk stack.
Fig. 158
.. Carefully lift off the bowl top (with fitted gaskets) using the centripetal pump
chamber lock ring, bolt unit and hoist.
.. Detach the compressing device from the bowl top.
Remove separating disk
" Remove separating disk from dis-

tributor neck.
Fig. 159
Remove disk stack and distributor
• Screvv the bolt unit of the compress-

the wrench.
Fig. 160

2063-9001-200 I 0609 139

.. Using bolt unit and hoist, lift off and
set aside distributor together with
disk stack.
.. Remove hoist and screw out bolt
unit.
Fig. 161
Remove sliding piston
.. Insert spindle screw 1 in the hub.
Fig. 162
.. Lubricate sliding piston 1 thread

.. Screw bell-shaped piece of com-
pressing device on sliding piston .
.. Screw bolt unit 2 through the bell-
shaped piece into the sliding piston.
(
./
T2062050
C//
Fig. 163

140 2063-9001-200 I 0609
" Force the sliding piston from the

bowl bottom by turning clockwise.
Fig. 164

'" Remove the sliding piston (with fitted
gaskets) using bolt unit, bell-shaped
piece and hoist.
unit.
Fig. 165
Remove annular piston and closing chamber bottom
.. Loosen the twelve Allen screws

holding the closing-chamber bottom
Fig. 166

2063-9001-200 I 0609 141
9--2
- Compressing device:
Bolt unit 1
Bell-shaped piece 2
T2062062
Fig. 167
• Mount bell-shaped piece 1 in bowl

bottom.
• Mount assembling device 2 on bell-
shaped piece 1.
" Loosen three Allen screws 3 with
ratchet (using extension and insert).
" Slide washers 4 of the assembling
device outward under the edge of
the annular piston 5.
" Make sure that washers 4 properly
bite under the annular piston.
• Firmly re-tighten three Allen screws
Fig. 168
3.
• Screw bolt unit 1 into the bell-

shaped piece.
turning bolt unit clockwise.
Fig. 169

• Lift out closing chamber bottom 3
~H--3 gaskets) using hoist.
4
Fig. 170

142 2063-9001-200 I 0609
.. Drive apart annular piston 1 and

closing chamber bottom 2 with mal-
let as illustrated.
T2062073
Fig. 171
e Remove spindle screw 1.
Fig. 172
If necessary:
" Remove gasket 1 and piston guide
ring 2.
Fig. 173

2063-9001-200 I 0609 143
Remove water chamber bottom

- Eye bolt 1
.. Unscrew hexagon nut 2.

.. Screw eye bolt 1 in bowl bottom and
2
Fig. 174

" Attach bowl bottom in the load hook
.. Remove four Allen screws 1 from

water chamber bottom 2.
• Force off water chamber bottom 2
with a screwdriver and remove with
fitted gaskets.
T2062077
Fig. 175

144 2063-9001-200 I 0609
4.4.2 Cleaning the bow!

separation unless
.. Dismantle and clean the bowl for checking from time to time. See section
4.3.1 - Maintenance schedule .
.. Use only a cleaning agent that is approved for the field of application!
.. Do not use acid or chloric cleaning agents.

Chlorine attacks stainless steel parts .
.. Dissolve dried scale with citric acid .
.. For cleaning the individual disks and bowl parts


parts.
.. Clean the grooves and gaskets to
e Replace damaged, very swollen,
ately.
T2059018
L- - - - - -
Fig. 176
.. Clean the small holes for the feed and discharge of the operating liquid with
• Clean the distributor between the

outside.
cause overflow.
)
T2058082
Fig. 177
• Apply a thin coat of grease to the guide surfaces and threads of the bowl

2063-9001-200 I 0609 145

.. Never rinse off the motor with a direct water jet.
ATTENTION!
,. Do not use acid or chloric cleaning agents.
" Dissolve dried scale with citric acid.
" Clean the inside of the upper section of the frame from time to time:
To do this:
- Refer to themaintenance schedule (section 4.3.1 ),
- dismantle the bowl (section 4.4.1).
IMPORTANT: Cleaning liquid is es-

caping!
When the bowl has been removed, no
cleaning liquid must spill onto the drive
belt via the spindle.
• Make sure that protection cap 2 and
spindle cap 1 are installed with in-
serted gasket.
Fig. 178
• Use citric acid in case of furring.

• Close the main valve for operating water, filling and displacement water.

separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 °C ( 158 - 212 °F) ) .

146 .
2063-9001-200 I 0609
-··------------
" Undo screw i Qaw span 22) with

fitted gasket 2.
" Remove filter element 3.
- Use citric acid in case of furring.
water.
2058029
Fig. 179
" Fit the cleaned or new filter element 3.


"' Never rinse off the motor with a direct water jet.
.. Keep the motor clean as specified in the manual.

2063-9001-200 I 0609 147

ATTENTION!
" Before assembling the bowl, check to be sure that the guide and contact sur-
faces of the bowl are clean.
" Grease the guide surfaces as specified in the lubrication schedule (see 4.3.4).
" Some bowl parts are arranged in

other.
Q " Locking devices and alignment

IMPORTANT:
~ erated.
~ S10
Fig. 180
" When fitting the bowl parts, make

are aligned.
Fig. 181

- no diagonal pull!

" Use suitably rated, intact hoists.


148 2063-9001-200 I 0609

,. Use tools only for their intended use!

" If the plant has several separators,
different bowls.
number.
T2059019
Fig. 182
" Thoroughly clean the gasket

grooves of the individual bowl parts
and apply a thin coat of grease.
" After fitting check that
in the groove.
T2059018
Fig. 183
·····------····· - - - - - - - - - - - - -

2063-9001-200 I 0609 149
4.4.7 Assembling bowl
.. Pay special attention to sections "Safety'', 4.4.2 and 4.4.6

Install water chamber bottom

- Eye bolt 1

" Screw eye bolt 1 in bowl bottom and
Fig. 184
• Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in the water

chamber bottom grooves.
" Attach bowl bottom in the load hook
• The 0 mark on the bowl bottom and
water chamber bottom must be
aligned.
• Place water chamber bottom in the
bowl bottom.
and bowl bottom together tightly.
Torque: 30 Nm
30Nm
T2062081
Fig. 185

150 2063-9001-200 I 0609
" Clean the bowl hub with a suitable

cloth.
- The cone must be clean and dry.
" IMPORTANT: Do not grease the
bowl hub!

" Lower bowl bottom with built-in wa-
ter chamber bottom again.
T2062082
Fig. 186
" Remove hoist and screw out eye bolt.

4.3.4).
" Insert gasket 1 and piston guide
bottom.
Fig. 187
" For replacing the polyarnide gas-

ket 1 see section 4.4. 9.
@ Place gasket 2 into the groove of the
and firmly.
~
4.3.4).
--~V~/~.~ T2062070 I
Fig. 188

2063-9001-200 I 0609 151
.. Insert annular piston 1 into bowl

bottom 2.
Fig. 189
• Insert guide strip 1 bit by bit into the

let!
its guide surfaces.
Fig. 190

tom.
• Grease guide surfaces as specified
4.3.4).
Fig. 191

Hex head screw 1
Wing nut 2
Pipe 3
Hexagon nut 4
T2062104
Fig. 192

152 ------------------------·---~---~~- ..
2063-9001-200 I 0609
.. insert two assembling devices into

nuts 4.
" The "O" marks of the closing cham-
must be aligned.
"' Insert closing chamber bottom 5 into
assembly devices.
Fig. 193
" Remove two hexagon nuts 4.

the bowl bottom.
nuts 2 clockwise
__,,.;'.)/
T2062095
Fig. 194
.. The "O" marks of the bowl bottom

and the closing chamber bottom
must be aligned.
"' Fasten closing chamber bottom 1
Fig. 195
" Screw tight the twelve Alien screws

Torque: 45 Nm
Fig. 196
2063-9001-200 I 0609 153
., Make sure that piston guide ring 1 is

Fig. 197
" Insert spindle screw 1 into the hub.
Fig. 198
• Insert guide strip 2 bit by bit into the

groove of the sliding piston and
carefully tap it in with a mallet!
its guide surfaces.
• Insert gasket 1 in the groove of the
sliding piston.
• Grease guide surfaces as specified
4.3.4).
Fig. 199

154 2063-9001-200 I 0609
.. Grease the thread of sliding piston 1

" Screw bell-shaped piece 3 of the
compressing device into the thread
of the sliding piston.
'" Screw bolt unit 2 into the sliding
piston, through the bell-shaped
piece.
Fig. 200

" Install the sliding piston (with fitted
gasket) into the bowl bottom using
compressing device and hoist.
'" Remove the hoist and unscrew the
bolt unit.
.------------·-···-·---·
.. Unscrew spindle screw 1.
~20620671
Fig. 202
I@ I " Place disk 1 onto the bell-shaped

piece.
n ,. Screw the complete eye bolt 2 into

the bowl hub as far as it will go.
"' rress the sliding piston into its seat,
as far as it will go, by turning the
hexagon nut clockwise with an
open-ended wrench .
.. Remove the tools.
Fig. 203

2063-9001-200 I 0609 155
Installing the distributor and disk stack

required total number of disks!
This is indicated on the blind disk, e.g.,
84/1:
- total number of disks A and B = 84
- Number of blind disks B = 1
T2062100
Fig. 204
IMPORTANT: The last disks must be

correctly inserted in the guide fins
of the distributor!
• Carefully stack the disks on the dis-

tributor neck.
Fig. 205
• Screw the bolt unit of the compress-

the wrench as far as possible.
Fig. 206

156 2063-9001-200 I 0609

@ Install the distributor together with
the disk stack using the bolt unit and
hoist.
.. The 0 marks on the bowl bottom and
disk stack must be aligned.
" Pay attention to correct positioning!

unit.
Fig. 207
Installing the separating disk
" Place the separating disk on the

distributor neck.
Fig. 208
.. Thoroughly clean the grooves for

gaskets 1 and 2 in the bowl top .
.. Check gaskets 1 and 2:
Gi)/'
- insiaii if missing.
l~~-~~
" For replacing the polyamide gasket
~-==---___,...- 2
~~~
T2057041
Fig. 209

2063-9001-200 I 0609 157

Compressing device
- Bolt unit 1
Fig. 210

- The ring nut must always be screwed into the bolt and be secured with Loc-
tite 275.
sary).
.. Grease the thread of the bowl top

0 (see chapter 4.3.4).
bowl top.
" The "O" marks of the bell-shaped
piece and the bowl top must be
aligned.
" Screw on centripetal pump chamber
hand thread).
• Screw in bolt unit completely into the
bell-shaped piece.
Fig. 211

0 transporting heavy parts!
" Install the bowl top using bolt unit
and hoist.
• Pay attention to correct positioning!
• The "O" marks must be aligned.
• Remove the hoist.
T2062055
Fig. 212

158 2063-9001-200 I 0609
" Screw bolt unit 1 through the bell-

an open-ended vvrench.
Fig. 213
IMPORTANT: Prevent seizing of

threads!
" The following parts must be carefully
bowl bottom and lock ring
bowl lock ring
Fig. 214

" Hold bowl lock ring together with

ring spanner and gradually lower
them onto the bowl bottom using
chains and hoist.
" Screw the bowl lock ring by hand
into the thread of the bowl bottom
as far as possible (left-hand
T2062091 I thread).
Fig. 215
© Remove hoist and chains.

2063-9001-200 I 0609 159

" Firmly hit the lever with the mallet.
pressed.
Fig. 216

through the lever!
" Strike the bowl lock ring with a mal-
let until the "O" mark is reached
' (left-hand thread).
CAUTION:
Fig. 217
" Remove centripetal pump chamber lock ring, compressing device and com-
pressing device.
" Screw in two threaded pins.
! ~
I
T2062106
Fig. 218

160 2063-9001-200 I 0609
" Clean and wipe dry the spindle

IMPORTANT:
Do not grease the conical parts!
T2062057
Fig. 219

- Eye bolt 1
"' Unscrew hexagon nut 2

.. Screw eye bolt 1 completely into the
bowl bottom.
Fig. 220

" Carefully place the bowl using eye
Fig. 221

2063-9001-200 I 0609 161
.. Unscrew the eye bolt from the bowl

bottom.
Fig. 222
Required tools
- Socket wrench
- Torque wrench
.. Provide spindle screw 2 with gas-

ket 1.
• Put spindle screw into socket
thread).
Fig. 223
CAUTION:
life!

Torque: 80 Nm
Fig. 224
• Check that spindle and bowl are

centred.
- is 5 ±1.5 mm

section 4.7 .1).
Fig. 225

162 2063-9001-200 I 0609
~-------~~"---------~

grooves of the bowl top.
Fig. 226
" Insert gasket i in the centripetal

pump groove .
.. Lightly grease threads and contact
surfaces of the centripetal pump.
" Install centripetal pump 2.
Fig. 227
" Mount the centripetal pump chamber

cover.
" The 0 mark on the centripetal pump
chamber cover and bowl bottom
must be aligned.
" Pay attention to correct positioning.
Fig. 228
" Insert the gasket in the groove of the
Fig. 229
Mechanicai Separation i GEA Westfaiia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 163
.. Mount the regulating ring selected

from the set of regulating rings .
.. See section 2.6.
Fig. 230

• Grease guide surfaces.
" Install sensing liquid pump.
Fig. 231
.. Insert gasket 1 in the groove in the

2044-025
Fig. 232

cover.
• The "O" marks of the centripetal
pump chamber cover and the bowl
bottom must be aligned.
Fig. 233

164 2063-9001-200 I 0609
'" Grease the threads on the bowl top

CAUTION:
" Screw tight the centripetal pump
chamber lock ring using the ring
Fig. 234
" Pay attention to section 4. 7.1.
----------------·-····
Mechanica! Separation I GEA Westfa!ia Separator
2063-9001-200 I 0609 165

REMOVAL
when drilling!
., Drill through the damaged polya-

mide gasket twice centrically and
vertically.
60mm.
T2062068
Fig. 235

while screwing!
• Screw two wooden screws in the
• Force off the old polyamide gasket
with the wood screws.
" Lever it out of the groove bit by bit
T2062069
Fig. 236
FITTING
• Thoroughly clean and dry the groove.
• Heat the gasket in approx. 80 °C (176 °F) water for 5 minutes.
• Wipe dry the gasket.
• Fit the gasket into the groove of the

the bowl top).
• Place on a wooden block.
• hammer the gasket evenly into the
groove.
Fig. 237

166 2063-9001-200 I 0609
" The sealing surface of the gasket

must not protrude by more than 0.5
mm from the surface "A" of the bowl
top.
T2059027
Fig. 238
Mechanica! Separation I GEA Westfa!ia

2063-9001-200 I 0609 167

Change the polyamide gasket only when it is damaged .
REMOVAL
• Drill through the damaged polyam-

vertically.
60 mm.
T2059105
Fig. 239

• Screw two wooden screws in the
" Force off the old polyamide gasket
• lever it bit by bit out of the groove
Fig. 240
Note:

168 2063-9001-200 I 0609
FITTING
., Thoroughly clean and dry the

groove .
., Heat the new polyamide gasket in
approx. 80 °C ( 176 °F) water for 5
minutes.
" Wipe the gasket dry and press it
Fig. 241
,. Insert annular piston 1 into bowl

bottom 2.
Fig. 242

let!
.. Thoroughly clean guide strip 1 and
its guide surfaces.
Fig. 243
Mechanical Separaiion I GEA Westfalia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 169

tom.
4.3.4).
Fig. 244
" Clamp mounting ring 1 under the rim

Fig. 245

Hex head screw 1
Wing nut 2
Pipe 3
Hexagon nut 4
T2062104
Fig. 246
" Insert two assembling devices into

nuts 4.
• The 0 marks of the closing chamber
bottom and the bowl bottom must be
aligned.
• Insert closing chamber bottom 5 into
assembly devices.
Fig. 247

170 2063-9001-200 I 0609
.. Remove two hexagon nuts 4 .

.. Screw two assembling devices into
the bowl bottom .
.. Insert the closing chamber bottom
nuts 2 clockwise
Fig. 248
"' The 0 marks of the bowl bottom and

the closing chamber bottom must be
aligned.
Fig. 249
.. Screw tight the twelve Allen screws

Torque: 45 Nm
Fig. 250
.. Insert spindle screw 1 into the hub.
Fig. 251
---------
Mechanical Separation I GEA Westfa!ia
2063-9001-200 I 0609 171
.. Unscrew the twelve Allen screws

holding the bowl bottom and the
closing-chamber bottom together.
Fig. 252
~
- Compressing device
Bolt unit 1
~2 Bell-shaped piece 2
T2062062
Fig. 253
.. Insert bell-shaped piece 1 into the

bowl bottom.
• Fit assembling device 2 onto bell-
shaped piece 1.
• Loosen three Allen screws 3 using
and socket).
• Slip three disks 4 of the assembling
• Make sure that disks 4 are properly
positioned under the annular piston.
Fig. 254
" Firmly re-tighten Allen screws 3.
• Screw bolt unit 1 into bell-shaped

piece 2
• Force off closing chamber bottom 3
turning the bolt unit clockwise.
Fig. 255

172 2063-9001-200 I 0609
., CAUTION: Danger to life when

" Lift out closing chamber bottom 3
~\-\--- 3 kets) using the hoist.
4
Fig. 256
" Separate annular piston 1 from clos-

• !
T2062098
Fig. 257
., Remove the mounting ring.
Fig. 258
" Unscrew spindle screw 1.
Fig. 259

2063-9001-200 I 0609 173
.. By carrying out several measure-

X ±0,05 mm ments around the entire circumfer-
T2048057
Fig. 260

174 2063-9001-200 I 0609
----~~--·--~--~---~---~~--~------~,--

" sealing surface A of the sliding piston (Fig. 261) (new condition of the sliding
piston rim H: 35 mm high) and
"' polyamide gasket B of the bowl top (Fig. 262).

ATTENTION! When the first erosion

marks (0.2 to 0.3 mm deep) are de-
tected, i.e. as soon as the bowl
starts to leak:
" Remachine the sealing surface of
the sliding piston.
T2062017
Fig. 261
" When remachining, make sure that

- the sealing surface A is machined cleanly and
- the sliding piston rim H is still at least 34 mm high.
Standard parameters for remachining the sealing surface A

~-··--·~--- -----e-~-·-~---
.-1
Speed 55
-···----------- ----------·-----~-·· --·-------~--------~-----~-------·-··
·--
Forward feed max. 0.1 mm/lrevolution
ATTENTION! After facing

.. fit a new polymide gasket B into the
Fig. 262

2063-9001-200 I 0609 175

/T2062009
Fig. 263

.. Unlock the shackle.
• Carefully close the hood.
Fig. 264
" Screw in four hex head screws (M

Fig. 265

176 2063-9001-200 I 0609
If the gaskets 2 have been removed

" Provide handle connection piece 1
.. Appiy a thin coat of grease to the

4.3.4).
T2062012
Fig. 266

- Socket wrench 2
" Introduce handle connection piece 1

into the hood.
" Hold the centripetal pump with the
socket wrench and screw in by
nection piece with a mallet (left
1 hand thread).
Fig. 267
" Carefully clean the holes in the non-

return valve and
" rinse with water.
" Check the functionality of the non-
return valve.
T2057226 I
Fig. 268
" Assemble and connect filling and

displacement water feed line 1.
Fig. 269

2063-9001-200 I 0609 177
Note
Notes
Not:izen
Anotaciones
MuistHnpanot
/
Notater
Notes
Note

178 2063-9001-200 I 0609
4.6 Drive
--1--- 80.1
90
80.2
95
100.9
80.7
80.8
- 100.5
-100.10
1 I .-100.11
1~: --1
v A2063003
Fig. 270 Exploded view of the drive

2063-9001-200 I 0609 179
JPos. Designation Dimensions
Neck bearing bridge, compl.

10.1 Neck bearing bridge:
10.2 Neck bearing pressure ring
10.3 Threaded plug
10.4 Set of neck bearing springs
10.5 Spring piston
20 Gasket
30 Pivoting bearing
40 Bearing housing
50 Gasket
60 Washer 12.5x22x1
75 Lock washer
Spindle assembly
80.1 Spindle
80.2 Neck bearing protection cap
80.3 Spacer ring
80.4 Cylindrical roller bearing
80.5 Set collar
80.6 Threaded pin
80.7 Ball bearing protection ring
80.8 Angular contact ball bearing
80.9 Bearing sleeve
80.10 Cylindrical pin
80.11 Dowel pin
95 Lock washer
Centrifugal clutch, compl.
100.1 Clutch pulley
100.2 Grooved ball bearing
100.3 Distance sleeve
100.4 Retaining ring 95 x 3
100.5 Clutch driver
100.7 Flat belt pulley
100.8 Allen screw M 10 x 35
100.9 Clutch shoe
100.10 Washer
110 Washer
130 Drive belt

180 --~---~--,_--, -----------------------------
2063-9001-200 I 0609
4.6.1 important instrnctions for fitting aml removing the drive


"' Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
still.
-- The run-down time of the bowl is 90 minutes after switching off the motor
(without braking!).

sight glass.
no longer moving.
Fig. 271

.. Check ONLY visually that the drive belt is no longer moving.

still.
separator!
.. Applying the brake is not effective!

separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 °C(158 - 212 °F))

2063-9001-200 I 0609 181


" Refer to the motor nameplate .
only.
" Avoid damage to drive parts when fitting and removing by

- no diagonal pull!



• Treat all drive parts
- gently.
IMPORTANT: Before fitting the drive parts

• Thoroughly clean and dry the drive chamber.
IMPORTANT: To avoid bearing damage,

• always operate the separator with installed bowl!

182 2063-9001-200 I 0609
" Pay special attention to section 4.6.1.
-~~/
" Undo the oii drain screw and
\i " Drain the oil into an oil pan (approx.
3.7 I).
7
(1)
/I~~
/ 11
A2057064
Fig. 272
" Undo three hex head screws 1.

ing 2.
/
/~
I
I
I
1
A2057065
Fig. 273
" Unscrew four hex head screws 1.
Fig. 274

2063-9001-200 I 0609 183
• Pull the motor out of the flange

guide by means of the hoist (approx.
10 mm).
ATTENTION!
"' Pull the drive belt off the belt pulley
(centrifugal clutch) downwards.
Fig. 275
.. Lift the motor with centrifugal clutch

out of the lower section of frame.
Fig. 276
Remove the operating water con-

TOP nection in the upper section of
frame:
•_ A • Undo nut 2.
~/ . . " Take off pipe 3.
3
A2062017
Fig. 277
.. Remove spindle cap 1 with fitted

gasket.
Fig. 278

184 2063-9001-200 I 0609
., Undo six hex head screws 1.

" Remove ring 2 and protective cap 3
with inserted gasket 4.
Fig. 279
Removing the speed monitoring

device:
., Unscrew hex head screw 1.
" Take off speed monitoring device 2
and lay it down in the lower section
of frame.
Fig. 280
., Take the drive belt out of the lower

section of frame.
Fig. 281
., Unscrew the three hex head screws

" Unscrew spindle assembly 3 from
Fig. 282
!\llechanica! Separation I GEA Westfa!ia

2063-9001-200 I 0609 185
Required tools:
(M12x75)
" Thread hex head screws 1 into the

puller holes.
"' Force the neck bearing bridge 2 off
the frame by turning the screws 1
clockwise.
Fig. 283
ATTENTION!
Before dismantling the neck bearing
bridge,
• mark the side of the neck bearing
bridge facing the motor.
A Motor side
Fig. 284
" Remove the neck bearing bridge

with neck bearing pressure ring from
(For dismantling the neck bearing
bridge, see section 4.6.7.)
A2063005
Fig. 285
• Unscrew the four hex head screws 1

with lock washers 2.
A2060017
Fig. 286

186 2063-9001-200 I 0609
Required tools:
- Two hex head screws 2 (M 10 x 40)
@ Force off bearing housing 1 by tum

ing hex head screws 2.
" Remove the bearing housing from
the lower section of frame together
with pivoting bearing 3, washers 4
and inserted gaskets.
Fig. 287

2063-9001-200 I 0609 187
Spindle assembly
A2057107
Fig. 288
Required tools:
- commercially available pulling de-
vice
- open ended wrench
• Pull off from the spindle:

- cylindrical pin 1
- heat bearing sleeve 2
- angular contact ball bearing 3
- ball bearing protection ring 4
Fig. 289

188 2063-9001-200 I 0609
Required tools:
- Mallet
IMPORTANT: Sensitive material!

- Be careful not to damage the spin-
dle.
" Drive the dowel pin 1 out of the

spindle by means of light hammer
blows.
Fig. 290
" Unscrew threaded pin 1 from the set

collar 2 and
" detach the set collar 2 from the
spindle.
Fig. 291
Required tools:
/ - commercially available pulling de-
vice
- open ended wrench
,. Pull off from the spindle:

- cylindrical roller bearing 1,
- spacer ring 2,
- neck bearing protection cap 3.
Fig. 292

2063-9001-200 I 0609 189
4.6.4 Dismantling the centrifugal clutch
I· Pay special attention to section 4.6.1.

.. Remove the brake with brake hous-
ing 2.
Fig. 293
r
11' I/"
l
A2058008
Fig. 294
.. Pull the motor out of the flange

10 mm).
ATTENTION!
• Pull the drive belt off the flat belt
wards.
Fig. 295

190 2063-9001-200 I 0609

" Lift the motor witl1 fluid clutch out of
Fig. 296
'" Turn the motor together with the

goo centrifugal clutch 90° (upside down)
with the aid of the hoist
able aids!
A2058097
Fig. 297
" Undo retaining ring 1.

,. Take off disk 2.
Fig. 298
~ " Pull the clutch shoes out of the

clutch driver.
A205720~
Fig. 299
!Viechanica! Separation I GEA Westfa!ia

2063-9001-200 I 0609 191
.. Arrest the clutch driver 1 with an

open-ended wrench.
" Unscrew hex head screw 2 from the
motor shaft end .
.. Take off disk 3.
Fig. 300

=
- Threaded pin 2 M 16 x 50

open-ended wrench.
tor shaft end:
• Screw threaded pin 2 into the thread
Fig. 301
Required special tool:

- Hex head screw (M 30 x 240)
• Screw the hex head screw into the

clutch driver.
" Arrest the clutch driver with an open-
ended wrench.
" Force the centrifugal clutch off the
motor shaft end by turning the hex
head screw clockwise.
A2057072
Fig. 302
• Remove hex head screw 1 from the

clutch driver and threaded pin 2 from
the motor shaft end.
'
Fig. 303

192 2063-9001-200 I 0609
® CAUTION: Danger to life when

.. Place the clutch pulley with fitted flat
belt pulley and clutch driver on a
wooden base using transport ropes
and hoist.
,. CAUTION: Secure from rolling
able aids!
" Take the retaining ring out of the
Fig. 304
.. Position wooden block.

.. Drive the clutch driver downwards
,. Loosen the clutch driver from the
seat of the two ball bearings.
Fig. 305
.. Turn the clutch pulley together with

fitted flat belt pulley 90° (upside
down) with the aid of the hoist.

able aids!
.. Take the retaining rings out of the

A2057075 I
Fig. 306
Required tools
- Disk (0 86 - 94 mm)
- Wooden block
- Hammer
e Turn the clutch pulley with fitted flat

belt pulley through 180° and
" place it on wooden supports as
shown.
e Drive the grooved ball bearing and
spacer bush out of the clutch pulley.
Fig. 307

2063-9001-200 I 0609 193

• For dimensions of the parts see 4.6 - exploded view.
• Insert gasket in groove of bearing

housing.
Fig. 308
• Screw bearing housing 1 together

with pivoting bearing 2 into place
with the four hex head screws 3,
lock washers 4 and washers 5.
" For number of washers, refer to
section 4. 7.1.
A2060034
Fig. 309
" Ensure correct assembly of neck

bearing bridge (section 4.6.7).
• Provide neck bearing bridge 1 with
gaskets 2.
correct fitting position of the neck
bearing bridge!
- The holes in the neck bearing bridge
must be aligned with the holes in
• Fit in the neck bearing bridge 1 with
the marked side facing the motor.
Fig. 310

194 2063-9001-200 I 0609
~
When the drive belt is dismantled, torn
or not tensioned, the neck bearing
pressure ring 1 is eccentric relative to
the side facing away from the motor in
the neck bearing bridge.
The neck bearing pressure ring 1 is
pulled into the centric axis when the
belt is tensioned!
A = Motor side
Fig. 311
"' Turn spindle through 180° (upside

down).
.. Mount neck bearing protection cap 1

and spacer ring 2.
IMPORT ANT: Pay attention to the
correct fitting position of spacer
ring 2!
- The small inner diameter of the
spacer ring must be directed to the
neck bearing protection cap i.
Fig. 312
" Heat cylindrical roller bearing 3 in oil up to 100 °C (212 °F) and slip it onto the
spindle .
.. Slide set collar 4 on to the spindle and secure it in the spindle groove with four
threaded pins.
Required tools:
1 - Mallet
0/, IMPORTANT: Sensitive material!

- Be careful not to damage the spin-
CfJD dle.
'I
k_---- I
.. Install dowel pin 1 dead centre by
hammering lightly.
A2063007 I
Fig. 313

2063-9001-200 I 0609 195
.. Heat ball bearing protection ring 1

and angular contact ball bearings 2
in oil up to 100 °C (212 °F).
. ·. · · ·._·. .
. .
ATTENTION: Bearing damage is
- When fitting angular contact ball
.tll
,/ \ ..\
: :
sure that the narrow rim of each
1 l ball bearing inner ring faces up-
.
.. ..
. wards.
. .
··.. ....
. " Slide ball bearing protection ring 1
.. ..·
A2060085 and angular contact ball bearings 2
Fig. 314 onto the spindle.
., Fit cylindrical pin 1 in the bearing

sleeve and secure with Loctite 275 .
., Heat bearing sleeve 2 in oil up to
100 °C (212 °F).
2 • Important! Before fitting bearing
sleeve 2, make sure that the in-
stalled angular contact ball bearings
have cooled down to room tempera-
ture.
• Slide bearing bush 2 over the angu-
lar contact ball bearings and the ball
A2060086
Fig. 315
" Install the assembled spindle as-

frame.
Pay attention to correct positioning!
ATTENTION: Pay attention to the
correct fitting position of the spin-
dle!
be aligned with the holes in the
lower section of the frame.
• Screw tight the spindle with the
three hex head screws 2 and lock
Fig. 316 washers 3.
• Place drive belt on the spindle.
A2062013
/
/
Fig. 317

196 2063-9001-200 I 0609

.. For dimensions of the parts see 4.6 - Exploded View.
" Clean clutch pulley 1 with fitted flat

belt pulley 2.
groove.
" Check that retaining ring 3 is cor-
rectly fitted.
A2057086
Fig. 318
Required tools:
- Disk 2 (0 86 - 94 mm)
- Wooden block
- Hammer

"' Carefully drive the fast grooved ball

taining ring.
Fig. 319
-------- ···-························ ... ·-··-··-·····--·
Mechanica! Separation I GEA Westfa!ia

2063-9001-200 I 0609 197

" Carefully drive the second grooved

first grooved ball bearing.
A2057142
Fig. 320

- Distance sleeve 1 may only contact
the inner ring of grooved ball bear-
ing 2!
• Place distance sleeve 1 on the ball

bearing inner ring.
Fig. 321

198 2063-9001-200 I 0609
ATTETNION: Bearing damage is

" Carefully drive the third grooved

distance sleeve.
A70o7198
CAUTION: Danger of imbalance by

incorrect fitting!
" Insert retaining ring 2 180° offset
per groove.
Fig. 322
i\!1echanica! Separation I GEA Westfa!ia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 199
Required tools:
1~
- Disk 1(061 -69 mm)

.. Turn clutch pulley with fitted flat belt
pulley and installed grooved ball
bearings through 180°.
205720
Fig. 323
ATTENTION: Bearing damage is caused by incorrect fitting!

""' - Disk 1 may only contact the inner ring of the grooved ball bearing!
" Place the ball bearing inner ring on disk 1.

correct fitting position of the dis-
tance sleeve!
- Distance sleeve 1 must be flush with
bearings.
Fig. 324
Required tools:
- Wooden block
- Rubber hammer
• Carefully hammer the clutch driver

into the grooved ball bearing with
light blows.
Fig. 325

200 ~~~~~~~~-~~~~~
2063-9001-200 I 0609
.. Turn clutch pulley with fitted flat belt

pulley and fitted clutch drive through
180° with the aid of the hoist.
the clutch driver.
Fig. 326

90° - Do NOT step under hanging load.
'" Turn the motor through 90° with the
aid of the hoist.
able aids!
A2057133
Fig. 327
Required tools:
.. IMPORTANT: Pay attention to the

feather key groove .
.. Fit the assembled centrifugal clutch
on the motor shaft end.
open-ended wrench.
" Insert assembling device 2 - as
shown and
" screw hex head screw 3 with hexa-
gon nut 4 into the motor shaft end.
Fig. 328
Mechanica! Separation I GEA Westfalia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 201
.. Pull the centrifugal clutch onto the

by turning hexagon nut 4 with a sec-
ond open-ended wrench.
Fig. 329
" Undo hex head screw 3 together

• Remove assembling device 2.
Fig. 330
IMPORTANT: With driver 1 arrested:

" Provide hex head screw 2 (M 16x65)
with washer 3 and thread it into the
motor shaft end.
Fig. 331

- Be sure to replace all clutch shoes
simultaneously!
shoes.
evenly spaced!
• Fit clutch shoes.
Fig. 332

202 2063-9001-200 I 0609
" Insert disk 1.

., Fit the retaining ring 2 in the groove
of the clutch driver.
Fig. 333
Mechanical Separation I GEA Westfa!ia

2063-9001-200 I 0609 203
4.6.7 Replacing the neck bearing springs (neck bearing bridge)
The neck bearing springs 2 are ex-

posed to different stresses due to the
drive belt tension (stronger stress on
the motor side A of the neck bearing
bridge).
To check the condition of the neck
bearing springs 2,
• they must be dismantled periodically
(see section 4.3.1) and individually
(see Fig. 335) .
.. and their length measured (see Fig.
336) dimension A).
Fig. 334
" Dismantle threaded plug 1, neck

bearings 2 and spring piston 3 from
the marked motor side of the neck
bearing bridge.
Fig. 335
.. Check neck bearing spring 2 for

deformation.
Neck bearing spring - New con-
dition:
A= 32 ±0.4 mm
Neck bearing spring -
Deformation limit:
A= 31 mm
• If dimension "A" is below the de-

A2057188 formation limit:
- Replace neck bearing springs ac-
Fig. 336
cording to Fig. 337 in the neck
bearing bridge.

204 2063-9001-200 I 0609
.. Replace the neck bearing springs

H1 of the strongly stressed motor
side A with the neck bearing springs
H1 H2 H2 of the less stressed side of the
neck bearing bridge - as illustrated.
" To fit the neck bearing springs refer

to Fig. 338.
H1 H2
Fig. 337

grease .
.. Insert the neck bearing springs 2 in
.. Fit threaded plug 1.
.. Screw threaded plug 1 together with

neck bearing spring 2 and spring
piston 3 into the taphole of the neck
bearing spring and tighten.
A2057194
Fig. 338
rmm
Do not forget to order a new set of neck bearing springs from Westfalia Separa-
tor!
The deformed neck bearing springs must be replaced after 8000 operating
hours.
Dismantling the complete neck bearing bridge
"' Remove six threaded piugs 1, neck

bearing springs 2 and spring pistons
3.
" Lift neck bearing pressure ring 4 out
of neck bearing bridge 5.
Fig. 339
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - · ···----·--·--
2063-9001-200 I 0609 205
Assembling the complete neck bearing bridge

!Im
The spindle cylindrical roller bearing is inserted into neck bearing pressure ring
4, which is held in position by a radial arrangement of six evenly distributed
springs 2.
" Install neck bearing pressure ring 4

the neck bearing bridge 5.
IMPORTANT: The six recesses of
the pressure ring must be located at
the six holes in the neck bearing
bridge!
grease.
" Insert the neck bearing springs 2 in
• Fit threaded plug 1.
Fig. 340
.. Screw the six threaded plugs 1 together with the neck bearing springs 2 and
spring pistons 3 into the six tapholes of the neck bearing bridge 5 and tighten.

206
--------------------------···--·----·· ------------
2063-9001-200 I 0609
, .. Pay special attention to section 4.6.1 .
.. Carefully place the motor with pre-

assembled centrifugal clutch on the
lower section of frame by means of
a hoist
- Do not yet let the motor flange
lock into the frame opening.
Fig. 341
IMPORTANT:
" Degrease the belt contact surfaces
" Fit the drive belt:
opening 1 and
'" Pay attention to correct seating of
the drive belt on flat belt pulley and
spindle pulley.
Fig. 342

Fig. 343
Mechanical Sep;:ir;:ition I GEA Westfalia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 207
.. Screw the complete clamp bolt

through the hole in the frame and
into tapped hole of centrifugal clutch
as shown.
" IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to
the grooved ball bearing:
- do not screw in hex head screw 1
all the way.
" Tension the drive belt by turning hex
head nut 2 clockwise until the mo-
i
I
tor flange locks into the frame open-
A2057098
ing.
Fig. 344
.. Fasten the motor with four hex head

screws 2 (M 16 x 40).
2 • IMPORTANT: Unscrew complete
clamp bolt 1 out of the centrifugal
clutch again.
A2057099
Fig. 345

" Remove the hoist.
Fig. 346
!mm
sioned (see Fig. 347, pas. 2).
347, pas 1)!

208 2063-9001-200 I 0609
" Check
easily.
-whether spindle 3 has been
tensioning drive belt 3 (see Fig.
225).
A2062008
Fig. 347
Installing the speed monitoring de··

vice:
" Place speed monitoring device 2 on

" fasten with hex head screw 1.
Fig. 348
e Align proximity switch 1 as illus-

trated.
ATTENTION!
mm.
Fig. 349
" Insert protective cap 3 with fitted

.. Fasten with six hex head screws
(M8x16).
Fig. 350

2063-9001-200 I 0609 209
" Place spindle cap 1 with fitted gas-

ket on the spindle .
.. Pay attention to correct positioning!
Fig. 351
Fitting the operating water connec-

TOP
.d.
~ -.
.... .../
)
tion in the upper section of frame:
" Slide nut 2 over pipe 3.
.. Fit pipe with nit into the screwed
connection 1 and slide on as far as it
will go.
IMPORT ANT: The narrow end of the

.. Tighten nut 2 firmly.

A2062017
Fig. 352
• Fit brake and brake housing 2 to the

lower section of the frame with three
Fig. 353
• Screw in oil drain screw 1 with fitted

gasket.
" Screw in the sight glass 2.
• Fill in oil as described in section
4.3.3 and
• Screw in plug 3 with gasket.
A2057123
Fig. 354

210 2063-9001-200 I 0609

" Have the motor connected by an authorized electrician!

2063-9001-200 I 0609 211

" bowl height
" and centripetal pump play
4.7.1 Bowl height

The bowl height is correctly adjusted at the factory before shipment of the sepa-
rator.
IMPORTANT: The bowl height may only be measured with installed and
tensioned drive belts!
CHECKING
Check the bowl height and readjust if necessary:
CAUTION:
" Firmly tighten bowl lock ring.

- The "O" marks on the bowl bottom
or top and on the bowl lock ring
must be aligned.
Fig. 355

- is 18 ±2 mm
- between upper edge of bowl lock
ring and upper section of frame.
Fig. 356

212 2063-9001-200 I 0609
ADJUSTING
Bowl too high Increase number of washers 3.
Bowl too low Reduce number of washers 3.
Washer:
Inner diameter, 12.5 mm - outer diameter, 22 mm - thickness, 1 mm
--~--··---- .. -~
CAUTION: Danger of crushing by

falling separator parts!
" Four hex head screws 1 of bearing
housing 2 must be
- unscrewed evenly and in di-
agonal sequence (do not re-
move!);
- loosen until a gap A is created for
the required number of washers 3
between the lower section of the
i 2 frame and the bearing housing.
A2060018
Fig. 357
" Remove hex head screw 1 indivi-

dually and
"' add or remove washer(s) 3.
" Screw in hex head screw 1 again.
" Remaining hex head screws 1 must
be:
- removed individually
- fitted with the same number of
washers 3 and
- screwed in again.
A2060019
Fig. 358
" Screw bearing housing 2 tightly into

place via the four hex head screws 1
with the necessary washers 3.
" Check bowl height
'i 3
2
~=r -:l
A2060020
Fig. 359

2063-9001-200 I 0609 213
.. Move the centripetal pump axially to

and fro in the centripetal pump
chamber.
" Measure the total clearance A (ap-
prox.10 mm).
" Close the hood .
.. Check:
the frame rim?
T2044009 firmly?
Fig. 360
• Lightly apply a thin coat of lubricant

to the threads of the centripetal
schedule.
• Fit handle connection piece 1 into
the centripetal pump.
• hold the centripetal pump with sock-
et wrench 2.
Fig. 361
.. Hold the handle connection piece 1.

• Turn the socket wrench 2 until the
handle connection piece is raised
slightly from the hood (approx. 0.5
mm).
Fig. 362

214 2063-9001-200 I 0609
----------------------------·

to its maximum.
A12= 4 - 6 mm
T2044012
Fig. 363
Check:
"' Axial clearance too large:
- Lift off the bowl, see section 4.7.1 - Adjustment.
" Axial clearance too small:
- Lower the bowl, see section 4.7.1 -Adjustment.

2063-9001-200 I 0609 215

Checks Section

4. Bowl speed 4.1.5

Checks Section
1. Temperature of product

• Disconnect all electrical connections.
• Thoroughly clean the separator (see section 4.4.2, 4.4.3 and 4.4.4).
" Dry and grease the clean bowl parts and all unvarnished machine parts to
• Store the clean, greased bowl in a dry place until reuse.
• Store the gaskets in a cool, dry, dust-free dark room to prevent them from be-
coming brittle.
• Check if the shut-off valves for water leak.
" If necessary, disconnect the water lines to prevent damage by dripping water.

" Drain the lube oil completely.
• Fill the drive chamber with a slushing oil, e.g. Shell oil S.7294 (SAE 30/SAE
50), to the middle of the sight glass.
" Let the separator run without bowl for approx. 1 minute to make sure that all

216 2063-9001-200 I 0609
CAUTION!
" Keep a safe distance away from the rotating spindle.
" After switching off the separator, wait until the spindle has stopped rotating.
" Take off the drive belt.

" Follow the instructions of the motor manufacturer.
·-····----------

2063-9001-200 I 0609 217
4.10 Storage
ATTENTION!
~
IMPORTANT:
• Outdoor exposure is not admissible!

IMPORTANT:
A storage time of more than 12 months of the separator and control unit is only
4.10.2 Separator
IMPORTANT:
• Store the separator with dismantled bowl!
• Store the clean, greased bowl in a dry place .

.. Store the gaskets in a cool, dry, frost-free, dust-free dark room to prevent
Recommended storage temperature:+ 5 to +50 °C (41 - 122 °F)
• The separator with dismantled bowl must be stored dry and free from vibra-
tions.
• Protect the drive spindle and motor from dust.
• Store all other separator parts dry and frost-free.

• The control unit and accessories must be stored dry, dust-free, vibration and
frost-free.
• Protect from excessive heat!

218 2063-9001-200 I 0609
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to+ 45 °C (41 - 113 °F)
4.11 Before restarting

'" that all separators and plant components have been function-checked
by competent personnel (qualified specialists).
" that the maintenance intervals are adhered to .
.. that the separator is assembled correctly by competent persons.
Note:
" check all bowl parts as specified in the maintenance schedule (table "Mainte-
Procedure:
"' Drain the slushing oil.
'" Remove the grease from all unpainted machine parts .
.. Check gaskets.
Replace damaged, very swollen, hardened or brittle gaskets immediately.
@ Assemble the bovvl (see section 4.4.7).
" Check the ball bearings of the spindle and centrifugal clutch (if applicable).
., Fit drive belt (see section 4.6.5 or 4.6.8).

" Assemble the separator correctly.

" Fill the drive chamber with the specified lube oil as specified in section 4.3.3.
Mechan1cai Separation I GEA '\Nestfaiia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 219
4.12 Disposal
- metal,
- plastics,
- glass,
- cleaning liquids,
- electric and electronic apparatus .
...
: ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION!
• * •

out carefully.
• They can be injurious to health,
sition.
• Waste oil must be disposed of in
Fig. 364
~
regulations.

220 2063-9001-200 I 0609


!mml
4.12.3 Separator
" Drain the gear oil and dispose of it properly in accordance with section 4.12.1.
" Dismantle the separator, remove any lubricant sticking to separator parts and

2063-9001-200 I 0609 221
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
l ;
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

222 2063-9001-200 I 0609
-----------------·-----------------~
4.13 Standard tools

~
4 5 ~ 7
e0 ~-
9 10 11
14 u 15
~
16
i17
I18
206?-9901-St ;
Fig. 365

2063-9001-200 I 0609 223
IPos. Designation
I
Screwdriver
2 Torque wrench (0 - 100 Nm)
with inserts and extension
3 Caliper gauge
4 Electric oil heater for ball bearings
5 Ratchet
with inserts and extension
6 Standard hammer and mallet
7 Inner snap pliers with offset jaws
(0 40 mm)
8 Outer snap pliers (0 35 mm)
9 Hand tachometer
10 Wrench, adjustable
11 Brushes
12 Puller (400 x 300 mm (H x W))
13 Wrench Uaw span: 19, 32, 65 mm)
14 Wooden blocks
15 Drill
16 Drill bit (0 2 mm)
17 Wooden screws (max. 0 4 mm x 70 mm length)
18 Hex head screws ( M 10 x 80)
19 Chains

224 2063-9001-200 I 0609
-----------···--·---·,·-------------
4.14 Special tools
LJ
10
0
20 30
®
100
310
200 320 340 400
500 600 610
~ l .
620 630 640 650 660

2063-9901-000
Fig 366
Mechanical Sepmation I GEA Westfalia Separator

2063-9001-200 I 0609 225
" Special tools are provided by the manufacturer.

.. For the delivery of special tools, the packing list supplied with the sepa-
Pos. Designation
10 Socket wrench (spindle screw)

20 Mallet
40 Ring spanner (centripetal pump lock ring)
200 Lubricating grease

400 Clamp bolt, compl. (centrifugal clutch)
600 Compressing device, complete (disk stack compressing device)
610 Assembling device complete (sliding piston I closing chamber bottom
I annular piston)
620 Mounting ring
630 Ring spanner (bowl lock ring)
640 Eye bolt, complete (bowl)
650 Assembling device, complete (closing chamber bottom I annular pis-
ton)
660 Double nipple (transporting the separator)

226
-------------·····-----------------------------------
2063-9001-200 I 0609

2063-9001-200 I 0609
227
5 Spare parts


228 2063-9001-200 I 0609

VVestfalia 50parator" The use of non-genuine parts leads to:
genuinepa ts - safety risks,
spare parts, this may have· legal consequences
ranty claims.


e.g. OSE 40-91-067
• Serial-No. see name-plate

e.g. 9000-223

e.g. frame
.. Part Number see order-specific parts catalog

e.g. 2050-1100-020
individual parts.

• Bowl S/N If this differs from the serial number.
• Model and number of see pump nameplate

pump


2063-9001-200 I 0609 229

Werner-Habig-Stra~e 1 · 59302 Oelde (Germany)
Phone: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax: +49 2522 77-17 78
ws.systems@geagroup.com www.westfalia-separator.com
Werner-Habig-StrafSe 1 · 59302 Oelde (Germany)
Phone: +49 2522 77-0 · Fax: +49 2522 77-17 78
ws.systems@geagroup.com www.westfaiia-separator.com
Type OSE 20-91-067
No. 2064-9001-200
Edition 0909

Type OSE 20-91-067
No. 2064-9001-200
Edition 0909

2 2064-9001-200 I 0909
TRANSLATION OF ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Werner-Habig-StraBe 1 D-59302 Oelde (Germany)
Tel.: +49 (0) 25 22177-0 · Fax: +49 (0) 25 22 / 77-17 78

2064-9001-200 I 0909 3

Type S/N:'~--~
Year of manufacture
Max. admissible rated bowl speed in min- 1
Max. admissible density in kg/dm 3 of product
Heavy
~'----~
3 3
liquid kg/dm Solids kg/dm
3


4 2064-9001-200 I 0909
For your safety

" Take special care when carrying out operations marked with this
symbol -
" Strictly adhere to instructions marked with this symbol.

~ ., This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-

nents and the processes .
., Observe the accident prevention regulations!

The iocai safety and accident prevention regulations appiy uncondi-
tionaiiy to the operation of the separator. The piant operator must en-
" When operating electrical apparatus, certain parts carry danger-

ous voltage.
Before working in eiectricai components, take adequate preventive
thorized electrician .
., Only qualified or authorized specialized staff may operate, main-

@ Follovv the instructions in the manuaL

., Operate the separator only in accordance with agreed process


2064-9001-200 I 0909 5
.. Maintain the separator

.. Carry out safety checks on the separator,

.. Liability for the function of the machine passes to the owner.


6 2064-9001-200 I 0909
1.1 Correct usage ........................................................................................ 10

1.3 Safety markings .................................................................................... 12
1.4 Basic operating principles ..................................................................... 17
1.5.3 Assembly ............................................................................................... 19
1.5.5 Before start-up ..................................................................................... 23
1.5.6 Start-up .................................................................................................. 25
1.6 Corrosion ... .................. ........... .. .... .. .. .... .. .. .... ............. ....... 33
1. 7 Erosion ................................................................................................... 34
2 Machine description 37

2.3 General .................................................................................................. 41
2.4 OSE ... -91- ............................................................................................. 41
2.5.2 Bowl ....................................................................................................... 46
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics....................................................................... ........... 47
2.5.4 Drive.......................................................................................... ....... 50
2.5.5 Solenoid valve block ............................................................................. 51
2.6 Regulating ring.................................................... ..................... ...... 55
2.6.2 Determination by experiment... .............................................................. 56
2.7 Supervisory equipment .......................................................................... 57 )
2.7.2 Vibration monitoring (Option)...................................... .. ......... 59
2.8 Product feed line and product discharge line................. .......... 61
2.8.1 Throughput monitoring (product feed line A)..................... .. .. 61
2.8.2 Determining the throughput rate (product feed !ine A). ........... 62
2.8.3 Pressure monitoring (product discharge line B) .......... ........... 63
2.9 Technical data ...... ..................................................... .......... 64
3 Operation
3.1 Technical information .. ...68

3.1.1 Notes on separation... .... ... ....... ..... ............ ............. ... .. .......... 68
3.1.2 General information on bowl ejection .. ........ .... .... ....... ..... ........... .. 68
3.2 Before start-up.......................................... . ........... 70
3.2.1 Before the first start-up - after maintenance and repair ....................... 70

2064-9001-200 I 0909 7

3.6 Ejecting the bowl .................................................................................... 77
3.8.2 Bowl faults .............................................................................................. 84
4 Installation - Maintenance - Repair 91

4.1.3 M~r ...................................................................................................... ITT
4.2 Orifice plates and flowmeter ................................................................ 103
4.2.1 Installing the orifice plates ................................................................... 104
4.3.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................... 113
Separator ............................................................................................. 119
4.4 Bowl ..................................................................................................... 120
4.5 Closing the hood .................................................................................. 167
4.6 Drive ..................................................................................................... 170
4.7.1 Bowl height .......................................................................................... 197
4.10 Storage ................................................................................................ 202

8 2064-900·i-200 I 0909
4.10.1 After delivery ........................................................................................ 202

4.10.2 Separator ............................................................................................. 202
4.10.3 Control system ..................................................................................... 202
4.12 Disposal ............................................................................................... 204
4.12.3 Separator ............................................................................................. 205
4.13 Standard tools ...................................................................................... 206
4.14 Special tools ........................................................................................ 208
5 Spare parts __2ii]


2064-9001-200 I 0909 9
1.1 Correct usage ........................................................................................ 10

1.3 Safety markings ..................................................................................... 12
1. 5 Operations on the separator .................................................................. 18
1.5.3 Assembly ............................................................................................... 19
1.5.5 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 23
1.5.6 Start-up .................................................................................................. 25
1.5. 7 Shut-down and "Emergency-Off' ........................................................... 27
1.6 Corrosion ............................................................................................... 33
1. 7 Erosion ................................................................................................... 34

10 2064-9001-200 I 0909
1.1 Correct usage

" for the separation of liquid mixtures which consist of two liquids, with simulta-
neous removal of the solids contained in the liquids .
., for removing (clarifying) solids from a liquid.

" for a very high bowl speed.
of the product:
- Temperature
"' for products which contain no corrosive and erosive components.
material.
processed.
Westfalia Separator. Refer to the data sheet and contractually agreements .
.. in accordance with the admissible utilities (cleaning agents, lubricants, operat-
ing liquids etc.) specified in the documentation or on the data sheet

., paying attention to the safety precautions, the instruction manual of the sepa-
" adhering to the data on the nameplate, e.g. maximum admissible bowl speed.
- agreed areas,
- temperatures
- pressures etc.
tion.
tended use of the separator must be passed on to the operating personnel by
the plant operator.

2064-9001-200 I 0909 11

compliant.

.. Persons who have not read and understood these basic safety precautions .
., Persons who have not read and understood the instruction manual of the
separator.
• Persons who have not been briefed on proper and correct operation .
.. Persons who have not been adequately trained .
.. Persons who have not reached the minimum age of 18 years.

plate.
" when the max. admissible bowl speed has been exceeded through electrical
or electronic manipulation of the drive.
• in an incomplete state of assembly, e.g.
e by persons who are not adequately trained.
• when the separator is operated with spare parts which do not come from

erty and persons!

12 2064-9001-200 I 0909
1.3 Safety markings

clearly visible.
All safety markings on the separator, control system and plant components must
always be in perfect condition.
'" Clean dirty safety markings.
~
~
3
2~
L~ 2057023
1 Pictograms (safety siickers)

2 Oil quality
3 Plates
4 Nameplate
5 Maker's nameplate

2064-9001-200 I 0909 13

labels.
Niemals Teile losen vor Bei stark en Vibrationen

Stillstand des Separator sofort mlt
Separators gefOllter Tremmel Ober
NOT-AUS stoppen.
before the separator has Stop separatorwith
by EMGENCY OFF when
002454.i.6(0)
Fig. 2

tation!
• Every person who is assigned the
documentation.
Fig. 3

14 2064-9001-200 I 0909
Before carrying out work, dis=

connect power to all compo=
tor!

ponents:
standstill.
" Lock the instaiiation to prevent it

mentation.
S1
Fig. 5

vibrations!
off'.
" Never trigger a bowi ejection!
Fig. 6
--"-~--·--·--·----------------·----------------------

2064-9001-200 I 0909 15
Frequency converter operation!

• When setting the frequency con-
rim
Fig. 7

temperatures!

rim
operation.
Fig. 8


S5
Fig. 9
CAUTION:
switch is off!
" Lock the separator/plant to prevent it from being accidentally switched on.
specialists).

16 2064-9001-200 I 0909

examples:
- with signal word (ATTENTION!) and warning text.
Bel ausgeschal!e!l?m Sous tension meme

Hauptschalter en posilio11 d'auet de
unrerSpannung! l'lnterrupteurprincfpall
Vol!age a!so present Con el inlerruptor

when main
switch is turned off!
principal desconectado se
encuent1abajotcnsi6n! is turned off!
CAUTION:
switch is off!
Fig. 10 Example 1

Auch bel ausgeschalteten1
Hauptschalter k<lnnen
orangefarbige Leitungen
ATTENTION!
ATTENTION!
ATTENTION!
est eteint les files orange
switch is off!
Fig. 11 Example 2
Imm
Orange coloured leads are fitted as standard at Westfalia Separator.
,,,,,_, ____ ", ________________________________

2064-9001-200 I 0909 17

earth.
S6
Fig. 12


the rotating bowl.
501
Fig. 13
bowl.

18 2064-9001-200 I 0909
1.5 Operations on the separator

tions.
Fig. 14

.. Assembly
" Before start-up
" Start-up
.. Shut-down
.. Maintenance and repair

Operating, maintaining or repairing the separator or the separator plant requires
CAUTION!

who
" have reached a minimum age of 18 years .
.. are demonstrably familiar with the state-of-the-art through briefings and train-
ing.


2064-9001-200 I 0909 19

courses. You can obtain further information from Westfalia Separator or from
one of the authorized representatives.

- safety risks,
ranty claims.
1.5.3 Assembly
• If the plant has several centrifuges,

number.
T2059019
Fig. 16
• Damaged parts must be replaced

parts.
SB
Fig. 17

20 2064-9001-200 I 0909
CAUTION:
" Some bowl parts may be pre-
specialists from Westfalia Separa-
tor or in workshops authorized by
S9
Fig. 18
" To avoid unbalance, when replacing

- Lock ring
- Bowl top
- Distributor
- Bowl bottom
Westfalia Separator must be con-
sulted.
These parts
"Bowl").
" Some bowl parts are arranged in

fixed positions relative to one an-
other.
" Locking devices and alignment
The bovvl must othervvise not be op-
erated.
Fig. 20

shear strain.
S/\01
F"ig. 21

2064-9001-200 I 0909 21
" When assembling the bowl, be sure

imbalance.
" Before starting the bowl, be sure to
fit all parts.
T2044092
Fig. 22

• Pay attention to the position of the
marks!
CAUTION:
Fig. 23
• Tighten the spindle screw with the

thread).
CAUTION:
life!
Fig. 24
" Tighten the centripetal pump cham-

ber lock ring securely (left-hand
thread).
CAUTION:
Fig. 25

22 2064-9001-200 I 0909
" Carefully fasten hood 1, feed and

pump 3.
S12
Fig. 26
" Check if the machine is completely

Fig. 27

cian!
e The governing accident prevention
" Special attention must be paid to the
installation guidelines of Westfaiia
Separator.
.. The frequency and voltage of the
Fig. 28
" Carry out voltage equalization .

.. Observe legal regulations; e.g. in the EU:
- Low-voltage guideline 2006/95/EC,

2064-9001-200 I 0909 23

been firmly tightened.
" The "O" marks on bowl bottom or
be aligned.
Fig. 29
" The bowl must rotate in clockwise

ids collector).
+ +
$63
Fig. 30
" The separator may only be operated

to EN 294.
• Equip solid and liquid discharges
S3
Fig. 31

24 2064-9001-200 I 0909
"' Check that the lubrication and cool-

S14
Fig. 32
" Check whether the supervisory

·c equipment is operational and the
- cooling,
A2057222
Fig. 33
.. Check that the product lines are set

to operation .
., Regularly check hoses for signs of
ageing.
" Check sight glasses for mechanical
damage.
• Damaged parts must be replaced
parts.
Fig. 34

2064-9001-200 I 0909 25
1.5.6 Start-up
" Refer to chapter "operation".

GEA W•ntfalia Separator Systems GmbH
593020ekJe,Germany G!:J\
" Note nameplate. The values for
Typ Masch.-Nr. ,___ ______,
- bowl speed,
Bau1ahr ~ - density of the heavy liquid,
max. zulassige Tromrne!-Nenndrehzahl in min·
1
- density of the solids (centrifugally
max. zulassige Oichte des Aufgabegutes in kg/dm 3 dry)
Feststoff kg/dm
3
Ill
F!Uss1gke1tkgfdm3
Schwe'e
3
~-~
be exceeded.
mm /max Ourchsatz m /11
mm /max Temperatur des Aurgabegu!es in °C
mm /max Gehausedruckbere1ch in bar
Fig. 35
" Wear ear protection.
Fig. 36
A
operation:
~
speed limiting.
OCQ•t.e424000
Fig. 37

26 2064-9001-200 I 0909
., Do not feed product which is catego-

rised as explosive.
required.
Fig. 38
.., VVhen processing products harmful

safety regulations .
., Refer to the safety data sheet of the
product.
" Use protective gear, e.g.
- Eye protection
- Protective mask
Fig. 39
VVhen unusual noises or vibrations

off' .
.. Never trigger a bowl ejection!
.. Evacuate the room .
S2
Fig. 40

" Product·-contacting parts such as
- pipes and hoses
- hood,
- solids catcher
reach temperatures over 80 °C
(176 °F).
Fig. 41

2064-9001-200 I 0909 27
.. The bowl is not allowed to run with-

terial.
A2057223
Fig. 42
1.5. 7 Shut-down and "Emergency-Off"
" For shut-down of the separator refer

STOP S24
Fig. 43

28 2064-9001-200 I 0909

Important:
- The bowl is not emptied. Product and solids remain in the bowl.
returns.

automatically.

.. Immediately shut down the separa-
off'.
S2
Fig. 44

2064-9001-200 I 0909 29

.. Aggressive product (chemical or physical)
" Environment: Temperature, dust, vapours

parts like
- Bowl lock ring,
- bowl bottom,
- bowl top and
diameter
Fig. 45

Carry out the required cleaning thoroughly.

manufacturer.

30 2064-9001-200 I 0909

ponents:
standstill.
"' Switch off all electrical appliances
Fig. 46
'" Do not ioosen any part and do not

the section "bowl".
81
Fig 47

.. Make provision for and use a sturdy
working platform.
Fig. 48

a suitable base, e.g. rubber mat.
.. Secure machine parts from rolling
aids!
Fig. 49

2064-9001-200 I 0909 31
.. Do not heat bowl parts with the

naked flame .
.. Bowl parts must never be welded.
sterilizable separators .
.. Even during cleaning the bowl parts
100 °C (212 °F).
Fig. 50
.. Load-carrying equipment such as

tor,
- chains etc.
.. Do not use damaged or incomplete
552
Fig. 51
., All load suspension devices have to be checked for completeness and for
.. In addition, when using load suspension devices and hoists, the applicable

• Special tools (e.g. compressing, assembly devices, pin spanners) may only
instruction manual.
• Before using the standard and special tools supplied, check them for damage
and completeness.
Make sure that
• Have damaged tools repaired by specialists before using them again.
• Keep the tools clean and keep them in a dry, safe place.
checked better.

32 2064-9001-200 I 0909
" Collect dripping oil to prevent danger

- They can be injurious to health,
position.
Fig. 52

2064-9001-200 I 0909 33
1.6 Corrosion
documented.
shaped corrosion.

rosion.
535
Fig. 53


nation.
Pittings
a materials expert.
524
Fig. 54

34 2064-9001-200 I 0909
1.7 Erosion
contact.
" hard solids particles
" high throughput capacities

540
Fig. 55
1) U1e bottom of the distributor, the rising channels and the ribs,
2) the centripetal pump (cavitation),
3) all surfaces in the area of the solids discharge ports
4) the nozzles.

2064-9001-200 I 0909 35

" The bottom of the erosion mark has
radius < imm a radius smaller than 1 mm (large
notch effect).
" The depth of erosion mark exceeds
point.
526
Fig. 56

36 2064-9001-200 I 0909
1.8 The health hazards involved when handling heavy oils and lube oils
As a result of the deterioration in quality of fuel oils, the danger has arisen that the heavy oils used on
- polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons,
- lead compounds,
" on the concentrations of the dangerous substances,
.. the ambient air (inhalation of oil vapours/oil mist),
" the intensity and duration of the contact with the skin or mucous membrane.

" headaches,
.. dizziness,
" nausea,
" itching or burning of the skin,

• allergic reactions, especially skin allergies,
" festering inflammation of the skin pores (oil-acne),
.. damage to the central nervous system after inhalation over a long period,
.. skin cancer caused by direct skin contact over a long period,
" Lung cancer or cancer of the digestive organs after inr1alation over a long period
" Avoid skin contact with heavy oils or lube oils if possible!
- Wear suitable protective gloves.
worn!
$ If possible, improve the air circulation in the roon1l
Fully open the air regulation flaps in the outlets of the air supply ducts in the centrifuge and filter area.
.. Wash affected areas of skin frequently and thoroughly!
.. Personal hygiene is of the utmost importance!
• Exercise special care when carrying out maintenance work on and cleaning heavy oil and lube oil cen-

2064-9001-200 I 0909 37

2.3 General .................................................................................................. 41
2.4 OSE ... -91- ............................................................................................. 41
2.5.2 Bowl ....................................................................................................... 46
2.5.3 Bowl hydraulics ...................................................................................... 47
2.5.4 Drive ....................................................................................................... 50
2.6 Regulating ring ....................................................................................... 55
2.6.2 Determination by experiment... .............................................................. 56
2. 7 Supervisory equipment .......................................................................... 57
2. 7.2 Vibration monitoring (Option) ................................................................. 59
2.8 Product feed line and product discharge line ........................................ 61
2.8.1 Throughput monitoring (product feed line A) ......................................... 61
2.8.2 Determining the throughput rate (product feed line A) .......................... 62
2.8.3 Pressure monitoring (product discharge line B) .................................... 63
2.9 Technical data ....................................................................................... 64

38 2064-9001-200 I 0909
.. Refer to the installation guidelines for further information.
17
Minimum lifting capacity hoist 100 kg
For repair and maintenance
bowl, motor
§l
The complete bowl
can then be trans- -~
ported over adjacen
separators of identic-
al type.
Centre of gravit
0@ x
Water discharge I
Operating water
discharge
"'
®
N
/
I ,._+""'""'----+
l__J
~(4) Filling, displacement and operating water feed
z 1:2
@ Product discharge
C::) These dimensions must be adhered to!

EB Do not discharge residuals into public waters! 2064-4100-010-1
Fig. 57 Refer to the project-specific dimensioned drawing!

2064-9001-200 I 0909 39
Beschreibung
DN
DESCRIPTIONS
([) Schmutz61 siehe Detail Y
25
@Reino! siehe Detail W
25
CLEAN OIL SEE DETAIL
@ Wasser-Ablauf 40
© Schlamm-Ablauf 80 Schlauch I Schlauschelle
SLUDGE DISCHARGE FLEXIBLE HOSE I HOSE CLIP
teuerwasser Aussengewinde
FOll-und Verdr~ngungswasser 314
MALE
Centre of gravity
Socket:
2
wf -J___,.,Qlll'r-rfl
M 1:2
Product feed
y 1 ~
M 1 :2 -s-3ELl§3-
min. 250
425
908
Filling, displacement and operating water feed

~J
234 425 221
Terminal box

Filling, displacement and operating Solids discharge
water with water pressure reducer
Pressure transmitter (water discharge)
x
N
"' Water discharge

Operating side 201

1041
The separator foundation must not have contact with foundations of other units (e.g. aux-
iliary diesel engine, pumps) to avoid damage to roller bearings.
c=JThese dimensions must be adhered to!

EB Do not discharqe residuals into public waters! 2064-4100-010-2

40 2064-9001-200 I 0909
' = == = == ~~
c...'=
,---------1
'----------r
I
I
(-
....£. -
-
- -
- - - -
- - -
- - -
- - -"'\
'
(.,;:.;_:;;::-_.,,;;:_.;;=_,r._;;-_,;::-_;=_;=_,r_,;;;:_,;r__,;;;::-_.;;=_,;;;:_.;::; J-
I I - - - ,_ __
\__,_ ~,----------- - ) .. - . - . - - - - -
.. ..
l '--- -- ---C":":~"':-=-=-=-=':J
- - - - - - - - - - - - __,
l --,--,--J
I
I
I
~~~-_L.L__ _\.2';:::.===;===_=_=='_ ±--=---=-~'
I
2065-1000-010-91
Fig. 59

2064-9001-200 I 0909 41
2.3 General
self-cleaning bowl.
product
- do not emulsify.
2.4 OSE ... -91-...

The separator OSE ... -91-...
.. is equipped with a self-cleaning disk bowl,
.. is used for clarification and separation in fuel and lube oil treatment plants.
• operates with regulating rings (see section 2.6).
The most important part of the separator is the bowl. The bowl
• is configured as a purifier bowl at the factory,
.. can - depending on the application - be converted to function as a clarifier or
purifier bowl.
Conversion of the purifier bowl into a clarifier bowl is possible in a few simple
steps (see diagrams).
In the case of the purifier bowl:

" Mount the centripetal pump chamber
cover with bores.
IMPORTANT: All holes of the cen-
tripetal pump chamber cover must
be open!
• Select the regulating ring (see sec-
tion 2.6).
T2059074

with 2 bores (example)

42 2064-9001-200 I 0909
In the case of the clarifier bowl:

" ATTENTION! Mount the centripetal
pump chamber cover (without
bores!) for operation in clarifier
mode.
" Request the part number of the cen-
tripetal pump chamber cover from
the supplier.
T205907

without bores (example)
Operating principles of the separator
r----------------- -,
1 6 I
I I
-_~_u
I
I
:(~
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
I I
2 I
2058007-91
Fig. 62 Example of monitoring
1 Dirty oil feed 11 Separating disk

2 Clean oil discharge 12 Solids holding space
3 Displacement water 13 Dirty water discharge
4 Pressure transmitter (product discharge) 14 Operating water discharge
5 Pressure transmitter (water discharge) 15 Solids discharge
6 Throttle 16 Operating water feed
7 Regulating ring 17 Solenoid valve block
8 Control unit
9 Sensing liquid pump (dirty water)
10 Centripetal pump (clean oil)
The fuel oil or lube oil is conveyed to the separator via a separate pump.
The product is fed in through a closed line system (1 ).
The dirty water is discharged (13) by sensing liquid pump (9) via a throttle (6).
The clarified clean oil is discharged (2) under pressure by centripetal pump (10).
- - - - - --------·-
2064-9001-200 I 0909 43
by means of a remote controlled solenoid valve (17) in the operating water line.
The opening time of the solenoid valve is up to 3 seconds.

44 2064-9001-200 I 0909
A2065018-91
Fig. 63

Handle connection " connects centripetal pump and hood.
piece " holds the filling and displacement water supply
line.

Sensing liquid pump

" holds the feed and discharges (see section
2.8).
4 Bowl: See section 2.5.2

Bowl hydraulics See section 2_5_3
5 Frame ., contains the drive parts.

" supports motor, bowl and hood.
6 Sight glass allows checking the oil level.
7 Sight glass for checking the drive belt.
10 Motor .. accelerates the separator to the required

speed.
" is protected against overload during operation.

2064-9001-200 I 0909 45

-------------------------------
T2058081
Fig. 64
Centripetal pump • discharges the purified liquid under pressure.

" is firmly connected to hood 2 of the separator.
" The disk provided with channels

bowl.
" The liquid
pump and
3 Sensing liquid pump • operates on the same principle as centripetal

pump 1.
• conveys the sensing liquid to the monitoring
system.

46 2064-9001-200 I 0909
2.5.2 Bowl
4
~
T2058077
Fig. 65

the rotational velocity of the bowl and then con··
3 Disk stack " splits the liquid mixture consisting of a light
ponents .
.. consists of a large number of conical disks
duces very srnaii radiai sedimentation paths for
the product.


2064-9001-200 I 0909 47
T2058078
Fig. 66


and opens the bowl.
2 Annular piston • is inside the bowl bottom,

other bowl parts,
3 Sliding piston • is located inside the bowl bottom,

other bowl parts,

48 2064-9001-200 I 0909
Fig. 67

8 Ejection - Bowl open
Operating liquid .. flows into the injection chamber 4 of bowl

bottom 5 and
" from there through feed holes into closing
chamber 6.
Thie
1 1 11....,
initi~h:::ic r-IAcinn
11111.1'-A\,.._.V VIVVll I~
Af
VI
+ho hrHJ\11
\.I I\,.; J..JVVVI.
2 Annular piston " moves into closed position.
3 Sliding piston " is raised due to the hydrostatic pressure in

closing chamber 6.
" is pressed against the gasket 7 of bowl top
.. closes the bowl.

2064-9001-200 I 0909 49
5
7
9
6
3
T2058079
Fig. 68

Operating liquid • flows first into injection chamber 4 and

• from there into opening chamber 8.
2 Annular piston • rises and

• empties closing chamber 6.
3 Sliding piston • moves downwards and

.. opens the ejection ports in bowl bottom 5 for

50 2064-9001-200 I 0909
2.5.4 Drive
Fig. 69

the drive belt.
2 Centrifugal clutch " ensures power transmission between motor,

drive belt and spindle .
.. accelerates the bowl gradually to rated
speed;
.. is gentle on the drive belt and motor.
Important!
- ! ne anv1ng effect of new clutch shoes wiii
- Smoking of the centrifugal clutch during the

the bowl spindle 4.
4.3.1 ).
4 Bowi spindle supports the bowl.

2064-9001-200 I 0909 51

10
40
0018-7614-000
Fig. 70

70 Magnet coil
Manual override A

1 closed
2 open
Fig. 71

52 2064-9001-200 I 0909

- pressure controller 10
If necessary:
" Correct the pressure setpoint by
turning the setpoint screw 1 (jaw
span 7).

" Open the operating water valve
71 ).
Pressure setpoint is too iow.

"' Increase the pressure setpoint.
- Turn setpoint screw clockwise.
Pressure setpoint is too high .
., Decrease the pressure setpoint.
- Turn setpoint screw counter-
clockwise.
The adjusted pressure setpoint is indi-

cated on pressure gauge 30.
0018-7614-000-1
SW= jaw span

Fig. 72
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ------------------
2064-9001-200 I 0909 53
Technical data
ATTENTION:
" Note the specifications on the nameplate of the solenoid valve block and
" the installation guidelines.

NC
Housing Cu Zn
Solenoid
Coil size 32 mm
valves:
Nominal diameter
13 mm
(ON)
Operating voltage: 24 V DC
with fitted cable (1.5 m long)
valve
Temperature: Medium -10 to +80 °C (14 - 176 °F)


ATTENTION:
• Refer to the instruction manual and nameplate of the solenoid valve block.
• Direct intervention in the solenoid valve block only by authorised specialists
and with suitable tools!

54 2064-9001-200 I 0909
·.

·.·.

ing terminal.
connector block is loose. connectin~ terminal.
necting terminal. tact.

2064-9001-200 I 0909 55
2.6 Regulating ring

Perfect separation of a liquid mixture is only possible when the bowl has been
correctly adapted to the density difference between the light liquid (e.g. oil) and
the heavy liquid (e.g. water).
To achieve this, select and fit the regu-

lating ring from the set furnished (with
different inner diameters) whose inner
diameter corresponds to the difference
in density between the two liquid com-
ponents.
8205211
Fig. 73 Regulating ring (example)
The inner diameter of the regulating ring to be selected can be determined from
the table or empirically. The general rule of thumb is:
" narrow regulating ring for heavy oil
" wide regulating ring for light oil.
2.6.1 Determination by table
Density of the light liquid, Inner diameter

at 15 °C (59 °F) of the regulating ring
3
kg/dm mm
0.80 - 0.82 -
0.83 - 0.86 83
0.87 - 0.90 76
0.91 - 0.94 73
0.95 - 0.97 64
0.98 - 0.991 59
Density difference of the liquids

3
Min. density difference 0.02 kg/dm
3
Max. density difference 0.20 kg/dm
The max. density of the light liquid is 0.991 kg/dm 3 with a density of the heavy
3
liquid of 1.0 kg/dm .
Important!
If light liquid discharges through the heavy liquid discharge, the next smaller
regulating ring must be fitted.

56 2064-9001-200 I 0909
2.6.2 Determination by experiment

(explained using the example of oil purification)
Always try a wide regulating ring and then the next smaller ring.
When the regulating ring is too wide the discharging water contains oil.
When the regulating ring is too narrow the discharging clean oil contains water.
The water may look milky or dirty. The coloration comes from the washing of the
oil.
In the bowl, a separation zone is formed between the light and heavy phases
whose centre is the separating line.
After opening the bowl, the position of the separating zone can be recognised
by the almost always visible separating line between water and oil on the under-
side of the separating disk.
Correctly selected regulating ring

variable
oii is at the outer edge of the discs.
Effect:
water.
Fig. 74
Regulating ring too wide

too wide oil runs
- far outside the discs and
- too close to the outer edge of the
separating disk.
Effect:
v.;atcr.
- The discharging water contains oil or
- oil breaks the water seal.
Fig. 75
Regulating ring too narrow

The separating iine between the iiquid
components does not pass at the outer
edge of the discs but further inwards.
Effect:
- The discharging clean oil contains
water.
Fig. 76

2064-9001-200 I 0909 57

2.7.1 Pressure transmitter
The pressure transmitters PT1 and

PT2
- are included in the standard scope
of supply,
- serve to register alarms PAH (Pres-
sure Alarm Low),
- switch process-specifically n case of
~
functionality and
0005-1529-300
points,
- PT1 is fitted in the product discharge line.
- PT2 is fitted in the water discharge line.
~
system.

Factory settin~s
Product discharge Water discharge

PT1 PT2
PAL PAH PAH
1 2
1.0 bar ( ) 3.0 bar ( ) 0.5 bar
(1)
1 bar above the switching point
(L)
1 bar below the switching point
IMPORTANT:

58 2064-9001-200 I 0909
Technical data
Voltage 24 V DC
Range 0-16 bar
Output signal 4-20 mA
Tightening torque
Connector plug M 12 x 1; 5-pole
Cable PUR-2 core, 1.5 m
Cable box M 12 x 1; 5-pole
Pin1-, white; Pin4+, black
Enclosure IP 67
Working temperature
-40 to +125 °C (-40 to +257 °F)
Medium temperature

2064-9001-200 I 0909 59

0005-4258-8
Vibration pick-up • is installed at the upper part of the frame.

" converts the separator vibrations into electric
signals.
2 Terminal box • is mounted at the lower part of the frame.
3 Vibration monitoring • is installed in the control cabinet.

unit • evaluates the signals coming from the vibra-
tion pickup.

pickup.
cally.
ATTENTION!
• instruction manual of the vibration monitoring system
• instruction manual of the control unit
• terminal allocation in the terminal diagram of the control cabinet
• circuit diagram

60 2064-9001-200 I 0909

" displays bowl speed.
Speed deviations of up to 5 % are permissible.
" monitors speed drop as well as excess of speed and starting time.
Fig. 79
Spindle .. rotates and generates speed pulses at prox-

imity switch 2.
2 Proximity switch • transmits the puises triggered frorn the spindle

to control unit 3.
ATTENTION!
3 Control unit " evaluates the speed pulses.

or too high.
.. initiates a shut-down process if the bowl speed
is too low or too high.
" indicates the current bowl speed and
• permits setting of limit values.
ATTENTION!

2064-9001-200 I 0909 61
2.8 Product feed line and product discharge line
.---- ·--....... The separator is adapted to local con-

I ditions for throughput capacity and line
I pressure by means of orifice plates
I installed in product feed line A and
! . product discharge line B (see section
r#_ I 4.2).
~~~
Fig. 80
2.8.1 Throughput monitoring (product feed line A)

The effective throuhput capacity of the separator is stated on the project depen-
dent data sheet.
The inner diameters of the orifice plates required for the different thrgoughput
capacities can be read from the following table:
Flowmeter - Scale: 0 - 1O
Throughput capacity Inner diameter of orifice plate
[l/h] [mm]
1 000 - 1 400 6
1 400 - 2 200 8
2 200 - 3 300 10
3 300 - 4 800 12
4 800 - 7 000 14
7 000 - 13 000 no orifice plate
When using a 010 control unit

• During commissioning mark the respective scale area on flowmeter 2 (see
Fig. 80 with the sticker supplied.
When using an E10 control unit

The effective throughput capacity is displaced on the control unit.
Throughput values deviating between the actual value and the setpoint value
can be adapted in the control unit.

62 2064-9001-200 I 0909
2.8.2 Determining the throughput rate (product feed line A)
A 06 08 010 014
j2
I ,
co
0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
B-----+
Fig. 81 Diagram for determining the throughput rate
A inner diameter of orifice plate (mm)

C Scale area of flowmeter
The throughput capacity of the separator (volume of product to be treated fed by

unit of time) can be determined with the aid of the diagram.
Procedure:
.. Read the value on the scale of flowmeter 2 (see Fig. 80 ).
e.g. 3
.. From the value read from the scale (e.g. 3) draw a line up to the curve of the
inner diameter of the built-in orifice plate A (e.g. 0 10) .
.. Read the throughput rate B appearing vertically below:
e.g. 2.7 (= 2 700 l/h)
The precision in throughput determination depends on the following characteris-

tics of the product to be processed:
- 'Jiscosity
- Temperature
- Density
The parameters mentioned here can lead to inexact determination of the
throughput rate.

2064-9001-200 I 0909 63
2.8.3 Pressure monitoring (product discharge line B)

The pressure in the discharge line is displayed on pressure gauge 1 (see Fig.
80) .
., Note factory adjusted switch points (see section 2.7.1).
The inner diameters of the orifice plates required for the different throughput ca-
pacities can be read from the following table:
Pressure gauge - Measuring range: 0 -10 bar

Throughput capacity Inner diameter of orifice plate
[l/h] [mm]
1 000 - 1 800 6
1 800 - 2 800 8
2 800 - 4 300 10
4 300- 6 300 12
6300-9100 14
9 100-13 000 no orifice plate

64 2064-9001-200 I 0909
2.9 Technical data

·-
Bowl
3
Solids holding space (total) 1.5 dm
Speed 12 000 min- 1

3 (see name-plate)
0.991 kg/dm (at 15 °C) and
1.4 kq/dm 3
Starting time I approx. 2 -4 min

Run-down time (after switching off the motor
45 min
with drive belt))
belt)
Centripetal pump
Operating water
Qty. min. 1 800 l/h

- ~~~-,.--
Pressure (with open valve) 2-3 bar
I ' 4 .. U11"4~1Vil _f"..,,l'U.'-111~ 'll'VU'-U-1 <Jf-''V'V'lll'-'Ul.1'-'11
Suspended matter max. 10 mg/I
Particle size max. 50 pm
Hardness:
- up to 55 °C separating temperature I < 12° dH I
i 0
dH = i.79°fH = i .25 ° eH = i7.9 ppm CaC03
Chlorine ions < 100 mg/I

pH 6.5 - 7.5

2064-9001-200 I 0909 65
DO 20°c (68 °F)
MOO 40°C (104 °F)
LO 90 °C (194 °F)
LOHD 95 °C (203 °F)
HFO 98°C (208 °F)

"
manual.
Motor
Power rating 50 Hz 7.5 kW
60 Hz 8.6 kW
60 Hz 3 600 RPM
Design IMV1
Enclosure IP 55
Drive 50/60 Hz
Oil filling approx. 2.5 I

Product feed pump
Pressure head 2 bar
Weights
Separator (with motor, without bowl) 240 kg
Bowl 70 kg
Motor 53 kg

66 2064-9001-200 I 0909

2064-9001-200 I 0909 67
3 Operation

3.1.1 Notes on separation ............................................................................... 68
3.2 Before start-up ....................................................................................... 70
3.6 Ejecting the bowl .................................................................................... 77
3.8.2 Bowl faults ..................................................................... ,........................ 84

68 2064-9001-200 I 0909

3.1.1 Notes on separation

The separator is used for clarification and separation in fuel and lube oil treat-
ment plants.
The best separation effect is obtained with low viscosity of the product to be
separated.
The separator operates economically with the separating temperatures and ca-
pacities specified by us. Refer to the data sheet and contractual agreements.
Procedure:
'" Select the desired operating mode on the control unit.
" Set the separating time on the control unit.
.. Start the separator (see 3.2).

The ejection time is determined by the preset separating time.
Sequence of an ejection (example)

3. Displacement water displaces the fuel oil to the clean oil side.
4. Operating water opens and closes the bowl hydraulically at full bowl
speed.
6. Filling water supply
Displacement
" When separating, the loss of feed liquid unavoidable during ejection can be
uid).
'" The duration of displacement water supply is given in the timer overview (see
" If the displacement time is too long, water will discharge through the light liq-
uid outlet.
" If the displacement time is too short, part of the product remains in the bowl

2064-9001-200 I 0909 69
Flush ejection
- are stuck to firmly on the wall of the solids holding space due to the solids
properties,
" either the separating time must be shortened or
" a flush ejection must be carried out after the total ejection by filling the bowl
Program control
" "Displacement", "ejection", "filling" and "flush ejections" at precisely defined
intervals are best carried out with the automatic control unit.
.. The clean oil discharge and water discharge can be monitored.
• Faults can be signalled visually or audibly.

70 2064-9001 .. 200 I 0909
3.2 Before start~up
Note:
.. Safety precautions in chapter 1.
.. Instruction manual of the corresponding control unit.
" Instructions "Settings and malfunctions"
.. Instruction manuals for other auxiliary equipment
" Process-related deviations are possible
3~2~ 1 Before the first start~up =~ after maintenance and repair
ATTENTION!
.. check all bowl parts as specified in the maintenance schedule (table
"Maintenance after 4000 operating hours or after 6 months at the latest").
" check all separator parts in accordance with the maintenance schedule
(table "Maintenance after 8000 operating hours or after 1 year at the lat-
est).
" replace if necessary.
Ensure that
" tt1e sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean.
"' the drive chamber is filled with oil in accordance with section 4.3.3.
" the bowl height is correct (see section 4.7.1).

" the bowi can be rotated by hand.
- Tighten the bowl top securely (left-hand thread).
thread).
" the hood is correctly mounted (see 4.5) .
.. the handle connection piece is tightly bolted to the centripetal pump (see 4.5) .
.. the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.3.2).

2064-9001-200 I 0909 71

tional.
data sheet) .
., the product heating devices are ready for operation (option).
" the plant components such as valves. water pressure reducer, compressed
.. the motor is correctly connected (see 4.1.3).
• the motor is correctly mounted.
Important!
• Check the remaining plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for
signs of aging and mechanical damage .

72 2064-900 i-200 I 0909
3.2.2 Before every start-up
Ensure that
" the sight glass in the frame for observing the oil level is clean .

- Tighten the bowl top securely (left-hand thread).
thread).
" the hood is correctly mounted (see 4.5) .
.. the handle connection piece is tightly bolted to the centripetal pump (see 4.5).
" the hoses and hose pipes are undamaged and connected (see section 4.3.2).
tional.
data sheet) .
" the motor is correctly mounted.
Important!
.. Check the remaining plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for
signs of aging and mechanical damage .

2064-9001-200 I 0909 73

.. See section 3.2.1 or 3.2.2
" Switch on the control unit.

[mlml
on the separator -
" Check the direction of rotation of the bowl.

Fig. 82
., Switch on the product feed pump (option).

open!
" Check the direction of rotation of the product feed pump.
wheel of the pump motor rotates clockwise.
• Put the preheater in operation (option).
Pre-conditions:

74 2064-9001-200 I 0909
'" Open the shut-off flap in the solids

discharge (option).
1 Shut-off flap
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge
Fig. 83
.. Start the program.

Pre-conditions:
- The solids tank has been released (level switch LSHH).The solids tank is
empty.
" After the product feed valve has automatically opened.
- Set the backpressure in the product discharge line to approx. i .5 to 2.5 bar
ATTENTION!
" Check the discharges for solids and dirty water; there must be no oil flow


- Oil level
- Temperatures
- Pressures
- Leakage
- Vibrations
- Current consumption
- Starting time
- Pipe joints
.. Keep to the maintenance schedule (see 4.3.1 )!

2064-9001-200 I 0909 75
.. Inspection
Important!
" Regularly check plant components such as hose pipes, sight glasses for signs
of aging and mechanical damage.
• Damaged plant components must be replaced immediately by new parts.

76 2064-9001-200 I 0909

© the preselected operating mode (partial or total ejection mode),
" the solids loading in the feed,

.. the consistency of the solids,
" the separator throughput.
tion.

LOHD max. 2 h max. 1 h
3.5.1 Mathematical calculation

1
Given: Solids content < l p :::;; 0.05 %
Solids holding space volume v = 1.51
Solids holding space given 75 % utilisation v· = 1.13 I
Throughput capacity
1
< '
vo :::: 2 000 l/h
Wanted: Separating time t =?min
The separating tirne to be set is calculated as follows:
1.13
• 60 • 100 :::: • 6000 = 57.8min = 1.1 h
2 000 • 0.05
1
! I Solids content and throughput capacity must be determined on site or taken from

2064-9001-200 I 0909 77
Automatic operation
" Initiate ejection program by pressing the key "Process START":

- Displacement
- Bowl ejection
- Speed recovery
• The product valve opens again.

• Eject the bowl:
3 seconds.
• Speed recovery
• New separating operation

78 2064-9001-200 I 0909
Automatic operation
.. End the separation program with the key "Process STOP".

.. Switch off the preheater (option).

- Close the product feed valve manually .
., Displacement:
- Open the displacement water valve using the manual override.
ment water valve).
" Eject the bowl:
3 seconds.
" Speed recovery
- Wait for approx. 20 - 30 ~-~~nd_s_._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~

- The product feed pump continues to run (timer 23)!
ATTENTION!
The product feed pump may never be switched off to the steam shut-off vaive
All heaters (e.g. steam-fired, thermal oil, electric heaters) must be manually
shut down.
Manual shut-down of the product feed pump must be carried out delayed .
.. Close the product feed valve in the suction side of the product feed pump (op-
tion).
" Switch the separator motor off.
with hand valves.

"' Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
still.
- The run-down time of the bowl is 45 minutes after switching off the motor.

2064-9001-200 I 0909 79

sight glass.
no longer moving.
A2058047
/
Fig. 84

• Unscrew the sight glass,
• Check ONLY visually that the drive belt is no longer moving.

• Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
still.
separator!
ATTENTION!
• Close the shut-off flap in the solids
discharge (option).
1 Shut-off flap
2 Solids tank
3 Solids discharge
Fig. 85
Risk of injury due to electrical volt-

age and unintended start-up of the
separator!

ponents:
Fig. 86

80 2064-9001-200 I 0909

separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 °C (158 - 212 °F).
3.7.1 Shut-down "Emergency-Off"

additional connection for an external "Emergency-Off'-switch (example 1),
- an "Emergency-Off" switch (yellow-red), a main switch (grey-black) and ad-
ditional connection for an external "Emergency-Off'-switch (example 2) or
- an "Emergency-Off" switch (yellow-red), a main switch (grey-black) and ad-
ditional connection, via approved "Emergency-Off" relay for several "Emer-
gency-Off"-switches (example 2).

gency-Off' function.
energised.
" CAUTION! Evacuate the room.

STOP S24
Fig. 87 Example 1
" Actuate the "Emergency-Off switch.
ejections.

separator has come to a standstiii.
Fig. 88 Example 2

2064-9001-200 I 0909 81
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

82 2064-9001-200 I 0909

and Repair".
3.8. 1 Trouble shooting

The bowl does not come up Oil has run down the spindle onto the " Clean belt contact surface of the
to rated speed or takes too drive belt; the drive belt is slipping on spindle and clutch pulley.
long to do so. the bowl spindle. " Replace the drive belt.
Motor is incorrectly connected. " Check connection.

Insufficient number of clutch shoes. " Increase the number of clutch
shoes.
.. Make sure that the
clutch shoes are
evenly spaced.
Drive belt has stretched and is slipping " Replace drive belt.
Drive belt has not been fitted correctly. " Check position of drive belt on cen-
trifu al clutch and bowl spindle.
Liquid or dirt has collected in the upper " Check operating water discharge:
frame.
operation. oily. " ATTENTION: Do not use
vent!
Drive belt has stretched and is slipping " Replace the drive belt.
1
The motor speed drops during opera- " Check motor and line voltage.
ti on.
The bowl reaches the rated Too many clutch shoes are used. " Reduce the number of clutch shoes.
speed too fast (in less than .. Make sure that the
1.5 minutes). The starting clutch shoes are
current of the motor is hence evenly spaced.
I I
inadmissibly high.(lmax >2 X IN)·

2064-9001-200 I 0909 83

reasons: " Shut down separator.
• Close the product feed and dis-
charge.
CAUTION:
.. Bowl must not be emptied
will intensify.
If bowl leaks,
en the water su I .
1. The separated dirt has deposited • Clean bowl.
2. Bowl has not been correctly as- • Assemble bowl properly.
slackened:
- The bowl top is not screwed on
until 0 mark alignment.
.. The 0 marks of
the bowl bottom
and the bowl top
must be aligned.
- Insufficient number of disks. • Check number of disks; add a spare

disk if necessar .
4. Bowl parts are damaged. • Send bowl to factory for repair.
l CAUTION: Do not carry out
l~ your own repairs!
"'~ Do not weld or solder as this
would weaken the bowl!
Ball bearings are worn. • Replace damaged bearings.
ATTENTION!

84 2064-9001-200 I 0909
3.8.2 Bowl faults
19 1
2
18
-3
4
17-'-- ---5
16
15 6
21 22
" j
20
2065-6600-BA

4 Gasket (annular piston) 14 Bowl bottom
5 Gasket (closing chamber bottom) 15 Drain hole
c: ,-.. ............ 1, ......... 1 ......... .,... •• 1........ ..... : ................. \
u ua;:,f\t:l \CU 11 IUldl f-Jl;:)lVI I) 16 Annular piston
7 Gaskets (closing chamber bottom) 17 Drain hole
8 Gasket (bowl bottom) 18 Sliding piston
9 Piston guide ring (bowl bottom) 19 Bowl top
10 Gasket (water chamber bottom) 20 Solenoid valve block
21 Solenoid valve for operating water
22 Solenoid valve for filling and displacement water
24 Strainer
25 Shut-off valve

2064-9001-200 I 0909 85

Control unit is defective or • Check the control unit.
ATTENTION: Motor is not correctly set. • Check or reset program parameters.
(See control unit documentation.)
solids discharge.
high.
Closing water pulse too short. • Set 1 seconds (see also control unit
documentation).
Strainer 24 in the operating, filling and • Close shut-off cock 25.
displacement water line is dirty. • Clean strainer 24 (see 4.4.4).
low. necessary.

the capacity by litres)= 1.0 I in
3 secs
ber.
The operating water solenoid valve 21 " Check solenoid valve 21 and re-
does not open properly. place if necessary.
Bowl hydraulics
or • dismantle and clean the bowl (see
Gaskets and piston guide ring are • Replace all sealing elements.
damaged or Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood"
(see list of spare parts).
lation!
• Change polyamide gasket 5 only
when it is damaged (see section
4.4.9).
Sealing rim of sliding piston 18 is • Lightly remachine the sealing sur-
damaged. face of the sliding piston - max. 1
mm! - see section 4.4.10) or
• send in the sliding piston for repair.

86 2064-9001-200 I 0909
19
2
rn 3
4
17~
16
15 6
21 22
20
2065-6600-BA

"£, Gasket (bowl top) 12 Injection chamber
,,0
Gasket (annular piston) 16 ,l\nnular piston
.,
I Gaskets (closing chamber bottom) 17 Drain hole
9 Piston guide ring (bowl bottom) 19 Bowi top
24 Strainer
25 Shut-off valve

2064-9001-200 I 0909 87
The bowl does not open or Operating water

not properly Control unit is defective or ,. Check the control unit.
Motor is not correctly set. .. Check or reset program parameters.
(See control unit documentation.)
Time for opening water too short. " Set 3 - 4 seconds (see also control
unit documentation).
Strainer 24 in the operating, filling and • Close shut-off cock 25.
displacement water line is dirty. • Clean strainer 24 (see 4.4.4).
low. necessary.

the capacity by litres) ~ 1.0 I in
3 secs
The operating water line 26 has be- • Clean or replace operating water
ber.
The operating water solenoid valve 21 • Check solenoid valve 21 and re-
does not open properly. place if necessary.
Bowl hydraulics
Bowl hydraulic system is soiled " Remove hood and
or " dismantle and clean the bowl (see
- Thoroughly check outlet bore 17
and clean if necessary.
Gaskets and piston guide ring are • Replace all sealing elements.
damaged. Use set of spare parts "bowl/hood"
(see list of spare parts).
lation!
• Change polyamide gasket 5 only
when it is damaged (see section
4.4.9).
• Thoroughly check polyamide gasket
5 for proper location in its groove.

88 2064-9001-200 I 0909
1
\Jil:i'-"'+- 2
'§5,4--3
,~lllhl--4
~1"7'7':l---5
7NH"A<=/
~~~i~v.L,4---- 6 21 22
11
2065-6600-BA

c
u Gasket (annular piston) 16 Annular piston
7 Gaskets (closing chamber bottom) 17 Drain hole
9 Piston guide ring (bowl bottom) 19 Bowl top
24 Strainer
25 Shut-off valve

2064-9001-200 I 0909 89

The bowl does not empty The operating water capacity is too .. Check line pressure, increase if
the bowl.
the capacity by litres)= 1.0 I in
3 secs
The separating time has been set too • Shorten the separating time (see
tent is too high.
The bowl opens during sepa- Closing water pulse is too short. " Readjust the closing water impulse
ration. - Closinq water evaporates. (see control unit documentation).
bowl.

90 2064-9001-200 I 0909
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

2064-9001-200 I 0909 91

4.1.3 M~r ...................................................................................................... ITT
4.2 Orifice plates and flowmeter ................................................................ 103
4.2.1 Installing the orifice plates ................................................................... 104
4.3.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................... 113
Separator ............................................................................................. 119
4.4 Bowl ..................................................................................................... 120
4.5 Closing the hood .................................................................................. 167
4.6 Drive ..................................................................................................... 170
4.7.1 Bowl height .......................................................................................... 197
4.10 Storage ................................................................................................ 202
4.10.1 After delivery ........................................................................................ 202
4.10.2 Separator ............................................................................................. 202
4.10.3 Control system ..................................................................................... 202
4.12 Disposal ............................................................................................... 204
4.12.3 Separator ............................................................................................. 205
4.13 Standard tools ...................................................................................... 206
4.14 Special tools ........................................................................................ 208

92 2064-9001-200 I 0909
4. 1 installation of the separator
" Refer to the installation guidelines for further information.
17
Minimum lifting capacity hoist 100 kg
For repair and maintenance
bow!, motor
The complete bowl ~ .

can then be trans- -~
ported over adjacenj
separators of identic-
al type.
<±ff> x
Water discharge I
Operating water
discharge
DN4g1 i
'@
I I
!_J ·i-----~43~0_ _ _- t
z 1:2
@ Product discharge
314
I (033.7)
-t - Product feed
I
I
tct
I
~,[ " L/ '

~~
Water discharge I operating water discharge Solids discharge
C) These dimensions must be adhered to!

C:B Do not discharge residuals into public waters! 20644100--010-1
f\/Jechanical Separation I GEA Westfalia Separator

2064-9001-200 I 0909 93
Anschlusstabelle /CONNECTIONTABLE
Beschreibung
DN
DESCRIPTIONS
CD Schmutzol
25
siehe Detail Y
M'I Reino! siehe Detail W
25
'CJ CLEAN OIL SEE DETAIL
@ Wasser-Ablauf Schlauch I Schlauschelle
40
@) Schlamm-Ablauf 80 Schlauch I Schlauschelle
SLUDGE DISCHARGE FLEXIBLE HOSE I HOSE CLIP
teuerwasser Aussengewinde
FOll-und Verdrangungswasser 314
MALE
Centre of gravity
Socket:
Wr
2~--
M 1 :2"']
Product feed
min. 250
425
908
234 425 221
Terminal box

Filling. displacement and operating Solids discharge
water with water pressure reducer
Pressure transmitter (water discharge)
Water discharge
Operating side 201

1041
The separator foundation must not have contact with foundations of other units (e.g. aux-
iliary diesel engine, pumps) to avoid damage to roller bearings.
c::::) These dimensions must be adhered to!

EB Do not discharqe residuals into public waters! 2064-4100-010-2

94 2064-9001-200 I 0909
4.1.1 Transporting the separator
" CAUTION: Use appropriate lifting devices to prevent accidents!

- Be sure to use suitably rated, intact hoists for transport and installation .
.. CAUTION: Danger to life under hoists!

" Always transport the separator without installed bowl!
" For special tools, see section 4.14 or parts list.

Fig. 94
" Screw double nipple 1 into the hole

in the frame.
Fig. 95

2064-9001-200 I 0909 95
" CAUTION! Do not use the eye bolt

rator.
" ATTENTION: Do not damage any

tening the ropes.
" Attach the transport ropes

- to the machine A as illustrated,
- around the double nipple and
ATTENTION: Prevent the ropes from

slipping!
• Wind one piece of rope twice round
the hook (see detail).
" Make sure the machine touches

down gently.
Fig. 96
" Unscrew double nipple 1
Fig. 97
Fig. 98

96 2064-9001-200 I 0909

" Before installing the separator make sure that
.. Align separator 1 with feet 2 and

" Tack plates 3.
2 " Unscrew screws 5.
" Lift separator with feet (see section
4.1.1 ).
" Place the separator on plates 3 and
.. bolt tight with hexagon nuts 5.
" Screw tight hex head screws 6.
Fig. 99

2064-9001-200 I 0909 97
4.1.3 Motor
200% Rated current%
100%
150 90
80
70
100
JN
------ 60
50
40
50 30
20
10
20 40 60 80 100% 0 25 5075100%
-------- ______
.,.. $
I
{ Separation r §I. .
.... ., ....
Separation
P2042001
~~
1ir
I~
-
0~
rpm
C) ,§
min s
50 Hz
kW
60 Hz
De-
sign
Enclo-
sure*
50 Hz
rpm
at
60 Hz
rpm
IP 55
see name- approx. 2 - IM ISO-

3 7.5 8.6 3 000 3 600
plate 4 V1 class
F*
* WS standard
the drive belt.
and fuses.
The motor

98 2064-9001-200 I 0909

thermistors).
lows:
Note:
" The temperature feelers must be connected to a commercial tripping device.
" External voltage higher than 2.5 volts must not be applied to the connection
terminals of the temperature feelers .
., When testing for continuity, use an ohmmeter and not a test lamp.


.. Refer to the motor nameplate.
.. Take adequate preventive measures according to the national provisions (in
tion of German Electrical Engineers) or of the local electric power company.
only.

ual.
The terminal board in the terminal box can be connected in star or delta .
.. Check correct switching of the motor (star or delta).

2064-9001-200 I 0909 99

W2 U2 V2
0--0--0
11
L1
L2 - - - - - - + - - - - + - -
L3 - - - - - - - - + - -
PE--------.--
Motor-y
Fig. 102

W2 U2 V2
11
L1
L2
L3
PE
Motor-d
Fig. 103
IMPORTANT:
• In the case of additional electrical components, PTC thermistors or space
Shipboard operation
• When operating the machine on board of ship, pay attention to the installation
• When using ship wiring cables, cable entry must be by means of marine-type
glands.

100 2064-9001-200 I 0909
4.1.4 Direction of rotation ofthe bowl
Provided that:
- The drive chamber is filled with oil
up to the half way mark on the sight
glass.
" Switch on n1otor.
A2057054
Fig. 104

Fig. 105

operation:
" Before working on the motor,
note that residuai voltage may be
present!
" In this connection:
facturer.
sonnel.
Fig. 106

2064-9001-200 I 0909 101
4.1.5 Speed and starting time of the bowl

3
max. 0.991 kg/dm and
- for densities of the separated solids up to max.
3
1.4 kg/dm
Starting time approx. 2 - 4 min
The bowl speed has been rated so as to ensure the operating safety of the
separator.

the bowl.
CAUTION!
spindle.
• Keep a safe distance away from the
rotating spindle.
• Do not wear long, open hair or wide,
loose clothing!
• Wear a hairnet!
• IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the

I maximum spindle running time of
1 minute!
" Speed deviations of up to 5 % are

permissible.
A2058005
Fig. 107

102 2064-9001-200 I 0909
In case of frequency converter operation:

CAUTION!
" Operate the separator with fre-
"' Check from time to time that
and

2064-9001-200 I 0909 103
4.2 Orifice plates and flowmeter

A set of orifice plates (with different inner diameters) and a set of commissioning
parts are supplied with the separator.
- The set of orifice plates is fastened to the separator hood.
- The set of commissioning parts comprises flowmeter 3.
By installing an orifice plate the separator throughput can be monitored.
/
I
I I
I I
I
I
Fig. 109
A Product feed line

1 Orifice plate
2 Orifice plate
3 Flowmeter
4 3/2-way valve
ATTENTION! Before starting up the separator check that the following

parts are installed:
Orifice plates 1 and 2

• Select the orifice plates from the set of plates supplied, according to the re-
quired throughput capacity (see section 2.8).
• Install orifice plate 1 in product feed line A (see chapter 4.2.1).
• Install orifice plate 2 in product feed line B (see chapter 4.2.1 ).
Flowmeter 3
• Remove the plug from the corresponding hole of 3/2-way valve 4.
• Secure the thread of flowmeter 3 with Loctite 245.
• Install flowmeter 3 into 3/2-way valve 4.

104 2064-9001-200 I 0909
4.2.1 Installing the orifice plates

Installation of the orifice plates is explained here for product feed line B for ex-
ample.
Required material:
- Open ended wrench
.. Unscrew corrugated hose 3 .

/·~
.. Insert the selected orifice plate 2 into
. '-.._.
connection piece 1 and press in
I evenly, by hand.
I
I
\ \
j I
~/,
H2065002
Fig. 110
"' Slightly grease the threaded area of
! I
I
/' -- "'
connection piece 1
" Insert corrugated hose 3 and firmly
l I
\
Fig. 111

2064-9001-200 I 0909 105

operations.
the service life of the separator .
.. In the case of accessories (motor, product pump, preheater, solenoid valve
be observed.
" Maintenance and repair work may be carried out only by persons
and training.
.. Electrical work may only be carried out by an authorized electrician!
Westfalia Separator''
• " Use only genuine spare parts from Westf alia S eparator.
genumeparts
ATTENTION!
conditions.

- Vibrations

106 2064-9001-200 I 0909
~370
,---------1
I
I
I
I
I
(
400
I 390
310
310
2065-9902-00D-GM
Fig. 112 Set of spare parts "bowl/hood" (operation: 1 year or 8000 hours)
iVlechanical Separation I GEA Westfalia Separator

2064-9001-200 I 0909 107
Commissioning date:

system.
when fitting.
4.4.9)!
Oil chanoe and thorouqh cleaning of the drive chamber
of the drive belt.
sary.
(option).

108 2064-9001-200 I 0909
~370
--------·--1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 310
I
70
I
I
I
2065-9902-000-1.J
. "
2064-9001-200 I 0909 109

-After 8000 operating hours - after 1 year at the latest
Bowl inspection •
•
system.
when fittinq.
Replace gaskets and piston guide ring (see adjacent fig- ..
ure). (Operation: 1 year or 8000 hours).
See parts list.
Change the polyamide gasket only when it is damaged (see
section 4.4.9).
Replace grooved ball bearings and angular contact ball See parts list.
Replace vibration absorber.
Check grooved ball bearings of centrifugal clutch and re- • Use set of spare parts "drive"
place if necessarv. (Operation: 2 years or 16,000 hours).
Check thickness of the clutch shoes (1) and replace when See parts list.
ffi,·:1;:tj h) h smaller than 18 mm.

New condition of clutch shoe h =26 mm
Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber When using mineral oil 1"'
When using synthetic oil 1"'
drive belt.
sarv.
(option).

110 2064-9001-200 I 0909
):370
c-- - --- ---1
I
I
I
I
I
I 390
I
I
I OSE •••-0196-•••
OSE •• AJ136-••• OSE •••-91-•••
~- .Lffl')
130__,.,..........:,_
140 ·-··
L_._~o
w--380
150--'~~~~§~
70
2065-9902-000-1.1

2064-9001-200 I 0909 111

Bowl inspection ..
•
system.
" The cones of bowl and spindle must be clean and dry
when fittinq.
Replace gaskets, piston guide ring and guide strips (see ..
See parts list.
Change the polyamide gasket only when it is damaged (see
section 4.4.9).
Replace the drive belt. (Operation: 2 years or 16,000 hours).
Replace grooved ball bearings and angular contact ball See parts list.
Replace vibration absorber.
Replace orooved ball bearinos of centrifuoal clutch.
Check thickness of the clutch shoes (1) and replace when
llit··i,:w hi h smaller than 18 mm.
New condition of clutch shoe h =26 mm

Oil change and thorough cleaning of the drive chamber When using mineral oil ,,,
When using synthetic oil ,,,
Check the bowl height.
In case of direct current:
Check the spindle speed (bowl).
.
• Seesection4.7.1.
Check only after motor or drive replacement.
• See section 4.1.5.
In case of three-phase current: • Check only after drive replacement.
Clean the sight gl;:iss(P.s) in thP. frame for observing the
drive belt.
sary.
(option).
(Z) See section 4.3.3 - Oil quality and oil change

112 2064-9001-200 I 0909
Maintenance work
-After 48,000 operating hours - after 6years atthe latest


Replace hose pipes when an inspection reveals one or more of the following de-
fects:
.. Damage of the outer layer down to the fabric (e. g. chafe marks, cuts or
cracks).
.. Leaky spots.
" Damage to or deformation of the hose fittings.
., The hose becomes dislodged from the fitting.
" Corrosion of the fitting diminishing function and strength.
Protective hose 1

'" Adapt the length of the protective

hose.
Fig. 115

2064-9001-200 I 0909 113
4.3.3 Lubrication
MOTOR BEARINGS
facturer.


51502

~
cc
0
100
Viscosity class SAE30
2
Viscosity (at 40 °C/104 °F) 100 ± 10 mm /s (cSt)
Part Number 0015-0003-080 (2.5 litres)

Designation according to ISO Mobil SHC 626

Viscosity
2
- at 40 °C (104 °F) 65 mm /s
2
- at 100 °C (212°F) 10,4 mm /s

114 2064-9001-200 I 0909
OIL QUANTITY
Filling in oil
Fill the drive with oil before commis·
sioning the separator.
" Unscrew the screw plug and
" fill in oil through the charge hole.
Filling quantity approx. 2.5 litres
Fig. 116
Oil level
IMPORTANT:
" Check the oil level only when the
2 ing operation.
1 Maximum oil level

A2057239
2 Minimum oil level
Fig. 117


Oil CHECK
" Check the oil level every week!
" From time to time undo the oil drain screw and check whether there is water
Oil CHANGE
" Change oil after about
- 8000 operating hours or 1 year at the latest (synthetic oil).
" Clean sight glass.

2064-9001-200 I 0909 115
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

116 2064-9001-200 I 0909
A2065002

2064-9001-200 I 0909 117

Lubricat- Amount of
ing point lubricant
hours
Lube oil
~0
DIN 51502 3
(mineral)
1
cc 100
ISO 3498


3 2x
faces of bowl
Lubricating see
as required apply sparingly
grease parts list
4 1x Threads of fittings

• Refer to lube oil table (see section 4.3.5)

118 2064-9001-200 I 0909
lubricating oil sorts suggested by some firms
Manufac-
Viscosity
turer 2
mm /s cSt)
tion RADULA 100 100
DIESEL GAMMA 30
Separator lube oil
ATLANTA MARINE 30
I Viscosity 105
"EN DISOLA M 3015
Cl 80 MONTANOL HK 100 100
c -m~
() LO
;;::: _g c U) Kinematic
Type E .Q z viscosity ENERGOL GR-XP 100 100
0 »
U)
roc o0 at 40 °C ENERGOL DL-MP 30 114
0)-
(104 °F)
-~ ~
0 ·=
2
mm /s (cSt) x~eaifiiir HYSPIN AWS 100
100
BTC 3 ALPHA ZN 100
CTC 3
MTC3 1.3 GST OIL 100
100
OTC2 NL Gear Compound 100
OTC3 Veritas Marine Oil R&O 30 108
WTC2 DELO 3000 Marine Oil 30 104
ATLANTA MARINE 30
105
CSD 1 DISOLA M 3015
OSD2 1.3 TURBINE T 100
---·--·-·--~-·'-
SD 1
EXX-MAR XP 110
NUTO H 100
100
SPARTAN EP 100
ESD18 GULF HARMONY 100 95

GSC15 VERITAS 30 110
OSD6
r\C"n -to
VVLJ IU
icLPl 90 to 110 0015-0003-080 ... 1 §', lil u1n0An11 un 7n
95
~ r"'ll'f~l
1 llLJl,l\\JIL.. I IL-I IV
2.5 (2.5 I)
WSD8
WSD 18
OSE 10 MOBILGARD 312 106
Mob!!
OSE 20
GADINIA 30 104
OSD20
OSD 25
OSD30 HYDRA WAY HMA 100
3.7 100
SD 30
WSD35
OSE 40 DORO AR SAE 30 119
OSD60
OSD 80
5.0
SD 50
WSD60
OSE 80

2064-9001-200 I 0909 119
4.3.6 Comments on table of lubricating oils for separators from Westfalia Separator
ity checks are performed by Westfalia Separator. Oils proposed from some firms are not subjected to
these tests.
Therefore, Westfalia Separator cannot give a performance guarantee for those oils.
synthetic oils, must be used. If necessary, consult Westfalia Separator.
oils.

2064-9001-200 I 0909
4.4 Bowl
l
I
I
I
I 570
I
I
I
I
180 I
I
I
I 370
I 540
I
I 530 ----==-<~~~1\
80- 320---A..
I
120
I
I
I
I
I
I
I 510
I
I
I
I
290
240
360
350
!
250
I
I 260
230
I
I
I 220·
I
I
I 206S.6600-510·Gr
Fig. 11980Exploded view of b owl an.d rentripetal

,, pump
. I ,Separation
Mechan1ca . I GEA Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-200 I 0909 121
20 (1) Bowl bottom, comp!.

30 Gasket
60 Gasket
70 Gasket
90 Annular piston
100 Gasket
110 Gasket
130 Gasket
140 Gasket
150 Gasket
180 Sliding piston
200 Gasket
210 (1) Distributor
230 Separating disk
240 (1) Bowl top
250 Gasket
260 Gasket
290 Threaded pin ISO 4026 - M 10x10 -1.4571
310 Gasket
cover
cover
340 Lock ring
350 Spindle screw
360 Gasket
370 Regulating ring
510 Centripetal pump, comp!.

520 Gasket
540 Gasket
550 Spacer ring
560 Gasket
570 Gasket


i 22 2064-9001-200 I 0909

.. Switch off the main switch and lock it.

'" Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
still.

.. Shine a torch through the frame
sight glass ..
e Visually check that the drive belt is
no longer moving.
Fig. 120

.. Unscrew the sight glass,
.. shine a torch through the sight glass opening in the frame!
CAUTION: Danger of injury through rotating drive beit!
.. Check ONLY visually that the drive belt is no longer moving.

.. Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
still.
separator!


In the case of motors vvith space heaters, residual voltages in the motor

oniyD

2064-9001-200 I 0909 123
.. Avoid damage to bowl parts when fitting and removing by

- no diagonal pull!

'" Use suitably rated, intact hoists.


'" Use tools only for their intended use!
• Treat all bowl parts

- gently.

" Do not interchange parts from different bowls.
CAUTION:
• Certain bowl parts (see sect. 4.4)
may be pre-assembled and bal-
anced only by specialists from
shops authorized by Westfalia
Separator.
S9
Fig. 121

124 2064-9001-200 I 0909
Hinging up the hood
.. Unscrew filling and displacement

water line 1.
Fig. 122
., Unscrew handle connection piece 1

by lightly hammering with a mallet
(left-hand thread); at the same time
e hold the centripetal pump with offset
screwdriver 2.
Fig. 123
.. Remove handle connection piece 1.
Fig. 124

2064-9001-200 I 0909 125
.. Unscrew three hex head screws with

their washers.
T2058005
Fig. 125
" Hinge up the hood.
CAUTION: Danger of Injury by in-

Fig. 126
If necessary (see section 4.3.1 ):

tion of the frame.
Fig 127

126 2064-9001 -200 I 0909
Removing the centripetal pump

- Double hook wrench
" Loosen the centripetal pump cham-

ber lock ring using the double hook
move it.
Fig. 128

thread).
" Remove the complete centripetal
pump together with the centripetal
pump chamber covers.
(;T20580
Fig. 129

- Pressure piece 1
'" Insert pressure piece 1 into spacer

ring 2.
" Pull off spacer ring 2 with fitted
gaskets with the aid of a commercial
puller.
Fig. 130

2064-9001-200 I 0909 127
.. Remove the following parts if nec-
r essary::
with inserted gasket,
serted gaskets,
- regulating ring 3,
with gaskets 4 and 6,
gasket.
T2058102
Fig. 131

- Socket wrench 1
• Unscrew the spindle screw (with

1 and a commercially available rat-
chet wrench (left-hand thread) and
remove it.
Fig. 132

\ Loctite 275 \
- Eye bolt 1
1
Bolt unit 1 comprises ring nut, hexagon
nuts, and bolt.
CAUTION: Avoid accidents by using
undamaged and complete tools!
The ring nut and the upper hexagon
nut must always be screwed into the
bolt and be secured with Loctite 275.
T2065009
Fig. 133

128 2064-9001-200 I 0909

tom.
" Press off the bowl from the spindle
cone by at least 10 mm.
Fig. 134

the aid of a hoist.
" Set the bowl down on a rubber mat
mantling.
Fig. 135

Compressing device
- Eye bolt 1
- Beil-shaped piece 3
" Grease the contact surface of bell-

shaped piece 3 (see chapter 4.3.4).
bowl top .
.. Unscrew hexagon nut 2
.. Screw eye bolt 1 into the bowl bot-
tom.
Fig. 136

2064-9001-200 I 0909 129
.. Compress the disk stack firmly.

- Screw tight hexagon nut 1.
Fig. 137
Lifting off the bowl top
" Unscrew two threaded pins out of

the bowl top with a screwdriver.
Fig. 138

- ring spanner 1
• Remove two hexagon nuts 3 from

hex head screws 2.
Fig. 139

130 2064-9001-200 I 0909
Important:
® The 0-marks of the bowl top and of
the bowl bottom must be visible.

spanner 1!
show upwards.
" Bolt ring spanner 1 to the bowl top.

"' Screw in two hex head screws 2 of
the ring spanner and tighten firmly.
Fig. 140
., CAUTION: Danger of injury

" ATTENTION: Pay attention to the

point of impact A!
" Strike open the bowl top with a mal-

let (left-hand thread) and unscrew
it.
Fig. 141
.. Remove eye bolt, bell-shaped piece,

and ring spanner.
Fig. 142
J
\\~
1 T2065014
" Lift off the bowl top with fitted

gaskets by hand.
0T20580i'I
Fig. 143

2064-9001-200 I 0909 131
Removing the separating disk
.. Remove the Separating disk from

the distributor neck.
Fig. 144
Removing the disk stack and the distributor
" Remove the disks out of the distribu-

tor, one by one or group-wise.
Fig. 145
" Remove the distributor.
Fig. 146

132 2064-9001-200 I 0909
. e sliding piston
Removmg th -----
" Insert the sp1·ndle screw .in t o the hub.
Reqrn·red special tools

Eye bolt 1 . e
= Bell-shaped p1ec 2
" Unscrew hexa gon nut 3
Fig_ 148
.. Assembl~ ey2·e bolt 1 and bell-

ed
shaped piece ~It 1 into bell-shap
Screw eye b
- .
piece 2 -- nut
h It 1 into hexa gnfl
C.rrew eye - 0 ·· · m
- ,,__,~ 20 m ·
3 by approx.
Fig. 149
- I Separation
Mechanica - I GEA Westfalia Separator
2064-9001-200 I 0909 133
" Grease the thread of sliding piston 1

" Screw the bell-shaped piece with
fitted eye bolt into the thread of the
sliding piston.
Fig. 150

- Socket wrench 1
" Press off the sliding piston from the

bowl bottom by turning the socket
wrench clockwise.
Fig. 151
" Remove the sliding piston (with fitted

gasket) with bell-shaped piece and
eye bolt.
• Remove the bell-shaped piece and
the eye bolt.
Fig. 152

2064-9001-200 I 0909
Removing the annular piston and the closing chamber bottom

- Socket wrench 1
" Unscrew the Allen screws holding

the bowl bottom and the closing-
chamber bottom together.
Fig. 153

- Eye bolt 1
1
T2065021
Fig. 154
" Assemble eye bolt 1 and bell-

shaped piece 2:
- Screw eye bolt 1 into bell-shaped
piece 2
- Screw eye bolts into hexagon
nut 3 by approx. 20 mm.
Fig. 155

2064-9001-200 I 0909 135
., Place the bell-shaped piece with

fitted eye bolt into the bowl bottom.
" Fit assembling device 3 onto the
bell-shaped piece.
.. Loosen three Allen screws 4 using
and socket) .
.. Slip three disks 5 of the assembling
.. Make sure that disks 5 are properly
positioned in the mounting groove of
Fig. 156
the annular piston.

turning wrench 5 clockwise.
Fig. 157
" Remove closing chamber bottom 3

gaskets) with the bell-shaped piece
and the eye bolt.
• Remove the bell-shaped piece and
3 the eye bolt.
4
Fig. 158
• Separate annular piston 1 from clos-

T2065025
Fig. 159

136 2064-9001-200 I 0909
.. Unscrew spindle screw 1.
Fig. 160
If necessary:
" Remove gasket 1 and piston guide
1 ring 2.
Fig. 161

2064-9001-200 I 0909 137
Removing the water chamber bottom

- Socket wrench 1
.. Turn bow bottom through 180° (up-

side down) .
.. Unscrew four Allen screws 2 from
water chamber bottom 3.
Fig. 162
• Force off water chamber bottom 1

with a screwdriver and remove it
with inserted gaskets.
Fig. 163

138 2064-9001-200 I 0909
4.4.2 Cleaning the bowl

separation unless
., Dismantle and clean the bowl for checking from time to time. See section
4.3.1 - Maintenance schedule.
" Do not use acid or chloric cleaning agents.

" For cleaning the individual disks and bowl parts


parts.
" Clean the grooves and gaskets to
" Replace damaged, very swollen,
ately.
12059018
Fig. 164
" Clean the small holes for the feed and discharge of the operating liquid with
• Clean the distributor between the

outside.
cause overflow.
T2058082
Fig. 165
" Apply a thin coat of grease to the guide surfaces and threads of the bowl

2064-9001-200 I 0909 139

ATTENTION!
.. Do not use acid or chloric cleaning agents.
• Clean the inside of the upper section of the frame from time to time:
To do this:
- Refer to the maintenance schedule (section 4.3.1 ),
- dismantle the bowl (section 4.4.1 ).
ATTENTION: Escaping cleaning

liquid!
When the bowl has been removed, no
cleaning liquid must spill onto the
drive belt via the spindle.
• Make sure that protective cap 2 and
spindle cap 1 with inserted gasket
are installed.
T2065038
......
Fig. 166
• Use citric acid in case of furring.


separator parts (separating temperatures of 70 to 100 °C (158 - 212 °F) ).

140 2064-9001-200 I 0909
" Undo screw 1 Uaw span 22) with

fitted gasket 2.
,. Remove filter element 3.
Use citric acid in case of furring.
water.
2058029
Fig. 167
" Fit the cleaned or new filter element 3.


.. Never rinse off the motor with a direct water jet.
'" Keep the motor clean as specified in the manual.

2064-9001-200 I 0909 141

ATTENTION!
" Before assembling the bowl, check to be sure that the guide and contact sur-
faces of the bowl are clean.
• Grease the guide surfaces as specified in the lubrication schedule (see 4.3.4).
• Some bowl parts are arranged in

other.
Q • Locking devices and alignment

IMPORTANT:
~ erated.
~ S10
Fig. 168
• When fitting the bowl parts, make

are aligned.
T2058002
Fig. 169
" Avoid damage to bowl parts when fitting and removing by

- no diagonal pull!



142 2064-9001-200 I 0909

.. Use tools only for their intended use!
- For standard tools, see section 4.13 .
.. Do not use force when removing or fitting parts.

.. If the plant has several separators,
different bowls.
number.
Fig. 170
., Thoroughly clean the gasket

grooves of the individual bowl parts
and apply a thin coat of grease .
., After fitting check that
in the groove.
T2059018
Fig. 171

2064-9001-200 I 0909 143
4.4.7 Assembling the bowl
• Pay special attention to sections "Safety", 4.4.2 and 4.4.6

Installing the water chamber bottom

- Socket wrench 4

grooves of the water chamber bot-
tom.
• Turn bow bottom through 180° (up-
side down).
3
" Place water chamber bottom 3 on
the bowl bottom.
and the water chamber bottom
must be aligned.
and bowl bottom together tight.
Torque: 25 Nm
Fig. 172

4.3.4).
• Insert gasket 1 and piston guide
bottom.
Fig. 173

144 2064-9001-200 I 0909
'" For replacing the polyamide gasket

" Place gasket 2 into the groove of the
and firmly .
4.3.4).
Fig. 174
@ Insert annular piston into bow!

bottom 2.
Fig. 175

tom.
4.3.4).
Fig. 176
.. Insert closing chamber bottom 1 into

the annular piston.
- The 0 marks of the closing cham-
ber bottom and the bowi bottom
must be aligned.
Fig. 177
····-------··-----------
2064-9001-200 I 0909 145

Hex head screw 1
Wing nut 2
Pipe 3
Hexagon nut 4
.. Unscrew hexagon nuts 4
T2062104
Fig. 178
• Screw two assembling devices into

the bowl bottom.
• Insert the closing chamber bottom
nuts 2 clockwise
" Remove the assembling devices .
.....-'.)
T2065055
Fig. 179
.. Fasten closing chamber bottom 1

Allen screws 2 crosswise.
Fig. 180

- Socket wrench 1
• Screw tight the Allen screws holding

the closing chamber bottom and the
bowl bottom together.
Torque: 25 Nm
Fig. 181

146 2064-9001··200 I 0909
" Make sure that piston guide ring 1 is

Fig. 182
" insert the gasket in the groove of the

sliding piston.
4.3.4).
T2058072
Fig. 183

Compressing device
- Eye bolt 1
- Beil-shaped piece 2
Fig. 184
Bolt unit 1 comprises ring nut, hexagon nuts, and bolt.

CAUTION: Avoid accidents by using undamaged and complete tools!
- The ring nut and the upper hexagon nut must always be screwed into the bolt
and be secured with Loctite 275.

2064-9001-200 I 0909 147
" Grease thread 1 of the sliding piston

" Screw bell-shaped piece 2 into the
thread of the sliding piston.
Fig. 185
• Install the sliding piston (with fitted

gasket) into the bowl bottom, with
screwed-in bell-shaped insert.
.. Screw the eye bolt into the bowl
bottom through the bell-shaped
piece.
• Press the sliding piston into its seat,
as far as it will go, by turning hexa-
gon nut 1 clockwise with an open-
ended wrench.
" Remove the bell-shaped piece and
the eye bolt.
Fig. 186
Installing the distributor and the disk stack
" Insert the distributor into the sliding

0 piston.
- Pay attention to correct position-
ing.
- The "O" marks must be aligned.
Fig. 187

148 2064-9001-200 I 0909
ATTENTION: Pay attention for cor-

rect total number of disks!
It is marked on the blind disk, e.g.
84/1:
- Total number of disks A and B = 84
- Number of blind disks B = 1
T2062100
Fig. 188
ATTEl'"JTION: The last disks must be

properly located in the guide ribs of
the distributor!
" Carefully stack the disks on the dis-

tributor neck, one by one or group-
wise.
Fig. 189
Fitting the separating disk
" Mount the separating disk.

ing!
- The "O" marks must be aligned.
Fig. 190

2064-9001-200 I 0909 149
" Slightly compress the disk stack with

the bell-shaped piece and the eye
bolt.
Fig. 191
• Thoroughly clean the grooves for

gaskets 1 and 2 in the bowl top.
• Check gaskets 1 and 2:
- install if missing.
" Check the inserted gasket 3.
- For replacing the polyamide gas-
ket 3 see section 4.4.8.
Fig. 192
ATTENTION: Prevent seizing of

threads!
• The following parts must be carefully
bowl bottom and bowl top
sliding piston
Fig. 193

150 2064-9001-200 I 0909

- ring spanner 1
.. Remove two hexagon nuts 3 from

hex head screws 2.
Important:
@ If threaded pins are screwed into the
bowl top, undo them with a screw-
driver .
.. The 0 mark of the bowl top must be
visible.
Fig. 194
spanner 1!
show upwards .
., Bolt ring spanner 1 to the bowl top.
- Screw in two hex head screws 2 of the ring spanner and tighten firmly.
.. Screw the bowl top by hand into the

bowl bottom as far as it will go (left-
hand thread).
Fig. 195
.. Compress the disk stack firmly.

- Screw tight hexagon nut 1.
Fig. 196

2064-9001-200 I 0909 151
.. Compress the disk stack again and

" Screw in the bowl top using the ring
Fig. 197

• ATTENTION: Pay attention to the

point of impact A!
CAUTION:
A loose bowl top can endanger life!
• Strike the bowl top with a mallet until
the "O" mark is reached (left-hand
thread).
Fig. 198
" Remove eye bolt, bell-shaped piece,

and ring spanner.
Fig. 199
• Screw in two threaded pins using a

screwdriver.
Fig. 200

152 2064-9001-200 I 0909
w Clean and wipe dry the spindle

ATTENTION: Do not grease the
conical parts!
Fig. 201

- Eye bolt 1

tom.
Fig. 202
" Turn bowl through 90° (opposite the

fitting position).
" Clean the bowl hub with a suitable
cloth.
ATTENTION: Do not grease the
bowl hub!
Fig. 203

2064-9001-200 I 0909 153

" Carefully place the bowl using eye
" Unscrew the eye bolt from the bowl
bottom and remove the hoist.
Fig. 204
Required tools
0
- Socket wrench
- Torque wrench
" Provide spindle screw 2 with gasket

1.
" Put spindle screw into socket
thread).
Fig. 205
CAUTION:
life!

Torque: 50 Nm
Fig. 206
• Check that the spindle and bowl are

centric.
- is 4 ±1.5 mm

section 4.7.1.
Fig. 207

154 2064-9001-200 I 0909
" Insert gasket 1 in the centripetal

pump groove .
., Lightly grease threads and contact
surfaces of the centripetal pump.
" Install centripetal pump 2.
Fig. 208
@ Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in the

grooves of the centripetal pump
chamber cover.
" See section 2.4.
Fig. 209

0 0 cover with fitted gaskets.
- The "O" marks of the centripetal
pump chamber cover and the
bowl top must be aligned.
Fig. 210
.. Mount the regulating ring selected

from the set of regulating rings.
" See section 2.6.
Fig. 211

2064-9001 -200 I 0909 155

JJ ~1
i~2
., Grease guide surfaces .
.. Install sensing liquid pump.
Fig. 212
" Insert gasket 1 in the groove in the

2044-025
Fig. 213

cover.
- The "O" marks of the centripetal
pump chamber cover and the
bowl top must be aligned.
Fig. 214

- Double hook wrench
• Grease the threads on the bowl top

CAUTION:
.. Screw tight the centripetal pump
chamber lock ring using the double
Fig. 215 hook wrench (left-hand thread).

156 2064-9001-200 I 0909
" Insert gaskets 1 and 2 in spacer

ring .
.. Grease the guide surfaces of the
centripetal pump as specified in the
lubrication schedule (see 4.3.4) .
.. Fit spacer ring.
Fig. 216
" Pay attention to section 4.7.1.

2064-9001 -200 I 0909 157

" For standard tools, see section 4.13.
REMOVAL
ATTENTION: Sensitive bowl part!
- Do NOT damage the bowl top

vertically.
60mm.
Fig. 217

- Do NOT damage the bowl top
" Force off the old polyamide gasket
Fig. 218
If the polyamide gasket cannot be removed, repeat this procedure.
FITTING
• Thoroughly clean and dry the groove.
• Heat the gasket in approx. 80 °C (176 °F) water for 5 minutes.
• Wipe dry the gasket.
• Fit the gasket into the groove of the

the bowl top).
• Place on a smooth wooden block.
• hammer the gasket evenly into the
groove.
Fig. 219

158 2064-9001-200 I 0909
" The sealing surface of the gasket

must not protrude by more than
1 mm from the surface A of the bowl
top.
T2058070
Fig. 220

2064-9001-200 I 0909 159

Change the polyamide gasket only when it is damaged.
• For standard tools, see section 4.13.
REMOVAL


vertica Ily.
60 mm.
T2059105
Fig. 221

.. Force off the old polyamide gasket
T2059106
Fig. 222
Note:

160 2064-9001-200 I 0909
FITTING
'" Thoroughly clean and dry the

groove.
" Heat the new polyamide gasket in
approx. 80 °C (176 °F) water for 5
minutes .
.. Wipe the gasket dry and press it
Fig. 223
.. Insert annular piston 1 into bowl

bottom 2.
Fig. 224
" Insert gaskets i and 3 in the

tom .
4.3.4).
Fig. 225

2064-9001-200 I 0909 161
,. Clamp mounting ring 1 under the rim

Fig. 226
" Insert closing chamber bottom 1 into

the annular piston.
- The 0 marks of the closing cham-
must be aligned.
Fig. 227

Hex head screw 1
Wing nut 2
Pipe 3
Hexagon nut 4
" Unscrew hexagon nuts 4
T2062104
Fig. 228
• Screw two assembling devices into

the bowl bottom.
• Insert the closing chamber bottom
nuts 2 clockwise
• Remove the assembling devices.
/".)
T2065028
Fig. 229

162 2064-9001-200 I 0909
.. Fasten closing chamber bottom 1

Allen screws 2 crosswise.
Fig. 230

- Socket wrench 1
" Screw tight the Allen screws holding

the closing chamber bottom and the
bowl bottom together.
Torque: 25 Nm
Fig. 231
" Insert spindle screw 1 into the hub.
Fig. 232
.. Unscrew the Allen screws holding

the bowl bottom and the closing-
chamber bottom together.
Fig. 233

2064-9001-200 I 0909 163
~-2
- Eye bolt 1
.. Unscrew hexagon nut 4
T2065021
Fig. 234
" Assemble eye bolt 1 and bell-

shaped piece 2:
- Screw eye bolt 1 into bell-shaped
piece 2
- Screw eye bolts into hexagon
nut 3 by approx. 20 mm.
T2065017
Fig. 235
• Place the bell-shaped piece with

fitted eye bolt into the bowl bottom.
• Fit assembling device 3 onto the
bell-shaped piece.
• Loosen three Allen screws 4 using
and socket).
• Slip three disks 5 of the assembling
• Make sure that disks 5 are properly
positioned in the mounting groove of
the annular piston.
Fig. 236
• Force off closing chamber bottom 3

turning wrench 5 clockwise.
Fig. 237

164 2064-9001-200 I 0909
'" Remove closing chamber bottom 3

kets) with the bell-shaped piece and
the eye bolt.
" Remove the bell-shaped piece and
the eye bolt.
Fig. 238
.. Separate annular piston 1 from clos-

12065025
" Remove the mounting ring.
Fig. 239
.. Unscrew the spindle screw.
Fig. 240

2064-9001-200 I 0909 165
., By carrying out several measure-

ments around the entire circumfer-
T2048057
Fig. 241

166 2064-9001-200 I 0909

., the sealing surface A of the sliding piston (Fig. 242) (Sealing surface A as de-
livered 2 mm high) and
" the polyamide gasket B of the bowl top (Fig. 244).

When the first erosion marks (0.2

mm deep) are detected, i.e. as soon
as the bowl starts to leak:
" Remachine the sealing surface of
the sliding piston.
T2060011
Fig. 242
.. When remachining, make sure that

H - the sealing surface is machined
cleanly and
- shoulder H at diameter X is still at
least 1.5 mm high.
Fig. 243
-----
Standard parameters for rernachining the sealing surface

··-
1
--····
Speed 55 min- 1
For.vard feed max. 0.1 mm/revolution
After facing
.. fit a new polymide gasket B into the
T2058125
Fig. 244

2064-9001-200 I 0909 167

Fig. 245

" Unlock the shackle .
.. Carefully close the hood.
Fig. 246
• Screw in three hex head screws (M

Fig. 247

168 2064-9001-200 I 0909
]--- If the gaskets 2 have been removed

" Provide handle connection piece 1
.. Apply a thin coat of grease to the

4.3.4).
T2065047
'------'-----'·---~--'-~
Fig. 248
Required speciai tooi

- Offset screwdriver 2
" Introduce handle connection piece 1

into the hood .
.. Hold the centripetal pump with the
offset screwdriver and tighten it by
nection piece with a mallet (left-
hand thread).
Fig. 249
" Carefully clean the holes in the non-

return valve and
" rinse with water.
" Check the functionality of the non-
return valve.
T2057226 I
Fig. 250
" Assemble the filling and displace-

ment water !ine 1 and connect it.
Fig. 251

2064-9001-200 I 0909 169
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
3'"
I
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

170 2064-9001-200 I 0909
4.6 Drive
-t-------15
"
v
6
7
17
8 18
10
11
')')
L..J
13 24
A2064000-Antrieb
Fig. 252 Exploded view of the drive

2064-9001-200 I 0909 171
Pos. <Designation Dimensions
Retaining ring 95 x 3
2 Retaining ring 60 x 2
3 Clutch pulley
4 Grooved ball bearing
5 Spacer bush
8 Clutch driver
9 Clutch shoe
10 Washer 13 x 33 x 3
12 Washer
14 Drive belt
15 Spindle
17 Bearing cover
18 Bearing cover
20 Retaining ring 35 x 1,5
21 Ball bearing protection ring
22 Angular contact ball bearing
23 Bearing sleeve
24 Gasket
25 Rubber-metal cushion
26 Pivoting bearing
28 Gasket
29 Cup spring
30 Bearing cover
31 Washer
(This hex head screw is glued in with Loe-
tite 275.)
(This hex head screw is glued in with Loctite
275.)

172 2064-9001-200 I 0909
4.6.1 Important instructions for fitting and removing the drive

.. Switch off the main switch and lock it.

still.

sight glass .
., Visually check that the drive belt is
no longer moving.
Fig. 253

.. shine a torch through the sight glass opening in the frame!

.. Do not loosen any part of the separator before the bowl has come to a stand-
stiii.
separator!
,~ CAUTIO~,:: Dange; of injuiy th;ough veiy hot sepaiatoi paits!



Germany in accordance with the rules and regulations of the VDE (Verband
only.

2064-9001-200 I 0909 173
.. Avoid damage to drive parts when fitting and removing by

- no diagonal pull!

.. Use suitably rated, intact hoists.


" Treat all drive parts
- gently.
ATTENTION: Before fitting the drive parts

" Thoroughly clean and dry the drive chamber.
ATTENTION: To avoid bearing damage,

" always operate the separator with installed bowl!

174 2064-9001-200 I 0909
, ., Pay special attention to section 4.6.1.
" Undo the oil drain screw and
J
" Drain the oil into an oil pan (approx.
2.5 I).
A20580061
Fig. 254
.. Undo three hex head screws 1.

.. Take off cover 2.
A2058007
Fig. 255
,. Unscrew four hex head screws 1.
Fig 256
--------------·----~----·------

2064-9001-200 I 0909 175
" Pull the motor out of the flange

5 mm).
ATTENTION!
.. Pull the drive belt off the clutch pul-
ley (centrifugal clutch) downwards.
Fig. 257
.. Lift the motor with centrifugal clutch

out of the lower section of frame.
Fig. 258
Remove the operating water feeding
·'d
!
.
. \.·
....
TOP
.-·
\
.
device in the upper section of
frame:
• Undo nut 2.
" Take off pipe 3.
. .
3
A2062017
Fig. 259
• Remove spindle cap 1 with fitted

gasket.
Fig. 260

176 2064-9001-200 I 0909

.. Remove ring 2 and protective cap 3
with inserted gasket 4.
Fig. 261
Removing the speed monitoring

device:
" Unscrew hex head screw 1.
" Take off speed monitoring device 2
and iay it down in the iower section
of frame.
Fig. 262
" Take the drive belt out of the lower

section of frame.
I
A20580141
Fig. 263

ti .. Unscrew spindle assembly 2 from
the lower part of the frame.
!mm
If the vibration absorber is also pulled out
of the lower section of the frame:
" Loosen it from the spindle assembly by
striking the spindle on a wooden base.
Fig. 264

2064-9001-200 I 0909 177
., Remove from the lower part of

frame:
- Gasket 1
2 - Rubber-metal cushion 2
Fig. 265
If necessary:
• remove bearing cover 2 with sealed
hex head screws, disk and cup
springs 3 from the lower part of the
frame.
A2059002
Fig. 266
If necessary:
" Take out gasket 1.
A2059003
Fig. 267

178 2064-9001-200 I 0909

~--------------
Spindle assembly
Required toois:
- Pulling device
- Open ended wrench
- Pliers with outer snap jaws
A2059004
Fig. 268
" Detach the bearing sleeve 1 from

the spindle.
Fig. 269

2064-9001-200 I 0909 179
" Pull off from the spindle:

- Angular contact ball bearing 2:
- Ball bearing protection ring 3
Fig. 270
" Remove the retaining ring.
A2059026
Fig. 271
.. Pull off from the spindle:

- Grooved ball bearing 1
- bearing cover 2
- bearing cover 3
Fig. 272

180 2064-9001-200 I 0909
4.6.4 Dismantling the centrifugal clutch
1.. Pay special attention to section 4.6.1.

., Take off cover 2.
• A2058007 I
Fig. 273
Fig. 274
" Pull the motor out of the flange

5 mm).
ATTENTIO~~!
" Pull the drive belt off the clutch pul-
ley (centrifugal clutch) downwards.
I__
Fig. 275

2064-9001-200 I 0909 181

" Lift the motor with fluid clutch out of
Fig. 276
• Turn the motor together with the

goo centrifugal clutch 90° (upside down)
with the aid of the hoist.
able aids!
A2058097
Fig. 277
• Undo retaining ring 1.

" Take off disk 2.
1 2 A2057146
Fig. 278
• Pull the clutch shoes out of the

clutch driver.
A2064001
Fig. 279

182 2064-9001-200 I 0909

open-ended wrench.
" Unscrew hex head screw 2 from the
motor shaft end.
" Take off disk 3.
A2057148
Fig. 280
Required special too!:

- Threaded pin 2 = M 12 x 40

open-ended wrench.
tor shaft end:
.. Screw threaded pin 2 into the thread
Fig. 281

- Eye bolt 1
- Socket wrench 3
• Unscrew hexagon nut 2

.. Screw eye bolt ·1 into the clutch
driver .
.. Arrest the clutch driver with an open-
ended wrench.
" Force the centrifugal clutch off the
motor shaft end by turning the eye
bolt clockwise.
Fig. 282
.. Remove eye bolt 1 from the clutch

driver and threaded pin 2 from the
motor shaft end.
Fig. 283

2064-9001-200 I 0909 183

., Place the clutch pulley and clutch
driver on a wooden base using
transport ropes and hoist.
able aids!
.. Take the retaining ring out of the
Fig. 284
" Position wooden block.

" Drive the clutch driver downwards
.. Loosen the clutch driver from the
seat of the two ball bearings.
Fig. 285
" Turn the clutch pulley through 90°

(opposite the fitting position) with the
aid of the hoist.

able aids!
• Take the retaining rings out of the

A2058044
Fig. 286
Required tools
- Disk (0 86 - 94 mm)
- Wooden block
- Hammer
• Turn the clutch pulley through 180°

and
• place it on wooden supports as
shown.
" Drive the grooved ball bearing and
spacer bush out of the clutch pulley.
Fig. 287

184 2064-9001-200 I 0909
.. Pay special attention to section 4.6.1 .

.. For dimensions of the parts see 4.6 - exploded view.
If necessary:
lower section of frame.
r
, -co A2059008
I
Fig. 288
If necessary:
correct fitting position of the cup
springs!
.. Fit bearing cover 1 (with sealed hex
head screws and washer) with cup
springs 2 and bolt tight with hex
head screws 3.
Fig. 289

correct fitting position of the rub-
ber-metal cushion!
- The two opposite inner holes 2 of
the rubber-metal cushion must be
directed upwards .
.. Fit rubber-metal cushion 1.
lower section of frame.
Fig. 290
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ·····-··-·-···--···-·-··-··-·-
2064-9001-200 I 0909 185
.. Turn spindle through 180° (upside

down).

correct fitting position of the bear-
ing cover!
.. Mount bearing covers 1 and 2.
" Heat grooved ball bearing 3 in oil up
to 100 °C (212 °F) and slip it onto
the spindle.
" Insert retaining ring 4 in the spindle
groove.
Fig. 291
.. Heat ball bearing protection ring 1

~100"C@) (~2 and angular contact ball bearings 2
8 ~ .······· 1
in oil up to 100 °C (212 °F).
---~~......... ATTENTION: Bearing damage is

....... ::: - When fitting angular contact ball
/.
. ""/\~ '
sure that the narrow rim of the ball
bearing inner ring faces upwards.
\............................./ A2059028
" Slide ball bearing protection ring 1
and angular contact ball bearings 2
onto the spindle.
Fig. 292
" Heat bearing sleeve 1 in oil up to

100 °C (212 °F).
" Important! Before fitting bearing
sleeve 1, make sure that the in-
stalled angular contact ball bearing
has cooled down to room tempera-
ture.
• Slide bearing bush 1 over the angu-
lar contact ball bearings and the ball
Fig. 293
• Install the assembled spindle as-

frame.
ing!

correct fitting position of the spin-
dle!
be aligned with the holes in the
lower section of the frame.
Fig. 294
" Bolt tight spindle with the three
hex head screws 2.

186 2064-9001-200 I 0909
" Pay special attention to section 4.6.1.

.. Clean the clutch pulley.

groove .
.. Check that retaining ring 1 is cor-
rectly fitted.
Fig. 295
Required tools:
- Disk 2 (0 86 - 94 mm)
2 - Wooden block
- Hammer
1
ring of grooved ball bearing 1!
"' Carefully drive the first grooved ball

taining ring.
A2059017 l
Fig. 296

2064-9001-200 I 0909 187

- Distance bush 1 may only contact
the inner ring of grooved ball bear-
ing 2!
.. Place distance bush on the ball

bearing inner ring.
Fig. 297

2 - Disk 2 may only contact the outer
1 " Carefully drive the second grooved
ball bearing 1 with a suitable disk 2
up to the distance sleeve.
A2059019
Fig. 298
CAUTION: Danger of imbalance by

incorrect fitting!
• Insert retaining ring 2 180° offset
per groove.
Fig. 299

188 2064-9001-200 I 0909
Required tool:
1)1~
- Disk 1 (0 61 - 69 mm)
., CAUTION: Danger to life when

~~3=~~
'" Turn clutch pulley with fitted grooved
ball bearings through i 80°.
Fig. 300
ATTENTION: Bearing damage is caused by incorrect fitting!

- Disk 1 may only contact the inner ring of the grooved ball bearing!
.. Place the ball bearing inner ring on disk 1.

correct fitting position of the dis-
tance bush!
- Distance bush 1 must be flush with
bearings.
Fig. 301
Required tools:
- Wooden block
- Rubber hammer
• Carefully hammer the clutch driver

into the grooved ball bearing \lvith
light blows.
L
Fig. 302

2064-9001-200 I 0909 189
" Turn the clutch pulley through 180°.

the clutch driver.
Fig. 303

90° - Do NOT step under hanging load.
'" Turn the motor through 90° with the
aid of the hoist.
• CAUTION: Secure from rolling
able aids!
A2057133
Fig. 304
Required tools:
- ring spanner 2
• ATTENTION: Pay attention to the

feather key groove.
• Fit the assembled centrifugal clutch
on the motor shaft end.
open-ended wrench.
• Insert ring spanner 2 - as shown -
and
• Screw hex head screw 3 with hexa-
gon nut 4 into the motor shaft end.
Fig. 305

190 2064-9001-200 I 0909
., Pull the centrifugal clutch onto the

by turning hexagon nut 4 with a sec-
ond open-ended wrench.
\ ':2064004
Fig. 306
e Undo hex head screvv 3 together

" detach ring spanner 2.
Fig. 307
With driver 1 arrested:

" Provide hex head screw 2
(M 12 x 60) with washer 3 and
thread it into the motor shaft end.
~I
- Be sure to replace all clutch shoes
simultaneously!
shoes.
evenly spaced!
" Fit clutch shoes.
A2064002
Fig. 309
-------------------- ·-·"~---···~'"" -
2064-9001-200 I 0909 191
., Insert disk 2.
.. Fit the retaining ring 1 in the groove
of the clutch driver.
2 1
A2057152
Fig. 310

i92 2064-900i-200 I 0909
/.. Pay special attention to section 4.6.1 .
., Carefully place the motor with pre-

assembled centrifugal clutch on
lower section of frame by means of
a hoist.
- Do not yet let the motor flange
lock into the frame opening.
/
0 \
Fig. 311
I~~
ATTENTION:
., Degrease the belt contact surfaces
'" Fit the drive belt:
opening 1 and
" Pay attention to correct seating of
the drive belt on clutch pulley and
spindle pulley.
Fig. 312
Jl~,,-C~~
111~\\..1 .. Unscrew the screw plug 1 from the
~ ~
~----- ~-~2i:9034
Fig. 313

2064-9001 -200 I 0909 193
" Screw hex head screw 1 (M 10 x

200) with hexagon nut 2 and washer
3 through the frame bore into the ta-
phole of the centrifugal clutch.
" ATTENTION: To avoid damage to
the grooved ball bearing:
- do not screw in hex head screw 1
all the way .
.. Tension the drive belt by turning hex
head nut 2 clockwise until the mo-
tor flange locks into the frame open-
~~~~~~~~~~~~~--'
A2osso3 in g.
Fig. 314
• Fasten the motor with four hex head

screws 2 (M 12 x 30).
" Unscrew hex head screw 1 (with

hexagon nut and washer) from the
centrifugal clutch.
A205803.
Fig. 315
" Screw in the screw plug 1.

.. Remove the hoist.
Fig. 316
~
sioned (see Fig. 317, pos. 2).
317, pos. 1).

194 2064-9001-200 I 0909
" Check
easily.
- whether the spindle 3 has been
tensioning the drive belt 3 (see
Fig. 207).
Fig. 317
Installing the speed monitoring dew

vice:
" Place speed monitoring device 2 on

., fasten with hex head screw 1.
Fig. 318
" Align proximity switch 1 as illu-

strated.
ATTENTION!
mm.
Fig. 319
., Insert protective cap 3 with fitted

" bolt tight with four hex head screws
1 (M 8 x 12).
Fig. 320

2064-9001-200 I 0909 195
'" Place spindle cap 1 with fitted

gasket on the spindle.
ing!
Fig. 321
.. ····················-..
Fitting the operating water feeding
TOP device in the upper section of
ii A\) frame:
.. Slide nut 2 over pipe 3.
\:::::::/ / .. Fit pipe with nit into the screwed
connection 1 and slide on as far as it
will go.
ATTENTION: The narrow end of the

A2062017
" Tighten nut 2 firmly.
Fig. 322
" Fit cover 2 to the lower section of

the frame with three hex head
screws 1 (M 8 x 20).
A2058042
Fig. 323
• Screw in oil drain screw 1 with fitted

gasket.
• Screw in the sight glass 2.
" Fill in oil as described in section
4.3.3 and
• Screw in plug 3 with gasket.
Fig. 324

196 2064-9001-200 I 0909

" Have the motor connected by an authorized electrician!

2064-9001-200 I 0909 197

" bowl height
" and centripetal pump play
4.7.1 Bowl height
ATTENTION: The bowl height must not be adjusted on this separator!

The bowl height may only be measured with fitted and tightened drive
belt!
A bowl height check is necessary, e.g.
CAUTION:
A loose bowl top can endanger life!
" Tighten the bowl top firmly.

and the bowl top must be aligned.
T2058002
Fig. 325

- is 25 ±2 mm
- between upper edge of bowl top and
upper section of frame.
I T2058001
Fig. 326
If it does prove necessary to readjust the bowl height, consult the factory.

198 2064-9001-200 I 0909
" Move the centripetal pump axially to

t and fro in the centripetal pump
chamber.
" Measure the total clearance A
(approx. 10 Mm).
" Close the hood.
" Check:
the frame rim?
T2044009 firmly?
Fig. 327
" Lightly apply a thin coat of lubricant

to the threads of the centripetal
schedule .
., Fit handle connection piece 1 into
the centripetal pump .
.. Hold the centripetal pump with offset
screwdriver 2 .
Fig. 328
" Hold the handle connection piece 1.

.. Turn the offset screwdriver 2 until
the handle connection piece is
raised slightly from the hood
(approx. 0.5 mm).
T2062008
'
Fig. 329

2064-9001-200 I 0909 199

t to its maximum.
A12= 4 - 6 mm
T2044012
Fig. 330

200 2064-9001-200 I 0909

Checks Section

.. ·~~·-
-·
4. Bowl speed 4.1.5

Checks Section
1. Temperature of product

.. Disconnect all electrical connections.
~ Thoroughly c!ean the separator (see section 4.4.2, 4.4.3 and 4.4.4).
,. Dry and grease the clean bowl parts and all unvarnished machine parts to
" Store the clean, greased bowl in a dry place until reuse.
" Store the gaskets in a cool, dry, dust-free dark room to prevent them from be-
coming brittle.
" Check if the shut-off valves for water leak .
.. If necessary, disconnect the water lines to prevent damage by dripping water.

.. Drain the lube oil completely.
.. Fill the drive chamber with a slushing oil, e.g. Shell oil S.7294 (SAE 30/SAE
50), to the middle of the sight glass.
" Let the separator run without bowl for approx. 1 minute to make sure that all

2064-9001-200 I 0909 201
CAUTION!
" Keep a safe distance away from the rotating spindle.
" After switching off the separator, wait until the spindle has stopped rotating .
.. Take off the drive belt.

.. Follow the instructions of the motor manufacturer.

202 2064-9001-200 I 0909
4.1 O Storage
ATTENTION!
~
IMPORTANT:
.. Outdoor exposure is not admissible!

Recommended storage temperature:+ 5 to +50 °C (41 -122 °F)
IMPORTANT:
A storage time of morn than 12 months of the separator and control unit is only
4.10.2 Separator
IMPORTANT:
" Store the separator with dismantled bowl!
" Store the clean, greased bowl in a dry place .

.. Store the gaskets in a cool, dry, frost-free, dust-free dark room to prevent
" The separator with dismantled bov11I must be stored dry and free from vibra-
tions.
" Protect the drive spindle and motor from dust.
" Store all other separator parts dry and frost-free.

" The control unit and accessories must be stored dry, dust-free, vibration and
frost-free.
e Protect from excessive heat!

2064-9001-200 I 0909 203
Recommended storage temperature: + 5 to+ 45 °C (41 - 113 °F)
4.11 Before restarting

" that all separators and plant components have been function-checked
by competent personnel (qualified specialists).
" that the maintenance intervals are adhered to.
" that the separator is assembled correctly by competent persons.
Note:
• check all bowl parts as specified in the maintenance schedule (table "Mainte-
Procedure:
" Drain the slushing oil.
" Remove the grease from all unpainted machine parts.
" Check gaskets.

Replace damaged, very swollen, hardened or brittle gaskets immediately.
• Assemble the bowl (see section 4.4.7).
" Check the ball bearings of the spindle and centrifugal clutch (if applicable).
• Fit drive belt (see section 4.6.5 or 4.6.7).

" Assemble the separator correctly.

• Fill the drive chamber with the specified lube oil as specified in section 4.3.3.

204 2064-9001-200 I 0909
4. 12 Disposal
- metal,
- plastics,
- glass,
- cleaning liquids,
- electric and electronic apparatus.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION!

out carefully .
of slipping or product infection .
.. They can be injurious to health,
sition .
.. Waste oil must be disposed of in
Fig. 331
regulations.

2064-9001-200 I 0909 205


~
4.12.3 Separator
" Drain the gear oil and dispose of it properly in accordance with section 4.12.1 .
.. Dismantle the separator, remove any lubricant sticking to separator parts and

206 2064-9001-200 I 0909
4.13 Standard tools

4 5 7
9 10 11
~
14
16
i17
2065-9901-Si
Fig. 332

208 2064-9001 -200 I 0909
4.14 Special tools
50
® 40
10 15 20 ©60
70 80 90
100 110 120 130
140 150 160

2064-9901-000
Fig. 333

2064-9001-200 I 0909 209
,. Special tools are provided by the manufacturer.

" For the delivery of special tools, the packing list supplied with the sepa-
Pos. Designation
10 Mallet
15 Complete socket wrench (spindle screw)
30 Double hook wrench (centripetal pump chamber lock ring)
60 Disk 11 x 27 x 2 (centrifugal clutch)
70 Eye bolt, complete (bowl I centrifugal clutch))
80 Bell-shaped piece (bowl top I disk stack I sliding piston)

ton)
100 Ring spanner (bowl top)
110 Mounting ring (annular piston)
120 Double nipple (transporting the separator)
150 Pressure piece (centripetal pump)

ton)

210 2064-9001-200 I 0909
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaciones
Muistiinpanot
Notater
Notes
Note

2064-9001-200 I 0909 211
5 Spare parts


212 2064-9001-200 I 0909

- safety risks,
ranty claims.


e.g. OSE 20-91-067
" Serial-No. see name-plate

e.g. 9000-223

e.g. frame
.. Part Number see order-specific parts catalog

e.g. 2050-1100-020
individual parts.

• Bowl S/N If this differs from the serial number.
.. Model and number of see pump nameplate

pump


2064-9001-200 I 0909 213
Note
Notes
Notizen
Anotaclones
Notater
Notes
Note

214 2064-9001-200 I 0909
l\Jote
Notes
Notizen
Anota.ciones
j l
Nluistiinpa.not
Nota.ter
Notes
Note

2064-9001-200 I 0909 215

Werner-Habig-Stra~e 1 59302 Oelde (Germany)
Phone: +49 2522 77-0 Fax: +49 2522 77-17 78
ws.systems@geagroup.com www.westfalia-separator.com
Werner-Habig-Stra~e 1 · 59302 Oelde (Germany)
Phone: +49 2522 77-0 Fax: +49 2522 77-17 78

Im-16 Oil Purifiers PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Im-16 Oil Purifiers PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

-·

TEL NO. SHIP NO. SHIP NAME

GEA WestfaUa Separator Korea ltd. CHECKED Gyuhwan Kang

HEAVY BNDUSTIFUES CO.,ILTD.

Designation: Control system for separators with self-cleaning bowl

Designation: Control system for separators with self-cleaning bowl

TRANSLATION OF THE ORIGINAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL

\Vcs tfoiia Separator

A company of GEA Group

This page must be filled in by the user.

For your safety

~ @ This symbol is not a safety precaution but rather a reference to infor-

@ Observe the accident prevention regulations!

@ When operating electrical apparatus, certain parts carry danger-

"' Only qualified or authorized specialized staff may operate, main-

@ Follow the instructions in the manual.

e Operate the separator only in accordance with agreed process

e Maintain the separator

e Carry out safety checks on the separator,

• Liability for the function of the machine passes to the owner.

1.1 Preface ................................................................................................... 10

2.1 Function ................................................................................................. 26

3.1 Getting acquainted with the operating elements ................................... 38

3.6.3 Timer lists 1 and 2 ................................................................................. 54

4 Maintenance and servicing 91

4.1 Accident prevention ............................................................................... 92

5 Installation and connection 95

5.1 Installation of the control system ........................................................... 96

1.1 Preface ................................................................................................... 10

Nameplate (inside the control cabi-

1.2 Correct usage

- Pre-selectable partial ejections followed by a total ejection

Intended use involves

1.3 Non-compliance with the intended use

The control system may not be operated by:

The separator may not be operated:

Non-compliance with the intended use

----------- -·~--·~-~~---·-·-·----------- ----

1.4 Safety markings

Fig. 3 Safety markings on a control unit (example)

1.4.1 Safety markings am:I their meaning

Before carrying out work, dis~

Before carrying out work on the

Fig. 4 " Switch off all electrical appliances ,,i

via the main switch,

Danger due to electrical voltage!

Before working on electrical con-

Pictograms with warning text

Danger through external voltage!

Voltage also present when main switch

AC HT UN GI Danger through external voltage!

Potential equalisation (protec-

1.5 Operations on the control system

The control system works reliably, pro-

Special attention must be given to:

1.5.1 Demands on the operating and maintenance personnel

Westfalia Separator accepts no liability for damage caused by unqualified

Westfalia Separator offers an extensive range of training and advanced training

1.5.2 Spare part requirements

" Use only genuine spare parts from Westfalia

1.5.3 Electrical installation

.. Electrical work may only be car-

• Carry out voltage equalization.